Skip to main content

Full text of "Instantaneous Personal Magnetism"

See other formats


THE BOOK WAS 
DRENCHED 



CO >- GO 

(< OU 162977 >m 

> U- xO xtl 

? Zi ^ > 



INSTANTANEOUS 

PERSONAL MACNETISM 



COMBINING AN 

ABSOLUTELY NEW METHOD 
WITH THE BEST 

ESTABLISHED TEACHINGS 
OF THE PAST 



NOW THE STANDARD WORK OF THE 
INTERNATIONAL MAGNETISM CLUB 

FOURTEENTH EDITION ENLARGED 
1935 

By EDMUND SHAFTESBURY 



PSYCHOLOGY PUBLISHING CO. LTD. 
3 & 5 QUEEN STREET, MANCHESTER,^ 



1935 Edition 



Copyright, 1935 

BY 

PSYCHOLOGY PUBLISHING CO. LTD. 



All Rights Reserved 

Including the Right of Translation 

into other Languages 



Printed in Of eat Britain 



THE 
TEN GREAT DEPARTMENTS 

OF 
THIS SYSTEM 

I 

DEPARTMENT OF MAGNETIC SOURCES 

II 
DEPARTMENT OF MENTAL MAGNITUDE 

III 

DEPARTMENT OF THE MAGNETIC EYE 

IV 

DEPARTMENT OF 
INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

V 
DEPARTMENT OF MAGNETIC HEALTH 

VI 

DEPARTMENT OF TENSION ENERGY 

VII 
DEPARTMENT OF REPOSE AND POWER 

VIII 
DEPARTMENT OF THE MAGNETIC VOICE 

IX 

DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED MAGNETISM 

X 
DEPARTMENT OF MAGNETIC HEALING 



THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM 

The following facts should he kept in mind by persons 
using other systems of instruction in the Cultivation of 
Personal Magnetism : 

1. The Shafteshury System was the first to be issued ; 
and appeared forty-five years ago when there were no 
other systems in existence. 

2. To-day it is the Standard Method, and is so recognized 
everywhere. 

3. It is the only System that is used by the International 
Magnetism Club, and that has been adopted in schools and 
various other educational institutions. 

4. It is the only System that actually produces lasting 
results. 

5. It is the only System that has helped a long list of 
successful men and women in all walks of life to acquire a 
magnetic personality with no failure where its students 
have been in earnest and ambitious to win the highest goal 
of earthly existence. 

6. Attracted by its success, imitators many years ago 
began to issue cheap and loudly advertised courses of train- 
ing, and approached as near as they dared to our methods ; 
but, for fear of becoming involved in lawsuits for infringe- 
ment, they avoided all the essential value of our instruction, 
with the result that they were discredited and all went out 
of business. 

7. Since then similar imitators are likely to appear, 
with the same inability to guide their students to the suc- 
cessful acquisition of personal magnetism. 

8. As personal magnetism is life itself, only the best in- 
struction is desirable. Low priced competitive systems 
that accomplish nothing for their students are the highest 
priced in the end. Besides producing failure, they dis- 
courage the buyers, drive them away from the study and 
thereby deprive them of the greatest blessings in life. 

9. There is BUT ONE GENUINE METHOD ; it is the 
SHAFTESBURY METHOD ; long tried, thoroughly tested, 
and uniformly successful. 



GREAT MEN WHO HAVE OWED 
THEIR SUCCESS TO BOOKS 



PITT 

owed his success as a statesman to The Wealth of Nations, 

by Adam Smith. 

WATT 

was started on his way as an inventor by a book : 
The Elements of Philosophy. 

MERCER 

the pioneer of the artificial silk trade, was stimulated 
to begin his experiments by The Chemical Pocket-Book. 

KELVIN 

was inspired as a scientist by reading The Theory of Light, 

by Fourier. 

LEVERHULME 

often said that his career was started by Self-Help^ written 

by Samuel Smiles. 

FARADAY 

was started by a book on chemistry. 

ORVILLE and WILBUR WRIGHT 

were led to invent the aeroplane by reading a book on 

gliding, by Lilienthal. 

WESTINGHOUSE and FORD 

were both started on their careers as inventors by reading 

magazine articles. 

ANDREW CARNEGIE 

owed his success to the reading of books, and built 1600 

free libraries. ^ 

THERE IS NO BETTER AID TO SUCCESS IN LIFE 
THAN GOOD BOOKS 



INTRODUCTION BY THE PUBLISHERS 

A PRESENTATION of the causes and progress that 
have become history in the unfolding of any great 
movement that has lent itself to the betterment of 
mankind, is always a source of encouragement and 
inspiration to a newer generation. To this end we will briefly 
review the important facts that have been interwoven in the 
development of the Magnetism Club. 

Edmund Shaftesbury to-day is known to about four million 
men and women who are studying his works ; yet in the forty - 
five years or more that he has been a teacher, he has refused to 
advertise his productions ; and it is only at the present time 
that the publishers who now control his writings have under- 
taken to invite a larger following by public advertisements. 
His four million students came from the friends and acquaint- 
ances of those who had become students in the same way and 
who had mentioned these works and spoken of their merits to 
bthers. As one instance out of many, a person who owned a 
copy of this book of Personal Magnetism and who was spending 
a few weeks at a fashionable summer hotel, left the book on a 
table for a few days while temporarily absent, and learned that 
nearly four hundred other guests had obtained the address of 
the publishers, and had ordered the book. In another case a 
doctor kept a copy on the table in his waiting-room, and in the 
course of time more than two hundred of his patients procured 
the address and ordered copies for themselves. 

It is gratifying and also encouraging to prospective students 
and to those who are about to begin this study, to know that 
the BOOK ITSELF IS MAGNETIC ! 

A very capable, clever, successful but strictly honest business 
man who was told that this system was in itself full of mag- 
netism, refused to believe the claim, and said, " I will pay one 
hundred pounds to the author if he can induce me to buy 
the book." The following questions were put to this business 
man : " Will you decide the matter as an honest man without 



8 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

any quibble ? " " Yes."" Will you take time to read the 
book carefully ? " " Yes." " If, after reading it, you find 
that its value to you is fully a thousand times more than its 
cost, will you then buy it ? " " Yes." In a short time a 
cheque for one hundred pounds was his answer. 

It is not only encouraging but gratifying to prospective 
students to know that the book has a most positive and power- 
ful magnetic influence over the lives of those who read or who 
study its pages. 

And this influence is ennobling, uplifting and inspiring. 

Edmund Shaftesbury when engaged in his first literary duties 
as reporter for a great daily newspaper, correspondent for 
others, writer for magazines, and author of scientific treatises, 
as well as teacher and lecturer along these lines all of which 
harmonised in the plan he had in mind, was brought in contact 
with many great personages, and had the opportunity of analys- 
ing the causes of their greatness. No man that ever lived pos- 
sessed a keener insight into the problems of life ; and we have 
never heard of any person who was gifted with so great an 
analytical power of the causes, natural and acquired, that 
produced the successful people of the world. He compiled for 
his own use in experimentation and study, private biographies 
of more than one hundred of the greatest men and women 
of two generations ago, all personally acquired by actual 
contact with these people. A few only of these names will be 
mentioned here, and among them will be included some who 
were either close friends or students, or endorsers of the training 
systems created by Shaftesbury. 

These names are published for the sole purpose of giving 
encouragement to new pupils and of arousing in them the latent 
impulses of ambition to aim high in the purposes of life in the 
belief that nobje examples are truer guides than the allurements 
of unfulfilled hopes. 

To name a few, we find the following great personages among 
many others : 

CHARLES BRADLAUGH, the famous orator of convincing 
personal magnetism. 

JOHN BRIGHT, leading statesman and convincing orator. 

CHARLES STEWART PARNELL, for many years a 
masterful man, and successful leader in the Irish cause. 



INTRODUCTION 9 

WILSON BARRETT, regarded in his day as the most mag- 
netic of actors. By his personal magnetism he was able to 
hold his audiences thrilled until after midnight in his rendition 
of the unabridged play of Hamlet, which no other actor in 
our memory had essayed. Mr. Barrett purchased every book 
by Shaftesbury, and eagerly sought these systems of education 
on his annual visits to Shaftesbury 'a native town. 

REV. CHARLES HADDON SPURGEON, well remembered 
as the most magnetic preacher in the last century of English 
history. By his personal magnetism he built up a following 
that took him from his humble beginning at Waterbeach to the 
great Tabernacle where many thousands constantly crowded in 
order to hear him. Later in his career he organised classes of 
young men studying for the ministry, and proclaimed the two 
greatest facts in this profession : first, that the right kind of a 
prayer is always answered ; and that every successfuTpreacEer 
must; develop t Be power of personal magnetism. 

HON. WILLIAM EWART GLADSTONE, the great Prime 
Minister, whose personal magnetism won for him the highest 
honours in the gift of the nation. He not only possessed the 
Shaftesbury works, but, at the solicitation of Queen Victoria, 
presented her with one of them that she admired. These facts 
were published at the time. 

Other names here listed are but a very few of the many 
that might be included, but are omitted for lack of space. 

BENJAMIN F. BUTLER, of very magnetic personality, 
in whose office Shaftesbury when a young man spent two 
years. 

JOHN A. LOGAN, an intensely magnetic orator and states- 
man, as well as successful warrior. 

LAWRENCE BARRETT, associated with Edwin Booth at 
one time. 

JOHN B. GOUGH, one of the most energetic of all lecturers 
and platform orators, a personal friend of Shaftesbury. 

CARDINAL GIBBONS, one of the greatest dignitaries of his 
church, whose personal letter in approval of the Shaftesbury 
systems was published for many years in a university catalogue. 

ARCHBISHOP JOHN J. KEANE, personal friend of Shaftes- 
bury, who nearly forty years ago when at the head of a well- 
known university engaged him as instructor, and afterwards 



10 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

in an open letter recommended his books, which letter was 
published for many years. 

ALEXANDER MELVILLE BELL, with whom Shaftesbury 
collaborated in certain writings. His son was the inventor of 
the telephone. 

DWIGHT L. MOODY, the most magnetic of evangelists 
and yet a quiet and impressive speaker as compared with other 
orators. He organised great classes of Bible students and young 
preachers, and extolled the value of magnetism. 

BISHOP JOHN PHILIP NEWMAN, the greatest and most 
magnetic of pulpit orators in his day next to Beecher. He was 
not only a friend of Shaftesbury, but did him the exceptional 
honour of seeking his personal instruction. 

BISHOP PHILLIPS BROOKS, student of Shaftesbury's 
works while yet a leader in the Episcopal Church. His ap- 
proval of these works was published in the form of a letter 
nearly forty years ago, in which he called them the " new 
education. " 

HENRY WARD BEECHER was in the front rank of pulpit 
and platform oratory in the period in which he lived, and for 
the successful use of a winning personal magnetism he had no 
equal. He was pre-eminent in swaying the minds of thousands, 
rising from one range of magnetism to another ; his genius 
always rising with him ; for magnetism and genius are insepar- 
able. We have seen him while facing an adverse and hostile 
audience spend an hour or more in his efforts to get a fair 
hearing, and eventually end the discourse with the same 
audience rising and cheering him to the echo. These incidents 
are stated to make clear the fact that there is such a power as 
personal magnetism, and that it can overcome all obstacles 
and break down all barriers. In the years 1875 and 1876, when 
Beecher was instructing classes in theology in a university at- 
tended by Shaftesbury, a strong friendship sprang up between 
the two, one a world-famous orator, the greatest of his times, 
and the other a young man seeking the secrets of greatness. 
From the quiet little prayers at a rude table in a plain room 
up to the sublime heights of the loftiest oratory, in voice, man- 
ner and presence this remarkable man lived in an atmosphere 
of personal magnetism that thrilled and inspired those who 
came under its influence ; and, as far as the author of these 



INTRODUCTION II 

books was permitted to analyse the sources of this power, it 
came from a natural possession of gifts that sprang from laws 
that are within the reach of most men and women. 

As we have said, it is our purpose to create in every student 
of this system the ambition to succeed in life ; and we know the 
value of high examples and past triumphs. Nothing stimulates 
the desire to win in the battle of existence so much as the 
history of past achievements. It is also of prime importance to 
make known the fact that Shaftesbury created his opportunities 
for discovering the underlying causes and secrets of success in 
the lives of great men. By association and study he became 
eminently fitted to develop just such a course of training as 
would employ the laws of magnetism in his unfolding of these 
gifts in his students. 

Another fact that is of still greater importance is the re- 
ception given his methods by the greatest men and women of 
his time. It was said of his first edition of the book of Personal 
Magnetism that, if it were left as by accident in any public 
place, a single copy would in a few months attract the casual 
attention of readers, and so bring a demand for a large number 
of copies, each one of which would exert a similar influence, 
and this in time would account for the building up automatically 
of a following of four million readers without a single line of 
public advertising. 

What was the reception given him from the beginning ? 

He was overrun with applicants for his personal instruction. 
Now it is a fact that as much value can be obtained from the 
books as from personal teaching ; for the latter consists solely 
of the statement in lecture form of the laws and processes by 
which personal magnetism can be acquired. He made this 
fact known ; yet thousands within reach insisted on individual 
instruction. In his personal teaching he numbered, among 
others, Cabinet Ministers, Judges, Industrial Magnates, Famous 
Business Men, Financiers, Members of Society, Lawyers, High 
Dignitaries of the Church, and almost every class of professional 
people. 

Now we come to the most encouraging fact in this 
introduction. 

Omitting all those persons who came in person to him 
for lessons, and looking only to those men and women who 



12 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

- v> 
secured their help solely from his books, we find the following 

results : 

MINISTERS. Records furnished by persons in a position 
to know the facts, tell us that up to a recent period, but in- 
cluding the years long gone by, no less than 2781 clergymen of 
small churches working at low salaries, by the development of 
personal magnetism rose to eminence, step by step, going from 
place to place, always up, up, up, improving themselves, doing 
more effective work, winning greater compensation, and accom- 
plishing greater good in the world. The value of these records 
is in the fact that these clergymen acknowledge the power of 
this system of study as the cause of their success ; practically 
all of them admitting that without it they would still be in the 
same old rut where so many of their fellow-clergymen have been 
for a third of a century. And there are thousands of other cases 
of which we have received no record. 

LAWYERS. We teach that lawyers must win the confidence 
of the public by strict honesty and fairness of dealing ; must 
win^cpnMence in themselves ; and then must develop and 
employ the natural habits of personal magnetism that bring 
these two influences together ; and on this triple alliance must 
build the highest efficiency. Reports from 7793 lawyers who 
began in the humblest station in their profession, and who spent 
years in the struggle for existence, show that every one of them 
rose to the very heights of success, hundreds of them becoming 
great leaders, winning fame and wealth. 

DOCTORS. Every highly successful physician and surgeon 
needs a large fund of well developed and finely controlled 
personal magnetism. This is not hypnotism, but is the exact 
opposite of hypnotism. The latter deadens, depresses, deals 
with abnormal nerves, and helps only in certain classes of 
pernicious or vicious maladies. Personal magnetism builds 
life, is open, uplifting, brightening and cheering. Reports from 
12,624 doctors who have studied oiirjworks solely by themselves, 
and who have put thorn into practice, acknowledge that our 
system has been one of the causes of their rise out of mediocre 
conditions to the highest success in their profession. Countless 
others in the past forty -five years have undoubtedly accom- 
plished great results from the same aid, but have failed to tell 
us so. 



INTRODUCTION 13 

DENTISTS. The really great dentists of the world have 
feet nerve control not in their charges merely, but in their 
nipulation of the delicate instruments required in doing fine 
rk. Here is one letter which is very much like another that 
published many years ago : " The book of personal mag- 
ism does much more than is claimed for it. In fact it would 
> be possible to state its full value, nor a tenth of it. That 
nsists that every student shall acquire perfect nerve control 
one of its great merits in my profession. Your book has 
much improved my skill that this alone is worth many 
idreds of pounds to me in increased income/' But this is 
y an incidental part of the training. Yet there have been 
tdonable schools for young ladies that have employed this 
ise and one other, namely, perfect goise of manner, as aids 
3tn elegant training. Still these are incidentals only. 
BUSINESS MEN AND WOMEN. The law of supply and 
nand keeps many ugly -mannered business men alive ; but 
i competitive world, where customers may exercise a choice 
their dealings, the most effective drawing power is that of 
sonal magnetism, adapted, of course, to the channels of these 
ivities. One must know jvhat to use and how tojise it in 
h division of life. It seems beyond belief that, in the past 
by -five years, more than four hundred thousand persons en- 
;ed in business have reported newly acquired success which 
y have acknowledged to be due to this study as set forth 
fche present book and its similar predecessors. And there 
, vast army of clerks and employees who have risen steadily 
)heir positions, until a great majority of them have become 
ployers. Here we have the real value of personal magnetism. 
SOCIAL LIFE is a great field for the exercise of the powers 
attraction. Men and women have learned that assumed 
jetness, gentleness and kindliness are misfits ; they are a 
ieer that rubs off when least expected to do so. A young 
nan or young man who possesses the actual charm of personal 
gnetism, even if poor or less expensively attired than others, 
[ not be ignored or treated with indifference. This is one of 
reasons why certain phases of this study have been regularly 
ght in fashionable schools for the training of girls in social 
iduot. There is much herein that is sure to benefit any 
dent who aspires to social qualities and charming manners, 



14 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

regardless of the usages of good form which belong to other 
lines of training, not included in this work. 

The present system has for many years been recognised as 
the standard work of its kind. This prominence comes from its 
genuine merit as a training method ; its adherence to the 
practical usefulness of the system ; and to its unfailing help- 
fulness to every student of its pages. In dealing with hundreds 
of thousands of students we have never yet met with any 
totally dissatisfied person. 

Having thus set forth the history of this system from its 
inception and having presented the great names that inspired 
the author to undertake the formation of a method that was 
sure to help humanity beyond that of any other influence in 
life, we will now let him speak for himself in the forthcoming 
lessons. 

One prediction is to be made at this stage : 

Since it is true that this book itself is charged with the 
power of magnetism, we venture to assert that a single reading 
of its pages will not only draw the reader to it in an inseparable 
partnership, but will also in itself and of itself have aroused in 
such reader a very marked degree of acquired personal mag- 
netism. This is saying much ; but wait and note the result. 

One reading of this work will effect a complete and revolu- 
tionary change in the reader. 

The reader hereof will see life differently, will understand 
life better, will grasp the meaning of countless influences that 
work for and against success in the activities of existence, and 
will acquire a keen perception into human nature, and interpret 
human motives more accurately. If a single reading of this 
book will accomplish so much, what is to be said of the adoption 
of the simpler principles ; what of the adoption of the deeper 
teachings ; what of the absorption of the grand truths that 
crown the work ? 

In these inquiries we are anticipating the lessons that follow ; 
but it is our purpose to present in intensive form the great 
powers of the system. 

Three great merits have uniformly won success : 

1. The lessons meet the mental equipment of the most highly 
cultured men and women, and yield to them unlimited pleasure 
and profit. 



INTRODUCTION 15 

2. The same lessons are so written and prepared that they 
can be just as easily mastered by the average man or woman as 
by the most highly educated. 

3. Owners of this system of training very quickly found 
that they could acquire personal magnetism, and could make 
practical daily use of it as if it were born naturally in them ; 
and by its use could achieve the most pleasing and gratifying 
success in all departments of life. 



16 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

THE DRIFT OF LIFE 
BY EDMUND SHAFTESBURY 

1. SOURCE OF MAGNETISM. 

Sweetly the morning sunlight, 
Climbing the mountain high, 
Poured down its gold-beams slanting 

Like a pathway from the sky ; 
And along this highway gleaming, 
Came the spirit of one we love ; 
Our home to bless 
In this wilderness, 
It came from heaven above. 

2. PASSING OPPORTUNITY. 

Swiftly the day advancing 

Sped like the sunshine by ; 
While the glowing orb of heaven 

Flooded the noon- tide sky. 
The rose grew wild on the mountain, 
The bee sipped the honeyed flower, 
And down the vale 
The lily pale, 
Nodded the fleeting hour. 



3. LOST. 



Gently the evening sunlight 

Touched the horizon's bar, 
Reaching the sea eternal, 
Lighting the land afar. 
And down the gold-beams slanting 
Like a pathway to the sky, 
On pearls of light, 
Through the gateway bright, 
It passed to the realm on high. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
MAGNETIC SOURCES 

LESSON ONE 

THE DRIFT OF LIFE 

HUMANITY is hemmed in by so many influences 
that, from time immemorial, no real effort has been 
made to gain control of the impulses that run loose 
in the world. It has been, and still is, easier to let things 
go as they will rather than exert the will to direct them. But 
the dividing line between success amlTaflure is found at that 
stage where aimless drifting ceases. 

We are all creatures of emotions, passions, circumstances and 
accident. What the mind will be, what the heart will be, what 
the body will be, are problems that are shaped to the drift 
of life, even when special attention is given to any of them. 

If you will sit down and think for a while you will be surprised 
to know how much of your life has been mere drift. 

Look at any created life, and see its effort to express itself. 
The tree sends its branches toward the- sunlight ; struggles 
through its leaves to inhale the air ; and, even underground, 
sends forth its roots in search of water. This you call inanimate 
life ; but it represents a force that comes from some source and 
goes to some equilibrium. 

Man is a higher animal, and animal life is a higher vegeta- 
tion. There are more millions of flesh cells in your body than 
your mind could conceive or your pencil could write in figures, 
yet not one of these cells originated otherwise than in a 
vegetable, nor could it have originated but for some force that 
existed in and o the^ ceU itself. * 

We propose to call this force mere energy, and you may give 

2 



18 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

it any scientific name you please. It has been named by 
various investigators, but the terms used do not help the student 
to understand it any the better. In fact, whenever a new book 
is written, the author, believing that his invention of a few 
hundred scientific words will establish a new science and draw 
all students to his feet, loads the volume with long and un- 
bearable terms until its interest sinks with its weight. Once 
in a while a short, simple word is necessary to the explanation 
of a new idea ; but the disposition of scientific writers to invent 
hundreds and thousands of long technical terms has loaded 
their special literature with an incubus that for the most part 
throttles it. 

There is no place on this globe where energy is jiot found. 
The air is so loaded with it that in the cold north the sky shines 
in boreal rays ; and wherever the frigid temperature yields to 
the warmth, the electric conditions may alarm man. Water is 
but a liquid union of gases, and is charged with electrical, 
mechanical and chemical energies, any one of which is capable 
of doing great service and great damage to man. Even ice, in 
its coldest phase, has energy, for it is not subdued, nor even 
still ; its force has broken mountain rocks into fragments. 

This energy about us we are drinking in water, eating in food 
and breathing in air. Not a chemical molecule is free from 
it ; not an atom can exist without it. We are a combination of 
individual energies. 

REASON OF UNMAGNETIC CONDITIONS 

The plant is a collection of individual energies, without the 
power to unite the forces they represent, except in its general 
life. Man is a similar collection with the power and sometimes 
the habit of so uniting the individual energies within him ; but 
he has the possibility of educating and training this power. 

If we can be understood at this step it will help along 
the work of the present volume both in your understanding 
of it and your practice of its exercises. In the first place your 
body, whether living or dead, is a collection of millions and 
millions of little energies that can never die. In the 
second place these energies are separate and individual ; al- 
though at times they act in some degree of harmony. In the 



THE DRIFT OF LIFE 19 

third place the human body is a drifting mechanism of life, 
capable but not accustomed to control the forces within it, 
except as habit, will, cultivation or special excitement may 
marshal these forces to the accomplishment of some important 
end. We are satisfied from many experiments and from the 
reports of a host of pupils that this power of marshalling and 
using these energies can be, in every person, cultivated^ to a 
high degree. To do so much as this, the pupil must study and 
practise. 

You drift day after day. 

The air, sunlight, food and water you take, are agents of a 
force that comes from the sky and earth. You idly float upon 
the tide of circumstances to make up your day's life, and the 
opportunities of being something better than you are drift 
beyond your reach and pass away. 

There are three classes of persons who will undertake the 
study of this work : 

First. Those who, through curiosity, or as incredulous in- 
vestigators, pursue the study with hesitation and indifference. 

Second. Those who commence with enormous zeal and de- 
termination to succeed, and devote every spare moment to it for 
a few days, or weeks, and then suddenly cool off. This is a 
large class, and they have had their ardour as suddenly cool off 
in a hundred other undertakings before. 

Third. Those who commence deliberately and work and 
wait patiently, plodding along in the dark for some time ; but 
persisting until the light dawns upon them. When the light 
does come it seems to break all at once. They possess that rare 
faculty called application. 

The last-named class will achieve success. The other two 
will accomplish something of value in every minute they devote 
to it. Out of the very many exercises of the book there is not 
one which is not of great value. And this value is always 
practical and useful. 

When the subject was first being systematized for study, 
there was no intention to connect it in any way with benefits 
to the health ; but it was found that every new habit produced 
good results in that line. Therefore, while not claiming or 
laying stress upon the fact, we find the following to be always 
true of this special training : 



20 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

1. It promotes a healthy blood circulation. 

2. It invigorates the whole body. 

3. It builds a good brain-power. 

4. It makes perfect nerves, overcoming nervous prostration. 

HOW MUCH TIME WILL IT TAKE ? 

This is the question that everybody asks. Let it be answered 
by asking how much time does it take for one who is naturally 
gifted with personal magnetism to acquire or to hold the power ? 
It takes no time at all. When the singer whose voice is getting 
worse is told that there is an artistic position in which the vocal 
organs may be maintained in order to improve the tones by 
the mere act of using, he needs no more time to sing with 
those organs in their proper place than to sing with them out 
of place. This is the whole secret of magnetism-growth. How 
long will it take a young lady to write a letter, spelling her 
words correctly, as compared with the time required to write 
the same letter, spelling the words incorrectly ? 

You will now begin to catch the secret of our course of in- 
struction. Yet some routine work must be done. This will 
be found to be agreeable and full of pleasant experiences. Our 
earlier instruction kept the student down to severe labour with- 
out much relief, and while the progress was rapid, it has been 
found that even more speedy results are obtainable by the use 
of the natural vitality that daily loses itself in the drift of life. 
Where the waters of Niagara rush to seek their quietude in the 
volume of the lake below, the building of steam engines where 
Nature's forces are mightier than man's inventions, would be 
the adoption of the lesser for the greater. For endless time 
there has run to waste in that one region more power than was 
needed to run all the machinery of the country. 

In like manner each individual carries in his own body and 
loses daily through drifting habits more energy than the most 
magnetic man or woman that ever lived needs to give absolute 
supremacy to active life. It is true that we can acquire power 
by building the steam engine on the banks of Niagara, and that 
the steam so employed is a natural force, as gravity is ; but 
economy prefers to use the power that is at hand awaiting man's 
bidding, rather than go to the trouble of generating it in less 



THEDRIFTOFLIFE 21 

quantity and energy. The work before us is to acquire the 
most satisfactory results in the briefest time and with the least 
effort. 

Very recently the author put into practice with novices and 
others a certain regime which at once gave the most gratifying 
results in each and every case. It was the first instance in 
which the energy known as personal magnetism had been 
brought into active existence at the start. 

This present work includes a new method of presenting the 
same facts and laws that have always existed ; but with this 
advance in the plan of teaching is found all the instruction from 
past works. Nothing has been eliminated, while many new 
aids to this study have been added. 

What were mere exercises are now established as daily habits. 
This renders the study much more interesting and really more 
effective. An exercise, once it is over, is laid aside. A habit is 
grafted on the mind and nervous system until it becomes a part 
of the general conduct of a person. 

In the whole scope of the training there is not even the merest 
influence that does not enter into all other departments of life 
apart from the development of personal magnetism, as well as 
involved in it. It so happens that this characteristic is not 
found in any other line of study ; and the fact that it is so proves 
conclusively that magnetism is life itself , and its uses are merely 
forms of existence made still more useful. The reader of these 
pages should bear this fact in mind, as the most encouraging 
and inspiring stimulus to achieving the mastery of the subject 
as herein presented. 

An instantaneous subtle influence springs from the first read- 
ing of these lessons ; for it bears the message of the greatest 
law of life, that human existence is a art of the general fund 
of magnetism that holds sway throughout the universe. This 
influence is felt in the very unfolding of the facts that con- 
stitute these lessons. It is an old saying that declares that 
" knowledge is power," but it is a true one ; and never was so 
true as in the present study. 

No person can read these pages carefully without immediately 
gaining the power that comes from knowledge. If adogtion 
anc ^ absorption a re added to knowledge, the progress is very 
rapid. 



LESSON TWO 

FIRES OF MAGNETISM 

WE SPEAK of people as magnetic in a general way. 
For the purposes of the present volume, we shall 
class them as having four general tendencies : the 
light or beautiful ; the mental or thoughtful ; the deep or 
dangerous ; the rich or luxurious. 

Each class is as important as any other. We cannot judge 
the degree or quality of magnetism by the colour of the eyes, 
or the general complexion ; but the character of the magnetic 
fire is more or less influenced by eye-colour. 

As a general rule, but by no means a universal one, the dark- 
eyed person is the opposite of the grey-eyed ; and the blue-eyed 
of the brown. Brown is the rich verdure of the field over which 
the blue sky is spread. Grey is the cold zone of the north or 
the morning sky of the east, set against the tropics of the south 
or the night-laden sky of the west. Thus the four general 
classes are the completed horizon, the earth and the empyrean. 

Despite the fact that these influences are crossed and counter- 
crossed even in the same individual, and must be separated and 
studied apart, likewise in the same individual, there is an under- 
current of fixed influence belonging to each class. As such we 
will consider them for the present. 

The blue-eyed person, when magnetic, is light, happy, cheer- 
ful, brilliant, active, quick and even effervescent. The 
muscles and the blood express the magnetic force within. When 
unmagnetic, the blue eye becomes cold, the nature revengeful, 
the plans furtive, and the mind unreasonable in its demands. 

The grey-eyed person, when magnetic, is cool, calculating, 
steady in nerve and unflinching in muscle. He talks but little 
when a purpose is at stake, and looks you coolly in the eye 
when you address him. You feel compelled to do all the talking, 



FIRES OF MAGNETISM 23 

and he does not assist you by a word or a nod. His face never 
relaxes into an assent, and so you keep on thinking of new ideas 
and expressing them, in the hope that you will be rewarded by 
some show of acquiescence. Meanwhile he is looking you 
steadily in the eye. A stupid person may seem to do all this, 
but he does not. Stupidity relaxes the musses of the jaw and 
draws down the face into a look of perplexity. 

The black-eyed person is both dangerous and deep. The eyes 
are rarely, if ever, a jet black, unless the pupils are large. The 
colour, as a colour, iJnjthe iris, or ring that surrounds the pupil. 
In proportion as the nerves are excited this iris opens, and the 
cavity behind the pupil shows black on account of its darkness. 
Nervous excitability and magnetism have been regarded as one 
and the same thing ; but a black-eyed person in ill-health would 
have less magnetism than the blue, brown or grey-eyed person. 
Excitability is generally the sign of magnetic weakness. Self- 
containment and steadiness of nerve are surer signs of the power. 
When a black-eyed person is magnetic, the nature, the eyes, the 
expression, the grasp, the very presence suggest warmth ; 
when unmagnetic there is a nervous irritability that jars upon 
the nerves of all who are near. 

The brown-eyed person, when magnetic, is affectionate and 
rich in the expression of energy, but finds it very difficult to 
hold to a steady purpose, unless fixed habits of life have been 
educated by circumstances or trained by practice. Brown eyes 
are akin to black in their deepest hue ; but, embracing a score 
of shades even to a light hazel, they extend toward their 
opposite pole, the blue. 

The general philosophy of personal magnetism may be 
summed up in a few outlines that present the theoretical 
rather than the substantial side of the study. 

1 . All human beings belong to one of the following inherited 
magnetic temperaments, or to a blend of two or more of them : 

(a) THE BEAUTIFUL . . . Blue. 
(ft) THE, 



(c) THE DEEP ..... Black. 

(d) THE AFFECTIONATE . . Brown. 

The Blue and Grey may blend ; the Grey and Light Brown 
may blend ; and the Brown and Black may blend. 



24 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The Blue and Black are opposites ; the Blue and Brown are 
opposites ; the Grey and Dark Browns are opposites ; and the 
Grey and Black are opposites. 

2. All spontaneous exhibitions of energy must come from 
the inherited temperament ; and the degree of that energy and 
its success in dealing with others depends upon the stage of its 

i development. Circumstances are educators of men and women 
to a far greater extent than exact training. The so-called gift 
of magnetism is always the result of some kind of education. 
It is true that the inherited temperament may be cultivated 
by exact training such as this volume affords ; but, where we 
find it in mature life already established, we may suppose that 
the years past have been fraught with circumstances calculated 
to bring out the forces within, and to concentrate the individual 
energies that make up those forces. 

3. All deliberate exhibitions of energy must come from 
acquired temperaments ; or else the deliberation would be 
unnecessary. It is most curious indeed to follow out a line of 
investigation demonstrating this remarkable law. The acquired 
temperaments may be highly cultivated, and are most easily 
assumed in opposites. 

4. The following table gives a list of the simple uses of this 
energy ; and, if you wish, you may accept the belief that these 
uses are all unconsciously employed, whether spontaneous or 
deliberate ; that is, the persons who succeed in managing or 
controlling others in life's details are unconscious of any 
magnetic force at work. The cases stated in this table are 
realities taken from the experience of a number of people, and 
they represent what is actually occurring everywhere, every 
day of the year. 

(a) The Beautiful are Muscular. 

(b) The Cold are Mental. 

(c) The Deep are Nervous. 

(d) The Affectionate are Moral. 

This table requires explaining or it will be misleading. 
The beautiful are magnetic in a muscular way ; and only so 
when they are in their inherited temperament. Now muscular 
does not mean big of muscle but active of what muscle they 
possess. All beauty is controlled by muscular development. 



FIRES OF MAGNETISM 25 

The flesh is but a mass of very small muscles, as dissection will 
easily prove. The contour of the body, and all the lines and 
shapes of beauty are determined by the muscular arrangements 
of the flesh. The millions and millions of muscular fibres in 
the fleshy masses of the body are at work concentrating their 
energies in this temperament when its magnetism is aroused. 

The mentality of cold people has nothing to do with the 
warmth of the body. It is the steady, far-off, cold ray of an 
unflickering light. It is not excitable or impatient. The brain, 
and not the muscular system, exerts the temperamental 
magnetism ; and often with quick, unanswerable blows. 

In the nervous temperament, the motor and sensor nerves 
are all affected. In the affectionate class the moral element 
predominates ; not as a force of superior morality, but as the 
seat of magnetic activity. There are good morals and bad 
morals, and there are moralising natures, and natures easily 
influenced by motives, good or bad, or by inducements to do 
right or wrong. All these considerations attach to that class 
of people who are affectionate in their magnetic temperaments, 
and their activity is in their moral blends of life. Unless this 
explanation is early understood, the impression will become 
fixed in your mind that the moral magnetic temperament 
represents a high degree of rectitude. It is not true that colour 
affects the ethical tendencies of the heart. 



TABLE OF INHERITED MAGNETIC TEMPERAMENTS 

(a) I The Beautiful \ Is the Inherited 

1 ,, or . j Magnetic Temperament of 1 EYES 

[ Muscular J I 

J The Cold I Is the Inherited {GREY 

' ) I ,.. r , I Magnetic Temperament of 1 EYES 

[ Mental J I 

f The Deep \ Is the Inherited {BLACK 

' c ' 1 ^-r r I Magnetic Temperament of 1 EYES 

! Nervous J I 

J The Affectionate | I 8 the Inherited {BROWN 

W I or j Magnetic Temperament of j EYES 



26 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

INHERITED ACQUIRED 

(a) Muscular (may cultivate) Mental, Nervous, Moral. 
(6) Mental ^ Muscular, Nervous, Moral. 

(c) Nervous Muscular, Mental, Moral. 

(d) Moral Muscular, Mental, Nervous. 
As the truest, fullest tjjttjon^ 

rarely expect to find an accomplished person exclusively in jiis 
^IffveTemper ament . 

The distincfions~made in this lesson are intended only as 
interesting reading of the underlying influences that are at 
work in every life. If they are not understood at first, they will 
be found helpful after the study has advanced far enough for 
you to have met all classes of people, and to have learned that 
no two persons are exactly alike. One of the most pleasing 
things in this world is the opportunity for studying character 
and temperament in others. By so doing, you will be acquiring 
new knowledge, and finding new variations of human experience 
that, after all, is the best teacher one could have. 

Therefore if you wish to plunge ahead with great rapidity, you 
may defer the re-reading of this lesson until you are drawn back 
to it by your own magnetism. 

Great advantage arises from the practice of making your- 
self familiar with people ; seeking to determine their powers of 
resistance to the influence of magnetism as related to the eye- 
colour. You can easily form the habit of observing the men 
and women whom you meet from time to time ; learning from 
yourself the answers to the following questions : 

1 . Is it true that persons of opposite colour of eyes are more 
readily influenced by each other ? 

2. Is it true that grey eyes are generally studious, calculating 
and cold by nature ? 

3. Assuming that man and wife are more contented if they 
are interested in the same things in life, does it work out in 
experience that the best marriages are founded on the union of 
like with like ? 

By securing the answers by your observation of people, you 
will soon learn to measure them in all other respects. 



LESSON THREE 

LATENT MAGNETIC ENERGIES 

OF ALL the facts that operate to make our lives 
doubtful in their success or failure, is the appalling 
ease with which, on some unforeseen occasion, and 
in some unexpected and unexplainable manner, we yield 
advantages that our better judgment should have clung to 
and held in its keeping. In other words we are not always able 
to take care of ourselves. 

The loss of control is not due so much to our breaking down 
after a certain amount of resistance, as to our willingness to 
yield. Often our minds are led to think that it is the right 
thing to do. Startling propositions contain elements of con- 
viction that rush us to a change of view, almost before we know 
it. Let us see what these are. 

At the present stage of our study we may regard magnetism 
as a central trunk of influence, having four branches ; each in- 
dividual being capable of using, as well as controlled by, any 
one or all of the four, although his or her temperament may 
prevail in one only. The arrangement is not a scientific one ; 
but, being correct in fact and illustrating the true relationship 
of life more accurately than science may do in this part of our 
study, we are compelled to adopt it. 

In every created being there is an aggregation of individual 
energies left to drift. They furnish the general basis of power. 
When properly excited they become concentrated and, for a 
time, are irresistible. So it occurs that many unmagnetic 
persons are sometimes " aroused," as they choose to call it, and 
show a force that had never been credited to them. 

The energies of the body that arouse magnetism, show them- 
selves very distinctly in one way or another . 
The pupil of the eye is not supposed to have colour. It is 



28 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

a dark hole, and all dark holes show absence of colour, for 
absence of light can have no other result ; and absence of colour 
always means the appearance of black. An orator whose eyes 
were a brilliant blue, addressed an audience with eloquent 
passion. To the surprise of those who knew him in private 
life only, his blue eyes had disappeared ; they were displaced 
by great orbs of black. These friends sat directly in front of 
him, and were sure of the fact. An actor likewise surprised 
some acquaintances ; his grey eyes changing to black. 

But then the occurrence is a very common one, although 
it may not be observed as often as it transpires. The pupil 
of the eye indicates the magnetic condition. When the energy 
is lacking or is held in abeyance, the pupil is exceedingly small, 
unless the person is subject to abnormal nervous conditions. 
The small size of the pupil is due to lack of vitality in the optic 
nerve and brain as applied to the eye. The most magnetic 
men we have met were accustomed to carry the eyes as though 
they were dead ; the fires slumbered, but had not gone out. 
Blue eyes show a large field of blue when the pupils are con- 
tracted. So do grey eyes, or those of any colour. But as the 
magnetic fire is kindled the field is lessened because the pupil of 
the eye expands, the aperture is enlarged just in proportion as 
the energy within takes possession of the orb ; and, under great 
nervous excitement, the pupil, black, blazing and intense, drives 
the curtain widely apart until there is no trace of the iris, and 
consequently no colour to the eye. It is jet black. 

Under such circumstances the effect is sometimes awful, 
especially if the fire is kept within steady control. 

Some persons who are able to master the wills of others depend 
solely on this power of expanding the pupil of the eye. The 
beholder realises that a change is taking place in the character 
of the face before him, but he does not analyse its nature. He 
may be influenced to a degree that leaves him practically help- 
less, yet he is not by any means put into a hypnotic sleep. 

It is not possible to hypnotise a person unless there is a 
tendency in that person towards catalepsy, which is a morbid 
condition of the nerves. 

You may take lessons, become an expert, and possess the 
full power, yet where are your subjects ? The healthy man or 
woman will not permit you to manipulate the senses, nor could 



LATENT MAGNETIC ENERGIES 29 

you succeed if you were to try. That weakling who is to be 
pitied because of a deficient vitality is your only prey. The 
triumph is void of honour. The king has conquered a rag doll. 
There are schools of hypnotism, but their pupils practise upon 
cataleptics, upon diseased people, and, after graduation, they 
are powerless, for they have not acquired magnetism. The 
latter power is universal. All the world is its teachers, and all 
the world its subjects. 

What the individual is able to find out for himself will not 
be told him by instinct or Nature. God does nothing for 
humanity that it is able to do for itself. The life of the race is 
made necessary, and the impulses of instinct and desire are 
accordingly given first place in the habits and cravings of the 
mind and body. With animals below man this rule is reversed. 
With them, as with man, gain is sought, but for the purpose 
of maintaining life. Every beast, bird and serpent plays some 
important part in the plan of existence. Life dies most happily 
and most easily in the clutches of other life. The bird that 
must end its days in the slow processes of old age suffers many 
a month of torture waiting for the end ; but in the jaws of the 
cat or the fangs of the snake it finds a pleasurable release from 
the agonies of living ; an enjoyment that is participated in by 
the victim as much as by the devourer. 

To effect this purpose it is essential that the bird should be 
trapped by a power that paralyses his wings. The chatter of 
the cat is done to catch the ear, and thence the eye of the bird. 
Magnetism does the rest. Until the bird sees the expanded 
pupil of the eye of the cat, it is free ; but after that it is lost. 
The snake likewise draws its prey by the same law. Fish in 
the sea are known to hold their victims by a similar use of the 
eye. The nobler of the savage beasts, such as the lion, the tiger, 
the hyena, and countless others, are all given the magnetic 
power as an aid to their purpose of gain. 

Ascending still higher up the ladder of animal life we find 
that the valuable dog and the spirited horse have the same 
power. Without it the supreme qualities of these better 
companions of man would be dulled. 

In each and every instance where the lower forms of life, 
or humanity itself, may be seen to give evidence of the power 
of magnetism, the proof is present in the expanded eye-pupil. 



30 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

It does not follow that any man or woman can, at will, cause 
the eye-pupil to expand, but it is invariably true that the normal 
expansion of this part of the eye is the result of excessive 
magnetism. The abnormal expansion is due to the nervous 
powers running wild ; the latent energy is let loose and is uncon- 
trolled. One is the valued steed obeying the command of its 
master ; the other is the valued steed running away with its 
master. 

The increase of magnetism leads to the power of expansion ; 
but it does not follow that the power is to be always employed. 
On the other hand the most magnetic men and women do not 
allow this power to manifest itself except when they choose to 
call it into use ; they seem to be the very opposites of what 
they are, for their eyes are apparently lifeless, and even droop 
like those in a half -sleep. They are in a state of resting most 
of the time, thus being better prepared for the lightning energy 
that may be called forth by some special need. 

Outward light expands and contracts the eye-pupil ; but 
this is a mechanical action. The cat closes its iris to a vertical 
line, when it is out in the sun ; but let a bird come near by and 
the iris will instantly give way, allowing the pupil to expand so 
as to cover the whole area, even in the brightest glare of 
sunlight. Here we see the inward power outweighing the out- 
ward power. 

The authenticated cases of freedom from pain while in the 
clutches of savage beasts are too numerous to admit of question. 
The hunter who said, " I was quite conscious of the tiger's 
teeth penetrating my shoulder, but, instead of hurting me, they 
seemed devoid of pain," voiced the experience of many others. 
The bird suffers nothing while in the jaws of the cat. Some- 
thing in the expanded pupils and glaring balls of the captor 
has lessened the will of the prey, and the sensation of drowsiness 
that follows may deaden the feeling in the nerves. 

The power referred to is not only natural, but is as common 
as anything in Nature. It is said that a man who faces a 
wild animal can hold it at bay by a steadfast gaze^jetjfew 
persons are willing^o^depend upon so frail a defence. __The 



an energy of power jnJJb_e eye under the present principle. If 

of the beast is of a more enduring 



LATENT MAGNETIC ENERGIES 31 



this 

the ^ beagt^expects'and Jooks for. A qakk^drowsiness Jollows, 
and fifoon all JR. over.. ThejejreTl^wever,j^ancegJweIl verified 
where men have not only withstood the gaze of savag^beas^ 
but have actually o>wecLl<Hftrh byjbhe eye, and this in the haunts 
of Nature. 

The accounts given in this lesson are intended merely to show 
the fact that there is in every member of the animal kingdom 
a magnetic vitality that needs only to be aroused in order 
to manifest itself. Whether it comes as the power to hypnotise 
or to magnetise makes little difference in the study of the 
latent force, but does make a vast difference in the use made 
of it and the results of that use. Instinct teaches animals of 
prey to overcome the resistance of their prey after the fighting 
is over ; and the same instinct gives to the victims the relief 
from all pain as the compensation of Nature. 

The fire that glows in the eyes of the aroused animal comes 
from the same source as the intensity that shines in the eyes 
of a human being in the exercise of the natural or acquired 
gift of personal magnetism. But the uses are different, and 
the results of an opposite nature. The only phase of this animal 
force that is akin to personal magnetism in man, is in the effort 
to overmaster an opponent ; but all else is mere hypnotism. 

Unless a person is a doctor and has to deal with morbid 
conditions in a patient, there is never any reason why a man 
or woman should practise hypnotism ; and there are many 
reasons why they should not. Jjtnagine > a young man wishing to 
win the affections and love of a young lady friend wlio did not 
car^~forTnm, arid seeking to put her to sleep in order to gain 
Tier consent. TThe whole condition is absurd. I^Or imagine a man 
who wishes to sell a piece of land, hypnotising the prospective 
buyer and so securing his signature to the agreement. In the 
first place, the thing cannot be done in one case in ten thousand, 
and if done would not stand the test of a law trial. 

Yet on the other hand there are hundreds of thousands of 
men and women in this as in any large country who are 
unconsciously endowed with the semi-power of hypnotism ; 
not one of whom would be willing to have it known that such a 
power was possessed, nor would it be believed if urged upon 
them as a fact. We have met in the past forty-five years more 



32 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

than five thousand doctors who possess this power of semi- 
hypnotism. This profession seems to fall into its use naturally ; 
and it helps. Almost every patient knows some favourite 
physician whose voice and touch are soothing and assuring. 
Such a gift is undoubtedly helpful in curing the sick. Talking 
with a number of doctors and telling them that they were 
employing semi-hypnotic methods, they one and all denied it, 
but we proved to quite a number of them that the assertion 
was well founded. Other doctors seem to realise that their 
presence, voice and touch gave relief and confidence and 
imparted soothing qualities to their patients ; and they agreed 
that they had known for a long time that this was true. But 
one doctor said rather earnestly, " I have never put a patient 
into a hypnotic sleep in my life." Nor had he ; but he had 
calmed them, inspired them with confidence in him, and had 
given them relief from pain of the body and worry of the mind. 
These effects verge closely on personal magnetism, and often 
merge into it. 

Lawyers who tried this semi-hypnotic power over juries or 
courts would achieve nothing. What helps the doctors would 
injure the cause of the advocates. Dentists follow the doctors 
in this line of influence, and business men make use of both 
personal magnetism and semi-hypnotism in their dealings where 
they achieve unusual success. 

Ministers may become a source of danger if they employ the 
semi-hypnotic power ; but otherwise if they use personal 
magnetism. A very remarkable case occurred years ago when 
some parishioners of a church made in open meeting the charge 
that was repeated in the papers, that one of the ablest and most 
successful preachers in the city was resorting unconsciously to 
the use of this semi-hypnotic power, both in his sermons and 
in his conversations with the members of his congregation. 
Following this charge, some reporters attended the church for 
several Sundays, and found nothing out of the ordinary. The 
preacher had changed his methods, after consulting with an 
expert in this line. 

After the lapse of several months when the interest had 
subsided, we visited the city for a series of Sundays in order to 
hear the minister. It seemed that his voice under certain 
emotional feelings possessed what is known as HEALING 



LAMENT MAGNETIC ENERGIES 33 

TONES ; or such tones as a man or woman who is a natural 
magnetic healer employs in effecting cures of maladies that are 
not curable under ordinary treatment. These tones are fully 
described later on in this work. We had several talks with the 
preacher, and found him to be most sincere in his claim that 
he did not know he had these semi-hypnotic tones in his voice. 
We explained to him what they were, how they were produced; 
and how they differed from the ordinary tones of the speaking 
voice. 

A peculiar fact is that during several visits to the church we 
had heard these tones and had recognised them, and at the same 
time had noted the effect of their continual use on the members 
of the congregation. Of course a drowsy sermon in any drowsy 
voice with drowsy ideas will induce natural sleep ; but hypnotic 
tones will not do this ; and as they do not go far enough 
to bring on actual hypnotic sleep, they bring the hearers into 
a widely awakened interest in which their thinking powers 
seem to follow closely the thoughts of the preacher, to go and 
come with him, and to empty their minds of all else except the 
offerings of the preacher. 

People who recall the great work done by Mr. Moody and 
who heard him repeatedly, may think that he possessed these 
tones, and that his success was due to a semi-hypnotic voice. 
It is true that he came close to this quality of voice, but still 
employed only his power of personal magnetism for his success. 

We have seen an audience contribute five thousand pounds 
in a benefit meeting, and not for charity, as the result of the 
semi-hypnotic influence in the tones of the voice. We will 
learn all about them as we reach later lessons in this book. 

The human voice has a number of tones that exert a marked 



and instant influence over hearers. These tones are quickly 
acquired, when the way of producing them is understood. One 
tone may be used by mothers in putting their babies to sleep. 
One by teachers in securing and holding the attention and 
respect of their pupils. An entirely different tone may be used 
by merchants and salesmen in winning success. There is a tone 
of the voice that arouses instantly the desire of an audience 
to listen and give absorbed interest in what is said. These are 
magnetic and not hypnotic. 



LESSON FOUR 

HUMAN MAGNETISM 

HOMER describes the gods viewing the fierce contests 
on the plains of Troy from the summit of Mount 
Ida. A later tradition tells of the astonishment of 
a humble shepherd on this same summit, when he 
beheld his iron-bound staff leap from his hands and cling to 
the projecting rocks. History seems clear in pointing to this 
locality of ancient Magnesia as the scene of the earliest discovery 
of that wonderful ore or " stone " that would lift a " load/' 
hence called the Lodestone. Very naturally was this force called 
Magnetism, and the ore a Magnet, out of deference to the place 
of its discovery. 

This may be the very locality alluded to in the Arabian Nights 
as the Magnetic Mountain, which drew out the iron bolts and 
fastenings from passing ships, and sank them instantly. 

Men were not long in discovering this magnetic iron- ore in 
other places, and putting it to various tests of usefulness. Chief 
among such experimental discoveries was the power it possessed 
of magnetising a needle so that it would always point due North. 
Even in English annals we find the sailing stone mentioned as 
early as the twelfth century, but it was known and used long 
previously by other nations. 

It seems strange that up to one hundred and fifty years ago 
men were ignorant of the existence of animal magnetism. 

About 1770 a great scientist, Galvani, professor in Bologna, 
was preparing some frogs to be cooked for his sickly wife. 
Happening to touch two different metals in contact to certain 
nerves and muscles, he was surprised to see the frog's lifeless 
legs resume all the activity of their accustomed motions. 
Others had noticed this result, but had not been led to in- 
vestigate its philosophy. 

34 



HUMAN MAGNETISM 35 

After his death Professor Aldini, a nephew, travelled through 
Europe proving the truth of Galvani's statements and theories, 
which had been misrepresented and repudiated. 

A favourite experiment of his was to form a battery out of 
several heads of recently slaughtered cattle, connecting their 
tongues and ears alternately by wires. The result was always 
surprising and conclusive. Aldini, among other things, main- 
tained : 

" That muscular contractions are excited by the development 
of electricity in the animal-machine, which is conducted from 
the nerves to the muscles, without the concurrence of metals. " 

" That all animals are endowed with an inherent electricity, 
appropriate to their economy, which, secreted by the brain, re- 
sides especially in the nerves, by which it is communicated to 
every part of the body. When a limb is to be moved, the 
nerves, aided by the brain, draw some electricity from the 
interior of the muscles, discharging this upon their surface, and 
they are thus contracted as desired. " 

Was it not the shrewd Napoleon I. who said, when he first 
saw a voltaic battery : " Voila Fimage de la vie : la colonne 
vertebrale est le pile ; la vessie, le pole positif ; et le foie, le pole 
n^gatif." 

We know that electricity and magnetism exist in all things. 
We are assured that its power vastly exceeds our present 
acquaintance with it. We have also seen that the very air be- 
comes polarised and sets up induction between adjacent bodies. 

The human frame is, so to speak, filled and dominated by 
latent magnetism. Hence the brain, which appears to be the 
seat of the soul or ego, is properly a sensitive electrical con- 
denser, ready at any instant to charge any nerve^that they may 
set their appropriate muscles in action, whenever that ego 
touches the magic key which completes the circuit. 

Thales, then, considering that he lived twenty -five hundred 
years before our day, was not far out of the way when he said 
that " electricity is the soul residing in electron. " 

The latent magnetism of an individual is quickly awakened I 
by the vibratory current of a magnetic persoiT through the! 
action of the voice, eye or touch. 

Many persons are afraid to study these subjects, believing 
that they stand for something that is terrible, some weird power 



36 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

that may be associated with witchcraft. (Hypnotism was un- 
doubtedly the basis of the old-time witchery, for it has always 
existed in the world, and been misjudged in every age.^ 

But personal magnetism has never.beea in bad company . It 
has ha3^no^ffiiavoiiry ^ wputafcion "f tut, t>irtKer otHerTiand, its 
work has been of the nobler stamp, and its influence has always 
tended to make the mind sound, the body whole and the nerves 
steady. Of all the thousands of pupils in personal magnetism 
whom we have met, there has never Jbee^onj^wiiQJceimned the 
least^ bit pjLsuperstition, nor one^who hadjany fear of ghosts 
or^a belief^ in theuu *Ke brain ^e1& a "clear and perfect view 
of life^frse from the muddyiiues that 'tinge the meaner nature. 

Its very basis is vitality. Life and power grow with the in- 
crease of personal magnetism,,. It helps to uplift the weak, 
whether that individual be the student of the power or the one 
who is brought under its influence. One magnetic man or 
woman can wield a vast and inspiring sway over hundreds and 
thousands of others at one and the same time. Those who are 
thus dominated are given some of the magnetism of the master 
power, and the more they are under such sway the stronger they 
become in mind and purpose. Just the opposite is true of the 
uses of hypnotism. 

Every intelligent reader knows what is meant by the power 
of personal magnetism, and there are few who cannot at once 
detect the man or woman who possesses this power. The mere 
enterin^pf the room, the first steps towards an audience, the first 
tones of the speaking or singing voice, the touch of the hand, 
the glance of the eye, or the impress of the fingers on the piano, 
as in the case of the famous Polish player : these tell in a few 
seconds the fact that the individual is magnetic. If the gift be 
natural, then it has come from accidental habits that prevent 
the constant loss of vital electricity. You will see a self- 
controlled, easy, but at the same time energetic personality that 
will attract your attention because of the presentation of these 
two conditions in one life. 



LESSON FIVE 

LIFE IS MAGNETISM 

THE BODY CANNOT BEGIN LIFE until it first be- 
gins to generate magnetism. As has been fully stated 
in an early lesson, all matter is composed of chemical 
elements ; and the human body employs fourteen of these 
elements with one or two present under certain conditions 
in addition to that number. Each element consists of particles 
known as molecules ; and shape, formation and construction 
are given parts of the body by the action of magnetism in the 
character of cohesion. This attribute could no more exist 
without magnetism than could the earth remain in the solar 
system without magnetism. In its absence the body of man 
would be a mass of dust. 

Each particle which is known as a molecule is composed of 
atoms, and these also are held in the shape and formation of 
the molecule by the same law of cohesion, without which there 
could be no chemical elements ; no oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, 
carbon, iron, gold, or other thing. All creation would be alike, 
and all things as one. Nothing could grow, nothing could live 
or have shape. Still further analysing matter, we find that the 
atom is a^solar system of its own, in miniature to be sure, but 
nevertheless just the same kind of a solar system as is that of 
which our sun and planets are parts. Each atom has its central 
orb, and around this there fly its satellites in orbits such as we 
study in astronomy. Each such planet is endowed with mag- 
netism to keep it away from its central sun ; and each such 
sun is endowed with magnetisn to hold to its system every one 
of its satellites. 

Here we find that the basis of all life is magnetism, and that 
it is also the basis of all matter. Wherever there is matter, 
there must exist the powers of magnetic influence making life, 
shaping life, developing all activities of life, and exerting an 

37 



38 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

unending influence in all the operations of Nature. Of such is 
the body of a human being. Great experts in science say that 
a single atom, fully developed in the use of the power locked up 
in it, is charged with so mighty a force that it is capable of 
blowing up the largest building in the world. We have never 
believed this statement, but we have seen it repeated many 
times, and we know that it is believed by abler minds than our 
own. So what can we do ? 

The lesson taught, however, is this : Every particle of the 
human bodjjis charged to excess and surcharged to excess with 
active and with latent magnetism. It is everywhere, in the 
blood, in the organs, in the arteries, in the veins, in the brain, 
in the membranes, in the nerves, and in every bone and sinew of 
the body. 

Let us see if we can make clear the difference between the 
presence of a power singly and collectively. This is a most 
important distinction. 

At first we will look into it by using the well-known example 
of the cell, or the basis of ^ living structure whether of the 
animal or the plant kingdom. A cell has its controlling force 
which is seen as a darker particle generally near one side of the 
cell itself. Thisjs its intelligent director,. This is carrying the 
secret of the future of that cell. It may be the first cell of a 
human being ; if so, it will contain the intelligence that will, by 
being multiplied, build countless billions more cells all like it, 
which will obey the instructions that are locked up in that first 
cell, and create the body of a human child. All the future of 
that child as it grows into a man is contained in the intelligence 
of that first cell. 

The body of the man contains duplicates of the first cell, now 
given shape and specialised duties, and existing in cell life 
throughout all parts of the body. This is known as diffused 
intelligence because it is divided into the multitudes of cells that 
are contained in the entire organism as units. 

There are two great kingdoms in the world : 

One is the animal kingdom which includes the human species. 

The other is the vegetable kingdom which includes all plant 
life and all other life that does not belong to the animal division. 

The difference between the animal kingdom and the veget- 
able kingdom is this : 



LIFE IS MAGNETISM 39 

In the vegetable kingdom all cell intelligence is diffused. 

In the animal kingdom, cell intelligence is not only diffused, 
but is also found collectively. Collective cell intelligence occurs 
in the nerve centres and in the brain. The latter organ in man 
is an enormously enlarged collective mass of cell intelligence, 
relatively speaking. In the vegetable kingdom it is not possible 
to store intelligence in nerve centres, nor in a brain cavity ; 
hence plants remain plants and are never changed into animals 
until their cells are taken as food by the latter. But the cells of 
the vegetable kingdom possess the high honour of being the 
basis of the body of the animal ; for whether flesh eats flesh 
or only vegetation, every cell in the animal was once a cell in 
the vegetable division of life. So the diffused intelligence of 
the plant world becomes in time the collective intelligence in the 
brain of man. 

By this illustration we come to understand in what way the 
diffused magnetism of the atom-structure of the human body 
may become the collective magnetism of man or woman. 

It must be borne in mind that every atom possesses tremend- 
ous inherent or natural power, due to its magnetism. In the 
plant kingdom this magnetism is diffused, for which reason there 
is no collective influence emanating from the tree ; although 
persons who work out among growing foliage and plants or 
trees are known to absorb considerable power in diffused 
form. 

In the human body as in animals the magnetism is more or 
less drawn into central storage conditions. But in all life below 
man this is an electric and not a magnetic form. In the 
electric fish this force is concentrated to an unusual degree, 
considering the size of the organism. In the human species 
there may be a strong collective force of electricity with an 
insufficient quantity of magnetism. Thus many persons are 
found whose bodies are really charged with the fluid known as 
electricity. The fact is that this fluid is gathered collectively 
from the magnetism that is the life of each atom, yet it lacks 
something to bring it up to the standard known as personal 
magnetism. 

We have shown that diffused cell intelligence when brought 
into a collective condition becomes the brain of animal life. 

We have also shown that diffused atomic magnetism when 



40 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

brought into a collective condition becomes the magnetic power 
of life. 

Personal magnetism is the union of these two conditions ; 
the blending of the collective form of intelligence with the 
Collective form of magnetism. 

From this rather technical, although valuable, exposition of 
these great facts, we learn that every man and woman is of 
necessity highly magnetic, although the blending of the two 
forces into personal magnetism may not yet have taken place. 

One further step and we reach the basis of our study. 

It is equally clear that every man and woman is naturally 
in possession of the gift of personal magnetism in latent form. 
This power exists in fact, but as in a shell, just as the life of 
the eagle is contained in the shell of the egg. The latter must be 
broken and the life released. 

As every man and woman possesses this power latently, the 
process of releasing it is necessary ; but when once released it 
needs only to be guided aright to become effective. When we 
speak of developing personal magnetism we do not intend to 
imply that it is to be created out of nothing, for that would be 
impossible. The word educate in the process of learning, means 
to draw out, to lead forth, referring to the unfolding of the power 
of acquiring knowledge. In developing magnetism, it is not 
created, or made to grow out of nothing, but is released from its 
latent condition. 

There are two processes that may be employed to unfold this 
power : 

One is the use of inciting exercises that stimulate into action 
the forces that are dormant in the body. This is artificial in its 
first stages, but if turned into habits of living will in time 
become natural ; and this change occurs when the exercises 
have been carried far enough to inspire the adoption of their 
results as habits. 

The other and far better method is that which breaks the 
shell that obstructs the life within the body, and releasesTtlie 
pent-up power. Then Nature asserts herself, and personal 
magnetism becomes in fact a gift. 

The student should understand the difference between the 
two processes that are employed in unfolding this power. 

Then we meet the fact that there are many persons who are 



LIFE IS MAGNETISM 41 

thus gifted by their own habits of living and habits of using 
their powers. Without instruction of any kind, the operation 
of certain activities will result in the appearance of this gift. 
We have talked with many such men and women. Some of 
them have been known to us through a course of years. We 
have made a very large collection of little histories covering 
such cases, so that we have been able to get at the basic facts 
that underlie the acquisition of personal magnetism without 
instruction. The results of this analysis are worth knowing. 
We refer to men and women who have won great successes in 
the various avenues of life, in the professional, business and 
social world. 

In the first place we are deeply impressed with their perfect 
poise whether they were active or were inactive. This condition 
hey seemed to be cognisant of and they conserved it. 

Then we noted a degree of cjoohiess and reserve in the muscular 
5nd in the nervous systems. They did not seem to be uncon- 
scious of this condition, for in every case it appeared as if 
they sought to maintain it, although this might not always 
have been the fact. The same principle was involved as in the 
breach of good form which, if it occurred, would have at once 
been realised by the parties themselves rather than by 
observers. This means that persons who are magnetic solely by 
habits of living which have grown up with them, know when 
they break any of those habits just as a well-bred person knows 
when some rule of conduct has been broken, and will proceed to 
avoid it in the future. Thus we see that persons who are well 
bred conserve their watchfulness over their own conduct ; and 
it has always seemed to us that those who are magnetic do the 
thing automatically. 

The third trait that was always evident in this class of persons 
that of high nervous tension held in perfect repose. This 
condition was never absent in any of the great men and women 
of the past whose lives we analysed from a close personal 
Acquaintance. 

The fourth trait that was found in every one of them was a 
voertain muscular shaping of the temples which gave to the eyes 
a very powerful influence when they were employed either as 
accompanying conversation or when listening. This did not 
make the eyes either piercing or impressive in the act of being 



42 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

used ; but there was a subtle quality that we shall explain at 
,great length before this study is ended in this book. 
3 The fifth trait that we noted differed in its use. At one time it 
Appeared as a form of a living grace that was most fascinating. 
In other cases it showed itself in the phase of a rugged strength 
apparently born in ultra grace. But it was not the languid kind 
of grace, nor the form of ease that suggests relaxing. Life 
was present in every fibre of the body. 

The voice in every instance was very magnetic. 

' Habits of use had brought this afcout, for tliere'is no such thing 
as a naturally magnetic voice in the sense that it came about 
without some kind of development. People, without knowing it, 
copy others. A magnetic singer may have a voice highly trained 
at the hands of a great teacher ; and a hundred admirers among 
amateur singers may consciously or unconsciously imitate the 
methods of vocal use, and so come into some of its acquired 
power. 

All human voices are developed by habit or training ; and 
most of those that are attractive exert an influence over those 
who associate with the users. Even defects are imitated. We 
recall the case of a beloved master of a boys' school who stam- 
mered, and every boy in the school acquired the stammer 
unconsciously but in less degree. 

The development of the magnetic voice follows an exact 
scientific process, and can be accomplished with mathematical 
certainty. It is not a slow proceeding in any event. The reason 
for this success is due to the fact that exercises may be employed 
that begin to show results from the very beginning of the 
training. This can be said also of the development of the 
magnetic eye/ But other branches of the study of personal 
magnetism require time and patience. 

If a person could be constantly in the company of those 
who were naturally gifted in this power, and who had never 
been trained or had the opportunity of studying a book method, 
and such person were observant and disposed to analyse effects 
and trace them back to their causes, it is more than likely that 
the power could be acquired by what is called absorption, or 
the influence of association. 

The six traits that we have just described as being evident 
in all cases of magnetism where there has been no study or 



LIFE IS MAGNETISM 43 

training, instead of being copied or absorbed by imitation and 
association, may be more readily transmitted by study and 
training, and they are included in the present work ; but only as 
a part of the methods employed. They are as follows : 

1. Perfect poise of majiner. 

2. Perfect coolness and reserve in the jmjisfiiaL^ 

"" 



High nervous tension 




reserye. 

4. The shaping of the temple formation^ leading to the 
deyelopmentjrf the magn&ti0 eye. 

5. Living grace. 

6. SHnagnetic voice. 

As we Tmve said these are only a part of our system of train- 
ing ; and they are merely reproductions of the unvarying traits 
that we found in all persons who had achieved greatness 
through the possession of personal magnetism as a natural 
gift. 

^ But these same persons had been highjj developed in their 
mental^ preparations for their life work. Such development 
never invites magnetism, but is helped by it, and helps it in turn. 
On^the other hand a person who is magnetic without mental 
prepira/fcion" is like a powerful ^motor-vehicle jrunnin^ 
driver.^ 

To meet the needs of mental preparation we have included in 
this wor^ffie^ra^Mfi^lSlftt _is designed for arousing^ ambition 
andTibr stimulating the mind, which we have termed Mental 
Magnitude. Tt perfprmsJM-fe^y of cultivating the thought- 
processes and of uniting them with natural magnetism^ 

The work immediately before us then is to ascertain what 
are the defects and obstructions that prevent the latent 
magnetism of the body from storing itself collectively in the 
brain and faculties. These hindrances when once removed will 
no longer interfere with the development of the power that is 
sought, and the latter will have free scope to unfold itself in a 
manner that will leave no doubt of its character and value in 
life. It is a proved fact that when such power has free scope 
to unfold itself, it will make the most remarkable progress in 
its development, and will become then a natural gift, and not an 
acquired one. 



LESSON SIX 

THE VENEER 

THERE IS PRESENT in every man and woman enough 
latent magnetism to give to each person absolute control 
over all the affairs of life, and to lift such person up to 
the highest pinnacle of success, jf only it were drawn into 
action and employed in the right way. As long as brain and 
body are composed of atoms such as we have described, each 
controlled by a central force as full of energy for its size as is 
our own fiery sun, so long will every human being hold in latent 
form at least the potential presence of magnetism. Nor is it 
a difficult task to develop this power into an active agency, 
and to use it for the greatest achievements in life. 
Every person belongs to one of three classes : 

1. The attractive. 

2. The neutral. 

3. The repellent. 

The attractive class possesses qualities that please and win 
friends, followers and associates, by voice, manner of approach 
and methods of dealing with them. We do not refer to assumed 
or transient attractions. A doctor may dress in the height of 
fashion, be immaculately groomed, employ the most gracious 
manners, be pleasant and even charming, and yet possess only 
those attractions that are assumed. On the other hand another 
doctor may be plain in speech and dress, and yet exceedingly 
magnetic in voice and methods, winning confidence and reaping 
success, not so much in money as in curing his patients. The 
attractions of the first doctor in time pall on one ; while those 
of the other grow with acquaintance. 

A business man may be urbane, unusually polite, full of 
smiles and kind greetings, and yet fail to impress those who 
understand such methods. Another business man may be 

44 



THE VENEER 45 

attentive to the needs of his customers, may know what they 
desire, may find it readily, may discuss with them the questions 
that pertain to matters in hand, and yet lack the polish of the 
urbane and gracious gentleman we first mentioned. One may 
fail to sell his goods as readily as the other, for assumed attrac- 
tiveness is only a veneer ; and magnetism is abiding. 

Therefore by the term attractive in this lesson we mean 
magnetic. 

At the other extreme we find the repellent class. Of every 
ten thousand persons in this world among civilised nations, 
only about ten persons are magnetically attractive ; while fully 
four thousand are repellent ; and nearly six thousand neutral. 

Look at a group of ladies in a drawing-room. One always 
leads all the others in graciousness of manner and winning 
ways. A few are vivacious, and that is all. Some fail utterly 
to attract ; or if they succeed in so doing they do not hold what 
they gain. Some seem to be walled in by a repelling voice, 
unattractive personality and forbidding indifference. Many are 
neutral, or lacking in both qualities. This is in the drawing- 
room where the more pleasing influences should manifest them- 
selves. Out in the great world we find countless thousands of 
people repelling their fellow-beings, some from causes they do 
not seek, others from causes of which they are ignorant, and 
still others by reason of a most lamentable lack of attractive 
magnetism. 

The neutral classes are by far the most numerous. We refer 
only to magnetic neutrality. Many of them are rich, but wealth 
is not the chief insignia of success. Many of them are neither 
rich nor poor, but may be regarded as well-to-do. Many of 
them are well secured in their places in the social scale, and 
others belong to the middle classes, socially speaking. It would 
be humourous were it not pitiable to see many of them trying to 
substitute some forms of attraction for those that may be lack- 
ing. One of the chief defects in these substitutes is that they 
are employed only in the presence of others. When there are no 
observers present, the substitutes are laid aside as one would 
lay by a cloak ; hence they are not natural nor easily assumed. 
Sunday manners, like Sunday clothes, if worn only occasionally, 
do not make the lady or the gentleman. 

The methods just referred to are employed for the purpose of 



46 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

pleasing or impressing others. In and of themselves they are 
never magnetic, and therefore do not reach the end that is 
sought. What we are teaching in this course of training is the 
development of the genuine power of attraction, that is absorbed 
as first nature in the individual, that rises with him in the 
morning, enters into the daily duties, and still dwells within at 
night, engrafted into his very being. It is a new force, a new 
form of life, a new birth. 

The substitutes for magnetism are many and varied. Those 
who adopt them do not know for what they are substitutes, but 
do know that something in some way is lacking in their associa- 
tions with their fellow-beings. They are told that honey will 
attract more bees than vinegar, so they indulge in an assumption 
of smiles, kind expressions, and pleasing ways, in the hope that 
these will win the goal they are seeking. There are salesmen 
who are never very successful, although they flatter and praise 
their prospective customers, and pour out a flood of kindly 
talk ; while other salesmen possess a subtle, intangible some- 
thing that convinces and wins easily. We have known com- 
mercial travellers who, on making a call, as they term it, are 
primed with a line of talk that must of necessity bring orders, 
as they believe, and yet who find themselves held in check by 
the unbroken refusal of the person they address. They had not 
learned that talk, while necessary , and ideas, while indispensable, 
do not arouse an interest in offerings that are not urgently 
demanded, unless the talk and ideas are mentally magnetic ; 
for thought may be charged with this power, as"well as voice, 
manner and presence. 

We have known of young ladies who have put forth every 
possible effort to win the affection of men whom they have 
wished to marry ; and yet who have failed because their 
assumed attractions did not wear well. The more they were 
seenjmd heard, the less grew the charm. Short courtships 
have been urged in doubtful cases a under the instinctive fear 
that time juid knowledge will erase the veneer of practised 
smiles and stilted kindliness. The father whose wisdom was 
of tEeT order of Solomon's, who did not wish his daughter to 
marry a certain young man, conceived the idea of asking the 
latter to come and live in the father's family where the suitor 
could see the daughter daily under the same general circum- 



THE VENEER 47 

stances that prevail in married life. The scheme worked. In 
lessj/haa j^month the g^l^wa^askingjiers^lf .what there was ux 
this fellow that ever made her want tpjpaftjay^imnj and the 
young i^nrasEeS^imself a similar question regarding the girl. 
TEey^ parted with a feeling of relief that they had not made the 
greater mistake of marrying each other. 

We shall show that certain supposed attractions bring count- 
less thousands of men and women into wedlock, only to find all 
too soon that these attractions are a veneer, which, as soon as it 
wears off, leaves exposed the bare facts of mis-mating, estrange- 
ment and divorce. 

On the other hand where two persons are drawn to each other 
by the power of magnetism, they never separate, and there has 
never been a divorce in any such case. This brings us to the two 
great facts of life : 

1. Personal magnetism is inherent 4 natural, one hundred 
percent real, and one hundred per cent permanent. Once it is 
ei^r^tedjn the life of a person, it remains until death comes, 
and survives- beyond. 

2- The_ substitutes of personal magnetism are transient, 
unnatural, evanescent and disappointing. 

As these substitutes always stand in the way of the acquisition 
of the genuine power, we shall devote a few pages to the 
discussion of them. What we seek to teach is the value of the 
real as against the worthlessness of the veneer. 

If you are lacking in magnetism, you will in some form or 
other become the victim of a veneer. The politician, running 
for office, shakes hands with you and inquires about your family. 
That is veneer. The sour girl becomes sweet when she seeks 
to draw you into her net ; and she assumes what is called a 
" Sunday Voice " in addressing you ; and Sunday manners 
with Sunday clothes. Certain salesmen are over-kind, over- 
pleasant, over-cordial in addressing you. Most lovers employ 
a veneer in manner, dress and attention. But there^ neyer 

the test of a"magniic_pawer 



driven against. iL__ 



LESSON SEVEN 

OUTLINES OF MAGNETISM 

EVERY IMPORTANT STUDY is built in the form of 
a structure. Its foundations rest in the bosom of 
Nature. Its superstructure may rise, part on part, to 
the topmost section on which rest the spires that point 
to a power above. Bedded in Nature it seeks the sky. Thus 
all things proceed. The tree borrows its material fund from 
the lap of Nature, and responds to the vital forces of the 
heavens which draw its substance from the ground by the 
magnetism of the sun. A force holds all things to the earth ; 
and another force gives them the outstretching arms that seek 
the Giver of Life. 

Magnetism as a study has its basic foundations in Nature. 

ButTE rises to tlie sources of Nature. 

Jtj,_wholly a subtle and intangible force, yet it is the most 
powerful force in all the universe. 

Beyond this world we find the solar system of which our 
globe is a part. Beyond our solar system, we discern many 
other similar systems that unite to form our universe. Beyond 
our universe, there are countless other universes ; yet they 
are all bound together by the subtle and intangible force known 
as magnetism. If this force were absent, all creation would fly 
apart and be lost in chaos. 

The constellations that form our universe are held together 
by this same force. If it were absent, all the constellations 
would drift away, or in fact would have been wanderers in 
space and lost by this time to our gaze. 

Our own solar system consists of the central sun, the planets, 
and planetary orbs that are invisible to the eye ; all held by 
magnetism to the sun ; all revolving around it ; all repelling the 
efforts of the sun to draw them into its mass ; and yet all held in 

leash by the very sun they repel. Were this magnetism lacking, 

4 8 



OUTLINES OF MAGNETISM 49 

the whole mass would take one of two courses. If the inherent 
magnetism of the orbs that repel the inviting power of the 
sun were absent, they would be absorbed in that great fire. If 
the inherent magnetism of the sun that holds them in leash 
were lacking, all the planets and orbs would wander off in 
space, aimlessly and endlessly, with no future except that of 
frozen ice balls, useless in the plan of creation. 

These are the giant energies of magnetism. Yet this force is 
subtle and intangible. 

What we call gravity, for lack of a better name, is the same 
magnetism. It keeps all things within the embrace of the earth. 
Without it no living being could remain on the ground. The 
first step that was raised in walking would lift man from 
the globe and he would continue to rise until he had met the 
fate of the orbs that had wandered off into the abysses of space. 
Every object, animate or inanimate, that moved at all would 
move off the earth never to return. If you were to rise from 
a chair you would keep on rising until you reached the ceiling, 
if indoors, or until you passed out of view in the sky, if out of 
doors. 

All growth in the kingdom of plants, flowers and trees is due 
to the magnetism of the sun in drawing the material from the 
earth. If this were lacking, nothing would have life. The 
needed elements that build the plant or tree are actually lifted 
out of the soil ; while the needed vitality from the sun is actually 
drawn from that orb, woven into growing things, and eventually 
stored away in the earth itself. 

We have spoken of the universe as composed of solar systems, 
each with a central governing orb. It was not known until 
very recently that this form of structure is reproduced in minia- 
ture in all substance that is called matter. In chemistry there 
are more than ninety elements ; each element being supposed to 
consist of a fixed arrangement of molecules, or small particles 
that never vary their plan of structure unless disturbed by 
some such influence as radioactivity. One such arrangement 
results in the element known as iron, another in hydrogen, 
another in oxygen, another in gold, and so on through all the 
chemical elements. These molecules are held together in each 
fixed arrangement by the magnetism called cohesion. If this 
were lacking, there could be no elements, no iron, no gold, no 



50 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

oxygen, no metals or gases, and no combinations of elements 
such as sustain life and give shape to all things. Everything 
would be resolved to dust, or a condition much finer than dust. 
There would be no animal life, no plant life, no buildings, no 
tools with which to work, nothing whatever tangible. 

Thus we see the wonderful provision of the Creator in giving 
to all the earth this form of magnetism. 

Yet what we call shapes of things are held together not only 
by this kind of magnetism, but by laws within themselves 
similar to the laws that govern the universes of the sky. Each 
molecule which is the basis of an element is itself composed of 
atoms. While these are invisible, their activities and nature are 
well known and easily studied. Each atom, once supposed to 
be the beginning of all things and regarded as holding the secret 
of creation, is now known to be composed of electrons ; and here 
we really have the first cause of creation. 

Each atom is a universe, or rather a solar system in itself ; 
it has a central orb or sun, which is an^electron ; around which 
all the other electrons revolve. There is present in the atom 
the same law of magnetism that holds together the stars and 
planets. 

Our sun is a ball of fire inconceivably hot, shooting forth 
tongues of flame that extend a hundred thousand miles beyond 
its surface. The central orb in an atom is relatively active, and 
possesses the same relative amount of fire, energy and mag- 
netism ; yet a thousand billions of these atoms thus constructed 
in the form of solar systems could not, if massed together, 
present enough substance to be seen by the naked eye. 

It is of such atoms that the human body, the human brain, 
the entire nervous system, all the organs, and all the flesh and 
bones, are composed. The energy that is locked up in a single 
atom holds enough potential power to destroy the body itself if 
set free. Every drop of blood is charged with latent and active 
magnetism. There is no particle of life in a human being that 
is not a slumbering dynamo. 

While electricity and magnetism are not the same, both come 
from the same source, make use of the same laws, and proceed 
in the same manner to manifest themselves. The air about us 
is charged to excess with unlimited funds of electricity and 
magnetism. If you set up a giant generator in a small room 



OUTLINES OF MAGNETISM 51 

having walls ten feet thick ; a floor of masonry ten feet deep ; 
and a ceiling overhead made of concrete or stone material ten 
feet high ; and if you lock up that room with a door ten feet 
thick, and set the generator working to draw out of the air 
all the electricity available ; you will never find an end to the 
flow of current that will supply that engine or dynamo. It will 
be able to find this power a million years from now. You 
cannot shut out the supply, exhaust it, or even reduce it. 
Where does it come from ? How does it get through those walls ? 
We have spoken of drawing electricity from the air, as if it 
were located in the atmosphere. But when a dynamo is placed 
in a vacuum and set in motion, the flow of electricity is still 
maintained. This shows that the air is not the agency of supply. 
There are three oceans by which influences are transmitted : 

1. The atmosphere through which the magnetism of the 
voice is carried in waves from one person to another. 

2. The light-ether which fills all space between the orbs of the 
sky, and through which light waves pass, as well as electric 



_^^ _ . . . __ _ 

3. The thought -ethj^ throu^^^ of thought pass 

from mind to mind, and which connects life on this earth with 



, 
J 

nems 



Human magnemsm employs all three of these means of 
communication in the passing of its influence from person to 
person. But while the waves of sound in the air carry the tones 
of the voice, and are in that way the agency of the magnetic 
voice, the actual magnetism is conveyed either by the light- 
ether or by the thought-ether. 

The sound of the human voice travels on air waves at the 
rate of 1087 feet per second. Light travels at the rate of 
186,300 miles per second. Electricity moves at the rate of 
230,000 miles per second. Thought jsjible to 



ui spac^ in less J^han^a. 

secon5";~alad yet it moves in^jwaves, uniting not only human 
beings on this i planet, j^aU-Jbfiin^^ 



DEPARTMENT OF 
MENTAL MAGNITUDE 

LESSON EIGHT 

THE STOMACH SUBSTITUTE 

HUMANITY IS GIVEN FOUR APPETITES ; and in 
this regard differs from all the rest of the animal king- 
dom in that they possess only one appetite, which 
is that of the stomach. An appetite is an inborn 
craving, not a mere function. It is so strongly implanted in 
life tKat it sways all other considerations in conduct and 
manner of living. More than one-half of the jpopulation of t^e 
globe are craftyj_l>y which is meantlbEat JJiey k~now how to take 
^gf the human 



^ 

This craftiness, when it preys upon human appetites and 
thereby lures men and women into the webbed traps that are 
thus set for them, takes the place of that noble power known as 
personal magnetism, and, in combat between the two forces, 
often wins. We must clear the deck of these enemies before we 
proceed further, for they are only " substitutes " of genuine 
magnetism. 

The Four Appetites are : 

1. The Stomach Appetite. 

2. The Sexual Appetite. 

3. The Greed Appetite. 

4. The Spiritual Appetite. 

Humanity possesses all four in the form of controlling 
influences, while animals possess in fulness onlv the first : in 



THE STOMACH SUBSTITUTE 53 

tage over their fellow-beings, and who, knowing the urgency 
of the impelling force of these appetites, make use of that 
knowledge for their own conquests, some of one kind and some 
of other kinds. 

jj-gSJUffJLJlJ^ ^he greatest enemy of pet- 

sonat magnetism., 

J5gL]^ of life. 

We knew a preacher of great magnetism who was almost 
always able to achieve whatever success he sought, who had 
before him a man he was persuading to adopt a new life ; but he 
found to his surprise that he was losing in the attempt to 
convince the man, and sought the reason why. A deacon 
whispered in his ear, " This man is hungry. His stomach has 
been empty for two days." When that organ was given its 
necessary supply, the man was open to persuasion ; but the 
incident shows that the stomach appetite is the strongest of all 
four in human existence. 

Napoleon fed his soldiers liberally before their battles, and 
gained by so doing. More than this, he conceived an idea that 
proves the power of mental magnetism, when he gave orders 
that all prisoners taken from his enemy nations should be well 
fed at all times, the result being that they preferred to remain 
in France rather than go back to the mean rations of their 
own countries. It is related with authority that those who did 
return under the plan of exchange, and who afterwards fought 
against Napoleon, surrendered willingly in order to again 
become prisoners and again be well fed. 

Most animals kill for food only, rarely for any other cause 
unless to protect their young. But they must find enough to 
eat, and this is the plan of Nature in order to preserve the 
species. As the pangs of hunger increase, their power of attack 
becomes more ferocious. 

The human race has always been swayed more by the call of 
the stomach than by any other influence. Crafty people know 
this fact, and take advantage of it ; no matter how much they 
may be lacking in magnetism, or even to what extent they may 
be repellent in this way, they yet are shrewd enough to recognize 
the fact that men's minds may be reached through their 
stomachs. Here is a substitute for magnetism that has been 
employed countless times in order to gain some end. 



54 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 



Everyman and woman should learn this lessra^ Magnetism 
ive, aggressive agency ^jind should never be kept on 
Speaking of mental magnetism as the power of 



ideas in controlling men and women, or bringing them into 
accord with the views and purposes of a stronger personality, 
we find evidences of this influence constantly coming to our 
notice, and they seem to be unlimited. One such magnetic idea 
we have mentioned in referring to Napoleon. Here is another 
that is worthy of adoption ^The man or woman who, in the 
stn^l^fOT^supremacy with others, is kept on the defensive is 
always at a disadvantage. "Yet the individual who is made use 
pf~ihrougEf~any oiie^ oFthe four appetites is decidedly on the 
defensive. Magnetism must be made aggressive. Therefore it 
is important that you recognise the nature of the four appetites, 
and keep your mind alert, or on the look-out for them. In this 
connection let us see some of the methods employed to reach 
a person's judgment through the stomach. 

jUIjyqmen know that the best way tojgetjbo & man's heart 
is through his_stomach ; and this is an old adage. The wife who 
feeds her husband to his satisfaction is more likely to win his 
heart and mind in that way than by any other course, if she 
lacks magnetism. The woman who is seeking a husband, if she 
is oh the mty**to succeed with some friend whose decision is 
not yet fully formed, will invite him to dinner and serve him a 
meal that will linger in his memory. 

In society the great allurement is the many-course dinner, 
In all phases of social intercourse, the stomach, and the mouth 
that opens the way to the stomach, receive attention. If you 
make an afternoon call, something goes in the mouth or 
stomach. If you are to be honoured day or evening, there must 
be provided things to go in the mouth or stomach. If a great 
personage arrives in this country, he must be given a greeting in 
some assemblage where he is fed. A hero from the battlefield, 
or from the ocean's dangers, is met by a public demonstration ; 
and, although the hotel at which he is stopping supplies more 
than ample food for him, he must be fed before a great crowd. 
A well-known politician, who recently died, had on his waiting 
list more dinners and banquets than he could find time to 
attend ; but he did go to enough of them to ruin his stomach ; 
and he once said in despair, " If they would only invite me to 



THE STOMACH SUBSTITUTE 55 

do something besides eat, I should be a well man." These 
over-abundant feasts are conceived in a well-meaning scheme of 
giving pleasure to others and thereby winning their approval. 
But they are often used directly to win some control over the 
judgment of others. Men generally are the objects of this 
kind of feeding. Some are swayed into making decisions 
through the influence of nicely prepared meals to which they 
are invited as guests ; but men of magnetism know too well 
what purpose is in the minds of those who seek to win them in 
this way, jmd do not allow a weU.-i'ed^stQmach to control their 
judgment, 

~~ Tn the old days voters were easily won by the contents of the 
beer barrel, or the whisky bottle. The candidate for office did 
not possess magnetism, so he employed a substitute. Millions 
upon millions of votes have been won by magnetic speakers in 
their addresses to audiences ; but more millions have been won 
by the appeal to the stomach. Not only in politics but in every 
walk in life has the craving of the stomach for drink been made 
use of by crafty people, in order to win control over those 
who can be swayed in this way. 

To avoid being placed on the defensive through this method, 
there should be a very clear understanding of the purpose in the 
mind of one who offers drink, no matter how good it may be in 
quality, for the disadvantage is of a double nature : First, it 
places you under some obligation to the one who gives it. Then 
it reduces materially the power of resistance by making your 
mind and judgment less clear than it should be in an important 
transaction. 

Study the four appetites. Note them in others. Then take 
account of stock of them in yourself. Finally analyse^the 
possible_motives of people who seek to take advantage of you 
through them, and cease to remain on thejdefensive. 

Non-magnetic people are controlled T)y others through the 
jiouth and stomach ; and are even more controlled and deprived 
of their own magnetism by the cravings of the mouth, which is 
the gateway to the stomach. Something is entering the mouth 
through the livelong day : the cigar, the pipe, the cigarette, the 
chewing-tobacco, the chewing-gum, sweets, soda water, beer, 
liquor, wine, chocolate, nuts, and three or more meals daily. 



LESSON NINE 

THE SEXUAL SUBSTITUTE 

BY GLANCING BACK to the preceding lesson we learn 
that there are four appetites in humanity, any one of 
which, if played upon, may offset and defeat the power 
of personal magnetism. These appetites work in two 
ways. They place their owner in the control of crafty and 
unscrupulous persons at times ; and they bring in financial 
gains for those who make use of them in the mastery of others. 
The victims suffer losses that could easily have been averted 
by the possession of magnetism. They bring rewards to people 
who know the weakness of human nature. 

The advice that has been given in the preceding lesson is to 
be repeated here. Study the four appetites. Study their power 
over your mind and life. Be on the look-out for those efforts 
that sooner or later will be made to place you under the sub- 
jugation of one or more of them. Throw off the necessity of 
being on the defensive. Take the aggressive ; and this can be 
done only through the aid of magnetism. 

The first of the four appetites is that of the stomach. It 
would seem as if the injury done to the stomach, by excessive 
eating or indulgence in things that hurt that organ, would end 
its cravings at least until it gets back its normal health. But 
Nature punishes in a mysterious way ; for a congested stomach 
craves stimulants, especially those of the alcoholic kind. A 
perfectly normal and healthy stomach will not only not crave 
alcoholic drinks, but will refuse to accept them. In a record of 
tests in which ten stomachs were found that were in absolutely 
perfect condition, with no trace whatever of congestion, the 
admission of whisky that would have been craved by the 
ordinary stomach resulted in the liquor being instantly vomited 
up and discarded by Nature. All kinds of cures have been tried 
to overcome the craving for liquor, and none have been very 

56 



THE SEXUAL SUBSTITUTE 57 

successful until the method was devised whereby all congestion 
was removed, and then it was learned that craving for stimulants 
is the cry of a congested stomach. As doctors declare that a 
vast majority of all persons have congested stomachs, the 
widespread demand for stimulants is founded in some reason ; 
but the desire for stimulants has always disappeared when all 
congestion has been removed. 

Therefore the injury that follows misuse of a natural appetite 
only leads on to a greater misuse. This is true of the other 
appetites. 

Next to that of the stomach, the most powerful appetite is 
that of the sex nature. While hunger leads animals to slay, and 
to make themselves dangerous to other life, it is rare that these 
lower forms of creation are driven to what is called animal- 
crimes by the sex impulse. Humanity alone is made slave to 
this appetite. 

It is with men and women a very potent and very effective 
substitute for magnetism. JBy the use of personal magnetism a 
man can easily win the right kind of a woman for a wife; and 
if our records of forty-five years are to be believed, not one 
couple so united will ever be separated either by divorce or 
unmated temperaments. We know the facts in many thousands 
of lives and they all concur in the same result. 

Not many marriages in every thousand are made by mag- 
netism ; those that are, never fall apart. It is to be regretted 
therefore that the true magnet should not bring the man and 
woman together. The goal is worth the race. 

A Judge recently said in his charge to a jury : " It is a fact 
that morej&tmj^ induced by 

false lure of s^^ai^ap^etite.'' Here is a substitute for 



magnetism that is at work wredking^ lives by ^ ths millions. 
Magnetism unfolds the character and even the soul, and lays 
bare the truth. It brings forth all the natural good and all 
the acquired good in man and woman. It builds character 
on character, goodness on goodness, and worth on worth, and 
these become fixed and inherent qualities in the mind and 
heart. On the^jother hand the sexual appetite, while it draws 
anotEef, is fleeting on being satiated, and the 



glamour that it painted with its hopes and promises soon turns 
to sordid tinseL 



58 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Being easily preyed upon, it is taken advantage of by crafty 
people for their own ends ; like magnetism it wins what it seeks, 
but its success is a rope of sand, and its victory hollow. 

The horrible side of this influence is that which displays the 
devil-nature of humanity in its willingness to coin money by 
commercialising this appetite. Houses of ill -fame are means of 
making money. White slavery is employed as a means of 
making money. Paramours and mistresses have lured men of 
wealth into their dens, because men were not able to resist the 
call of this appetite. 

Wives who possess magnetism need never fear that their 
husbands will seek the society of other women. This fact has 
been abundantly proved and can be easily verified. We know 
of thousands of women who, after marriage, have acquired 
magnetism, and who by its quiet and undemonstrative in- 
fluence hold a firm grip over the loyal affections of their 
husbands, who yield this loyalty willingly and sincerely. 

Thus we find that strong as the sexual appetite is, magnetism 
Jar more dominant, and always master over 



these substitutes. 

A wanton woman of average beauty is able, by her appeal 
to the sexual appetite of a man who lacks magnetism, to do 
almost anything with him if she proceeds skilfully. Great 
personages have fallen into the clutches of such women, as the 
court records show. History is full of such examples. In 
America recently a young woman of more than average beauty 
poisoned her husband for his wealth after inducing him to make 
a will in her favour, was tried by a jury of men, and promptly 
acquitted. She repeated this crime with a second husband in 
another part of the country, and was acquitted. When she 
tried it in a different locality a third time, although she actually 
killed her husband, discovery was made in time to secure over- 
whelming evidence of her guilt ; and after conviction she con- 
fessed to the other two murders. It is a fact that a very 
beautiful murderess may so addle the minds of the average 
jurors that they are not able to convict her. 

If this is true, what is to be said of the men at large who are 
constantly being hunted by beautiful girls and women of whom 
the world is full ? 

If jurors are helpless with the law, the evidence, and counsel 



THE SEXUAL SUBSTITUTE 59 

uniting to guide them aright, what chance of scape have the 
mere. men who are aUowedj^^aiiLjai,wQ] [ jimid the sgenea. of 
human activities J . 

Some people who are sworn to do justice to all very soon 
wander from the ethical path of duty if beauty draws them to 
itself. 

AlHhis is sex appetite. _ 

/ Utis an undue and unholy interesfln the opposite sexJ 
T^ 



goes to lliie^ woman] Not airwomen who 
seek husbands do so because of their desire to be supported. 
Many are impelled by Jbhgir jami^m^jappatite. When this is 
normal, arid there is genuine magnetism to accompany it, the 
combination iajdeaL 

"*T?ut fewer jnen are gjjingjbg^day to ^ undeilake thejiazardoua 
gjid^ experiilY^experlence of wedjock 1 1 They are slow to marry. 
They do marry in about the same number as always, but they 
hesitate before taking the step. To offset this indifference, 
women have established several forms of sex appeal ; the most 
effective of which is the exposure of the shapes of their legs, 
their backs and bosoms. With her attire receding at the upper 
and at the lower parts, and the body that in former times was 
regarded as sacred, displayed in what is really a vulgar 
exhibition, all the power of this appeal is thrust into the gaze 
of hesitating man. 

Girls and women with decayed tonsils, ulcerised teeth and 
blood that is infested with intestinal poisoning, instead of 
delicately touching the face as of former times, now plaster on 
the paint until Nature resigns and the beauty parlours parade 
the scene. The man who marries one of these combinations, 
when he awakes in the morning and beholds the facts, becomes 
half delirious in the belief that he is passing through some 
horrible nightmare. 

Many keepers of dance halls, and of cabarets where indis- 
criminate dancing prevails, are making money by taking advan- 
tage of the sexual appetite of humanity. The majority of 
commercialised dancing is a form of assignation. Many public 
dance halls are agencies of prostitution. True men and true 
women will make use of this pastime as a social function, keep 
it within their own set, and place the ban on lascivious contact 
such as universally prevails under all other conditions. Boys 



6o INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

and girls in their teens, as well as men and women of all ages 
under fifty, drift to the questionable places, drawn by this same 
appetite. 

In this account we do not intend to criticise dancing as a 
social function, conducted as such, nor any friendly use of this 
pastime among acquaintances whom one would be willing to 
invite into the home as guests. 

The strongest magnetic force, taken collectively, is that 
of pure home life. Where this exists the world is safe. Where 
it is lacking, there the nests of criminals are to be found. The 
lure of the public dance hall is rapidly breaking up this influence. 
Reports gathered by police departments and by courts show 
that a large percentage of the girls who attend such dances 
become mothers, with no prospect or desire to marry the boys 
with whom they have associated. In one city, in a space of a 
year, more than 1400 such girls, many of them not half through 
their teens, were ruined ; and all of them ascribed their fall 
to the public dance halls and cabarets. 

This is all in the name of the sexual appetite. The girls 
were excited by lascivious embraces ; the boys and men were 
hungry for them ; and the proprietors were feeding their purses 
by bringing these two temptations into play under the name of 
entertainment and amusement. Many dance halls are equipped 
with very small upper-floor rooms. In one hall that was recently 
raided, the police found twelve rooms which twelve couples 
under the age of twenty years were occupying, having by their 
confession awaited their turn with many others ; and this 
hall claimed to be conducting a dance to provide entertainment 
for its guests. 

We have made the assertion that no married person who 
possesses magnetism is ever divorced or estranged ; for the 
reason that this power is permanent and genuine. It does not 
make any difference whether one or both are magnetic. If 
either has this quality, it is imparted to the other, for it carries 
its own ^ influence to all ^persons with whom it comes into contghgt% 

or woman consider'marrymft 



-. 

unless i tms power has beerTftcq^^ 

If it is true, as a prominent Jucige said in open court, that 
ninety per cent of all marriages are brought about by the sex 
appetite, then this will account for the innumerable disasters 



THE SEXUAL SUBSTITUTE 6l 

that follow wedlock. Divorces are common. Separations are 
more common. Dissatisfied couples are still more common. 
The claim madejby each jae^j3guEle prio r to TYiRrri^,g^jthat in 
their case there is J^bej^^cep^^ 
cease tcTlbve each other ^ _ 

By^evelry divorced couple before they entered wedlock^ 
tTiarTtEis they TJeBeved it, and think they are to be exceptions 
of the 



It is claimed that love is blind. 

Thejspell of the sexual appetite is so great as to be almost 
blinSing. Under thia^ipeH ^Ta^ire makes jngn^nifl TOTTIftT 1 
reckless. B^h^exea-feeLit. Many couples afterwards explajii 
ffieir misEaEen judgment Tiy saying that p)he commonplace yof 
marriage^the disregard of careful manner^ and careful dress^the 
gross familiarity, the assumption of ownership and personal 
claims, as well as the quickness of temper and criticism, bring 
them out of the dream state, and reveal the realities in their 
ugly hueg. But if marriage had been induced by the attraction 
of magnetism, as we shall show conclusively in this study, the 
very things that seem repelling would be regarded as quite the 
opposite. 

That th^sexual appetite is^o^jngjbi^a^eneer is jaroyed by 
the fact that couples who love each other devotedly at one 
time7^3eveIopTater on a T^and ofTSatred that ^surpasses ^aUJ&e 
firebrands o'f mafcejbhat were ever Jtmrjed at human hearts. 
The surf sets on the newly-weds with a smile and a^ glow of 
raSIahce that promises a happjjfuture^ The sun rises on .^the 
same newIy^e^s^^3~scofcEes^ their Jove jnto^ a Jburnt cinder. 
A single mght may jnake^ aUjbhe difference there is in fife. A 
montE"ciay"remove all the veneer. 



LESSON TEN 

THE GREED SUBSTITUTE 

NUMERICALLY CONSIDERED this inborn trait of 
human nature is fully as much in evidence as any 
of the other appetites. In fact a great analyst 
of life has made the assertion that all four appetites, 
stomach, sexual, greed and spiritual, are divided with an 
almost equal representation in each, and are all fully taken 
advantage of as substitutes for magnetism. The latter quality 
is the power to win ; and this power is invoked by an appeal to 
the stomach in foods and drink, with marked success, but is not 
so readily commercialised for profit as are the remaining three 
appetites. Yet it is as universal as hunger, and necessarily so, 
for life depends on feeding. 

It is doubtful if great financiers or business men can be 
swayed beyond their judgment in any appeal to the stomach, 
unless they fall before the temptation of drink. But the great 
American statesman, Daniel Webster, was easily overcome by 
drink. Enormous fees in his law practice, in one case reaching 
twenty thousand pounds, slipped through his fingers into the 
hands of friends who plied him with whisky ; and just before 
he took to his bed in his last sickness, he was described by the 
historian as the mos^magnificent wreck humanity ever pro- 
duced. During his last years hi$ whole career was compromised 
tEroiigt the same influence,/ The term vampire that is now 
applied to women who seek out men of wealth in order to gain by 
an appeal to the sexual appetite what they could not win by 
legitimate attractions, recognizes a firmly established profession, 
and a numerous division of humanity. They could not thrive 
unless their victims lost the power of resistance. 
Greed is the third appetite. 

It is not found in any life below man. No animal is greedy, 
despite the fact that some will store away their supplies for the 

6) 



THE GREED SUBSTITUTE 63 

winter, and others will over-eat at times. But greed, in the sense 
that it sways them beyond their powers of judgment in 
securing the existence that has been allotted them, is wholly 
absent. 

This is not true of humanity. Some psychologists claim that 
greed is a mental disease ; some a nervous disease ; some that it 
is born of the fear that old age will bring poverty when the 
earning capacity is gone. It is the duty of this study to guide 
all its students into conditions of safety in all matters. 

Magnetism provides in absolute certainty safety against 
poverty or the loss of the means whereby to live. It is an old 
adage, but a good one, which says that every year should 
find every one in Jbetterjneans. This is one form of mental 
magnetism, of which there are many waiting to help men and 
women in the struggle of existence. We will repeat this more 
prominently : 

Magnetism teaches and shows the way by which every year 
will find every one in better means ; which, being explained, 
sets up the law that all persons who acquire magnetism become 
better off financially every year of life. Before this work is 
ended this fact will be proved over and over again. Then all 
fear will cease, such as makes people tools of scheming and 
crafty men, who, like harpies, seek to rob them of their savings. 

Every one of the four appetites is a substitute for magnetism. 

Every one of thj^ acjcqn^ 

magnetism might accomplish, with the j^fferaace^that Jbhe 
former bring Hisaster,~losj3 and suffering, while the latter bring 
permanent success. The things that are sought by an appeal to 
thelove^Tlbod and drink may be better attained by magnetism. 
The legitimate ends of sex appeal, such as honourable marriage, 
or appreciation of the attractions of the opposite sex, or the 
many other goals to which this appetite drives people, may be 
attained by magnetism. 

That men and women are greedy is too widely known to be 
discussed ; but the knowledge is capitalised to an alarming 
extent at all times and under all circumstances. The victims of 
this crafty profession, if fully alert after one experience, learn 
to suspect everybody and every motive ; and seldom fall again 
into the clutches of the birds of prey. Ordinarily, however, 
when a man is once cheated, he gets into another kind of trap 



64 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

that is differently baited. It is the taut that lures him. His 
suspicions are directed only against the former kind of bait. 
The following example is a key to some of the methods employed 
to appeal to the greed of humanity. 

A man had been led to invest largely in a certain company, 
and was told of the earnings of other similar companies that had 
in fact made their owners very rich. Having the proof of the 
latter claim, he believed that this new company would be 
successful ; so he invested, and eventually found that his shares 
were worthless. /The first bait was the lure of gain or his greed 
for large profits. He was told that if nothing was ventured 
nothing would ever be jj&uie4 v This mental^ proposition is not 
generally trufi^^j^toatal magnetism tells usjii^^^ 
entured nothing^w^TBelogtl] It would have been true in his 



case at Tea^f Tor he parted with more than half his fortune in a 
venture that was not warranted by his financial condition. If 
he had kept his money in safe investments at a low 



interest, he would have had enough for himself and his family 
to live on during life, with a small but sure annual excess to be 
laid by under the law of mental magnetism stated on a preceding 
page which says that with the aid of magnetism every person 
may be bettgrjpff financially every vgar of life^ 

Figure out these laws of mental magnetism. 

Here is a man with sufficient capital to support himself and 
his family comfortably during life, with a yearly surplus to lay 
by for the satisfaction of doing it, and without a trace of greed. 
In his desire to win greater wealth he ventures on a new scheme, 
and finds himself deprived of half his income and unable to 
live comfortably. He believed that if nothing was risked, 
nothing would be won ; but mental magnetism says that if 
nothing is risked nothing will be lost. The situation we have 
described has been experienced millions of times ; and men have 
gone down to the grave with broken hearts because of their 
greed. Coal mines, gold mines, copper mines, silver mines, oil 
wells and countless other allurements have brought this disaster 
to investors who have sought to follow in the footsteps of 
successful men. 

Here is another law of mental magnetism. We have said 
that such laws are numerous, and that a few of them will meet 
us in this work, but they in fact are almost unlimited, and have 



THE GREED SUBSTITUTE 65 

required the publication of a very large work (Mental 
Magnetism) to teach and explain them, which work the 
author has dedicated to the students of the present work. 
We must include at this place one of the most potential of 
such laws as far as guidance to investments is concerned. 
It is this : Any stocks or shares in any get-rich-quick concern 
that people are solicited to buy, if one-tenth as valuable as 
claimed, will be quickly absorbed by men of wealth. They 
never go begging. There is too much money now invested 
at three per cent interest and less to remain there if anything 
of real worth is to be had in place of such holdings. 

Let us look at the manner in which a man who has been once 
victimised, falls a second time into a trap when the bait has 
been changed. 

The man who bought the shares in the worthless company, 
locked them up in his safe where they lay for a few years 
when a very impressive gentleman called upon him and asked 
if he was the owner of shares in that company. He was, and he 
emphasised the fact with the usual language. The visitor, 
unruffled, calm as a pond in a dead wind, smooth and con- 
vincing, merely remarked that the company was about to 
begin operations as a great vein had been discovered much 
larger than the first, and a syndicate of well-known capitalists 
proposed to buy enough of the outstanding shares to control 
the reorganisation. But if they could not get a majority of the 
stock, they would drop the matter. He was soliciting options 
at a price that was about double what this victim had first 
paid for his shares. Would he make an option at those figures ? 
Yes. No delivery was to be made, nor any certificates passed ; 
merely an agreement to sell at a very attractive figure. 

That evening this man was in a jolly mood. Life had turned 
roseate again. In the course of time a letter that was typed on 
an engraved letter head, with many names of officials having 
offices in a suite of rooms in a great building in a great city, was 
delivered to him saying that the deal might not be consummated, 
as it was impossible to get enough stock to control a reorganisa- 
tion ; for holders, hearing the good news, were seeking even 
higher prices. Also a rival syndicate was bidding more money 
for the shares. A few days later another man of impressive 
talking powers called, and stated that he represented the 

5 



66 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

rival syndicate, and offered fifty per cent more for the shares. 
The prospective victim said that he had given an option to the 
first syndicate ; but the stranger informed him that the option 
had a time-limit which had expired. While this conversation 
was going on, there came a wire from the first visitor, asking 
that the option be extended for a month under a promise of 
still better prices. Wishing to be safe the man decided to 
extend the option. The second visitor went away muttering 
his disappointment. 

The mind of the victim was asleep. 

In a few days the first visitor returned and said that his 
syndicate needed only a small block of shares to have control ; 
that a certain man held just enough of this stock to meet the 
requirements ; but could not be given any information from the 
syndicate ; his shares must be bought by some stranger, and 
were for sale at the price paid plus interest, which was fair 
all round. This small block, added to the block already held 
by the victim, would complete the deal ; and a contract was 
brought out signed by the officials of the syndicate agreeing to 
pay for both blocks of the stock, if the victim would agree to 
buy the second block. Seeing the opportunity to recoup his 
former losses and to add materially to his capital, the man did 
enter into this agreement, and did in fact buy the second block 
of shares, which nearly depleted his remaining capital. But 
after the purchase, he found himself in possession of two blocks 
of worthless shares, and nq^er heard again from either syndicate ; 
nor could he find the office building in which the first one 
claimed to have a suite of rooms. The bait had been changed, 
pid he fell twice into well-laid traps. 

Had this man been a student of personal magnetism, he 
would not have fallen into either trap ; nor would he have been 
compelled to face old age broken, disheartened and dependent 
on the charity of others. 

This experience is being repeated times without limit ; and 
even as we write we are sure that there are millions of men and 
women who are enduring the pangs of regret and suffering as 
the result of the greed of others who have made use of their 

greed m order to rob thejoa_gf_the savings of a lifetime. 

P Personal magnetism brings 'complete Independenoe^of all 
[attempts t<ij>aj^ad\^i^^ or will-power. 



THE GREED SUBSTITUTE 67 

We do not believe that any person who has read this lesson 
will allow the mind to be clpuded. or the will-power deadened 
TTy the substitute for magnetiMnJknown as greed. It has been 
our work to teach the methods whereby unnecessary losses are 
avoided. 



LESSON ELEVEN 

THE SPIRITUAL SUBSTITUTE 

HERE WE COME TO THE FOURTH and final nature 
of humanity in earthly existence. If a group of 
thinking persons were to be asked what of this group 
is the strongest appetite, the first reply might place the 
stomach demand ahead of the others. Then as the matter 
was given more serious attention, the sex impulse would come 
to the front. Still again there would be many reasons why 
greed is to be regarded as the most common and most 
insistent. The fact is that all four are equally distributed in 
the activities of life. 

The stomach appetite is seemingly paramount because the 
body must live, and to live it must be fed. Yet every body that 
lives must die ; and as long as death is at one end of life, with 
birth at the other, so long will the spiritual appetite demand 
feeding. For this reason, ever since man first came &iMjjjjji 

fo nc ^ bftBi^ AAr> n 23^r^!S!JjQ" ffl* fin tJffi J r 2J^ ftTna ^ death ,ythe chief 
nd has beenreHg^njr In the ages of savagery, 
percent i ol^airnumari^ Beings were religious ; wHal they 
could not discern they invented, but always in the same way 
and for the same purpose. 

No normal person to-day wishes to die. Nor does any normal 
person omit the study of the problems of birth and death. 
Every normal mind thinks of these mysteries, and seeks infor- 
mation at every source where it is possible to attain it. No 
matter what the result or what the convictions, this normal 
condition is spiritual. 

Every appetite may be taken advantage of by crafty persons, 
and thus used as means of gain either in money, property, 
influence or power. In the earliest age of savagery the demands 
of the stomach and of the sexual nature were held in check and 
not used as means of gain or greed by superior minds, as is now 

68 



THE SPIRITUAL SUBSTITUTE 69 

the case. Nor were there sufficient attractions in greed among 
the masses to incite the appeal in that direction. This left 
to the leaders and upper castes the greater field of the spiritual 
appetite. Influence, power, rule, homage and contributions 
were the price paid to a select upper class by the terrified 
middle and lower classes ; nor did the superior minds hesitate 
to teach and preach every kind of jear. based on the mysteries 
of death and the hereafter, if they could retainthdrhpld o^ the 
people in that way. 

~Tn every tribe there was the central control composed of 
priests and teachers and those who shared the spoils wit^thfiia, 
an3 fib thTs centre there flowed an unceasing stream of contribu- 
tions and homage. These leaders kept the^people in a continued 
state of terror. The images that were worshipped were like- 
nesses supposed to be of the devils that hovered over all living 
things ; and these were used to supplement the threats and 
terrors that attended all persons. No matter how much 
wealth a man had in herds or in grain, or even gold, there was 
no hesitancy in parting with it when demanded in the names of 
and the spirit of contributions has been 



SepFalive in all the ages that have come and gone. It is only 
in the most recent times that these contributions made to the 
churches have been devoted to the uses for which they serve 
a rightful purpose. 

In times past practically no man or woman refused to give 
freely in the cause of religion, and now a large majority of the 
people support liberally both the church and the charitable 
organisations ; for charity is a part of the spiritual nature. 
Every appetite properly fed, and properly controlled, is a bless- 
ing. To give to the stomach the foods that make it a perfect 
organ whereby it may give health to all the body, is doing the 
most good in that direction. To employ the sex appetite in the 
manner intended by Nature, is likewise doing good. Greed 
when its name is changed to careful saving of surplus earnings, 
is always a desirable trait. So the support of religion, the 
support of charity, and the study of thejreoblems of life_and 
djtoth.fc folly normal, and most commendable . 

It is The misuse of them, the attempt to take advantage of 
others by crafty minds who know human appetites and their 
value in securing control over those who are swayed by them, 



70 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

that is reprehensible. How many persons who have just buried 
their loved ones, are induced when in a state of emotion, to 
part with their wealth at the solicitation of those who know how 
to prey on this spiritual appetite ? And how many more persons 
who themselves had come to their own death-beds, have been 
induced even while perfectly sane to give their property away 
in the name of religion ? We are not passing judgment on 
the matter either one way or the other ; our only purpose being 
to depict the trait called the spiritual appeal. 

The spiritual appetite, as we have said, embraces charity, 
and it also includes all mystery worship, such as superstition, 
and the search for occult phenomena. In this free and 
enlightened country there are millions of people who believe in 
the existence of the spirit world, and the communication of 
spirits with mortals. In the name of this belief countless 
thousands of crafty minds have exacted a big toll in the way 
of contributions and money. More than two millions believe in 
theosophy, and several other millions in kindred teachings ; 
while the Hindoo influence of transmigration, transmutation, 
metempsychosis and all sorts of happenings after death, 
has saturated certain sections of this country. Probably all 
such cults came out of India, and are related. It is predicted 
that if the prevailing religions crumble, those of ancient India 
will take their places. 

Nearly every man and woman is superstitious ; jtnd nearly 
a^of them denj^ it. SupeFsffEIon was once the mother oFall 
savage religion, and L it is asjiatural a^anylorm ^ ortEe^lpufCual 
appetite. ~~ 

We believe that without a noble religion and without the 
churches, life on earth would not be worth living ; no person 
would be safe ; and property would have no value because it 
would have no protection. In any great city the police depart- 
ment will tell you that religious belief and church influence 
are greater aids in the suppression of crime than all the laws, 
courts and police combined. But we accord to every man and 
woman the full right to believe according to their own con- 
victions. 

Our purpose in this study is to show that a power that is 
inherently good may be used to take advantage of people at 
times when they are brought into spiritual hunger by public 



THE SPIRITUAL SUBSTITUTE 71 

or private calamities, or are swayed by too deep an emotion of 
fear or dread. 

Charity, as we have said, is a part of the spiritual nature ; 
and knowing this there are countless bodies of organised solic- 
itors in the name of charity which so follow up the people 
that escape is not creditable. Most contributors respond in 
fear of being harmed either socially or in their business. Thus 
the same spirit of prey is at work in the best of good causes. 
There are many organised bodies engaged in charity who 
absorb from fifty to eighty -five per cent of the contributions 
in their salaries and other expenses. You do not feel as if your 
money were going in the right direction if more than half of it 
is spent in collecting and handling it. The question may arise 
what kind of charity spirit prevails in the giving of funds to 
such organisations, especially by business men who know full 
well that omission to contribute would be whispered here and 
there and may affect their business. Every business man and 
professional person is known, is listed, and his contributions 
are recorded and even given publicity. He is therefore more 
or less compelled to give in self-defence, and not in the true spirit. 

Referring again to the uses of j^ejitalj^ 
in human conduct we find another law helping us through this 
better influence ; and it is this : The best charity j that, 
which helps men^jmd^^ 

'to"tEeaseives ; not that which merely sustains them in a state 
oflielplessriess. Teach the true spirit of independence ; give 
freely of money and time to this end ; and help people help 
themselves. 

In America, surprising as it may seem, there are eight 
hundred thousand professional and non-professional fortunej 
tellers who employ the so-called visits of spirits from the 
spirit world to tell their clients what the future has in store for 
them. It is estimated that of the population of America, 
numbering possibly close to one hundred and twenty millions, 
if a census were secured, it would be found that some time in the 
past or present, fifty millions of them have visited spirit- 
fortune tellers and paid good money in return for messages 
from the spirits. The majority of these clients do not believe 
what they are told. But many do, and are so completely 
swayed by this belief that they are easily victimised. 



72 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

A familiar cheat is the spirit-fortune teller in America who 
charges for general services, but will not accept fees for advice 
as to how to safely invest money. The events proceed somewhat 
as follows : The client has money to invest or may have good 
Chares paying low interest and wishes to find a higher rate. 
The fortune teller goes into a trance and, after some difficulty, 
figures out the names and addresses of several brokers, some of 
them well known and reliable, but one in particular is the most 
honourable and the most honest of them all. His name and 
address are scrawled on a piece of paper. Certain shares are 
just ready to rise ; if secured without delay a fine profit will 
be obtained. No time must be lost. On coming out of the 
trance the spirit-fortune teller does not know what is written 
but says that if the spirit told it, there could be no doubt about 
it. The client is as sure of the honesty and reliability of the 
advice as that the sun will rise again ; so hastens to the broker 
who is the most honourable of them all, parts with good money, 
or with high-grade shares, and buys worthless stock in exchange. 
This and similar methods of defrauding people who have faith 
in the spirit world, are robbing them by the thousands in the 
United States. It is greed making use of the spiritual appetite, 
and the latter uniting with greed sometimes, but generally 
seeking only honest investments, though lured into bad ones 
by falling prey to the power of the spirit appeal. 

A person who lacks magnetism allows the mind to enter into 
a cTSuHnffT^Mclr^Tffl 

tEougEtsiand belief sTEaFcome Irom^tEeFsliiinds are active. 
Suspicion IQEo^ohly safety-valve left to sucE persons "; ancl 
this trait works bqth_ways^ .lj|y^?/^ tKeltppfoach oFFraud ; 
and it leaves^the mind stalled in the ~deepTwTT5 v 3S" IrT e~very 
trai^actior^ fib^L^rogfessive mules . 

Magnetism .J^uickly^ disperses the^cKu3irania" 'IBS' Is Boo3feS 




LESSON TWELVE 

MENTAL MAGNITUDE 



WARFARE AND VICTORY jM^oidam^ 
as mea^^ 
_jicts of in&tiacts~jas_.^ appetites. TEe 

latter are established so that, when properly HoseS, they 
may carry on existence in a necessary manner to necessary 
ends. But as theyjxre esse^^^ 

chargecn^^ "Eike electricity, if given free scope, the 

excess kills. Because of the dangers locked up in the four 
appetites, we are compelled to carry on a most obstinate 
warfare against them, and., wage it untiljbhggg >_can be no doubt 
utcome - p^ 



^ 
be permanent._[ 

"TJnTiI"This~victory has been achieved, magnetism will be 
kept on the defensive, and we have learned that any person or 
cause that remains always on the defensive, is under adverse 
control. 

We have found that it is better to wage the war at the very 
beginning of this study ; to understand what is threatening 
success ; to meet the issue manfully and squarely, and to win 
the greatest victory of life. 

TJigJJoal of J5?5^^i?^J:l.i ( L^^L- 

If you carfwin nowj*^ you can 

mn^ythiB&j^^ ISMj^isli. Put this to the test. 

There are two classes of enemies working against magnetism : 

1. Those that are inborn or natural. 

2. Those that are acquired. 

When both classes of enemies are overcome the result is 
natural personal magnetism, or that high grade of power that 
is called a gift ; and it is always better to possess natural gifts 

73 



74 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

than those that must come from hard lifelong struggle, taking 
too much time and effort. This distinction is so important that 
it should be kept always in mind. 

The inborn or natural enemies of magnetism are the Four 
Appetites that we have described. In this lesson our work is to 
show the way of giving them one great battle and thus secure 
a victory that will never be wrested from the winner. 

It is an old saying and a true one that he who rules himself 
is greater than he who rules a city. We can extend it to read 
that he is greaJBE than the grandest king who ever lived. In 
ruling yourself, you must win over the two classes of enemies ; 
over the Four Appetites ; and over the foes that you have 
acquired and taken into your camp as associates. Here we 
have the story of nations and organisations told over again in 
tabloid form. Everybody and everything has two enemies, 
those without and those within. Every nation has had this 
twofold danger. Napoleon, the greatest master of mental 
magnetism when in his successful career, made use of another 
law that served him well. Just as soon as a successful campaign 
was ended and he had come home to France to give attention 
to its needs, the usual unrest and intrigue began, and foes within 
were eating at the vitals of the nation. To offset this he invented 
stories of danger from foes abroad. The effect of this law is 
that a threatening outward enemy will cause a disintegrating 
inward condition to mend itself. Home enemies unite to fight 
a common cause such as an outward enemy. The plan succeeded 
even to the end of his reign. 

The process we employ herein begins with the overcoming 
of the outward or natural enemies ; then we proceed to drive 
out of camp the hidden foes that are lurking there to destroy 
our newly acquired power. 

This lesson we have named Mental Magnitude, or the great- 
ness of the mind as an agent of warfare. The battle is waged 
in a series of steps. The first step is to recognize the Four 
Appetites. The second step is to recognize the nature of each. 
The third step is to recognize the danger attending the activity 
and control exerted by each. The fourth step is an honest 
inventory of the influence over your life and habits resulting 
from whatever control they exercise over you. The fifth and 
final step is to create within yourself a Mental Magnitude 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE 75 

sufficient to completely master the Four Appetites. Let us 
unfold this method : 

1. The Four appetites are the stomach, the sexual, the greed, 
and the spiritual. """"" 

2. The nature of each has been fully explained in the lessons 
just preceding this ; and they should be thoroughly reviewed. 

3. The danger attending the activity of each in its control over 
you, is indicated very fully in these lessons. What you should 
do is to make yourself familiar with them. 

4. The fourth step is to be taken now, and with it the final 
step, the creation of Mental Magnitude, or a mind big enough 
to make you ruler of yourself, and therefore greater than he who 
rules a city or a nation. 

There are several vital laws that are at work in establishing 
this power and these we will state in simple form so that they 
may be easily understood : r- 

FIRST VITAL LAW -.Mental Magnitude is a form of 
personal power that is greater than the combined power of the 
Four Appetites. 

SECOND VITAL LAW : Mental Magnitude, by enabling 
a person to escape the attitude of being continually on the 
defensive in life, which means being under adverse control, 
brings immediately to every man and woman who acquires this 
Magnitude the power of personal magnetism as a natural gift. 

THIRD VITAL LAW : Mental Magnitude, working in 
another channel of influence, tends towards the development of 
the power known as the control of mind over matter. It is a 
very great step in that direction^ 

FOURTH VITAL LAW : While the control of mind over 
Matter is now present only as an instinct, and in very crude 
form, it is greatly increased by the building up of Mental 
Magnitude in developing personal magnetism as a natural gift. 

FIFTH VITAL LAW : Mental Magnitude is readily 
acquired and firmly established by the practice of shifting the 
defensive attitude to that of the aggressive, and thus removing 
all adverse control. 

SIXTH VITAL LAW : The mental determination acting 
in any direction, if given sufficient strength, is capable of 
accomplishing the greatest things in life ; on the principle 
that what a man determines with all the power of his mind to 



76 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

do, he will do, and nothing can prevent the consummation 
sought. It is readily seen that we are laying the foundation 
of personal magnetism as a natural gift. 

SEVENTH VITAL LAW : The simplest and at the same 
time the most effective method of practising mental determina- 
tion is had in the system known as the Regime of Mental 
Magnitude. This will appear in the next lesson. 

Books might be written on the subject of the control of Mind 
over Matter in its now crude form, in which it appears chiefly 
as visitations of instinct. But what its purpose is, as it now 
influences humanity, is not known. The familiar example of 
this crude form is seen in the oft- quoted case of the man 
who comes home hungry and sits down to a generous dinner, 
well prepared and highly inviting. He has eaten a part of the 
meal when a telegram is handed him, which he reads. The blood 
leaves his face and he is deathly pale, the gastric juice refuses 
to flow into the stomach and his partly eaten dinner remains 
undigested. His appetite, which was vigorous, is gone. Yet 
all that has happened is the intelligence, conveyed to his mind, 
that he has lost his entire fortune in an unfortunate investment. 

His respiration drops to almost nothing ; his heart is barely 
able to carry on its beating ; and his whole body totters as 
he proceeds from the table to his room above where he falls 
upon the bed. It is not difficult to understand why he suffers 
mental anguish, but why the influence of his mind should 
control the material body Is a mystery. Every function is 
subjected to the mastery of his thought. 

This is only one of many thousands of instances showing 
that the mind can and does control the body ; or in other words 
that there is such a thing as the control of Mind over Matter. 

It is not alone bad news that will affect digestion. Good news 
plays its part both ways. Another oft-quoted example is found 
in the case of a very beautiful young lady whose parents were 
rich enough to give her all the comforts and luxuries of life ; 
and who yet fell into anaemic ill-health and could not be brought 
back to a normal condition. Every possible method and treat- 
ment were tried, but in vain. At length her parents began a 
campaign of discussion and preparation for a magnificent trip 
abroad, including visits to places that held great attractions 
for her. Books, pamphlets and folders were read and studied ; 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE 77 

and she was advised to make an itinerary for the journey. 
Still she did not show any signs of getting better. Then the 
doctor made the following mental experiment ; consisting of 
a long letter which he wrote in apparent confidence to her 
father, in which he said that the young lady was not well enough 
to undertake so great a trip abroad ; some day she was sure to 
get well ; but not now ; and the journey must be postponed to 
a future year. By seeming accident this letter fell into her hands. 
She read it, and replaced it, and said not a word. But her mind 
took on at once the mental determination to get well. She 
resolved to get well. She did get well. 

Ordinarily the prospect of a trip abroad or some pleasing 
venture will increase the health when other means fail ; but 
such improvement is generally temporary. On the other handy 
when the MIND sets itself into a fixed determination, jreal .and 
lasting results follow. This is a well-known law of psychology. 
Great doctors employ it. The public statement of Thomas A. 
Edison, who was probably one of the greatest men who ever 
lived, all things considered, asserts that his grandfather and 
also his_fother_bpth died by th^ We 

quote here the exact words of Mr. Edison published some years 
ago in a leading magazine : " My grandfather ate carefully 
and lived to be one hundred and four. No disease killed him. 
He was perfectly well up to the time that he died. He lost 
interest in life. The cells of which his body was composed 
were anxious to get away. So my grandfather told his children 
that he was going to his daughter's house to die. He went to 
her home ; undressed ; went to bed ; AND DIED. There was 
nothing the matter with him. He was simply tired of life. 
And my father died the same way. They had found that the 
secret of long life and perfect health lay in right eating. As 
for me I eat only because I want to live. As a result my body 
is not poisoned with decaying, surplus food. My arteries are 
as soft as a child's." 

There are published in books many instances of the power of 
the mind over the body ; of the mental magnitude thatjnstead 
of being swayed andjm^^ %g-.9fJjj*gjj!P ur 

Ap|^^ rises superiorjx) them all7 an3 

masters them. JJj^ this Jjrocess have come the great men and 
women of the~w5rI3. 



LESSON THIRTEEN 

MENTAL MAGNITUDE REGIME 

FOLLOWING THE TEACHINGS of the preceding 
lesson we come to the mental exercises that are prepared 
for the purpose of developing the power there taught. 
We strongly advise that the several Vital Laws and all that is 
said prior to and following them, be reviewed so as to be fully 
understood, as they are charged with the mission of completely 
revolutionising your life. Until this study is undertaken, 
all persons with so few exceptions as to seem none at all, are 
subject to adverse control, due to the influence of the Four 
Appetites ; and it is here that the battle must be fought and the 
victory won. Then will come the established habit of meeting 
aJLother forms o? adverse control, and of conquering all opposing 
|orcejgbether arisin^from^othejke^ons or from conditionsT 
Faith in your ability to establish some form of contFol 01 
Mind over Matter is helpful, but not essential. There are 
phases of life where the power of faith is very potent, but we 
do not deal with them. We do not face the excuse that is given 
when failure comes, that the faith is too weak. Yet we do not 
undervalue the advantage that comes from its exercise. Our 
position is this : ^Mental ^determination is all-powerful, and 
whencarrted^ 

in a marked degree in the formation of the control of Mind over 
Mettler.' TKsls done by the pracSce of mental exercises ; and 
these we will give here in their most useful and serviceable 
arrangement, in the systems known as 

MENTAL MAGNITUDE RfiGIME. 

This Kegime appears in the form of mental determinations 
made in the first person of grammar so as to bring them home 

more firmly to the mind of the student. 

78 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE REGIME 79 

We deal in turn with the Four Substitutes which are the 
source of the adverse control that keeps all persons on the 
defensive and so enables them to cultivate personal magnetism 
as a natural gift. These are : 

1. The Stomach Substitute. 

2. The Sex Substitute. 

3. The Greed Substitute. 

4. The Spiritual Substitute. 

The mental determinations are as follows : 

1. I will review at this place the lessons that relate to the 
Four Substitutes ; and I will also review the lesson next 
preceding this, entitled Mental Magnitude, with especial 
attention to the Vital Laws therein. 

2. I understand what is meant by adverse control which 
arises from the power of these appetites over human nature. 

3. I understand that these appetites are substitutes for 
magnetism, in that they are employed by crafty persons in 
order to win influence over other persons, and to gain unworthy 
ends. 

4. I understand that any substitute for magnetism is a 
veneer and does not bring permanent success. 

5. I will not permit my mind to be blinded by the efforts of 
the opposite sex to influence me through any form of sex appeal. 

6. The excessive use of facial make-up I will regard as an 
effort to conceal a dirty and yellow skin ; and tricks of a 
similar kind I will look upon as methods intended to mislead 
my judgment. 

7. On the other hand I will give my attention in preference to 
any one whose complexion is as close to Nature as good taste 
should permit ; on the theory that good health and cleanliness 
of blood speak for themselves when allowed to show themselves. 
This fact I will not forget. 

8. I will not be influenced by the appeal to the sex appetite 
in the manner of dress ; the exposure unduly of the legs and 
the upper part of the torso. 

9. On the other hand I will prefer the person who retains as 
much modesty as is possible without going to the extreme of 
prudery ; allowing always for the convenience of dress brevity 
as a help to activities, but not for unnecessary brevity. 



80 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

10. I will not engage in any form of dajicing that is intended 
to excite the sex appetite, nor will I encourage any such dancing 
anywhere. 

11. I will do all in my power to aid the law in the suppression 
of many commercialised forms of dancing, especially of certain 
types of dance halls, and the cabarets that are places of assigna- 
tion. 

12. If I am not married I will delay that step until I have 
mastered the study of magnetism as presented in this book, so 
that the marriage may be made with a view to permanency and 
happiness. 

13. If a woman, I will mentally uncover the veil that obscures 
the future conditions of wedlock, and I will not be swept unduly 
into a marriage that may not stand the test of opposing forces 
coming into conflict when the veneer has been removed. I will 
look cautiously ahead. 

14. I will not permit the need of support, or the appeal to 
greed to draw me into a marriage that is not founded on a 
sound basis. 

15.1 will not permit any improper familiarity with the opposite 
sex, even under the pretence of affection or love, and I will 
hold myself aloof until marriage in order that I may retain the 
respect of the opposite sex, and be held in a higher regard. 

16. I am determined not to believe the protests and pretences 
that are made in order to induce me to change my reserve, nor 
will I place credence in promises, artificial ideals and gilded 
hopes of the future such as lure many girls and women into 
hasty and ill-considered marriages. 

17. I will not believe that our marriage is to be the one 
exception to the usual experience of disappointment and shock 
when once the illusion has spent itself, and the hard facts of 
two temperaments facing the crises of the new venture must be 
met and mastered to avoid the cooling of ardour and consequent 
estrangement. The future is to be judged by the past. 

18. I will not be swept into any hasty marriage by any cause 
or influence such as drives men and women, and especially 
young folks into wedlock and its failure ; but on the contrary 
I will assert my power of mental determination to discover the 
full effects of the step about to be taken. 

19. lamjfu^^ 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE REGIME 8l 

the speoieSjjseta up the sexual appetite in both sexes in order 
4o hasten forthcoming marriages ; and that fully one-half of 
all marriages are caused by the trickery jtf JNature in drawing 
people together and maKmg^wedlock necessary ; but I will 
avoid beinglised In this scheme by retaining absolute control 
over my inclinations and desires, and keeping safely outside the 
limits of temptation. 

20. In order to carry out the last determination, I will form 
the mental habit of looking with one hundred per cent suspicion 
on all questionable or doubtful lures set in motion by the 
opposite sex ; knowing that, whatever temporary loss I may 
sustain, the future will bring its full rewards in happiness. 

21. Assuming that ninety per cent of all marriages are, 
ill-assorted and wretcEed, and even when not broken by 
estrangement are filled with a lifetime of regrets, I will follow 
the later lessons of this book in order to avoid this fate. 

NOTE : In this R6gime we have taken the second of the 
Four Appetites out of order, as many mistakes due to hasty 
action occur following this impulse, and lead to wretched lives 
in which the ambition to succeed in other directions is destroyed. 
We now proceed with the first Appetite. 

22. I will avoid putting into my mouth or stomach anything 
that may cause any drug habit, as drugs that stimulate, excite 
or distort the nervous activities, make it impossible to develop 
magnetism. .__ 

23. I will not smoke cigarettes Q3BSS8l as these are in 
most cases charged with some degree of habit -forming drugs, 
the purpose being to fasten on the smoker an unshakable 
slavery to the habit ; and any form of slavery is an adverse 
control that makes the development of magnetism impossible. 

24. I will not allow any person to influence my will or control 
my decision in any matter by the temptation of drink, which 
I know has been used as a substitute for magnetism in order to 
serve the ends of crafty persons. 

25. I will not allow an appeal to my appetite in any form to 
be used to win from me any action that may put me to a 
disadvantage in any dealing or matter of importance. 

26. I will give heed to the statement of Mr Thomas A. Edison 
in the preceding lesson on the subject of eating properly so that 
the body may not " be poisoned with decaying, surplus food," 



82 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

for I know that there cannot develop in the system the natural 
power of magnetism when this poisoning is present. 

27. Like Mr. Edison I will eat for the purpose of living ; 
and not live for the purpose of eating. 

28. By reference to later lessons in this book I will take 
advantage of the natural laws of health by putting into my body 
only the elements that build the body, omitting all things that 
cannot participate in the building of health and vigour. 

29. I will not weaken my vitality by over-eating or over- 
loading the system even with proper food. 

30. I will take advantage of the law that says that a person 
who eats all that the strength and vigour of the body require 
and no more, so that he may come away from each meal not 
fully satiated, but with a small percentage of hunger remaining, 
will develop a high degree of natural magnetism, while the 
person who eats to satiation carries a dead and stale condition 
of the vitality for some time thereafter. 

31. In matters where greed may induce others to take 
advantage of me, I will develop the mental attitude of being one 
hundred per cent suspicious of all persons and all motives ; 
believing all persons who are in a position to cause me loss to 
be one hundred per cent dishonest. 

32. I will not allow my judgment of values to be warped by 
the promise or hope of receiving more than a fair exchange 
for what I pay in any dealing. 

33. I will not cause loss to any person by selling anything at 
an unfair price, or taking a larger return than is fair to me and 
to such person. 

34. I will not take advantage of the financial embarrassment 
or distress of any person in order to gain something to which I 
am not entitled in the fair exchange of values. 

35. I will not indulge in the tricks so often used to induce 
people to buy my goods. 

36. I will not sign my name to any blank piece of paper, nor 
to any written or printed paper having a blank space above my 
signature ; as safety may be obtained by heavily marking the 
blank space with ink lines to prevent matter from being 
written therein. 

37. I will not write my name in any album or in any place 
where, if the leaf were to become detached and were to fall into 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE REGIME 83 

the hands of unreliable people, something involving me in 
obligation might be inserted. 

38. I will avoid the trap of writing my name on blank en- 
velopes, especially large ones, under the pretence of being needed 
for identity, which envelopes could be so cut as to give oppor- 
tunity for writing or printing a contract, power of attorney or 
promise that would involve me in a loss. 

39. I will not buy or sell any stocks or shares except through 
a Bank or through a member of a Stock Exchange. 

40. I will not endorse a note for another person ; nor go on 
the bond of another ; nor engage to stand responsible for 
another. My duty to my family takes precedence of all such 
obligations, even for friends. 

41. I will not seek a high rate of interest in place of a high 
grade investment. 

42. I will not believe the statement made so often by certain 
people that they have not had a loss in a great many years. 
When analysed this claim may be explained to mean anything. 

43. I will so manage my savings as to retain at least some 
part of them every year. 

44. I will not follow the suggestion that if nothing is risked, 
nothing can be gained ; but will adopt the better suggestion 
that if nothing is risked something may be saved. 

45. When I have enough of this world's goods, I will not seek 
an unnecessary excess at the risk of my health, my self-respect 
or my good name ; nor will I sacrifice these at any time in 
winning a competence. 

46. I will not go on piling up a great fortune to be left to 
those who will not need it. 

47. In the uses of charity I will avoid contributing to those 
organisations whose expenses absorb from fifty to eighty 
per cent of the moneys collected. 

48. I will, whenever possible, make use of the method that 
helps worthy people to help themselves and thereby become 
independent of charity. 

49. I will not tie up money for inheritance that can be put 
into use in my lifetime, if such money is not needed by my 
heirs. __. 
[ 50. No matter whether I am a church attendant or not, I 

will study the usefulness of the church $a the world as the source 



84 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

of civilisation, the teacher of morality and the only effective 
agency of law, order and peace. 

51. If I do not believe in a Supreme Ruler I will not seek to 
influence others away from their beliefs, nor will I in any way 
antagonize those who are sincerely trying to lead moral lives 
in the name of religion. 

xx 52. As belief in superstition is a form of fear, and fear is a 
serious phase of adverse control greatly interfering with the 
development of magnetism, I will from this moment on, as long 
as I live, discard all belief in superstition, and pay no attention 
to the popular claims of signs good and bad that are attached 
to various happenings. 

v/53. I will not exhibit a state of mental weakness by enter- 
taining the fear of ghosts, spirits and occult phenomena ; 
remembering that when the world was in its darkest period, all 
humanity was depressed by this fear, which grows less with the 
advance of knowledge and intelligence. 

v'54. I will not be swayed in my life by beliefs in supernatural 
happenings, visitations or spirit phenomena ; remembering 
that men and women who so believe, and who shape the 
activities of their lives to meet such belief, are always retro- 
grading in their affairs and losing their influence in the world. 

55. I will not follow the advice of any person supposed to 
have been in a trance state ; nor will I fall victim to the belief 
that the person I consult is an exception to the general rule of 
fraud and pretence. 

56. I will not invest any money nor part with any values to 
any person or for any securities recommended by a fortune 
teller, or by any person who is supposed to have been in a trance 
state. 

57. As the spiritual appetite is natural and instinctive, 
inborn and predominant in the world, I will study it and seek 
to develop it in myself as the associate of that power that 
brought humanity into existence and that must of necessity 
direct and control the lives of all men and women who look in 
that direction for guidance and sustaining help. 

58. Kecognising the fact that, in this country alone, there 
are millions of people who firmly believe in the existence of a 
Supreme Deity, and further recognising the fact that a person 
who unnecessarily antagonises a great belief always destroys 



MENTAL MAGNITUDE REGIME 85 

his influence among his fellow-beings and makes the power 
of magnetism valueless, I will combine good judgment with 
discretion in this matter, and respect the opinions of others even 
though they do not agree with me. 

59. Knowing that the spiritual appetite in its best estate is 
inborn and inherent in humanity, that every normal person is 
swayed by its instinctive influence, and that character and 
well-being are greatly benefited and enhanced by developing 
it to its highest degree as an agency of personal power, I will not 
neglect this part of myself. 

60. In the belief that all persons who are normal possess three 
great departments of being physical, mental and spiritual 
and that the cultivation of the powers of each will lead to the 
highest degree of personal influence in life and thereby win the 
respect and confidence of all those who may come to know me, 
I will give attention to each of these three departments of 
my being. 

61. As sleep is typical of death, and death is the stimulating 
cause of spiritual study, I will devote my last thoughts at night 
to the consideration of my spiritual nature ; and on the follow- 
ing morning I will give myfijgt thoughts to the same subject^ 

It will be seen that one ofthe purposes of this system of train- 
ing is to unfold in each life its all-round nature, on the following 
principle : 

A person who is only developed physically is never magnetic. 

A person who is only developed mentally is never magnetic. 

A person who is only developed spiritually is never magnet^g. 

Only the all-round individual m i highly magnetic ; all others! 
tye one -sided, warped and repellent.! 

The person who disregards his spiritual character, and who 
parades his boast that he does not believe in the power that 
gave him life, soon separates himself from the healthy influence 
of his fellow-beings, and is pushed to one side in the affairs of 
this world. 

Of course it is a matter of policy to follow the crowd, and there 
are sticklers for personal pride and courage who think it 
evidence of a superior mind to declare their antagonism to 
prevailing beliefs ; and this argument might have weight if it 
were not founded on conceit and refusal to test the power that is 
indicated in the items 60 and 61 in the foregoing list ; for 



86 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

countless incidents prove the remarkable increase of personal 
character and influence following the practice there described. 

This system of Mental Magnitude Regime makes a man a real 
man, and a woman a real woman. If studied in connection with 
the two final Departments of this book, those of Applied 
Personal Magnetism, and of Magnetic Healing, but more 
particularly with the former of these two, it builds a personality 
that becomes a dominating power in the world. No human 
being can rise to great heights on nothing but desire and 
planning ; there must somewhere be the real basis, the solid 
foundation, the substance, and these come from what will 
be learned as Values, or units of real worth. There must be 
the richness of character, of mental development and of actual 
achievement. 

It will be shown in those final Departments that there are 
three groups of mental faculties : those of the merely physical 
functions ; those of the reasoning functions ; and those of the 
inner self, which psychologists to-day term the subconscious 
group. Magnetism rarely uses any mental groups except those 
of the last-named faculties, and in all higher-class educational 
institutions they are being studied to-day under the name of 
psychology. They present the only part of human effort that 
may be termed invincible ; and what victories they are capable 
of achieving will be found stated in the two final Departments 
of this book. 

Some people believe in life after death, and to them the phase 
of change known as death is likened to sleep, which it is thought 
was instituted to teach humanity in this life, once in every 
twenty -four hours, the facts of passing away and of rising again 
into life. Whether this similitude is warranted or not, the value 
of the last waking moments at night as the key that opens 
the secret chamber to the hereafter, or to the knowledge of the 
life to come, is being brought home to the great experts of the 
world ; and the most remarkable results are being achieved 
in making use of the powers that are thus revealed. 

It is for this reason that the 61st item of this system of 
Mental Magnitude Regime has been included in the list of 
resolves. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
THE MAGNETIC EYE 

LESSON FOURTEEN 

MAGNETISM OF THE EYE 

A POWER SUCH AS MAGNETISM is acknowledged 
to be, must have means of use by which its influence 
may be transmitted to other persons. The greatest 
and most magnetic of English pulpit orators, Charles 
Spurgeon, undertook to train young men for the ministry ; and 
among his most insistent claims was that every man who 
wished to succeed as ^^I^U^. a P reac ^ er must 
possess personal ^8^" J^^5^ magnetism; and if 
he lacked it he ^ ^^jj^-^ \ should acquire it. 
In America the most ^^^Jll^ ' successful of evan- 
gelists was D wight ^^ L. Moody ; he also 
taught young men and trained them in Bible classes for 
ministerial work ; and he made the same assertion in regard 
to the value of personal magnetism. 

Two of the greatest lawyers of international fame were 
Webster and Choate. Both were magnetic in the highest degree. 
Choate was called " The Ruler of the Twelve/' because he so 
often won his cases when not opposed by a man possessing 
magnetic powers as great as his. But when Choate was on one 
side of a case and Webster on the other side, the real merits won. 
We have talked often with men who were living during the 
later years of these two great men. We also have talked with 
a man who, while of greatly advanced years, was fully cognisant 
of the successes of both lawyers, and who had been associated 
several times in cases with Webster. From all we were able 
to learn, the same traits prevailed with them that we had noted 
in observing a number of the greatest men and women of our 
own time. 



88 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

But the popular idea of the magnetic eye was not manifested 
in any of these persons. It is true that when aroused to a fever 
heat of intensity the eye becomes unusually brilliant, and at 
times has a piercing power ; but this characteristic is not 
present at any other time. In all other moods the eye is 
seemingly ordinary as far as the general outward appearance is 
concerned. 

Investigation and study led to the discovery that the power 
of the eye is not in that orb itself, but in the arrangement of 
the surrounding parts of the face. Spurgeon in his grandest 
moments, when he swayed his listening thousands by his voice 
and action, displayed the strong facial earnestness that gave him 
an almost sublime appearance. Moody was rarely fervid in a 
vigorous way, nor would he have been called a great orator by 
strangers who heard him for the first time ; yet his facial 
expression that framed the eyes was clearly indicative of the 
power of the man. Observers who had the opportunity to 
witness Webster and Choate, agreed that in moments of great 
intensity their eyes glowed like dark, deep burning coals. An 
account is given of a conversation between Webster and an 
obstinate business man who at first refused to accept the 
lawyer's advice in a certain matter, but who was soon won over 
by the advocate ; and in this conversation Webster sat with his 
eyes almost closed. His voice or manner or general presence 
probably won the day. 

These remarks are made to pave the way for a sensible and 
practical consideration of this phase of our study. 

But it cannot be denied that in the process known as 
hypnotising, the eye is very helpful ; and its use in that opera- 
tion might well receive attention if this study included that 
practice. We are dealing with an opposite power. Magnetism 
wins. Hypnotism defeats the wifl of another person. A sleep- 
producing drug puts the subject into slumber, but wins nothing. 
A bludgeon may do the same thing. Advantages obtained by 
rendering the subject helpless are a species of robbery. Hypno- 
tisers cultivate a brilliant and glowing eye by training the 
nervous system into a high degree of intensity. Any bright 
object of small size held slightly above the line of vision 
of the subject, thereby compelling the latter to keep the 
gaze uplifted until it wearies, will produce hypnotic sleep in 



MAGNETISM OF THE EYE 89 

a person who can be thus controlled. The eye serves the 
same purpose. 

If there is an advantage in possessing a brilliant and glowing 
eye, this acquisition may be placed easily within the reach of 
any man or woman by the tensing exercise of this work. 
Some women place a few drops of a chemical upon the eyeballs 
to make them shine and glow ; but the practice becomes hurt- 
ful in time. It shows, however, the desire to have brilliant eyes. 

The eyes in their size, shape and colour are often called 
beautiful. Yet the size depends on the iris, as does the colour, 
and the shape depends on the framing of the eye by the facial 
arrangement. If you will study the changing moods of a highly- 
bred cat, you will sometimes note affection, and this will be 
depicted solely by the positions of the lids. Then surprise will 
change the entire arrangement of the lids. Mood after mood 
may follow, each being depicted by the lids and not by the eyes. 

Choate said that he never stopped talking to a jury until he 
thought that the last man had indicated by his eyes that he 
agreed with him. In those days lawyers were not limited in 
the length of their address in summing up their cases. We have 
seen in later days, what Choate saw in his time, in the faces of 
juries : the turning-point in yielding. Choate once said, " I 
know how long to talk to a jury. I also know when to stop 
talking." 

The secret is not a great one, although it is important. 

A person who holds an opinion opposing you will involun- 
tarily raise the lower lid. This of itself signifies an analysis and 
scrutiny of your assertions.! If the lower lid in addition to being 
raised is brought in towards the nose, this expresses not only 
hesitation to believe in your claims, but an affirmative obstinacy 
which is intended to combat you to a finish, mentally speaking. 
The mere raising of the lower lid is a normal action ; but when 
it is both raised and brought inward, it is a concentric and 
combative action, f When the upper lid meets the normal 
action, it indicates that the mind is at work trying to solve the 
problem. 

The upper lid tells a more common and more easily read 
story. 

If it is lowered and the eyeball is raised to meet it, although 
not fully doing so, this shows that the mind has ceased to work 



90 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

for the time being ; and that the speaker whether in the court- 
room, in the home, or in the office, is not reaching the thoughts 
of the supposed listener. I To understand this position, practise 
looking up to the ceiling, and shutting off the gaze by dropping 
the upper lid half over the eyeball while keeping the latter in 
the position of looking at the ceiling. In any form of con- 
versation, as well as in addressing a jury, this phase of human 
nature is always the same. 

A magnetic person cultivates the habit of studying the effect 
of his words upon listeners ; and the eyes principally tell the 
facts. 

There are several positions of the upper lid with reference to 
the eyeball that are assumed countless times every day by all 
persons. We may list these positions as follows : 

The centre of the eye is known as the pupil. 

The ring around the pupil is called the iris ; and its colour 
gives to the eye the hue that is permanent. 

The less the tension, or the calmer the person may be, the 
smaller is the pupil. Temperament or heredity, or even 
nervous disease, may make many changes in this opening. 
Assuming it to be normal or nearly so, the purposes that control 
the mind of a person are shown by the lids ; and the upper lid 
has the following gamut : 

1. If the upper lid completely covers the pupil of the eye, 
it indicates that the mind is not thinking closely, or may be 
aimless, or wandering, or sluggish ; but the principal fact is 
that such a mind is not being subjected to magnetic control. 

2. If the upper lid covers the top half of the pupil, the mind 
is indifferent. 

3. If the upper lid comes down as far as the top edge only of 
the pupil the mind is attentive. 

4. If the upper lid covers half the width of the top arc of the 
iris, the mind is very attentive ; and this is what Choate looked 
for when he was talking to the jury, as he had come to that 
point where he controlled their thoughts. 

5. If the upper lid touches the edge of the iris ring, it indicates 
that not only the mind is very attentive, but the feelings have 
been aroused. This is a double victory. 

6. If the upper lid shows any thin line of white above the 
iris, it indicates that the mind and feelings have been aroused to 



MAGNETISM OF THE EYE 91 

an excess, and that the person has lost control of them by the 
springing into being of some strong emotion such as that of 
anger, hatred, horror or other mood. It is not a normal 
condition and should be avoided. 

7. If the upper lid shows a wider line of white above the 
iris, it indicates that the person has become transfixed with 
fear, horror, insane ecstasy, or other similar mood, such as 
might occur in the presence of a foe, apparition or wild animal. 
These two last conditions have nothing to do with the study of 
magnetism, but are stated in order to complete the gamut and 
show how clearly the upper lid interprets the state of the mind 
and the feelings. 

The cultivation of personal magnetism includes the study of 
life in all its moods, and shows the way to read and understand 
the effects on others of any influence that may proceed from the 
observer. In other words, the truly magnetic person is able 
to read instantly the mind and moods of every person he meets. 
The more one sees of these indications in the faces of others the 
more confidence will be created in the ability to sway such 
persons ; and confidence in magnetism is exactly what faith is 
in religion or in healing. 

In a conversation with a very successful financier whose 
magnetism had given him the leadership in his line of business, 
we asked the question : " Do you realise that you possess the 
power of personal magnetism ? " and the reply was made 
quietly in the affirmative. We then asked, " Without personal 
magnetism what would be your standing to-day in the financial 
world ? " The reply was : " I would probably be a ' bucket- 
shop ' broker." One more question : " What is the most 
useful phase of personal magnetism as a practical aid to business 
or otherwise ? " He thought for a moment and said slowly, 
" The most useful, most practical and most valuable aid to a 
man in business life, or professional life, or social life, is to know 
the mind and feelings of those with whom you come in contact ; 
to be able to size them up as the common saying goes ; to read 
in their faces what they think and how they feel towards 

you." 

It is by the observing eye that we learn to study the meanings 
in the faces of others. Nothing is so beneficial to the mind, to 
the eyes themselves, and to the personal character of the 



92 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

magnetic individual as the practice of analysing the meanings 
that are written clearly in the faces of people. 

Magnetic persons are exceedingly observant. 

The habit of constant observation of any details will help 
to develop what is called natural personal magnetism. Most 
persons see things in lumps or masses. A non-magnetic person 
will see a face as a whole ; a magnetic person will see its details. 
There is a sect in India among the ancient high-class caste that 
has acquired the highest known form of personal magnetism 
solely by the process of separating masses into details, and 
catching the details as separate units, each distinct ; a process 
that they have trained themselves to develop until it has 
reached an unbelievably powerful state of control over their 
fellow-beings. 

If you will follow carefully each lesson in this system you will 
recognise the fact that each accomplishment that is designed 
to awaken and arouse the latent magnetism of the body, has a 
wide field of practical usefulness in all other directions apart 
from the study of magnetism. 

This fact applies with direct force to the process of acquiring 
the power of mental observation of details, in place of masses. 
The process begins at once to build a mental acumen that 
becomes a most important weapon in dealing with men and 
women. As an example of what we mean, let us look back to 
the preceding pages of this lesson. Ninety-nine persons in every 
hundred study the normal face as a whole. If there is any 
mark or evidence of injury, that is seen ; but nothing more than 
a face in general. There is no reading of the mind and feelings ; 
no attempt to go behind the mask of the commonplace appear- 
ance for the knowledge that is plainly written there./ Choate 
once said to his partner during a resting period in his address, 
" The fifth man on the back row, and the second man in the 
front row are not yet with me." After he resumed his address 
and came to a pause for a drink of water, he said to his partner, 
" The back row man has yielded ; I have yet to get the front 
row man." As he spoke he scanned the face of this last juror, 
and soon read in the fine shifting of a muscle or two the story 
of his victory. 

This is the process of separating details from masses ; lines 
and fine movements in the face from the general appearance. 



LESSON FIFTEEN 

MAGNETIC DETAILS 

FOLLOWING THE OUTLINES set forth in the preceding 
lesson, we take up the study of that process which has 
produced such wonderful results in the manner there 
stated. It is known as the practice of separating details 
from masses. The clumsy mind sees everything in a mass 
or what is called lumping it. There may be directly before us a 
face that has the story of the mind and feelings behind written 
in plain characters on its surface and yet the face remains a 
mystery to the beholder. There is only the thinnest partition 
between the story that the face reveals of the thoughts and 
feelings behind it, and the actual reading of the whole mind. 
In a series of experiments made by us with over two thousand 
men and women during a period of fifteen years, we found that 
it was possible for every person to learn to separate details 
from masses ; that in so doing by reading the face for the 
thoughts and feelings of a person, in the manner stated in the 
preceding lesson, the power of thought transference or practical 
telepathy was instantly developed. 

That such a power exists and indicates the purpose of Nature 
to unfold a higher system of usefulness for the mind than has 
ever yet been developed, is self -apparent. It should be 
cultivated. 

There are in daily transactions countless opportunities for 
securing advantage if only we could know the plans and 
purposes of those with whom we are dealing ; or as a business 
man said, " if only I could know what is in the other fellow's 
mind." The power to read aright what is behind the features, 
is half the battle in magnetism. From an analysis of the methods 
employed by men and women who have achieved the highest 
success in the world, it seems certain that they have come into 
this power as a natural habit. 

93 



94 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Some persons are called uncanny who are only trained by 
their own way of doing things to read and understand faces. 

As we have said there is only the thinnest partition between 
the easily acquired habit of reading faces and of reading the 
whole mind. It is not a difficult thing to learn or to acquire. 
It proceeds in two lines of development : 

1. Learn what the eyes and the mouth indicate in the fine 
details of position and movement. ~""~ "~ 

2. Practice the habit of observation of these positions and 
movements as details in the mass appearance of the face. 

We have referred to the eye positions only thus far, using the 
term eye to include the framework about it as explained in the 
preceding lesson. Two laws will help us at this stage : 

The eye positions and movements stated in the preceding 
lesson indicate the mental operations in chief, and the feelings 
as secondary influences. 

The mouth positions and movements indicate the feelings in 
chief, and the mental operations as secondary influences. As 
the finest shades of movement about the eye tell differing 
stories of the mind, so the changes of movement and position 
of the mouth tell different stories of the feelings. In order to be 
able to acquire the habit of breaking up the lower face into 
details as opposed to mass reading, it is helpful to learn in a 
general way the meanings of the changes and positions of the 
mouth, which are as follows : 

1. There are two basic meanings : 

2. The first basic meaning is that of the level mouth which 
indicates normal feelings held in check and good reserve. 

3. The second basic meaning is that of the lightly closed 
mouth which indicates the feelings held in check and good 
reserve. Thus the combination of these two basic meanings is 
the highest ideal of character when the mind and feelings^are 
normal. Both basic meanings coincide. If you will study the 
portraits of fine men and beautiful women you will note the 
union of these two meanings with variations that do not change 
them, as when, instead of the mouth being lightly closed, it is 
very nearly closed, or lightly open. The effect is the same, 
except that as the mouth opens, the feelings become slightly 
awakened, the opportunity for shading tfie meanings is a 
valuable one in every way. 



MAGNETIC DETAILS 95 

4. There now enter two new meanings that are based on the 
level mouth : 

5. The level mouth closed in any degree from that of the 
first position indicates a gamut running from the beginning of 
slight firmness to that of strenuous determination. This gamut 
contains at least a dozen degrees in the scale. It is worth 
studying. You will meet every one of these degrees in the people 
about you or in the faces of the great men and women of the 
present and past. 

6. Now the meaning shifts to the opposites. The level mouth 
open in any degree from that of the first position of being 
lightly closed, to that of being wide open, runs another gamut of 
at least a dozen degrees in the scale showing the opposite 
meanings from those of determination or firmness. So intricate 
are these shades of varying meaning that it is not possible to 
spend sufficient time to describe them. But the level mouth 
when more than slightly open indicates that the feelings are 
being transferred to the care of outside causes as a rule, and 
occasionally to causes of interest, fear, alarm and even horror 
set up by one's own thoughts and feelings. 

If the level mouth is more than slightly open, something has 
occurred to take away the determination or the affirmative 
state of self-reliance, f If the upper lid of the eye falls and the 
eyeball rises, and the mouth begins to open, the combination is 
that so often noted when a person needs sleep ; but this is 
negative, and in the hands of a skilled hypnotist leads quickly 
to a state of sleep through which the subject passes into another 
kind of wakefulness attended by unconsciousness of the working 
mind. This we do not teach but seek to guide our students in 
the way to avoid it both as subject and manipulator. } 

Assuming that the person is to remain awake and alert, the 
gamut of meanings that run from normal to expanded interest, 
is one of the most useful of all things to watch and to study. 

If you will watch any person who is being addressed, you 
learn quickly to what degree the interest in what is being said 
is aroused. If an account of some incident is absorbing, every 
listener will show not only relaxed lips, but mouths that open 
gradually to meet the increasing interest. A preacher whose 
description of some event was greatly interesting noted that 
every mouth in his congregation was widely open. In another 



96 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

instance a minister who had followed the sea before entering 
the ministry was fond of depicting a great crisis on the ocean. 
A flash photograph of his listeners just at ttiat stage where the 
ship was about to sink unless saved by a seeming miracle, 
showed every mouth wide open. This same condition appeared 
at a meeting where the heroic deed of Captain Fry was being 
told to the audience. 

We have seen juries sit with mouths slightly open and as the 
speech of a certain advocate increased in intensity these listeners 
gave way more visibly to their feelings. 

The main point to be learned is that as the lips separate 
towards an open position, to that extent the speaker is winning 
an influence over the person who is listening. To be assured 
of a victory, it is only necessary that the lips be slightly open ; 
but in any event the operation of this law is so interesting that 
its workings are worth all the time given to detect and to 
understand them. 

We now come to two other laws as follows : 

7. The lips raised above the level indicate approval or some 
kindred meaning. The act of raising occurs at the ends of the 
lips. 

8. The lips lowered below the level indicate disapproval or 
some kindred meaning. The act of lowering occurs at the ends 
of the lips. 

The child who is pleased will begin to raise the ends of the 
lips. If he is about to cry this condition is heralded by the 
depressing of the lips. The term approval takes in a large 
group of meanings but all along the same line, and there is a 
well-defined gamut of change from the slight raising to the 
excessive upward position. The term disapproval takes in a 
large group of meanings ; and there is also another well-defined 
gamut of change from the slight lowering to an excessive 
downward position. These gamuts furnish great opportunities 
for training the mind of the observer ; and the story of success 
is written in the ability to separate details from masses. 

There is no finer education in the world. 

Even if it is not to be used in the practice of personal mag- 
netism, it will serve in every department of life as the most 
practical and useful of genuine accomplishments. The chief 
power of this study is in the same fact applying to every step 



MAGNETIC DETAILS 97 

of the training ; as aids to the development of magnetism each 
line of study is important in the highest degree ; and at the 
same time takes rank as possessing more value in all other 
departments of life than any other kind of training. 

The power to separate the details of the face into their 
shades of meaning serves in four ways to help the student : 

1. It gives him knowledge of what are the purposes, inten- 
tions, thoughts and feelings of those with whom he comes in 
contact ; and this is half the victory in magnetism. 

2. It leads close to that subtle power known as telepathy 
which is a more or less natural gift with the great leaders of the 
financial, business, professional and social worlds. 

3. It is an ever-attendant aid in all other matters that make 
up the daily activities of life. 

4. It gives to the mind the most wholesome, invigorating and 
stimulating development as a means of preparation for the 
greatest achievements in the world ; as a result of which the 
mind grows^keener, stronger and far more alert in the exhila- 
rating struggle for supremacy. 

These four advantages apply not only to the present phase of 
this training ; but to all other phases of this system. 

By way of review we will note that the mouth has three 
positions in one line : 

Normal or lightly closed or lightly open which is the same in 
meaning. 

Open in a gamut to wide open. 

Closed in a gamut to tightly closed. 

In another direction we find three other positions : 

Level mouth, which is normal. 

Raised lips indicating something akin to approval, in a 
gamut of meanings. 

Lowered lips indicating something akin to disapproval, in a 
gamut of meanings. 

Finally we come to combinations as follows : 

Mouth level, through gradually wider opening, passing 
through the meanings of normal, interest, enthusiasm, surprise 
and astonishment, with intervening shades of meaning all along 
the way ; and also such indications as are described on a 
preceding page. 

Mouth raised with gradually widening opening, passing 



98 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

through the meanings of normal approval, approved interest, 
smiling, excited approval, mirth, laughter and finally hilarious 
enjoyment, with intervening shades of meaning all the way. 

Mouth lowered with gradually tightening of the closed lips, 
passing through the meanings of disapproval, dissatisfaction, 
discontent, until it reaches the well-known grouch. 

Mouth lowered with gradual wider opening, passing through 
meanings of disapproval plus interest, disapproval plus surprise, 
and disapproval plus astonishment ; the latter being the well- 
known expression of horror, and the familiar picture of tragedy ; 
while its opposite, the combination of astonishment with 
approval being employed to depict comedy. 

It is not our purpose to teach facial expression, nor the 
painter's art, but to train the eye of our student in the practice 
of separating details from massed conditions. 

The value is not in merely reading faces, but in separating 
details from masses. The result is a most POWERFUL 
MAGNETIC EYE. 

But we cannot expect any student to jump into the climax of 
training without passing through the stages that must of 
necessity precede the end to be attained. For this reason it 
is important to enter into a line of practice that is of Oriental 
origin, and that has given to those who have succeeded in it a 
degree of personal magnetism that is astonishing. In the 
preceding lesson we briefly referred to this practice. Now that 
the facial details have been described we will pass into the 
Oriental practice in the next lessons with a view of preparing the 
way for returning to this lesson and continuing the work of 
separating details from masses. The exercises that follow in 
the next lessons not only develop the power desired, but give 
the mind a keenness of action that puts it in the foreground of 
human advantage. 

The work now becomes intensely interesting and fascinating. 



LESSON SIXTEEN 

ORIENTAL SECRETS 

CERTAIN HIGH CASTE societies in the Far East 
conceived the idea that by persistent practice the 
power of the eye as the source of magnetism could 
be developed to a degree that made it the weapon greatly 
to be feared. We are not seeking that end, as we do not 
think we live in an age when fear should rule mankind. 
But there are other "HKJTMft reasons why the 

excessive and un- ^^P^jjjSj^ usual power of the 
human eye should jf ,/^^&\ ^ e developed, and 
these have been fully ^i^^Hl^ ' stated in the two 
preceding lessons. ~^^ Behind these reasons 

there exists still another which has been touched upon in 
a past lesson and which will be further stated as we proceed ; 
that of the collective generating of the latent magnetism of 
the body, which can be effected by a number of processes. 

The eye has been described by scientists as a small-sized 
volcano ; in most cases latent, quiet, sleeping in its embers, but 
the centre of the most intensely heated zone, in all Nature, 
ready to glow when aroused. 

What is known as the Oriental Practice is not by any means a 
new method. It has had uses in other departments, notably in 
developing a wonderful memory, and in stimulating thought, 
creating fertility of ideas, building inventive powers and 
avoiding mental breakdown. None of these purposes will be 
insisted upon in these lessons, although they will follow natur- 
ally. The trouble with the minds of unsuccessful people is 
that they are not alert in a way that wins results. Most of them 
are sluggish except in pursuit of the needs of the Four Appetites 
which generally rule mankind. This kind of mental alertness 
results in placing them under the sway of craftier minds. 
The field of human activities in other directions is almost 

99 



100 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

unlimited, and in them the powers of mental alertness and 
keenness are absent. 

This explains why most lives are failures. 

In the Oriental Practice as it was employed in the Far East, 
the results hardly warranted the time devoted to it had these 
people had other lines of usefulness in the world. They were 
not educated except in religious theories. They were not 
engaged in anything really worth while in life. Of course this 
gave them time for their practice ; and led them into methods 
of concentration that, if their claims were to be believed, gave 
them knowledge of some of the mysteries of other powers of a 
superhuman nature. If such claims were in fact true, there was 
nothing gained by what they acquired. 

We are in this world primarily to live the life that is thrust 
upon us. 

No normal human being is a hermit ; hence our duty lies far 
and wide among mankind. The more people we meet the better 
it is for us. Interests are interwoven everywhere. Duties 
involve home and social relations, as well as business, pro- 
fessional and productive activities ; and the practice indulged 
in by other people who are not so interbound in their duties, 
does not help us except in the very limited use we make of it. 

But any natural and highly beneficial practice that will 
stimulate the brain into its best uses, and start a new line of 
habits tending to establish great mental_keenness and alertness, 
will at the same time develop collectively the latent power of 
magnetism where now it is diffused in the body. Thus the 
Oriental Practice, kept within such limits, serves a double 
purpose : 

1. It produces, so far as its influence reaches, what is called 
the Magnetic Eye. 

2. It creates collectively a fund of magnetism from the 
diffused magnetism of the body. 

Its direct result in accomplishing these two ends is found 
in developing the habit as a natural gift of separating details 
from masses, following the plan set forth in the two preceding 
lessons ; and based on the two following accepted facts : 

1. Persons who do not possess as a natural gift the power of 
separating details from masses are never mentally magnetic. 

2. Persons who do possess this power as a habit, and thereby 



ORIENTAL SECRETS 101 

as a natural gift, are exceedingly magnetic mentally, and 
become more so as they put this power into daily and practical 
use in dealing with other persons. 

The method now to be pursued is what is called cumulative. 

A process is cumulative, at least in art and particularly in this 
practice, that begins with the least unit, adds one at a time, 
and so goes on, always beginning at one. No other plan succeeds 
in this branch of the training. But few readers will understand 
what is meant by always beginning with one, or the first unit, 
or any one unit whether the same is the first or not. 

Take a step to an open door leading to an adjoining room ; 
give one quick glance at the contents of that room ; then with- 
draw. While out of the range of vision of those contents, 
mention one article that is in the room. This is the first unit. 
The same article may or may not be included in the next glance. 
Go again to the door, look into the room, and withdraw, 
mentioning two articles in the room. Repeat by taking a third 
glance, which must be as quickly done as the eye can look. 
Again repeat by taking a fourth glance, always going out of 
sight of the room, and name aloud the four articles that are 
seen in the fraction of a second. Try now to name five articles 
that are seen at a fifth glance after retiring from the sight of the 
contents. Then six, and so on until you are not able to add any 
more. 

What is meant by cumulative will now be explained. 

After reaching your limit in the number of articles that can 
be seen in a fraction of a second, rest for any length of time 
that you may choose. Progress and development take place 
during periods of rest, but following periods of activity of the 
mind. 

When you feel again an interest in resuming the practice, 
start with one unit ; not with the number following where you 
left off. There are two kinds of mistakes that you can make at 
this stage. 

1. The first mistake is to try to see how many articles you 
can take in at a glance, instead of beginning with one, and 
adding one at each trial. 

2. The second mistake is in not going back over the same 
ground after taking a rest. 

A room in an ordinary house would not contain enough 



102 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

articles to reach a real test. The mind by the cumulative process 
will soon be able to include from fifty to one hundred items in 
less than one second of time. Women train themselves to see 
in one very brief look everything that another woman has on 
at Easter time, meaning everything that is visible. In the 
present style of dress the number of articles is limited compared 
with those of a generation ago. We once heard a woman 
witness in court describe an occurrence in which a well-dressed 
woman participated ; and on being asked to tell what she saw, 
enumerated twenty-five items worn by the other woman, 
although she declared that she was passing at the time and 
did not stop to see all that was happening. She first noted 
what a well-dressed person of her sex was wearing, and then lost 
interest in the other matters. 

This method of seeing details in mass is of very limited 
benefit unless it can be made to grow by the cumulative plan. 

The Chinese employ the shop-window system, but do not 
make it cumulative except in the early stages of the training. 
The plan is to walk along the street past a shop window and to 
note only one item at first. Then they walk past the window 
again, and note two items. Then three ; four, etc., and by 
actual test it was proved that the experimenter, in less than one 
second of time, could see more than five hundred details and 
could describe them accurately. Claims have been made that 
one person reached more than five thousand items. We are 
willing to stop at a much smaller number ; although what the 
human brain can be traced to do is unbelievable until known. 

The principle involved in the method is all that interests us. 

It requires the growing use of the mind as the agent of 
separating details in the human face, and of reading what is 
behind those details in the mind ; and for the purpose of highly 
developing this power, the Oriental Practice is exceptionally 
valuable. 

As personal magnetism is power, first over self, then over 
all human beings with whom you come in contact, it must 
follow that the ability to know what is in the mind and purposes 
of other persons is one of the most valuable and important 
adjuncts to this power. 



LESSON SEVENTEEN 

GLANCE PRACTICE 

UNIVERSITIES HAVE RECENTLY been testing the 
ability of their students in quick observation. Instead 
of showing them in what way this acquisition might 
be developed, they have merely taken them as they 
found them, and sought to learn how much they had been 
educated by Nature and past habits of association. It was our 
good fortune to have -n^n^iri studied in the office 

of a most successful ^jlP^^^8j(^ lawyer, a man of 
national reputation ; ^ //9ijj?^ \ an( ^ we no ^ ce( i that 
he was able to read ^^^^fw ' t ^ ie w ^ole page of a 
handwritten letter ** at a glance. He 

also could read any letter which was upside down, and any 
printed matter in the same way. Not wishing to intrude by 
asking questions concerning his personal habits, we refrained 
from enquiring in what manner he had attained this efficiency ; 
but in later years he gave us the information when he knew we 
were analysing the methods of successful men. He had trained 
himself to do these things. They had not come to him naturally. 
In the midst of a large practice he had found time for this train- 
ing, and also to memorise many books of the Bible. His 
memory was so remarkable that he could recall persons by 
name and circumstances, whom he had met only once and then 
as far back as twenty years. 

The vast majority of people are contented with minds that 
are developed only far enough to carry on the necessary 
processes of living and of the chosen vocations of life. But 
there are vast fields of new adventure. 
All these mental acquisitions help each other. 
As we have said, we are not teaching memory culture ; but 
if any person desires to acquire a wonderful memory, the 



104 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETSIM 

Oriental Practice of the preceding lesson will accomplish this 
and vastly more. 

That practice dealt with the quick use of the eye in separating 
details from a mass ; and especially in catching every shade of 
meaning in the face of a person. The present lesson now deals 
with the catching of a mass of ideas ; but these ideas are really 
the separate" words and thoughts that are expressed on paper. 
Minds act in several grades of activity. The slow or dull brain 
gets its ideas very feebly and as the result of effort or waiting. 
Success is impossible in life under such conditions. 

Another brain will grasp a meaning in less time, yet may be 
very slow and dull. Still another works faster. As soon as we 
reach the brain that takes in ideas and conditions rapidly, 
we approach the magnetic power. 

Speed may be cultivated, and dull minds converted into alert 
ones. It is an admitted fact among psychologists and scientists 
that all human beings, except those who are mentally dwarfed, 
possess marvellous brain energies that remain more or 
dormant through life. Many of these " mind forces " are 
at work in individuals who advance rapidly in the world. The 
right to accumulate independent wealth belongs to every 
intelligent being ; but that right is useless in the hands of a man 
or woman who lacks " Brain Magnetism." Any form of wealth, 
power, achievement open to you is of little use, if you lack the 
magnetism to make it yield increased life values. 

The test is how much progress a person can make in the 
following exercises : 

1. Take a large sheet of paper, say about 8| inches wide and 
11 inches long. On this sheet print in letters about the size of 
capitals used on typewriters, about fifteen lines, occupying the 
whole page. These lines are separated so as not to crowd the 
vision ; and the words are in letters large enough to be seen 
readily. 

2. Lay this paper on a table, having the printed side facing 
down. As you approach the table, take the paper in your hand 
and turn it over, and then turn it back, leaving it there while 
you sit down at another table and write down as many of the 
words as you can recall, framing the sentences nearly like those 
on the sheet that you glanced at as you turned it over. It is 
best to have the lines that are placed on the paper put there 



GLANCE PRACTICE 105 

by some other person so that you may not know what they are. 
After you have glanced at them during a brief second, and have 
written down what you saw in that time, you should report to 
your assistant what you have reproduced. Do so always in 
writing. The first effort may not be fruitful, depending not 
so much on the power of your mind as on your experience. 

3. Repeat the test in the same manner, and make a separate 
report in writing of what you have caught by a second glance. 
This method is to be repeated as on the first occasion until 
you are wearied. On some other day when you are not mentally 
tired, repeat it. Do not try to do too much at one time. Keep 
at it, however, until you can reproduce every idea that is con- 
tained in the lines on the paper. That will finish the first stage. 

4. After this, have a second piece of paper prepared like the 
first but with different lines and ideas ; and proceed until you 
are able to secure at a glance, lasting not more than a second 
of time, all that is on the paper. Keep a record of the number 
^| efforts which have been required in each stage, and see if 
fpi have made progress. Like the game of golf the less times 
you are compelled to try to reach the end of the course, the 
more progress you are making. Thus will end the second stage. 

5. Now the lines instead of being far apart, making about 
fifteen to a page, should be placed in the usual distance, making 
thirty lines on a page. Still the capitals should be employed in 
this third stage. You will have twice as many lines to see at a 
glance, and twice as many ideas probably. This stage will take 
more time and a number more efforts. 

6. The fourth and last stage in straight reading at a glance 
is to be made with thirty lines on a page, and capitals used only 
when they are ordinarily employed. This means that you are 
to face the usual kind of typewriting matter. By this time your 
eyes should have a very keen power, and the lower-case letters 
should be as easily read as capitals. 

7. We come now to reverse reading. This is done by taking 
a piece of paper of the size stated, and writing in fifteen lines 
some new matter with which the experimenter is not familiar. 
This exercise is not glance work, but must follow that. It should 
not be tried until the four stages are mastered perfectly ; for 
progress will be very slow until then. In reverse reading, after 
your assistant has placed the fifteen lines in capitals on the 



106 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

paper, this is to be left upside down on the table, and turned 
over when you are seated with the paper placed so that the 
page itself is upside down. This means that the upper lines 
are nearest to you but the lower lines are farthest from you, 
which is the reverse of the usual position. You may take all 
the time you need, and read aloud every word on the page. 
This is the fifth stage of this lesson. 

8. The next stage consists in placing thirty lines of new 
matter in capitals on another sheet of paper, upside down as 
before, and reading it from a reverse position. This is the sixth 
stage. 

9. The next step consists in placing thirty lines in the usual 
letters including capitals and lower-case letters as in ordinary 
text, and reading them from a reverse position. This is the 
seventh stage. 

10. Now, instead of using typewritten matter for the lines, 
cut an advertisement from any newspaper and read it from 
the reverse position. A very interesting way of doing this is to 
have your assistant hold the advertisement in the usual way so 
that he may read it in the proper position, while you are reading 
it from a reverse position. We have known students to become 
so adept in this manner of reading that they can repeat aloud 
every word from a piece of newspaper as freely as if 
holding it in the usual manner. We have also witnessed races 
between two persons, each reading at a normal rate of speed, 
one in the reverse way, and the other in the usual way. This 
training proves in time to be of the utmost value and highest 
usefulness. 

11. The final stage makes use of handwritten letters, which 
the expert will be able to read when in the hands of another 
person who does not suspect that they could be read upside 
down. 

No business man, and especially no financier of large activities 
nor a lawyer, would wish to make known the fact that they 
can read letters and documents at a glance when held in the 
hands of an opponent ; but we have seen this done many 
times ; yet if the fact were known these opponents would not 
only be on guard, but would entertain unpleasant feelings 
towards those who used such methods. Therefore we are not 
teaching these things to enable a person to take advantage of 



GLANCE PRACTICE 107 

others, but to develop in the brain and eye the highest power 
of magnetism, in order that the expert in these qualities may 
read humanity as an open book rather than their private papers 
and letters. 

This is a direct source of power. 

But sometimes injustice may be prevented by these very 
methods of catching the ideas that are contained in a letter or 
document. We were present in a trial where an unprincipled 
witness held in his possession a paper that contained evidence 
needed by the other side, but which was being concealed. By 
chance this witness unfolded the paper and showed it to one of 
his friends who happened to be in court. The lawyer who re- 
presented the plaintiff was able to read any letter or document 
at a glance ; he saw this paper ; caught its contents ; put the 
witness in the box, and demanded the reading of the paper. 
By this means he won a just case, which otherwise he would 
have lost. We have witnessed many other instances of the 
usefulness of this accomplishment in securing justice for those 
who might otherwise have been defenceless. 

The eye-power stimulates and fires the brain. 

Our main purpose, however, is to train the mind to become 
keen and alert, and the eye to become powerfully magnetic. 
When we can do these things by methods that bring other 
benefits, we feel that the time has been well spent by any 
student who persists in the practice. 

Many enjoyable hours follow. 

The benefits are self-evident. That they would be forth- 
coming is also self-evident. Then another law comes into force 
that will be fully explained in the next lesson that follows this. 
It is the law that tells us that an excitant of the eye -power 
brings to that organ in a collective form a great amount of the 
diffused magnetism of the body. Here we have one of the most 
effective methods of building personal magnetism as a natural 
gift. 

What we call exercises soon blend into habits, and from 
habits come the same natural powers that attend the activities 
of great men and women. 



LESSON EIGHTEEN 

THE VITAL EYE 

WHEN THE FOUR LESSONS that immediately 
precede this one have been mastered, and not before, 
the student must put into practice one of the simplest 
things that could possibly be taught, yet that holds 
in its little scope the greatest results in any line of training. 
While it is a simple matter that we now present, it is not the 
easiest thing to do. -^SB^e^ No exercises are to be 

employed; nothing ^^^^^J^^l|> but habits; and 
these need nothing ^ -/jrf^ \ ^ut attention i* 1 
order to be fixed and ^^4jBH? ) retained perman- 
ently. Yet simple ^^ as it is, it affects 
every year of life as long as the person remains on earth. It 
also affects old age and its unnecessary decrepitude. 

Two laws are at work in the face, as reflections of the trend of 
the mind : 

1 . When the face drifts into a concentric shape, lack of 
personal magnetism is not only indicated, but is made so 
apparent that any person, even a non-expert, may read the fact. 

2. When the face drifts away from a concentric shape, the 
presence of personal magnetism is not only indicated, but the 
face gradually becomes interesting and attractive to all be- 
holders. 

We use the word " drifts " to indicate the tendency of the 
body to give way to the influence of habits that are both bad 
and unpleasing. Left to itself it goes wrong at all times. 

To use plain language, the face drifts into a concentric shape 
when its muscles draw towards its centre, not only from the 
sides, but also from the upper and lower parts. All concentric 
tendencies of the face denote kinship with the lower forms of 
creation ; with the beast and the brute. The forehead seeks, 
apparently, to come down as if to meet the chin ; and the chin 

108 



THEVITALEYE 109 

seems to rise to meet the forehead. But the most noticeable 
drifting is that of the sides of the face towards the central line. 
By this action one, two or three lines form just above the nose 
between the eyebrows, and we say that the bro^ is knitted. 

When the scalp moves forward towards the eyes, and the 
eyebrows move upward towards the scalp, the result is a cor- 
rugated forehead, in which several lines almost parallel appear. 
These lines denote some form of weakness, either mental or 
emotional. Worry gradually raises the eyebrows, and in 
proportion as they rise the mental condition of worry increases. 
People who go about constantly with raised brows carry 
with them the sign of giving way to adverse control of some 
kind, which is the opposite of magnetism. Likewise the lower- 
ing of the scalp indicates some form of trouble. 

This part of the face is strongest when the eyebrows are as 
low as possible without the concentrating of the face between 
them known as the knitted brows. The combination can be 
cultivated by care. Often it is the result of weather exposure, 
and of light shining in the face ; and still more often of a 
peevish and fretful disposition in which the face is screwed out 
of shape to suit the character of the moods. These are 
evidences of weakness. 

The scalp has certain muscles by which it can be moved if 
a person is able once to find them and to start them moving. 
The temples also have muscles by which they can be moved. 
These different muscles are constantly employed by persons 
who knit the brows, and by others who wrinkle the forehead. 
In both movements, the action is involuntary, but not naturally 
so. It is made so thoughtlessly. 

One of the stimulating exercises is that which knits the brows, 
bringing them together at the top of the nose, and then unknits 
them. If you can knit them, you can as readily unknit them. 
The way of doing this is by the rebound of the muscle. Stand 
or sit before a mirror for the practice. Knit the brows, and 
watch them form the vertical lines above the nose ; but 
instantly unknit them by reversing the direction of the temple 
muscles. ^Everybody can do this at the first trial. 

The next step is to extend the rebound at every effort. This 
is done by knitting the brows ; then unknit them in the 
rebound, making the effort slightly more decisive on each reverse 



no INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

action. Keep on doing this in one or more sessions daily until 
you can unknit the muscles by a pulling action that stretches 
the part of the face above the nose into a smoothness that 
contains no evidence of the vertical lines. Of course this result 
is not to be reached in a very short time. No matter if it takes 
weeks or months to be accomplished, its value is so great that 
it is worth all the time and effort devoted to it. 

But very soon the phase called practice will have passed, 
and the better phase known as habit will be entered upon. 

As soon as you are able at will to unknit the brows until the 
space between them above the nose is perfectly smooth, then 
adopt this action as a habit following all through the waking 
hours. Put it into action the first thing in the morning before 
you rise from bed ; carry it as a companion all day long ; and 
when falling asleep at night, hold the temple muscles tightly 
drawn away from the eyes. In this way the concentric tendency 
is soon destroyed. 

The vertical lines between the eyes above the nose may be 
so deeply indented that they cannot be smoothed out. In this 
case, massage must accompany the unknitting of the brows ; 
as the temple muscles pull back from the eyes, rub a cold cream, 
or better still some cocoa butter against the deep indentations, 
pressing and rubbing by turns as if trying to iron them out. 
This massage rubbing is best done in eight directions ; right, left, 
up, down, up diagonally to the right, then to the left, down 
diagonally to the right and finally to the left. We have seen 
many cases of very deep indentations completely rubbed out, 
and that part of the face become smooth and take on the 
appearance of youth, as if many years had suddenly dropped 
from the person. In one class, more than two hundred students 
of more than middle age accomplished this result in a few 
months ; and several thousand in a single year did so without 
one failure in their number. 

But massage alone will not do the work. In the first place 
it will not pull the temple muscles back to the positions of 
youth. Then it will lack the essential benefits of stimulating 
the eyes themselves. 

The crow's-feet or thin lines at the corner of the eyes close 
to the temples are also eliminated. Thus we get rid of three 
sets of old-age wrinkles ; the forehead lines, the knitted brows, 



THE VITAL EYE ill 

and the crow's-feet ; all of which accompany old age. Many 
women make long and painstaking efforts to get rid of these 
wrinkles by massage and by manipulation in the beauty 
parlour ; but they never succeed in removing the actual posi- 
tions of the muscles that attend old age. The old-age positions 
still remain, and all that massage accomplishes is to cover them 
over, not eradicate them. 

The habit that we teach is the actual condition of YOUTH. 

We set the clock back twenty to forty years. 

Massage is beneficial, but rarely necessary after the face has 
once been smoothed out by controlling the muscles. Let us 
see if we can make this clear. In youth the forehead muscles 
are rarely ever concentric ; if so, they are abnormal and unusual, 
indicating a morbid mind or nervous system. In youth the 
temple muscles are never concentric when conditions are 
normal. In youth the side-muscles at the outer edge of each 
eye do not close up, as they appear to do later in life. 

It is an old law of human nature that conditions that are 
natural in youth invite the mental and nervous conditions of 
youth, if they can be resumed. As the normal positions of these 
three sets of muscles are natural to youth, the reinstating of 
them invites the mental and nervous conditions of youth. 
Massage never does this. The plastering on of cream and the 
creating of a coating of a temporary character on the cuticle 
itself does not restore a single position of the facial muscles, 
and does not invite any of the spirit of youth into the coun- 
tenance. A pupil who has graduated from the beauty -parlour 
treatment shows an unnatural face, because all the fine lines 
and delicate lineaments have been obliterated. 

There are still other reasons why the muscles must be made 
to do their own work and to get the face back to the condition 
of actual youth. 

The most recent science tells us that the countless billions of 
atoms of which the body is composed are charged, each and 
every one of them, with inherent or native magnetism, the 
presence of which is necessary to hold together their electrons, 
and to maintain a sort of solar system in which a central orb 
exerts an influence over its satellites, and the latter in turn by 
the magnetism of a force akin to that known as centripetal, 
keep their distance from the ruling orb. Also we are told that 



112 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

each atom holds a mighty pent-up power that, if let loose, 
would destroy matter vastly greater than its size. All these 
engines of force and energy are coming into the body in countless 
billions daily, serving their mission of making and maintaining 
life, and passing out to join the great fund from which they 
were drawn. 

All this magnetism is known as diffused power. 

It is scattered throughout the body. 

This is recognized by all scientists as the basis of a higher use 
than that which has yet been drawn from it. In order to under- 
stand how this higher use may come about, let us review the 
manner in which the vegetable cell that holds the germ of 
intelligence is made by Nature to collect these scattered forms 
of intelligence into a collective mass, which is called the brain, 
and by which the animal is created from the plant. 

In the same way the diffused or scattered presence of mag- 
netism in the countless atoms of the body is drawn collectively 
into ganglia, or nerve centres, and into the brain or greatest of 
all nerveTcentres. When the process of collecting this magnetism 
is carried forward to greater results, there is present in the 
body a much more active fund of magnetism. When the 
collective fund known as brain-power is united with the 
increased fund of magnetism, the result is personal magnetism. 

Any action that will excite the generation of magnetism will 
increase the stored up fund of this power. Any faculty that is 
favoured by an exciting cause in this line will be greatly 
intensified. The human eye is located in the midst of vast funds 
of magnetism, small as things are considered, but great when 
related to the uses of the eye. The stimulating of the blood-flow 
in the direction of the eye will bring countless billions of new 
atoms to that organ, all of which will contribute their magnetism 
to it, and so establish the magnetic power of the eye. 

The furrowed brow is not attractive and is not necessary. 

The knitted brow is not attractive and is not necessary. 



LESSON NINETEEN 

THE POWERFUL EYE 

SINCE IT IS ACKNOWLEDGED that the methods 
of magnetic communication between human beings 
are limited to the senses in open expression of influence, 
and since the eye is the agent of the most generally used 
sense next to that of the sound of the voice, we are giving 
the most thorough instruction possible in the development of 
the powers of this -^a8^ organ. But, as has 
been said in the ^gj^^^^^B^I preceding lesson, 
every step in the ^ ^^?j^k \ trailing ^ as brought 
many other benefits ^il^^Hlr ) than those called 
magnetic. The --^ present lesson will 

be shown to be the most important example of this fact. 

Except where disease or some form of poison has reached 
the eyes and produced injury, the loss of perfect sight is always 
traceable to a sameness of muscular use, or unvaried activity 
of sight. 

The routine use of any faculty puts it in a rut, and tends to 
make it grow stale. The same uses day after day of the eye 
bring about defective sight, and weaken its organic vigour. 
Speaking in a general way, the eyeball is nearly round. It is 
movable. There are muscles that enable it to move in many 
directions ; but they are not the same muscles in every action, 
nor are the same muscles always employed in the same kind of 
movement, if all their possible motions are used. Thus there 
are muscles that enable the eyeball to be pulled to the right ; 
others to be pulled to the left ; others to be pulled upward ; 
others to be pulled downward ; and also in oblique and diagonal 
directions. In a preceding lesson we referred to the meanings of 
the positions of the eyelids as helps to a magnetic person in 
reading the purposes and intentions of others, and getting close 
to the contents of their minds. 

8 113 



114 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

In this lesson we seek to develop the studying power of the 
observing eye, and to enable it to read the plans and purposes 
of others with greater ease and effectiveness. 

In order to do this we propose to draw more blood, more 
nutrition, and more magnetic energy to the eye itself, by the 
stimulating action of the muscles that we have described on 
the preceding page. We start on the basic law that the same 
kind of routine activity especially of the eyes, will cause them to 
weaken, to lose their focus, and to flatten. When the eyeball 
begins to flatten, then we need glasses. When the sight weakens 
from the constant repetition of one kind of muscular action, the 
sight grows dim. Here are two distinct results. Dimness of 
vision is due to the weakness of the eye-power. Loss of focus 
is due to flattening of the eyeball. The vision is getting worse 
all the time, just as it would if you were to use glasses that were 
fitted to your needs, and the lenses were to be changed for those 
that were flat. 

One kind of use of the muscles that move the eyeballs tends 
to flatten them. This refers to movements of action. But one 
kind of use of the eyes in reading, or in looking at objects, 
weakens the eye-power. This fact has been verified in the past 
five years, and even given prominent attention by specialists 
of a high order of experimentation, with results that we are to 
include herein as means not only to strengthen the eye but to 
add to its magnetic quality for reading the meanings in the 
faces and minds of other persons. Let us see what they are. 

There are nine eye-directions, and these are brought about 
by the varying action of the muscles. In these activities we 
overcome the tendency of the eyes to flatten. In fact we have 
in more than eleven thousand cases overcome flattened eyeballs 
by these nine movements. We will repeat the causes of eye- 
flattening again, in order to drive home the importance of this 
part of the training : 

The same routine use of the eyes, which we have called one 
kind of use of the muscles that move them, leads to flattening 
and the loss of focus, necessitating glasses~o^luriSF""the 
rotundity that flattening has destroyed. But if the nine 
muscle-actions are employed either as exercises or as habits, 
which latter method is feasible in daily life, the eyeballs will be 
pulled out of their flattened condition ; for the pulling of the 



THE POWERFUL EYE 115 

muscles in one direction overcomes a part of the flattening, and 
the pulling of opposite muscles will overcome another part, and 
so on, making the circuit of movements. But if one direction 
only is employed in this pulling, the eyeball will be given a bad 
shape and thereby rendered weak. 

Muscles that surround a flexible ball, if all are in turn pulling 
on the ball, will give it the required or natural shape, exactly 
the form that Nature intended for it, and gave it at birth. The 
fact that it is flexible leads to its being flattened by one line 
of activity in its muscles. It is the all-round activity, exerting 
its power on every portion of the eyeball, that gives it the 
natural shape it had during youth. 

This part of the instruction has appeared in all the late 
editions of this book ; and, as we have said, our records show 
more than eleven thousand cases where flattened eyeballs have 
had their rotundity restored by the use of the circuit movement 
which we will present in this lesson. This relates solely to the 
flattened condition and its^cure. / But the other phase of our 
instruction, relating to one kind of use of the eyes in reading is 
another thing, and the science and practice that will appear in 
the next lesson are just being given attention in order to 
avoid the unnecessary use of glasses. 

We trust that you will keep this distinction in mind. 

Then also remember that there is a difference between the 
nine eye-movements, and the nine e^e -positions, which we will 
discuss later. 

The nine eye-movements are employed to overcome the 
flattened condition of the eyeballs, and to restore their natural 
rotundity. These results take time, but are worth a thousand 
times more than the cost of this entire study, even if there is no 
intention of developing eye -magnetism by them. 

While there may be many other finer directions of eye- 
movements than the nine we now present, this number is 
sufficient for the purpose for which they are prepared. We 
will describe them as follows : 

1. Look straight ahead, neither to the right or left, nor up 
or down. This is the Number One position. You can stand or 
sit ; but it is better to be at one side of the room so that you 
have the whole of the opposite wall facing you. In this case, 
ascertain what part of that wall, or what object on it, exactly 



Ii6 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

meets the direction of the eye when you are looking straight 
ahead, and at something that is in a position level with the 
height of your eye. We use the word eye as generative, meaning 
gaze, 

2. The second position is on a level with the first, but refers 
to an object on your left as far toward the corner of the wall 
as you can look without moving your head. If you move the 
head at all, the eye loses a part of its range. 

3. The third position is on a level with the first, but refers 
to an object on your right as far toward the corner of the wall 
as you can look without moving your head. Make the eyes do 
thejwhole^work . 

4. The fourth position is down to the floor directly in front 
of you and is under the first position. Drop the gaze as low as 
you can in a vertical direction without lowering the head. 

5. The fifth position is down to the floor as far to the left as 
you can move the gaze, and as low down at the same time. 

6. The sixth position is down to the floor as far to the 
right as you can move the gaze, and as low down at the same 
time. 

7. The seventh position is up to the ceiling directly in front 
over the first position, as far upward as you can move the 
gaze without moving thejiead. 

8. The eighth position is up to the ceiling as far to the left as 
you can move the gaze and keep the head still. 

9. The ninth position is up to the ceiling as far to the right 
as you can move the gaze and keep the head still. 

CAUTION. The first time you try these movements do 
them only once or twice. Every athlete knows that muscles 
that have not been used, or if used that have not been given 
certain kinds of action, will become sore from the strain, no 
matter how slight it may be. This soreness will lead to a lame- 
ness that will be painful. Remember that in the training 
camps, the managers of athletes insist that they start slowly in 
order to spare their muscles from pain. In the eye-movements 
the first few trials should be very limited. After a while, as the 
atcion is repeated, all danger of soreness will pass. 

These are not eye-positions. 

The latter will have their usefulness. But for the purposes of 
this lesson, the muscles must be made to pull the eyeball in all 



THE POWERFUL EYE II? 

possible directions, in order to bring back its shape in the degree 
of rotundity intended by Nature. 

Movements should be made by opposites. 

Thus, beginning at the first position, move to the second, then 
to the first, then to the second, then to the first, &$& tflU 
times. 

Then move from the first to the third, then to the first, then to 
the third, each ten times. 

Next move from the second to the third, then from the third 
to the second, each ten times. Ttese constitute the level 
movements./ 

Begin now at the fourth gosition and move to the fifth, then 
to the fourth, each ten times. 

Then from the fourth to the sixth, and from the sixth to the 
fourth, each ten times. 

Then from the fifth to the sixth, and from the sixth to the 
fifth, each ten times. These complete the lower movements./ 

Now move from thejeventh position to the eighth, and from 
the eighth to the seventh, each ten times. 

Next move from the seventh position to the ninth, and from 
the ninth to the seventh, each ten times. 

Now move from the eighth position to the ninth, and from 
the ninth to the eighth, each ten times. These complete the 
upper movements./ 

It will be noticed that all the foregoing movements are right 
and left. There are nine others that are up and down as follows. 

Begin at the first position, raise the eyes to the seventh, and 
back to the first, each ten times. 

Begin at the first position, move the gaze to the fourth 
which is directly under it, and back to the first, each ten times. 

Begin at the fourth position, raise the gaze to the seventh, 
and back to the fourth, each ten times. These complete the 
middle up and down movements. 

Begin at the second position, raise the gaze to the eighth, 
and back to the second, each ten times. 

Begin at the second position, lower the gaze to the fifth, and 
raise it to the second, each ten times. 

Begin at the fifth position, raise the gaze to the eighth, lower 
it to the fifth, each ten times. These complete the left up and 
down movements. 



Ii8 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Begin at the third position, raise the gaze to the ninth, and 
go back to the third, each ten times. 

Begin at the third position, drop the gaze to the sixth, back 
to the third, and do each ten times. 

Begin with the sixth position, raise the gaze to the ninth, go 
back to the sixth, and do each ten times. These complete the 
right up and down movements./ 

We now come to the diagonals, which are the most effective 
in pulling the eyeball back into its normal rotundity. 

Begin at the fifth position, raise the gaze up to the right to 
the ninth position, then back to the fifth, and do each twenty 
times ; but do not start any of these until the preceding move- 
ments have all been done a sufficient number of times to harden 
the muscles. 

Begin at the sixth position, raise the gaze up to the left to 
the eighth position, then back to the sixth, and repeat each 
twenty times, observing the caution just given. 

Make your own chart of positions by numbers, which is very 
easy to do, and place it in front of you for reference. If you 
do not care to make the chart, then write the following numbers 
each about two inches apart on a piece of paper : 

On the upper row 879 

On the middle row 213 
On the lower row 546 

These numbers placed before the eye will serve in the place 
of a chart. 

After you once learn these movements they can be made at 
any time and almost anywhere, in the dark as well as in the 
light. The whole idea is to stretch the eye-muscles, meaning 
those that control the pulling about of the eyeball, in a series 
of opposite directions. It may require some time to overcome 
the flattened condition of the eyeballs, but persistent practice 
will bring surprising changes and restore the natural shape. 

If the necessity for wearing glasses is due, as is commonly 
the case, to the loss of shape in the eyes, these movements wiU 
in time enable the person so afflicted to lay aside the glasses 
permanently. To encourage our students to engage in this 
practice, we include in this lesson some statements taken from 



THEKEENEYE 123 

of magnetic units, all of which bring to the eye a very great 
increase of power. 

This result is quickly observed. 

In this lesson we deal with the eyeball itself as an organ 
equipped with constructive muscles that are endowed with the 
ability to change the focus by changing the shape of the ball 
within itself, as distinguished from the action of the outer 
muscles that pull it in all directions in order to restore its lost 
form. 

Thus we have three groups of influences working to make the 
eye a much greater organ in every way. 

The present lesson may be omitted if it is too uninteresting, 
for the development of magnetism does not depend on this 
practice. It merely is one of the causes that help materially. 
It does a very useful work in restoring the eye -power of youth 
and thereby enabling one to dispense with the wearing of 
glasses. 

It also brings a new fire and brilliancy into the eyes, which 
quickly attracts attention from other persons. 

A partial use of this practice, while not doing away with 
the wearing of glasses, will assuredly save a person from 
continually increasing the magnifying power of lenses as age 
comes on. In fact it will avert any further ageing of the vision ; 
and by partial practice alone. 

A successful eye-specialist recommends the practice daily of 
reading coarse type, and instantly changing to fine type, then 
back to coarse, and so alternate many times at each session of 
exercising the eyes. While no results may be noticed for some 
days or even for a few weeks, in time the eye will become much 
stronger, and its power and keenness will have increased many- 
fold. 

A climacteric step may be taken now by adopting the tense 
action of the eye in conjunction with the tense use of the voice. 
At just this stage will the eye become fired with great fervour, 
keenness and magnetic life. 
Your friends will notice a remarkable change in you. 



LESSON TWENTY-ONE 

THE FIRE OF THE EYE 

A! A FITTING CLIMAX to this interesting and valuable 
series of lessons on the power of the eye as an agent 
of magnetism, we come to the union of the voice 
with the action of the organ of vision. In other words, 
the two may at times work together in the uses of the 
newly acquired power. What is meant by intensity or fire of 
any part of the body ~^^^^K^ * s ^at ^^ ere * s sum ~ 
moned by the act of jjP^^^^^I* the will the accum- 
ulated fund of mag- pr* jfj^T^^ \ netism, and by some 
method of use it is '**$&^3Sjr ' given outward mani- 
festation. Thus the ~~^ eye itself may be 
fixed upon a person while the whole body is fired with intense 
feeling which may be assumed at will, and the eye will 
glow by reason of it. Some persons call this glow a phosphor- 
escence of the nervous system ; others believe it to be electricity. 
It is neither. It is magnetism, which is not electricity nor 
phosphorus. We shall prove later that it is pure magnetism. 

The facts that are presented in this lesson have been accumu- 
lating through many years, although based on experiments 
made nearly half a century ago and put to the test in many 
ways since, and thus amply proved. 

The results have been pleasing and convincing, while highly 
beneficial to all concerned. 

This glow that flows from the eyes may be increased at will 
to almost any condition, after a little practice ; provided all 
the foregoing exercises in this section of the book have been 
given due attention. It is not possible to jump forward in any 
progressive course, and attain results. Each lesson paves the 
way for its successor. 

In experimenting in a darkened room with this glow of the 

124 



THEFIREOFTHEEYE 125 

eye, we have witnessed lines of fire proceeding far into the 
room when the eye has been made tense by the will-power. 

This glow is never seen in a lighted place for the reason that 
it is not bright enough ; hence we do not regard it as electric. 
But the eye itself may be made not only bright, but actually 
brilliant if the use of it is accompanied by some words that 
have meaning akin to the position taken by the eye. Most 
persons who. are magnetic show nothing of the kind when they 
are in a state of normal mental action ; but let them become 
interested in the achievement of some purpose, and the whole 
eye-formation changes ; the upper face is different ; and power 
stands expressed in every lineament. 

We therefore refer to the magnetic eye as that organ in a 
state of action or seeking some purpose. In repose we do not 
call it the magnetic eye. But these are mere terms that have no 
real bearing on the power itself. 

Any faculty may be made tense by concentrating on it the 
energy of the mind. Thoughts themselves become fire at times. 
Feelings are aflame either by design or under great stress. 
Control them, harness them, drive them, guide them and compel 
them to do your bidding. 

The magnetic eye is always tense. 

There is here opportunity for a volume on a single subject. 
The eye sees and is seen. The sense it embodies is the most 
important of all. A deaf person can compel the eye to perform 
some of the functions of hearing, just as a blind person uses the 
sense of touch with greater delicacy and power. When a person 
speaks to another the latter gets some of the meaning from the 
eye. It is not only natural but common to look into the eye to 
see the individual. All persons in an audience look at the 
speaker's eye whenever he interests them ; in dull moments only 
they are attracted to some other part of the body, some 
peculiarity, or some matter that distracts attention. 

The magnetic person generally holds attention by the power 
of the eye when there is a direct effort made towards one or 
more others ; but the latter will have no consciousness of such 
influence. The tensing of the eye comes out of the same power 
as the touch or voice when either is magnetic. All energy is 
vibrant. The muscles are controlled by waves of force ; sound 
is likewise propelled ; so is light ; so is thought ; and magnetism 



126 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

moves by a similar law. Each has its origin, its source of 
supply, and its method of transfer ; and, above all, each has its 
kind of pulsation. We never mistake light for sound. When 
science shall have laid bare the secrets of life it will be known 
what the difference is between alf these energies. 

The use of the tense eye changes every part of the face by 
some strange law of our natures. It also invites a glow into the 
eye itself that even the photograph will record. This special 
brightness is due to the electrical energy which is aroused by 
the tensed condition. This does not arise in the eyeball, but 
has its origin in the brain, which is the most powerful electric 
battery of its size in existence ; so that the tensing of the latter 
organ is the real cause of it. We have for years used a plan of 
shifting locations which we find to be the best method of tensing 
the brain and eye. We present this arrangement here in a 
different light from any elsewhere given. We take the nine 
locations of the eyes from a former plan, as follows : 

879 

up left. up front. up right. 

213 
level left. straight ahead. level right. 

546 
down left. down front. down right. 

The first practice is to look (1) at some imaginary person 
whose eyes are directly in front of you and on a level with your 
eyes, adopting a dead-still body all through, but holding the 
eyes two seconds only in fixed gaze. * 

From one (1) change to two r (2), which means to move the 
gaze to the left lateral, but do, not wink or move a muscle of the 
face. Hold the gaze at two (2) for the same space of time, two 
seconds. 

Then come back to one (1) and hold the gaze for two seconds. 

From one (1) change to three (3), and hold the gaze dead- 
still for two seconds. So continue through all positions. 

While holding the eyes in the positions indicated by the 
numbers, repeat the following remarks with their full meaning 
stamped in your tones : 

When the eyes are at one (1) repeat : " / am talking to you 



THEFIREOFTHEEYE 127 

and you must hear me." Let the voice be low clear and firm, 
even severe. 

When the eyes are at two (2) repeat : " You cannot escape 
me." The words should be spoken in deep tones as though some 
person were planning to get beyond your influence. Remember 
that the face is to remain to the front and no part must move 
except the eyes themselves. 

When the eyes are at three (3) repeat : " Beware ! Do not 
make me angry " 

When the eyes* are at four (4) repeat : " I will not do wrong" 

When the eyes are at five (5) repeat : " Get thee behind me, 
Satan" 

When the eyes are at six (6) repeat : " I am stronger than my 
enemies" 

When the eyes are at seven (7) repeat : " Thou God seest me" 

When the eyes are at eight (8) repeat : " Right is mighty and 
will prevail " 

When the eyes are at nine (9) repeat : " Angels hold watch 
and ward over my life" 

The first few repetitions may be mental, continuing them until 
the spirit of the sentiment in connection with the positions shall 
be absorbed, after which it is better to use the voice aloud. 
Get familiar with the locations as belonging to the sentiments 
uttered. 

In repeating them aloud, speak the sentiment once ; then 
come back to the central position one (1). 

After five days' practice in the above lines, repeat each 
sentiment five times aloud while holding the eyes fixed in 
whatever position they take, and go through them all. 

After five more days in the last-named practice, repeat each 
sentiment ten times in the position to which it belongs. 

The success in tensing the eyes will depend upon the tone- 
colour in your voice. An actor could easily accomplish this 
end at once. You may have to keep at it for weeks, but the 
power will come sooner or later, and, once come, it always 
remains. 



LESSON TWENTY-TWO 

MAGNETIC EYE OF YOUTH 

MORE MAGNETISM is constantly being generated in 
a young person than in one who is mature or aged ; 
but vastly more is being lost by excessive waste. 
For the latter reason we do not think of youth as 
magnetic. If, however, we can retain the power that the young 
person develops daily, and turn it to use, we can quickly make 
ourselves felt in -*^^Mi^^~~ human affairs. But 
as youth is not able >gl^ ^^5*fik to hold its magnet- 
ism, all that we can ? Jj^^^ \ learn of its abundant 
fund of vital energy '**S&&^Jjj& ) is how it comes about 
and how to conserve ^^ it. On this theory 

we will take youth as an age and condition of excessive 
energy, and omit its excessive waste, as applied to the con- 
ditions of those who have reached more mature years. 

The vitality of youth has often been mistaken for magnetism, 
but health, vigour and physical power seem to intrude them- 
selves in the place of magnetism and to hold it in check. These 
qualities are never magnetic. 

In a preceding lesson in this Department we have discussed 
the action of smoothing the forehead, and the sides of the eyes 
and face, and making this condition a permanent habit. There 
is a law that is old and yet new. It says : " Restoring a youth 
condition will restore the condition of youth" 

It does not seem to mean much as it is worded. But the term 
condition has two significations. The first is the physical change 
that is wrought in the body, as where the facial^muscles are made 
to assume the same smoothness as is present in a young person. 
This is the restoring of the physical condition that was evident 
in former years in the face. The return of such shape as 
prevailed at an earlier stage in life, acts upon the mental and 
psychological nature of the person in such a way as to stimulate 



MAGNETIC EYE OF YOUTH 129 

the feeling and characteristics of youth. The law is an old 
one, and has been proved in a number of ways. 

If we can bring back the vitality of youth we can bring back 
the excessive abundance of magnetism that attends youth. 
Then, instead of allowing it to run to waste, we need only 
conserve it in order to make it useful . 

This facial change has been so thoroughly taught in the 
lessons of this Department of the Magnetic Eye that we shall 
not deal further with it. 

There are several other influences or conditions that belong to 
youth that may be restored by very little attention, if only they 
are known. The next most important is the exciting cause of 
vigorous blood circulation that exists in the medulla oblongata. 
As words of this character are not readily understood by the 
average reader, we will call this little master of life by the name 
of the Third Brain. It is the upper part of the spinal column. 
The first TbraSTSoes much of the voluntary thinking ; the second 
brain attends to the involuntary life of the body and the 
muscular system, sometimes obeying the mandates of the 
first brain. 

But life must go on when there is no thinking and no muscular 
activity ; for the human body must breathe, must carry on 
the circulation of the blood, and must proceed with digestion, 
whether of the contents of the stomach or of the intestines. 
Breathing is always taking place. The blood is always circu- 
lating. Digestion never ceases unless the entire alimentary 
canal is empty, which is very rare. More than half the nutrition 
that comes from food is derived from the process of intestinal 
digestion. Patients are often fed by injections at the colon. 

This Third Brain attends to all these functions : 

Digestion. 

Circulation. 

Respiration. 

We are not intending to teach increased breathing. That is 
taught in many forms and for many health purposes ; and our 
students should by this time have established a greater range of 
respiration. But we are going to show that the influence of the 
Third Brain, which alone maintains natural respiration, can be 
employed to vitalize all breathing which mere practice in the 



130 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

exercises will never do. It is not more air that the lungs need, 
if they are receiving a full supply ; it is vital air that brings new 
life and with it the magnetism that the body requires. 

By reaching this Third Brain with any instrument that 
interferes with its work as controller of respiration, digestion and 
circulation, it is possible to immediately stop the heart from 
beating ; or to stop all digestion ; or to paralyse the lung-action. 
This has been done, and can be done as often as the Third Brain 
is interfered with .Jf In the thinking brain, the pressure on a 
certain part of the skull, forcing it into the convolutions of that 
organ, may deprive the person of the power of memory ; or 
may cause loss of speech ; or do other injury, depending on what 
part of the brain the injury falls./ So injury or shock of a severe 
kind that reaches the Second Brain may paralyse the arm, or the 
leg, or side. Sometimes temporary paralysis is due to a pressure 
that, if relieved, will cause the return of the normal condition. 

Not only does the Third Brain absolutely and completely 
control respiration, but it controls also circulation and digestion. 
As we have stated, digestion occurs not only in the stomach, 
but in the entire canal, including its adjacent parts, and the 
intricate arrangement of aids that are found near to the stomach 
itself. Diabetes is caused by interference of a chronic kind with 
this out-of-the-stomach digestion ; whether by the extreme irri- 
tation of too much sugar, starch or other carbon form of food, 
or by a blow on the back^of the jaeck which has permanently 
injured the Third Brain which is located there. In fact there 
are thousands of cases of diabetes arising every decade from 
blows on the neck, which are cured only by curing the injury 
at the Third Brain. Worry, which is a mental trouble that 
depresses all three brains, has caused many cases of diabetes. 

Injury to this small Third Brain arising from accident will 
interfere with one of the three functions. If respiration suffers, 
then quick tuberculosis takes the victim away. If circulation 
suffers, then anaemia follows. If digestion suffers, it is generally 
in the intestinal canal as stated. 

We have gone thoroughly into the study of the functions 
depending on this Third Brain in order to impress on the student 
its importance in the plan of life. We shall now apply it to 
the development of magnetism. It does not require an astute 
mind to see that the involuntary functions of digestion, 



MAGNETIC EYE OF YOUTH 131 

respiration and circulation are in reality the WHOLE LIFE of 
the human body ; and that this very small section at the back 
of the neck that ends that part of the spinal column, plays the 
greatest part in not only sustaining life but^in ^generating its 
vital powers, and especially in bringing into activity as well as 
existence all its magnetism. 

But what is to be done about it ? 

It is there well encased in bone, and may not be reached 
except by some fine pointed instrument, or by a blow, or by a 
strain ; rarely by a fracture, in which case the chances of 
survival are too small to be considered. 

But the entire spinal column, endowed as it is with the 
controlling power over various parts of the body, which acts as 
aids to the Third Brain, is composed of small sections, making an 
electric pile from the base of the torso to the head, charged and 
supercharged with constantly forming magnetism, and these 
small sections of bone are tied together with nerves and muscles, 
and between them are small pads of flexible material ; the whole 
structure being capable of being bent to the right, to the left, to 
the back, to the front, and in a vertical direction. 

When we bend the body to the righ, this column is flexible 
enough to shape itself into a curve ; and when we bend to the 
left, the curve is changed to the opposite direction. When we 
bend back there is a new curve ; and when we bend forward 
this is reversed. 

The boy or girl who is normal is as straight as it is possible to 
be ; but with reading and leaning over a book or paper, the 
forward curve begins to show, and the body seems to be bent 
at the shoulders, until later in life this stooping and the craning 
of the neck tell the story of advancing age. Yet all persons in 
the fifties, with few exceptions, are bent at the upper back ; 
some are bent when much younger ; but no person who is above 
the age of thirty is free from some shrinking of the spinal column. 

The small bones that form the spinal column are cushioned, 
and so separated from each other. This cushioning and the 
complex interweaving of nerves and muscles are much more 
marked at the Third Brain, and the flexibility much more 
pronounced. 

If you will make a mental picture of your torso, which is the 
part of the body between the neck and the legs, and if you will 



132 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

find mentally the average central line of the torso, you will 
soon understand what is to follow. Imagine that there is a 
centre to the neck at its base or where it joins the trunk or torso. 
Imagine that there is another centre at the lower part of the 
torso, which centre would be in the middle position between 
the right and left hips and the front and back. Now imagine 
that a vertical line runs from one centre to the other ; that it is 
not only perfectly straight but that it is plumb, or at right- 
angles with the floor, or parallel with the side wall of the room. 

This is the carriage of the torso at all times, if you wish the 
vitality of youth. 

Now we must find two more centres. One is the same as our 
first, which was at the base of the neck, bringing it in the 
throat back of the larynx or Adam's apple. The other centre is 
at the top of the head midway between the front and back and 
between the two sides. These centres must unite so that a line 
running between them would be vertical. 

Now unite the two vertical lines. 

This will make the imaginary line that runs from the centre 
of the lower part of the torso extend to the centre of the top of 
the head. 

Every curve in the spine, shoulders or neck interferes with 
the flow of blood and the flow of the nerve vitality or magnetism, 
through those important controlling agencies of life. You may 
press against your arm and stop the flow of blood. But you 
may also press against a nerve in the arm, and put the lower 
part to sleep. By sitting in a certain position in a chair, as 
where the front edge of the chair presses against the nerves in 
the leg, you may put your foot to sleep, and may invite cramp 
in the legs. 

All curves more or less cause similar dangers. 

The flow of blood carries new magnetism-forming cells. 

The flow of the nerve currents carries the actual life of the 
body which includes all its magnetism. 

Any curvature of any part of the body that interferes with 
these flows lessens the energy and vitality of the currents so 
impeded ; as a curvature is more or less a shutting off of the 
avenues of travel. But the settling down of the bones that form 
the structure of the spine, and especially of the section known 
as the Third Brain, will likewise check the flow of magnetic 



MAGNETIC EYE OF YOUTH 133 

vitality to the functional centres of the body ; such as those of 
respiration, digestion and circulation. 

We have seen several pernicious cases of constipation 
immediately cured by skilful manipulation of the tog section 
of the spine or Third Brain. There are two great curative 
professions that employ such methods. 

We have seen severe cases of stomach indigestion cured by 
skilful manipulation of the same top section of the spine. 

But some few years ago a very widely known specialist in 
blood circulation and heart maladies made the assertion that 
the circulation of the blood was controlled by this top section 
of the spine to the extent that when sluggish circulation 
resulted in cold extremities, as of the feet and hands, he could 
overcome this trouble by stretching the muscles of the neck in 
such a way as to pull upon the Medulla or Third Brain ; explain- 
ing the process by saying : "It requires but slight adjustment 
of the upper spine to send a very powerful influence to the heart, 
thereby vitalizing its action and propelling a much more 
vigorous flow of blood to the feet and hands. This adjustment 
is made not by another person but by the manner in which the 
head is lifted. A distance so slight as to be almost unmeasurable 
will effect such results as we have witnessed/' 

The manner in which the head is lifted is the key to this 
process. 

Old age brings all kinds of curves to the spine, neck and 
shoulders. Youth is straight. Age is bent. Some people curve 
their backs so much when they get old that they must support 
themselves with canes when they walk, to prevent falling over. 

But standing straight is not enough. 

The centres that we have described must be kept in mind, 
and the vertical line must be kept perfectly plumb from the 
centre of the top of the headjto the J^entre^ bet ween^the^ hips. 
This is the preparation only. But let it be made into a habit, 
so that whether you are sitting or standing, the centres are 
maintained in a perfectly plumb line. It is a good habit. Mag- 
netism students, whether they are twenty or a hundred years 
old, will never forget this vertical line. They will never grow 
old to the beholder ; nor in their own feelings. 

Having learned to acquire the vertical line position, keeping 
the centre of the head always over the centre of the chest, and 



134 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

never craning the neck, the next thing is the important one ; 
that of pulling the top section of the spine, the Third Brain, into 
a stretched position. The manner in which this was done, as 
explained by the doctor, was to imagine that you could bring 
the top of the head slightly nearer the ceiling above by raising 
the head so as to stretch the neck. The new habit then is to 
keep the centres vertical and to carry the head so that its top 
seems to be trying to get nearer to the ceiling, thereby stretching 
the neck muscles, the nerves, and the medulla that controls 
circulation, as well as other functions. 

If you were to be told that stretching the upper spine would 
stimulate the heart, vitalize its action, and send warming blood 
to the hands and feet, thereby overcoming their cold feeling, 
you would not see in what way this action would bring so 
decided a result. For this reason we have explained it in 
detail. 

But the fact that concerns us is that it is done, and has been 
done to our knowledge hundreds of times. All that is necessary 
is to make the neck respond to the effort at stretching. 

We are not teaching any exercises in this lesson. 

The things we are setting forth are intended as habits. 

An exercise takes time. 

A habit takes no time at all. You can do things right just 
as quickly as do them wrong. 

If the Third Brain controls the circulation of the blood and 
gives to its flow a new vitality both of magnetism and of 
material that bears magnetism in its course, it must follow that 
it will, in thus restoring the conditions of youth, bring back the 
excessive power of youthful magnetism. 

Like all habits that are taught in this lesson, it is a good one 
in its influence on the individual in every department of life. 

Another habit that belongs to youth and that is lost about the 
time the man or woman is old enough to vote, is that of avoiding 
the exhaustion that comes from straining the spinal column, or 
irritating it. This habit is inborn, but quickly loses itself in the 
mass of bad methods that attach themselves to the coming 
adult age. It is that of keeping the strain away from the spine 
by not using the heels for receiving the weight of the body in 
walking. No one thinks of doing so when running. 

When the act of taking a step is performed by bringing the 



MAGNETIC EYE OF YOUTH 135 

weight down on the heel, a blow is struck to the spine that irri- 
tates it, and tends to exhaust its magnetism and the vitality of 
the general body. But it is not only this blow that is harmful ; 
there is a decided strain put upon the spine that is also irritating 
and exhausting ; both of which influences quickly sap the 
system of its stored up magnetism. 

In taking a step, keep the centre of gravity of the torso well 
forward without bending and without losing the vertical line 
that we have just taught. This will put the weight of the whole 
body on the ball of the foot, even if the heel touches the floor 
first in taking such a step. When walking in bare feet, the ball, 
of each foot should touch the ground first, but in wearing shoes I 
with heels, the heel may touch first without any weight going ; 
on it, or not more weight than enough to merely support it. 
Wearing heels that are more than an inch thick, or high, to 
use a misnomer, detracts from the power of generating mag- 
netism in walking. 

This is not an exercise ; it is a habit. It may not be easily 
adopted at first, but soon you will enjoy it, for it not only does 
away with the irritation and exhaustion of heel-walking, but on 
the other hand it stores up considerable magnetism. We know 
of many cases where men and women could not walk half a 
mile without becoming tired, who now can walk six miles and 
feel refreshed in so doing. 

Thus far we have found three new habits that, while they 
generate magnetism, also bring new conditions to the body and 
improve it vastly. 

Another habit that has been much written about must be 
considered in this training. It is the collapse of the neck and of 
the vital muscles. When the neck muscles weaken, the head is 
carried forward. This is a position of age, of feebleness of mind 
and body, and of exhaustion of magnetism. When the vital 
muscles weaken, the chest falls in, the heart sags, the stomach 
drops, and the intestines are lowered. 

In women this collapse of the vital muscles brings on pro- 
lapsus, which is a never-ceasing enemy of magnetism. It can, 
however, be cured by vitalizing the vital muscles. This is done 
not by exercises, but by habits. We have promised not to give 
any exercises in this lesson, and we are keeping our word. 
Exercises take time. Habits require no time at all ; for they are 



136 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

merely ways of living. The process by which the collapse of the 
vital muscles is cured by new habits is as follows : 

First, ascertain if your chest falls down when you are sitting. 
If it does, raise it as high as you can without raising the 
shoulders, for they must never rise, never be thrown back, 
never come forward. Keep them in a central position, force 
them down and raise the chest as high as you can. Then hold it 
there. Hold it there when you are eating, when you are reading, 
when you are writing, when you are walking, when you are in 
train or car, and always everywhere. 

In the above manner you can overcome the first collapse of 
your vital muscles. 

Next, ascertain if your abdomen projects forward. If it does, 
pull it in. Not with your hands, but by its own muscles. If 
they will not do this, then help them with your hands for a 
while ; but soon they will be strong enough to do the pulling 
themselves. Then make them do it. In a very short time, they 
will attend to this matter as a habit, and that is what you 
want. 

All athletes, all normal young persons, all strong and vital 
men and women overcome the collapse of these vital muscles. 
That condition causes old age and leads rapidly to decrepitude 
besides resulting in badly misshapen bodies and gross appear- 
ances, all repugnant to the eye and not creditable to the person 
so afflicted. We are sorry to say that more than ninety per cent 
of all persons above twenty -five years of age are victims of 
collapsed vital muscles. 

Thus the good work goes on. These new habits increase 
the natural flow of magnetism, send much new and vigorous 
nerve-power to the eye, and so fire it with YOUTH. One of 
the first results in a better heart-action, and of decreasing 
irritation to the nervous system, is the brighter and more youth- 
ful glow of the eye. As new life comes to the brain and all the 
faculties, the eye is the first to respond. 

By the term, The Magnetic Eye of Youth, we teach that the 
vital habits of youth if restored and conserved against waste 
living will give unusual health, vigour, brightness and brilliance 
to the eyes, which are the gauge that indicates perfectly how 
much magnetism has been developed in the body. 



LESSON TWENTY-THREE 

THE TENSE EYE 

OUR FINAL LESSON in this Department of the 
Magnetic Eye will deal with: the organ when under the 
full sway of great jegling^ as distinguished from the 
sway of the mind. Thoughts move people in one of two 
ways ; either by the ideas they convey ; or by the feelings 
they arouse. While the most useful of all displays of personal 
magnetism come in -^^i^^ ^ e convincing force 
of ideas, the most ^^^"^j5?P^ interesting exhibi- 
tions are found in the ? j^Sfc^ \ outpouring f feeling 
when accompanied ^^^^^f^^ I by magnetism. We 
have never yet seen ^^ an audience that did 

not enjoy to the utmost those tense moments when the power 
of some speaker was brought home to them in currents of 
magnetism ; not in shouting, or declamation, or physical 
energy. Some of the greatest victories have been won in quiet 
tones of the voice ; but not in lifeless ones. 

Noise is a physical product, and for that reason is never 
magnetic. A din, or racket, if prolonged, tends to induce sleep, 
in the person hearing it. Loud speech must be avoided at all 
times. 

A shouting preacher or declamatory orator may put an 
audience to sleep if he keeps at it long enough . A quiet voice that 
has no magnetism may empty a church or hall. It all depends 
on the presence of magnetism. 

What is true in public displays is even more true in the 
various avenues of life, in business, or home, or professional 
affairs, as well as in social meetings. The tense voice is far more 
influential than the loud one. 

Before the tense voice can be aroused and used with effect, 
the tense eye must be developed ; and it is the purpose of this 

lesson to teach the habit that brings this about. But even such 

137 



138 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

a result cannot be obtained until the conditions of youth that are 
taught in the preceding lesson are acquired by the formation of 
the habits there described. 

The tense eye comes about from the habit of charging the 
system with magnetic interest in which both mind and feelings 
participate. It means that the mind is wide awake, and that the 
emotional nature is likewise aroused, both uniting to find 
expression through the eye even if no other faculty than sight 
participates. By emotion is not necessarily intended the control 
of the feelings over the mind ; for that is weakness, and 
indicates that the judgment is being warped by some influence 
that is driving it from its moorings. Thus the imaginations 
that bring a mob into existence and dethrone their reason are 
illustrations of the control of the emotions over the mind. 

Just as the human system is a nice balance of acid and 
alkaline conditions, so the magnetic system of intensity should 
be a nice balance of feeling and thought. In the absence of 
feeling, thought becomes magnetic only under the influence of 
an idea that possesses moving power ; by which is meant the 
power to win. In other words it is a winning idea. Great 
men and women rise to this estate who are never emotional, 
yet are magnetic ; but it requires the element of true greatness 
to do so. Yet a mind that has once been aroused in these 
powers quickly forms the habit of creating winning ideas. It 
then is only a question of acquired habit. 

We have met many persons who are overcharged for a time 
with nothing but feeling. Some lawyers will begin an address 
to the jury with this overflow of emotion ; but with no winning 
idea back of it the effort soon falls flat, and the affair becomes 
ridiculous. But when mind and feeling are both magnetic, 
that is, when the thoughts are worth while and they are 
propelled by emotion, the combination is irresistible. The best 
indication of this nice balance is found in the tense eye ; for it 
is lighted with the fire of the thought and the fire of the nerves. 

In order then to cultivate this brilliant and glowing eye, for 
it is unusually attractive, the thought itself must be powerful, 
and the feeling must propel it. One of the best illustrations of 
this combination to be found in history undoubtedly was the 
fiery and piercing eye of Patrick Henry, of whose appearance 
during the heat of eloquence many accounts have been handed 



THETENSEEYE 139 

down from persons who were present and who faced him as he 
spoke. Take for instance his defiance of British rule and 
repudiation of loyalty to the Mother Country when he said : 
" Csesar had his Brutus, Charles the First his Cromwell, and 
George the Third/' at which time he was interrupted by cries of 
" Treason." " And George the Third may profit by their 
example. If this be treason make the most of it." As short- 
hand was not in use at the time, his exact words may not be 
known ; but ideas are more vital than words, and these were the 
ideas that he expressed. It is said that his face, which ordinarily 
was not usually attractive, was lighted up by a fire that shone 
from his eyes and gave him a godlike appearance. 

The student of these lessons has witnessed similar scenes 
probably many times ; but we quote the foregoing in order to 
bring home a stirring example of the combination of the most 
intense thought coupled with the most intense feeling. Yet 
Patrick Henry did not break down. Had his feelings not been 
harnessed to his thoughts and made a well-balanced team, he 
might have broken down, as so many persons do when they give 
way to their feelings. The evidence of great magnetic power is 
found in the ability to feel to excess and to hold this pent-up 
dynamite of force in perfect control. It becomes a beautiful 
exhibition of human ascendency over the masses. 

The quotation we have given above is also intended for use 
in practice, for the reason that it holds in its few words the most 
intense thoughts. Try repeating the words a few times, and 
note the result in your own force of expression. Do not use 
force of voice ; avoid mere noise. A magnetic thought must 
live in the mind ; it must make the scenes behind it live again ; 
it must see with mental vision what it refers to as it is uttered. 

All the preceding lessons in this Department of the Magnetic 
Eye may be given attention at once, or in their order in the 
book ; but this final lesson should wait on others that follow,. 
As it belongs where it is, we prefer not to move it ahead ; but 
we advise that it be omitted for a while. 

The progress of this study is so interwoven with Departments 
that claim attention, apparently all at once, that it is difficult 
to arrange an order of sequence in adopting them. The best 
plan is to do nothing but read them and think about them, even 
if this method is never aided by exercises ; for the reading of 



140 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

a thought will often change a whole life. This is merely a 
suggestion. 

In this lesson as in many others we must borrow from lessons 
that are ahead, and from some that have been given. Thus in 
order to acquire the tense eye, the youth habits of the lesson 
just before this will do more than any other influence. Then 
looking ahead to the Department of Tense Exercises, we find 
help that is very effective. Also there are lessons in the 
magnetic voice that possess unusual value. A reading of them 
will show what is meant. 

With these helps, and with a thought that is on fire like 
the extract from the speech of Patrick Henry, it is a very rapid 
and easy process to develop the tense eye. The value of this 
acquisition is that it beautifies the face, gives it an unwonted 
attractiveness, and makes the eyes brilliant and capable of 
holding any attention even under the most discouraging 
circumstances. So important is it that every man and woman 
should acquire it even if not another thing is learned in this 
study. 

We have seen so many thousands of instances of the use of the 
tense eye in controlling others that a volume larger than an 
unabridged dictionary would not hold the histories of them 
with the circumstances leading up to such use, and the advan- 
tages that followed. Later on we will show what can be 
accomplished in this line of influence. In this lesson it is our 
purpose to establish the acquisition as a permanent habit. It 
is one of those things that can never be lost after it has once been 
firmly engrafted on the nervous system. When you have 
attained it and have learned to use it, it will always respond to 
the merest act of the will. 

Making use of the helps that are borrowed, as stated, from 
other lessons and from the careful reading of this whole work, 
we sum up the lesson by repeating the formula which is as 
follows : 

1. There must be an aroused emotional feeling. 

2. There must be a mental control of that emotion. 

3. There must be present a great thought driving the emotion 
as the power in an engine drives the wheels of motion. 

The great thought that we have quoted is one of the most 
vital of all ideas, as it contains a summing up of history in 



THETENSEEYE 141 

a very few words. When words are barren of ideas they are 
weak and wearying. When ideas are barren of words they are 
like jewels in frail settings. The man of few words, if what he 
says is important, holds more influence over his fellows than the 
man of many words that clothe the same thought ; but the 
man of few words that are barren of ideas is dull, stupid and 
a bore. 

Mental vision is the eye of the mind back of the physical eye. 

Here it is employed to see what happened in history when 
Caesar had his Brutus. The whole scene can be made to pass in 
review in less than one one-hundredth of a second. Then the 
eye of the mind shifts to another great crisis in human affairs, 
when Charles the First had his Cromwell. What happened then ? 

Now the warning is given that George the Third, what ? 

In uttering these words, the body should remain fixed and 
wholly immovable ; not a twitching of a finger, nor the batting 
of an eyelid. Stand facing a mirror, and look into your own 
eyes until they burn with your gaze, and the reflection burns 
back to you. Let the voice be low in tone, low in musical pitch, 
but spoken naturally ; and repeat the words with the vital 
centres of the preceding lesson and the vital muscles of the same 
lesson, all in perfect position. 

While combining these natural habits as one unit, hold the 
entire body tense under the instructions given in the Department 
that is devoted to that subject in a later part of this book. 

In one trial you will find that you have tensed your eyes 
and have given them an unusual brilliance. After a few trials 
this glow will appear very distinct in a room that is absolutely 
dark. 

One more quotation will be furnished you here in order to 
fix and complete this study of the tense eye. In the Patrick 
Henry words we selected the one thought in all history that 
was most charged with fire. We now pass to the drama and 
select a thought that stands out as the greatest ever uttered in 
that profession. It is from the play of Richelieu. He was 
Prime Minister of France, and had for his ward a beautiful 
girl named Julie. The king desired her for immoral purposes. 
In that period, any person who was guilty or innocent who was 
pursued and in danger of being arrested or captured, could 
secure perfect safety by entering the precincts of a church, as it 



142 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

was dangerous to follow. No soldier dared follow. When the 
messenger came to arrest Julie and take her to the king, there 
was no church at hand where she could flee and be safe. So 
Cardinal Richelieu constructed a mental church into which he 
thrust her, and thereupon defied the king's officer with the 
following words : 

" She shall not stir ! Mark where she stands ! Around her 
form I draw the awful circle of our solemn church ! Set but a 
foot within that holy ground, and on thy head yea, though 
it wore a crown, I'd launch the curse of Rome ! " 

The mental picture is that of Richelieu in the centre, the 
king's officer forward obliquely on the right of the Cardinal, 
and Julie forward obliquely on the left. While he gazes on the 
officer with tense eyes, he draws the imaginary circle about 
Julie on the floor without removing his fixed gaze from the 
officer. 

It is an old rule of power in speech that the shorter the words, 
if they are filled with vital ideas, the more magnetism they 
convey. In the final or climax part of the above utterance, it 
will be seen that the last seventeen words are all monosyllables. 

Make use of the same directions that we have given for the 
Patrick Henry quotation, and apply them to the Richelieu 
quotation. Repeat this in a fixed attitude, looking at the 
imaginary officer until he seems to stand before you in the flesh, 
and so proceed slowly, carefully and with the firm determina- 
tion of mastering both the officer and the king. 

Before this book is closed we will show you the many great 
victories that may be won by the tense eye. 



DEPARTMENT OF 

INSTANTANEOUS 

PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

LESSON TWENTY-FOUR 

PREPARING THE WAY 

BUSY PEOPLE IN THIS AGE of haste and hurry do 
not take much interest in a course of training that is 
founded on nothing but exercises. Such a profession 
as that of singing or playing a musical instrument 
will, from its very nature, require long and tedious application 
to exercises which would not be performed if there were any 
other way to reach the desired end. Very few young folks like to 
practise on a piano, or violin, or any other thing hours and hours 
every week ; and some of them rebel against it most vigorously. 
But the woman who has been told that she possesses a 
charming voice, and that she could earn a living by having it 
cultivated so that she could sing in public, faces a different 
proposition. Her name and fame, if not her livelihood, are the 
goals. She knows from reading and being told that the road to 
any art is long and time is fleeting ; so she is willing to be 
taught the many exercises that lay the foundation for a 
finished voice ; in some cases requiring from five to seven or 
more years of hard work. With her it is practice, practice, 
practice. Men singers also must practise long and tediously 
before they can secure opportunities for displaying their gifts. 

Few indeed of the world's vocal artists have leaped out of 
the uncultured class of natural singers into the accomplished 
class of successful performers. Art as developed among painters 
requires from five to ten years of practice, and some after 
years of experience. Even the prize-fighter must go through a 

143 



144 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

process of training to become recognized as fit for fighting ; and 
before each important engagement he must again devote weeks 
or months to renewed training. All sports to-day require some 
development and some training as may be seen in both the 
amateur and professional ranks. 

When a prospective student of personal magnetism is asked 
to enter upon this study, he naturally wishes to know what he 
has to do, and how long he must devote himself to it before he 
shows results. Before an answer is given, it should be under- 
stood that personal magnetism is life itself . It enters into every 
moment and second of the waking hours of the day and night, 
and it keeps companionship with every man and woman down 
to the last days of existence. It is a part of them. It is en- 
grafted into their blood, their nerves, their brain, their thoughts, 
their activities, and their associations with all other human 
beings in all phases of life. 

A habit is a manner of living. 

Personal magnetism is a habit. 

Therefore it is and should be a manner of living. 

Living includes the expression of thoughts, of feelings, the 
activities of solitude and of association with others, and the 
operations of life that are going on within the body and all its 
parts and functions. 

Personal magnetism becomes a vital part of living in all these 
phases. 

Therefore it is not the result of exercises, but of habits. 

It is true that there are qualities that may be acquired in 
shorter time when they are aided by exercises that stimulate 
them into action ; but the entire scope of the study may be 
made to include only habits without the aid of exercises. 

Nearly every great man and woman has been started on a 
successful career by reading. Sometimes it is biography ; 
often other lines of reading. We know of the sailor who found 
a book that told of the life of a great man ; he left the sea and 
became one of the most famous preachers of his time. He 
always said the book did it. We have read of a carpenter who 
was loaned a book which described the struggles of another 
great man and his ultimate success ; the tools were thrown 
aside, and the carpenter entered upon a new career in which he 
won great triumphs. Henry Wilson, the cobbler of Natick, 



PREPARING THE WAY 145 

Massachusetts, U.S.A., stopped some school children on their 
way home, and asked them to explain to him the letters 
of the alphabet. In time he learned to read. He was Vice- 
President of the United States when he died in 1875. Daniel 
Webster was loaned a copy of Milton's Paradise Lost, and 
he memorized every word of it. This work led to his desire 
to know more, and he entered college. But the style and 
inspiration of Milton followed him all through life, and prevailed 
in his great orations. It has been claimed that not a single great 
man or woman has been born great, but that their inherent 
powers have been stimulated into action by what they have read. 

Biography is full of such incidents. 

These facts being so, and it being true that personal magnet- 
ism is a part of the act of living, the conclusion was not difficult 
to reach that almost all the help that a man or woman needs in 
acquiring or developing this power can come from reading a 
book that presents a complete system on the subject. Exercises 
may help to hurry the development, but they cannot do more. 

Reading alone may accomplish vast results. 

Our New Method therefore consists chiefly in showing the 
way by the instructions contained in the lessons, from which 
we form the vital habits that bring the results required. But 
we add all the necessary exercises for those ambitious students 
who wish to make all the speed possible. 

A single idea has inspired many a person. 

A word or two may change a habit. 

A word or two may completely turn the individual around 
and face him in the right direction when we see him going in 
the wrong direction. A very good singer who was too poor to 
pay for lessons in vocal culture was filling the position of 
soprano in a city choir, but with poor success. A friend told 
her that she was trying to make her notes with her throat in 
the wrong position ; she was told what was correct ; to use a 
figure of speech, she had been going in the wrong direction, and 
was turned around and faced in the right direction. A faulty 
tone is rasping, harsh to listen to, and repellent. All persons, 
as far as personal magnetism is concerned, are either 

1. Attractive ; 

2. Neutral ; or 

3. Repellent. 



146 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Whatever will irritate the brain of another person will irritate 
the nervous system. A harsh tone or faulty note is irritating. 
You cannot irritate and attract. But we will see more of this 
later as we proceed. 

The purpose of this lesson is to prepare the ground for the 
development of instantaneous personal magnetism ; by which 
we mean the formation of magnetic habits without the trouble 
and delay of practising exercises. It is easily possible to acquire 
some useful degree of this power in one day after you have 
finished a careful reading of the book. Further, it is easily 
possible to know that you have acquired this first degree ; to be 
conscious of the fact that you have become partly attractive, 
less repellent, and have ceased to remain neutral. But you must 
read every word of the book before you begin the new life, for 
such it will prove to be. 

Read slowly, not in the desire to get through, but with the 
purpose of understanding every word, every idea, every sug- 
gestion. It will pay you to do this. Become a good reader, 
and you will become a good thinker. Go off by yourself, or else 
keep the companionship, if in the evening, of some loved 
member of your family, and read aloud if permitted and desired, 
or to yourself otherwise. When you have given the first 
thorough reading of the book your absorbed attention, you will 
have become worth to yourself fully twenty-five per cent more 
than you were before. This is gain. It has always been our 
practice to read an important book twice. If you do this, your 
gain will be still greater. Then you will be ready for the progress 
that we call instantaneous personal magnetism, which will 
begin in the next lesson. 

This progress will be so great in a very short time that it 
will be known to yourself and to others who meet you in the 
daily activities of life. Let it then be understood that the 
exercises of this book are designed for those who are exceedingly 
ambitious, while all others will develop this power by change 
of habits through reading alone. 



LESSON TWENTY-FIVE 

IMMEDIATE PROGRESS 

HAVING READ SO FAR very carefully and patiently, 
the student is now to learn what is meant by instan- 
taneous personal magnetism. It means the immediate 
beginning of its development, the consciousness of possessing 
it, and the use of it in every phase of life. We have learned 
that young people generate vast quantities of magnetism, 
and lose it all by the waste of youth ; or the uncontrolled 
activities that use up all the dynamic energy of early life 
in those who are normal. It is the superabundant vitality 
running itself without a controlling and directing engineer. 

This is called leakage. 

It is not possible to check it in youth, nor is it desirable to 
do so. Nature is taking its course. 

But this leaking continues into maturity and keeps up the 
waste without check, although the wastage is far less then, or 
death would come in the form of fatal nervous prostration. 
That malady is due to the continued, unchecked loss of mag- 
netism, while neither the patient nor the doctor knows how to 
stop it. No physician has ever learned how. Medicines, drugs, 
pills and electric treatments have been tried without success 
to effect a cure. Change of climate, change of living conditions, 
change of diet and of habits have been tried, but all have 
failed. The victim of nervous prostration or neurasthenia goes 
on slowly to the grave. Magnetism is being wasted faster than 
it is being generated ; this is the whole story. 

It has been proved that if all the abnormal leakage of the 
body can be stopped, there will occur an immediate accumula- 
tion of magnetism. We say of the boy whose vitality is one 
hundred per cent that it must have vent. If the grown-up 
person accumulates magnetism, which is the vitality of that 
age, it may seek opportunities for giving itself vent ; and these 

M7 



148 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

come naturally in the prolific thinking of the mind, the thirst 
for real knowledge in place of sensational news and worthless 
books/ the desire to do something instead of sitting around 
aimlessly* and the wish to bring light and sunshine into the lives 
of others who are near and dear to us. Unselfishness takes the 
place of the narrow conception of duty to those who can be 
made more appreciative of interest in them. 

The possession of magnetism is generally the difference 
between success and failure. A lawyer who believed in himself 
and who was somewhat magnetic and knew it, complained that 
he was not winning his way as he should, and asked why. 
" You are too fidgety/' was the reply. This means that his 
magnetism was being wasted by useless motions of hands and 
feet, and of the whole body at times. A fidgety man is unattrac- 
tive, and all persons are either attractive, neutral or repellent. 
There never was and never will be a man or woman of fidgety 
habits who can attract. Here is a double loss. The irritating 
motions repel of themselves, and they cause leakage as well ; 
hence such a person fails to get on in the world. A very brief 
reminder is all that is necessary to cure the fault. In the case 
of the lawyer, it made so much difference that, when he had 
caught its meaning, he instantly rectified the trouble, and from 
that time he became successful. From this account it might 
seem that this single fault was all that stood in the way of 
becoming magnetic. It is one, at least, of the many faults. 

A woman complained that She could not win friends of the 
right kind, and was told that she distressed them by using a 
high pitched voice. This kind of a voice is merely one that 
makes use of the upper notes such as are found in the musical 
scale, but spoken instead of being sung. In order to know just 
what is meant, turn to the Department of the Magnetic Voice 
and there find the nine pitches with their quotations. Then 
repeat the quotations of the four highest pitches, or the sixth, 
seventh, eighth and ninth. Imagine a woman carrying on a 
conversation lasting minutes or hours and employing no other 
pitches than one or more of these four upper ones. 

It is a well recognized fact that the higher the pitch of the 
speaking voice the greater the irritation on the ear-nerves of 
the listeners. 

These ear-nerves communicate with the brain centres and 



IMMEDIATE PROGRESS 149 

there transfer the vibrations or waves received by the ear. In 
a high pitched speaking voice as well as singing voice, there 
are many more vibrations of sound than are found in the lower 
pitches. Thus a person who avoids the upper pitches and uses 
the middle or lower ones, relieves the listener of many vibrations 
in each and every second of time ; and as a person may engage 
in a conversation that lasts for minutes or hours, the accumu- 
lated number of vibrations that are escaped are a great relief 
to the nerves and brain of those to whom the remarks are made 
while the conversation is in progress. The woman to whom we 
refer caught the idea in the briefest possible time, and mended 
her ways. It required no exercises, no training, no time spent 
in building up something different from what she was naturally. 
It was the suggestion that showed her doing the wrong thing, 
and told her what was the right thing. Then her cleverness did 
the rest. 

Another woman complained that she did not win friends and 
seemed to be repelling those whom she sought. She was told 
that she talked too fast and too much. Much as we do not 
like to say it, no man or woman who talks too fast or too much 
is magnetic. Here again we see the irritating effect of the 
accumulated number of voice vibrations that attack the ear- 
nerves, and through them the brain itself. Many thousands of 
these vibrations strike small but decisive blows against the 
ear-nerves and the brain, and it is like so many strokes of a 
microscopic hammer hitting these sensitive parts. There is a 
normal rate of speed that is readily made magnetic ; but when 
you double it, you double the thousands of hammer strokes that 
are thrust against the brain of the listener, and irritation ensues. 
It requires a genius of the highest order to speak rapidly and 
effectively ; and such methods must be varied by modulation 
of the best quality. Bernhardt could do it, but she had few 
imitators. Soprano singers need longer periods of absolute 
silence than others ; and the best of them refrain from using the 
voice for hours and sometimes days before a public appearance. 
They talk with pad and pencil. 

The woman to whom we referred as talking too fast made an 
effort to talk slowly, but could not maintain it. Her husband 
used to sit within range of her vision when they were with 
others, so that he could signal her to reduce her rate of speed. 



150 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

But a person who must be coached in this way is hopeless 
as far as overcoming this fault is concerned. 

A minister said that he had no magnetic control over his 
hearers. We attended his church one Sunday, and the next 
day told him that he used a monotonousjdtch. He did not 
know what that was. He knew that he was not using too high 
a pitch, but the idea that, while he kept the pitch down, he made 
it monotonous was new to him. Anything that is monotonous 
strikes the brain nerves too often in one way. It concentrates 
as it were on one spot. The old incident of driving a man insane 
by forcing him to sit under a tank of water placed above him, 
from which a single drop fell upon one spot on his head, at the 
rate of one a second, carries in it the real principle that affects 
all faults along this line. 

If you are compelled to hear one note all the time, the blow 
falling on the nerves of the brain will make you insane. A 
very small noise at night, if it is the same all the time, without 
the relief of variation, will so irritate the brain as to do it 
injury. A man who plays one tune without change, even if it is 
melodious and pleasing for a while, will nearly drive every one 
crazy who is compelled to listen to it. The human brain cannot 
long endure monotony in any form. There is more insanity 
among the women of the farms than among those of the cities, 
because they lead a life of dreary monotony. 

It is for these reasons that the minister whom we have 
mentioned was unmagnetic. He preached along one part of the 
pitch, even if it were the pleasing part, which is around the 
middle of the vocal range, known as the magnetic pitch. Relief 
from this kind of monotony is secured by the cultivation of 
modulation, or the movements of the speaking voice that 
employ a variety of pitches for the expression of thought. More 
than this the really magnetic speakers and conversationalists 
employ the movements of modulation in harmony with the 
variations of thought. 

This is getting too deep for the ordinary student, and we will 
pass it on for a later lesson. It involves the finest points in 
voice training, and is fascinating as well as magnetic ; but it 
requires practice, and we have agreed to avoid the practice part 
of our method as much as possible. In the Department of 
the Magnetic Voice we furnish training that will need some 



IMMEDIATE PROGRESS 151 

practice ; and this will be fully provided in the latter part 
of this book. 

The point we are making here is that any kind of monotony 
irritates the listener, and no persons can be attracted to you if 
you irritate them. This is common sense. The minister learned 
to use his voice with proper modulation and soon became very 
successful in his work. 

Another man who was in business complained that he seemed 
to drive customers away, and that his efforts to increase 
patronage failed at every turn. We studied him from a vantage 
place in his shop and found that he used his voice with four 
faults : the pitch was too high, the tones were unvaried and 
monotonous, the rate of speed much tooTast, and he closed the 
upper part of his throat in talking, making a guttural, barking 
sound as he spoke. 

This brings us to one of the most unmagnetic faults of the 
human voice ; a fault that repels instead of attracting. When 
the voice is developed by the drifting methods of Nature, it runs 
to some kind of faults, just as a beautiful garden, left to the 
management of Nature, will destroy itself by weeds. Many 
thoughtless people say they prefer to remain natural than to 
cultivate good habits, and their argument seems unanswerable, 
which is : " Nature knows what she is about, and the only proper 
way of living is to let her do as she pleases." But when this 
argument is applied to the raising of flowers, fruits or foods, 
it shows Nature as an unruly impulse in all departments of 
living things and living organisms. This unruly impulse, when 
controlling the human voice, brings into it as many faults as it 
brings into the garden which is left to itself. 

There is no vocal fault so common and so almost universal 
as that of closing the upper part of the throat in speaking or 
in singing. TKe skilled teacher of the coming genius of opera 
attacks this fault first. One of the methods is to place the end 
of the handle of a teaspoon on the back of the tongue, and 
so force down the roots of the tongue, with the result that the 
throat will open in its upper part. Another method that is 
employed by teachers is to direct that the student swallow, 
and note the position of the larynx, or Adam's apple, in the 
throat ; and in tone production keep that organ down where it 
went in the act of swallowing. This last process may be 



152 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

misleading, for the larynx tries to rise just before it performs the 
real act of swallowing, and it is the latter part of this act that 
is helpful in getting the throat open. So another plan was 
adopted, and it proved a better one. It was that of imitating 
the gape ; or trying to open the back of the mouth and upper 
throat as a person does who gapes. This succeeded. When 
once it can be done voluntarily, which should require but a 
few minutes of practice, it can be done always at will. 

The closed upper throat is an effectual barrier to a decent 
singing voice ; but it is a common fault in speaking. 

It produces voices that irritate and repel in every department 
of life, and that therefore are non-magnetic. 

In a state of Nature this closed position means dislike, and 
under more pressure it means hatred. It can be seen at once 
that such a mood is unattractive ; and although it cannot be 
translated by a non-export, it is felt instinctively as a repellent 
tone position. Among beasts it produces the hiss of the cat 
and all cat-like animals, and the warning hatred of other life 
below the human species. The growl of the dog has its origin 
in the same position. Hence to hear it in the voice of man 
or woman is to feel as if there were more of the growl and 
threat there than attractiveness. The health of the throat, 
also, becomes involved in this closed position, for it rasps the 
membrane, which is very delicate at that place. 

This does not imply that every repellent voice is rasping. 
Any tone that is produced with the upper throat closed is 
disagreeable, even if it is merely a closed tone. The natural 
impulse that causes the closing of the throat is born of a dis- 
agreeable temperament, and this influence is always repellent. 

The cure of this trouble is to be found in correcting the 
throat position in the manner we have described. It is a very 
quick procedure if our instructions are followed as given. Just 
as soon as the upper throat is opened, it should be held flexibly 
open all the time you are talking ; and this applies also to 
public speaking ; and is absolutely necessary in singing. There 
can be no real singing voice until this position is acquired and 
made an easy habit. 

As soon as you master this simple matter, you will notice 
that the character of your voice will at once undergo a change 
that is revolutionary in its nature. Every harsh and repellent 



IMMEDIATE PROGRESS 153 

note will disappear. Better volume, which before was wholly 
impossible, will follow. Then there will be purity, attractive- 
ness and winning qualities to reward your brief effort at mending 
a fault that stands between you and success in your influence 
over others. The closed throat fault reacts upon every person 
who possesses it, and it is present in ninety per cent of all 
voices. Very few persons are free from it. Hence we seek to 
eliminate it at once. 

The troubles that c^re cited in this lesson are not all by any 
means. There are many others, and they must be given 
consideration as we proceed. Like the garden that is left to the 
drifting impulses of Nature, humanity collects multitudes of 
weeds, and also like the garden which is overrun with weeds 
when left to Nature, humanity needs a bit of cultivating. 

Human intercourse is so constituted that the means of 
communication between one person and another are confined 
ordinarily to the use of the eyes and of the voice. These furnish 
the channels for the exercise of the power of personal magnetism. 

Incidental to them are the uses of touch and of thought. 
Luther Burbank by placing one hand on the chest of a person, 
and the other hand on the back, was able to throw so powerful 
a current of magnetism into a person that cures were effected 
that defied all treatments of science or medicine. This is the 
use of touch. 

Ideas are also tremendously magnetic. 

But in the wear and tear of life, in the multitudinous 
activities of the day, the voice becomes the agency of magnetic 
control in ninety per cent of all communications ; and so simple 
an idea as to allow it to develop itself into an instrument of 
wondrous beauty by merely adopting the habit of maintaining 
the open throat in order to give forth pure tones, and of 
acquiring a pleasing and harmonious modulation in speech, is ? 
charged with the potency of a complete revolution of the life-* 
habits of an individual, and this change may begin in a single 
day. 



LESSON TWENTY-SIX 

" FIDGETS " 

WE PURPOSE NOW to look ahead and collect in 
systematic form the causes that militate against the 
natural acquisition of personal magnetism. They 
are causes that, once overcome, leave the individual really 
far advanced in the development of this power. Not all of 
them can be conquered at once, but from day to day one by 
one they may be given attention, until all are driven out of 
life. But no person may possess all these faults. If some are 
lacking, so much the better. You will have no trouble in 
recognizing those that handicap you ; nor will you set yourself 
against trying to drive them away, on the theory that you are 
exempt when the facts are otherwise. You will be fair with 
yourself. 

All non-magnetic persons lose each day as much natural 
magnetism as they generate in the act of living. 

If they lose more than they generate they die of nervous 
prostration if this difference is maintained. 

The losses occur through what are called leakages. 

A leakage in the study of personal magnetism is a waste of 
natural electrical energy through some fault. 

The leakages may be of physical, nervous or mental character. 

A physical leakage occurs when muscular energy is thrown 
away without purpose and without control. 

A nervous leakage occurs when some vital energy is thrown 
away by the erratic action of the nervous system. 

A mental leakage occurs when the thoughts persist in 
exciting the brain erratically, and so exhaust its energy. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 

The least magnetic of the so-called non-magnetic people 
lose each day more vital electricity than is necessary to produce 
the highest degree of personal magnetism. 

'54 



"FIDGETS" 155 

The reverse of this proposition is necessarily true, that the 
conserving of the energy thus wasted would result in the 
development of personal magnetism of the highest degree. In 
other words, if all losses from leakage were to be stopped, 
nothing more would be required. The training and study might 
cease right at this point. All this is true ; but, on the other 
hand, it must be remembered that personal magnetism, no 
matter in what degree it exists, is a power only, and that its 
chief value is in its uses. 

in this Department of Instantaneous Personal Magnetism, 
we have promised to begin the development of this power at 
once ; even on the first day after this whole book has been 
carefully read through once or twice. 

This promise will be kept to the letter. Such development 
will begin on the first day after the reading is completed ; and 
on the second day there will be more progress ; still more on 
the third day ; and so on from day to day until the work of 
development has advanced to a satisfactory stage. 

On the first day a triple combination will do the work in 
the manner to be stated in a subsequent lesson of this Depart- 
ment. On the second day the same triple combination will do 
the work, with only one part of the same advanced in order to 
make due progress. And so on to the end of this Department. 

The changing or movable part of the triple combination is 
the battle with some different form of leakage. This makes 
it necessary for us at the present time to set forth the groups 
of Leakages ; the first of which is the Physical Group, whereby 
muscular energy is thrown away without purpose and without 
control. These are as follows : ~~" 

"TTThe Fidgets. These have been referred to in a preceding 
lesson. Everybody knows what they are. You have seen 
them in all classes of people, and know the harm they have done 
in your estimation. Here may be seen your family doctor ; 
suppose he is restless, fidgety and ill at ease. Your confidence 
in him is weakened ; nor do you have to know anything of the 
rules of magnetism to form your estimate of him. Any man, 
woman or child can pass judgment in some way or other on the 
restless doctor. The result is that he loses his clientele. 
Then failure comes. On the other hand, let him be a stranger, 
and yet well at ease, free from this fault, and you will quickly be 



156 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

drawn to him. Self-mastery inspires confidence in others, and 
success is much more probable. 

If this restless man should be a surgeon, his usefulness would 
come to an end at once. How about the dentist ? We recall 
the case of one who was very much under the sway of this 
fault ; in the town where he set up practice, he could not make 
friends in his profession, although he had excellent influence 
socially and his wife tried to make herself as popular as she 
could. A wide circle of friends did not create the practice 
needed. The fault was that he was restless and did not inspire 
confidence. He brought the matter to our attention. He took 
up the study of the enemies of magnetism ; overcame his great 
fault ; moved to a town where he was not known ; and very 
quickly established a large practice, because he won the 
confidence of the public. 

Thus we see that what is apparently a simple thing, and 
only a drop in the study of magnetism, is really almost a 
turning-point in human life. 

Now look in the legal profession, and note the calm, cool, 
powerful control shown by one, and the fidgety manners of 
another. The brain and judgment are not at their best when 
the body is leaking vitality. Or look at the splendid bearing 
of the self- controlled minister, as compared with the smallness 
of the uneasy, squirming preacher. Many a Sunday have we 
listened to some man who is addicted to meaningless gestures 
that are mere motion ; and we have noted that loudness of 
voice does not hold the interest of the congregation, nor does 
physical activity of the involuntary kind pass current for 
earnestness. Such clergymen are numerous everywhere, but 
we fail to find one who is genuinely successful. 

True power is deep. The stronger the feelings, the less should 
be their outward evidence. """" 

But it is on other grounds that restlessness weakens a man 
or woman. The constant loss of vitality, flowing out with each 
involuntary motion, soon saps the force that should underlie the 
effort of the mind or body. 

Then there is still another law at work. Restless people make 
all beholders uneasy. The jury, the congregation, the school, 
the friends in a social gathering, the business circles, the patient 
or client, all are made more or less irritable by being compelled 



"FIDGETS" 157 

to watch the restless man or woman. The brain is soon fogged 
by such irritability, and a fixed desire to get free from the cause 
takes hold of every one. Instead of controlling others, they are 
driven away, and after years will hardly serve to regain the 
confidence that is thus lost, unless better methods are adopted. 

Magnetic people are not restless. 

Restless people cannot become magnetic. 

Magnetism is a charm, not an annoyance. 

Until you learn to hold the body still, as far as involuntary 
motions are concerned, you cannot become magnetic. You may 
try any and qvery method you please, but the power attained 
will ooze out from the nerves just as a leaking battery will let 
its energy escape when subjected to influences that draw away 
the fluid that is stored. 

Some persons get the idea that all that is necessary to acquire 
magnetism is to practise some affirmative exercises. On the 
same principle, if you buy the best locomotive boiler, and 
puncture it with a hundred small holes, you would deem the 
makers of the boiler at fault because it did not maintain its 
power. 

Affirmative acquisitions in this world must be supported by 
attention to negative influences, or the latter will neutralize all 
that the former may seek to accomplish. 

Habits, good or bad, are quickly formed, and the brain will 
execute them. At first it is necessary to study and think of 
the many small involuntary motions you make ; but in a few 
days you will find the mind performing this duty for you. We 
recommend that each student of these lessons ask some friend 
to act as a critic. You cannot see yourself as you are seen, and 
a critic should mention only your faults. Praise to an ambitious 
person makes it difficult to tell the truth when the truth is 
most needed. Honest advice is welcomed by the sincere 
student. 

The value of this lesson in the training of young men and 
young ladies can be seen at once. Children are never magnetic, 
for Nature encourages their restless activity as a means of 
growth. But when they pass the age of fourteen or fifteen, the 
strength of youth should manifest itself in a form of demeanour 
that assumes to be culture and gentle deportment, although in 
fact it is the quietude of magnetism. 



158 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Education in schools along these lines is useless until the 
ages mentioned. 

But at that time, and all through the years that follow, it is 
of the highest importance to^train the joeryes to steadiness, and 
the muscles to their voluntary uses only. Mere quietude is 
harmful. It should be the covering of an accumulated power 
within ; and, for this reason, the affirmative course of instruc- 
tion in magnetism should accompany these lessons that are 
only negative. 

This volume must of necessity include both sides of the 
training. The weeds must be removed from tfye garden, for 
nothing will make progress when counter influences are choking 
out all good impulses. 

The removal of weeds is not enough. The destruction of 
enemies is not enough, either in war or in life. There must be 
a progressive and aggressive growth of affirmative power. 

Nothing is so undesirable as the man or woman who is still 
or quiet or self-contained because of deadness in the nature, or 
lack of energy or power. The world is full of such people. 
Churches, organizations and departments of social and govern- 
mental life are already overcharged with dead folks who still 
live. They are useless and in the way. 

Magnetism gives life. 

But first it is necessary to make room for that life, and there- 
fore we must continue these lessons with the enemies of 
magnetism. 

It has been said by a very able critic that the best way of 
overcoming the faults that stand as barriers to self-control is 
the mental process of " thinking them away . * * Training is made 
to take the place of culture, and is then called culture ; but this 
quality is native only when it becomes a part of the individual, 
and ceases to be a veneer. Thinking away one's faults produces 
real culture. 



LESSON TWENTY-SEVEN 

PHYSICAL LOSSES 

NOW WE APPROACH a flood of Leakages that come 
from the losses of muscular electrical energy that is 
thrown away without purpose and without control. 
These take place in all parts of the body, and generally at 
some terminals. What is known as the fidgets applies to the 
whole body, and in the manner which has just been described 
in the preceding lesson. Terminal losses are localized and are 
not as general as the fidgets. The latter attract more attention 
because they are larger activities. Terminals lose a great 
amount of vital energy on the principle that they release the 
power much as points release electricity. We will describe 
some familiar experiences, in which terminals form an important 
part with others included. 

Typewriting. It is a well-known fact that more than ninety 
per cent of all who use the typewriter for any length of time 
are restless and nervous. Under a system of smooth and easy 
motion this nervousness may be controlled. There are two 
kinds of touch for a typewriter : one that resembles the touch of 
a skilled pianist, and the other that is a succession of pounds 
with the fingers on the keys. The latter is the cause oTloss 
of vitality. A smooth motion, as is seen in the most skilled 
piano playing, does not tax the nervous vitality except as all 
excess of work may weary for the time. Many a young lady 
has suffered from nervous prostration because of too much work 
at the typewriter, and doctors are constantly having to deal 
with such cases. Any jerky movement is harmful to the vitality. 
W inking. We have always attacked this fault first of all : 
and not until the pupil is able to suppress at all times the habit 
of moving the eyelids will there ever be a hope of acquiring 
magnetism. Here is the battle ground for a majority of the 
readers of these lessons. We are often told that the habit can- 



i6o INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

not be cured, and our reply is, then give up the study of mag- 
netism. But the habit is being cured every year in thousands of 
cases, and consequently there is little virtue in the claim that 
it is a hopeless task to get rid of it in every instance. Attention 
is the sole method of overcoming it. "*"""" 

Yawning. This fault is due to a low state of vitality, and the 
person who is addicted to it is as far from magnetism as the 
suri is distant from the darkest corner of a cave. It is not only 
a clear evidence of weakness, such as follows indigestion in 
nine cases out of ten, or loss of sleep, or wasting of the energy 
as in excesses of any kind, but is also bad manners and bad 
deportment. When the claim is made that it cannot be cured, 
let the usual method of suppressing it be applied. This is to 
omit every alternate yawn. The cure is complete. Even the 
loss of sleep and indigestion cannot compel the yawn against 
that cure. Omitting every other yawn soon reduces the number 
to less than one in an hour, as the omissions become less and 
less. 

Face Motions. These are of various kinds. The most 
common is the action of the lips, and especially of the tongue. 
These are very small matters, but they have their influence for 
ill. One of the signs of approaching senility is the habit of 
constantly moving the tongue against the upper or lower lip, or 
the lips against the teeth. It is evidence of weakness, and 
magnetism is a power. Therefore the book of the face should 
not bear records that are read by people at a glance. 

There are other petty physical habits that might be included 
in the list, but they are generally swept away by a successful 
contest with those we have named. 

While life demands activity, there is a large distinction 
between regulated power, and force running away with itself. 
What the will directs increases the power ; and what is directed 
at haphazard is sure to weaken the power. 

Drumming. Some people drum with their fingers ; some with 
their feet. We have known many such drummers, and have 
never seen one of them who was in the least magnetic. It is 
not only evidence of Leakage of vitality but of exceedingly bad 
manners ; and persons who are ill-bred rarely get anywhere in 
the world that is worth while. 

Variety when not the spice of life. To show to what extent 



PHYSICAL LOSSES 161 

non-magnetic people lose their electrical energy, let us peruse 
the following list : 

Fingers. Not only as drummers on the table or anything 
handy except an actual drum, do the fingers play their part, but 
they have numerous other motions. They twirl the moustache, 
if there is one. They rub against themselves as if brushing 
crumbs away. They open and shut. They are interlaced at 
times in a restless manner. They spread themselves. They rub 
the chin, stroke the face, pull at the ears, caress the nose, and 
engage in any kind of activity that they can invent. 

The cook when making the toast scratches her head with 
her finger nails and releases a lot of dandruff that otherwise 
might remain intact. 

The embarrassed lover, when trying for the first time to 
propose to his lady friend, finds a coat button handy for his 
fingers to work at and eventually to twist off ; and not until he 
has twisted from their fastenings all but one of the buttons on 
the front of the coat does she accept him for the sake of saving 
that final button. On other occasions men finger their coat 
buttons as a habit and not due to embarrassment. 

The number of both sexes who work their toes when the 
latter are hidden in their shoes cannot be surmised ; but this 
fault is a familiar one, as all persons may easily believe 
who know the eagerness of the terminals to throw off waste 
vitality. 

Leg Swinging. We have seen ladies sitting for an hour or 
more, some of whom were wriggling the feet all the time, using 
the hinge action of the ankle for the purpose. The action 
consisted of pointing the toes towards the ceiling and immed- 
iately dipping them towards the floor. This motion they were 
not cognizant of, but nevertheless it was maintained without 
cessation. We have seen other ladies and more men who 
preferred to cross the legs at the knees, swing the whole lower 
part of the limb forward and back, and sometimes right and 
left when other persons present were not in the way. A 
number of these added a special accomplishment by making 
circles with the toes. 

Non-magnetic Positions. In almost any office, you will note 
the customary position of the body of the male clerk who is 
sitting at the table or desk. He is slouched down far into his 



11 



162 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

chair, his head is lower than his feet, and the latter are resting 
on the table or desk. 

Most chairs are uncomfortable. They compel the person who 
would use them for resting the upper part of the body to lounge 
in them in strained positions even when merely sitting. The 
common illustration of this fact is seen in the straight backs of 
some church pews and of some drawing-room chairs. The cure 
of this fault is to ignore the back and allow the body to rest 
itself only as far as its sitting posture is concerned. After stand- 
ing until you are weary, or after walking until any kind of 
sitting support is acceptable, you are glad to get even a box 
or log to sit upon, and may exclaim, " How delightful ! " yet 
the box as well as the log is without a back and you never notice 
it. The support of the back is not required in most cases until 
the body has been sitting too long ; then, instead of rising on the 
legs as ought to be done, the custom is to shift the support from 
the sitting posture to that of leaning back against something. 
When this proves too monotonous, there is always an inclination 
to lean farther back, until the hammock or the lounge is wanted. 
During this process of wearing out the vital forces, the body 
is getting more and more tired. It becomes a refreshing relief 
to be able to lie down, and to thus employ the faculties in read- 
ing or studying. This tired-out feeling is seen in offices and other 
places where men and young men lounge into easy attitudes 
until they are seen with feet on the table, and their heads far 
below a normal relative position. 

Where the circulation of the blood is interfered with, the 
vitality is low. When the back receives any support the heart 
lessens its efforts to push the blood through the body. Remove 
the support from the back and the heart will do much more 
vigorous work. Now stand, and the heart still increases its 
activity ; and this increase is very marked when you walk, and 
quite energetic when you run, showing a steady, proportionate 
effort of this great organ of life to keep pace with the demands 
of the muscular system. 

The more you rest, the more you will require rest. 
^The more you favour the back muscles, the more you will feel 
inclined to do so. 

The more you sit with raised feet, lowered head and resting 
back, the more you will want to do these things. 



PHYSICAL LOSSES 163 

(The more you lie abed, the more you will have to lie in bed. 
The less you stand, the less you will be able to stand. 
The less you walk, the less you will want to walk, except in 
certain abnormal instances where the deadness of the muscles 
rebels and a few minutes' walk is refreshing ; but the weariness 
afterwards will make you declare that you will not give way to 
such indiscretion again. Then, awaking to the fact that you 
are muscularly lazy, you try to atone for years of weakness by 
a few days or weeks of exercise, with the result that you break 
down the exhausted tissue and do yourself a permanent injury. 
Habits should be changed slowly if they affect the body or any 
of its faculties. Immoral habits may be changed by moral 
surgery, and haste never makes waste. 

Another straining position is that which lets the chest fall 
down on the stomach. It ought to be trained out of all children 
from the first years of their schooling. This almost universal 
fault is the first step in consumption. Bold as the declaration 
may seem, we nevertheless make it, that you will not find 
consumption or its symptoms in a man or woman who is free 
from this bad habit. The fallen chest is weakness itself, and 
the heart is crowded and checked in its work. The raised chest 
compels the heart to do more work ; its blood is drawn with 
remarkable energy all through the interiors that feed the lungs, 
and the vitality is such that the germs of tuberculosis could not 
long live there. You who would like to do good in the world, 
take this one proposition into the lives of all men and women, 
into homes and into schools, and note how a small principle 
will revolutionize humanity. 

One fact is not generally known ; it is this : The upper lungs 
never receive air from an ingoing breath, but always from a 
repressed, energetic i_out-gping breath, as when it accompanies 
some physical effort, or is forcibly discharged through the 
partly closed mouth. This effort should be tried occasionally. 



LESSON TWENTY-EIGHT 

NERVOUS LOSSES 

LIFE IN THE HUMAN BODY on the animal side is 
physical, nervous and mental ; not meaning that 
animals are mentally endowed, but that man is born 
in the animal kingdom with these divisions of his being. 
We have discussed in the preceding lesson the losses that occur 
by Leakage in physical activities. We now pass on to nervous 
wastefulness. A fidgety person may or may not be nervous. 
Nearly all nervous persons lack the fidgety faults. They may 
be very calm and self-contained until some little thing happens 
to startle them. In fact, they force themselves to be calm as 
much as possible, knowing the likelihood of flying off their 
nerves, as they term it, at almost nothing. 

Some men and most women scream at the sight of a mouse, 
spider or snake. The calm judgment of the mind would show 
the folly of such giving way to this nervous weakness ; for a 
person of high intelligence would not find anything to cause 
fright in any of these objects of creation. One such experience 
drives out more vital energy than can be stored in three days. 

Sudden starts. These are trifles in themselves, but they work 
havoc with the nerves, and what lowers the tone of the nerves 
will always lessen the magnetism. 

Sudden Stops. These may apply to the whole body or to any 
part of it. They are quite frequent as we will see a little later 
on in this work. 

Trembling. This is not the shaking of fright, so much as the 
unsteadiness of hand which many persons allow to fall into 
habits of senile weakness early in life. 

Sighing. This is due to a low state of respiration. It denotes 
that the nervous system is out of order. Like yawning, it will 
disappear as the affirmative lessons of this course of training are 

put into practice. 

164 



NERVOUS LOSSES 165 

Short Breathing. This is a habit distinct in itself, and grows 
if left to itself. It invites the open mouth breathing which is 
injurious to the health. All usual respirations should occur 
through the nostrils. Magnetic people breathe deeply and never 
pant. 

Halting Speech. Strange as the assertion may seem, it is 
nevertheless a fact that not one person in two hundred talks or 
speaks without halting. The usual expression when the halt 
comes is uh as a little observation will prove. In speaking 
formally at meetings, or even in businesss conversations, the 
habit is very prevalent. The cure of it is to speak smoothly by 
direction of the will. 

Rapid Talk. Vehement and earnest delivery in speaking, or 
in conversation, is one thing ; but the habit of rapid talking is 
quite another. Vehemence generally helps to increase mag- 
netism, if the body is tensed and free from the enemies to which 
we have referred. ; but rapidity of talk is one of the quickest 
methods of destroying vitality. Nervous prostration is the 
penalty of the man or woman who talks much and talks 



We know of many cases where persons are all tired out after 
an afternoon of gossipy talk. Recently our attention was called 
to a woman of great wealth who said that she would give a 
liberal reward for some treatment that would check her nervous- 
ness and loss of vitality. In looking into her habits, we found 
that she was an incessant and ragid talker. Not wishing to offend 
her, we outlined a course of conduct that required four weeks of 
silence. She was told that she must use pencil and paper for 
all her communications she wished to make ; and to appease 
her curiosity we showed her a letter from Patti, the English 
prima donna, in which the latter spoke of her habit of always 
refraining from conversation, and using paper and pencil, 
during the days preceding her engagement to sing at night. 
When Patti adopted this plan for the purpose of saving her 
voice, she found that it saved her vitality as well. The four 
weeks of silence resulted in a complete cure of nervousness and 
low vitality. We do not recommend silence in ordinary cases ; 
but we do suggest that those who talk much cannot become 
magnetic. 

The orator of greatest powers is always a man of few words 



166 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

when not engaged in speaking. The same is true of the 
actor. 

There are many reasons, mostly of policy, why a person should 
be addicted to few words. Total silence may seem like shyness, 
but a moderate degree of this quality is helpful to any man or 
woman. As a rule, the less you talk, provided you talk some 
and talk sensibly, the more you are respected ; and the person 
who is able to command respect has easy sway over others in 
the use of magnetism. 

A person sits in a hall or church ; some one drops a book ; 
the former gives a general start of the whole body, sighs, leans 
back and suffers from the weakness engendered. In that one 
motion of the body a great volume of magnetic vitality leaped 
forth. 

A person is walking upon the street ; a friend comes up from 
behind and slaps him on the back ; he jumps, catches his breath, 
turns pale, and is soon himself again, but weaker. 

A woman thinks she sees a mouse in the room. With one 
involuntary recoil she shrinks backward. The magnetism so 
lost will not easily return in a week. 

Something occurs to attract the attention. A jump is made 
from the chair to the feet. Vitality is lost. 

A touch of the finger against something hot causes a sudden 
movement of the arm and upper body backward. Life is 
thrown off in such action. 

We might cite thousands of cases, all of which depend upon 
the element of suddenness resulting from whatever may startle. 
Is it possible to conquer such tendencies ? Yes , there is no 
person of a reasonable degree of intelligence who will not 
become supreme monarch of himself if he sets out to do so and 
has a system of training to guide him to success. Who is more 
nervous than a very nervous woman ? 

A Mrs. Brown was moving about the house one evening, 
having got into her night attire ready for bed. A lady relative 
of about her age was in another room similarly attired ; she 
followed after Mrs. Brown, making no sound whatever, came up 
to her and laid her hand upon her cousin's shoulder. Mrs. 
Brown gave a start that took her a yard or two before she 
stopped. She collapsed with weakness. A year later the same 
thing occurred again, except that her husband was the offender. 



NERVOUS LOSSES 167 

He came up behind her with noiseless steps and laid his hand 
upon her shoulder, thinking that she knew he was there. She 
was more startled than before and became weaker. 

Under the advice of her doctor, who was a student of our 
system of magnetism, Mrs. Brown took up the study of self- 
mastery. In three months she conquered her great fault. One 
night after twelveTshe arose from her bed in the dark and 
proceeded to get a drink of water in an adjoining room. Her 
husband was awakened, got up, followed her noiselessly and they 
met in the dark. Mrs. Brown writes as follows : " I did not 
know he was awake. I had no idea that he was coming into 
the room. His hand was outstretched as if feeling his way along 
in the dark. It was a cold hand and laid itself on my face. I 
was as much surprised as if I had been touched by a corpse fresh 
from the grave. A year before I would have screamed, jumped 
and no doubt fallen into a dead faint. Since I began the study 
of magnetism I have learned to hold my nervous system as solid 
as a rock. I have schooled myself against everything." Her 
case is cited as one of a large number of persons who have 
acquired the much-coveted one of self-mastery. 

The very same movements that demagnetise when made 
involuntary, will develop magnetism if done under the control 
of the will or if accompanied by internal energy. 

A very good illustration of the losses that occur from sudden 
starts and sudden stops, may be seen from the action of water 
on an object ; if the latter is made to stop with a quick action 
the water will be thrown off ; and the same is true if it is made 
to start suddenly. A quick stop of a train may throw a person 
forward off the seat. A quick start of a carriage may throw a 
person backward. 

Magnetism is a force that is likewise thrown off by sudden 
starts, stops and jerky motions. To overcome this, unless you 
think of the fault by mental attention, it is a good habit to be 
acquired by utilizing the motions of each day's activities in the 
practice of starting and stopping all movements easily and 
smoothly. In so doing, your general carelessness, and perhaps 
awkwardness will wholly disappear, and so add to your power 
of attraction. 



LESSON TWENTY-NINE 

MENTAL LOSSES 

PHYSICAL AND NERVOUS Leakages have been dis- 
cussed in the two last lessons, and we now come to 
the third part of human existence and find losses 
flowing out of the magnetic fund of the mind as freely 
as in the other divisions of life. These are not so easily 
mended, although they do great harm in lessening a person's 
influence in the world. Physicians say that more vitality is 
lost and more injury is done to the system by means of mental 
waste than in any other manner. This waste takes place in a 
number of ways, and has two results : 

1. It lessens the energy of every part of the body mind, 
nerves, the functions of the organs, the power of digestion, the 
power of accurate thinking, the respiration and the circulation. 
It can be seen that it invades the duties of the Third Brain as 
well as its own. This result is called self -injury. 

2. By its various exhibitions of weakness and defects, it 
invites the ill opinion of all persons who meet or associate with 
those who suffer such losses. This is called the inability to 
gain or hold the confidence of others ; a quality that is abso- 
lutely necessary in any kind of effort to succeed in life. 

Mental losses are double acting, a danger that is charged at 
both ends and that weakens the person who is the victim of 
them, and repels others. 

These losses are caused by some form of mental exhaustion, 
or a set of influences that lead to such wear and tear on the mind 
that it becomes a difficult task to control self or others. 

The most dangerous and at the same time the most prolific 
cause of mental exhaustion is WORRY. There are two kinds : 

1. WORRY from causes that arise in the activities of life. 

2. WORRY that is a mental disease. 

The subject is almost unlimited, and all we can do is to 

168 



MENTAL LOSSES 169 

suggest the methods that have been employed successfully in 
the past to combat this trouble. A small library of books 
might be written about it. 

It is not at all difficult to ascertain what are the causes that 
arise in the activities of life. These can be learned by the care- 
ful plan of listing them as they become evident. From reports 
sent us in the past forty years, we found the average number to 
be in the neighbourhood of six ; the least to be one, and the 
greatest to be twelve ; that is, there were a number of causes 
at work to create worry. Half the victory is attained when 
you know what these causes are and can put them down 
in writing to be seen and studied. We have found that they all 
disappear under the training of this book taken as a whole ; 
for that is one of its great purposes. 

But worry that is a mental disease is like cancer in the blood ; 
it is there to stay for a while, and can be eradicated only by 
a strong uphill fight that, if waged in the right and by the right 
weapons, will bring victory. As that subject is not a part of 
the proper study of personal magnetism, but is a disease, all 
we can do is to express a willingness to make suggestions by 
written correspondence if the student cares to send a letter of 
inquiry to the publishers whose address is on the title-page of 
this book. 

Melancholy is a mental waste that not only destroys the 
person's vitality but deprives him of the good opinion and 
confidence of others without which there can be no successful 
association with them. For this and the next trouble, a perfect 
remedy is found in the Regime of Mental Magnitude which was 
presented in an earlier lesson of this volume. The next trouble 
referred to is known as 

Pessimism. This is the opposite of optimism. We have 
known of many men and women who have built up very 
successful systems of personal magnetism instinctively by 
employing optimism in combination with some method similar 
to that set forth in the Regime of Mental Magnitude. Optimism 
without the steering hand of good judgment and common 
sense is mere gush ; and there are men and women who 
pour out this kind of nonsense in the presence of their friends 
and acquaintances with no gains whatever unless some of these 
persons are themselves wee^-minded. This effervescence is 



i?o INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

generally followed by periods of reaction in which melancholy 
prevails. 

However, the misuse of a good thing does not put the latter 
in disgrace. 

The quickest way to accumulate personal magnetism, if a 
person wishes to secure results the very first day after this book 
has been read through in the manner we have stated, is to turn 
your mind into that of an optimist ; but to be sure to harness it 
to the Regime of Mental Magnitude so that its work may be 
successful from the very start. 

Do not go to the other extreme and overdo it. Do not gush. 
Do not be flowery, as Scrooge said to Marley's ghost. Remem- 
ber that optimism not given magnetic power by the Regime of 
Mental Magnitude is a mere veneer, and can be seen through 
by any keen mind. Your mind should be keener than the 
keenest mind you meet in the battle of life. 

Discouragement is another waster of magnetic energy. It 
is always traced to the inability to see opportunities for advance- 
ment in one's progress through the world ; or, if seen, to be 
made to recognize the state of unpreparedness to take advan- 
tage of them. Such persons suffer the most acute mental 
reactions. 

Youth is the time for making preparations for success ; not 
for wasting the valuable hours. And the same law applies to 
middle life and any age in one's career. The man who when in 
middle life was not able to read or write, and who afterwards 
employed every spare moment in educating himself and rose to 
the office of Vice-President of the United States, might have 
lived and died a devotee to idle pleasures and frivolities. To 
conquer discouragement it is necessary to move on in life. This 
means to spend less than you earn ; to add every day something 
of real value to your stored knowledge, and fit yourself for 
contact with people who are worth knowing. Five minutes a 
day will in time give you control over those awful errors in 
speech that keep you down to the very dregs of existence. Five 
minutes a day will in time make you a decent speller and 
decent grammarian ; yet bad spelling and bad grammar are 
the greatest barriers to progress~ln the business alad social 
world. These are examples selected at random of some of 
the ways in which you can move on. 



MENTAL LOSSES ijl 

Surface Thinking. Magnetism is the power of purpose 
intensely willed and carried to execution by the faculties. It is 
of necessity an act of the mind, as well as of the heart and 
nervous forces. Its enactment* is planned in the brain, and the 
method of accomplishing the end sought is built in the thinking 
powers. 

The surface brain is a natural condition that allows the 
individual to enjoy much thinking without carrying the burden 
of thought. 

The magnetic brain is deeper, and it becomes mightier as the 
depth is sounded. 

Surface Thinking includes : Light reading, novel reading, 
newspaper reading, games, play, puzzles, cards, social inter- 
course, and many kinds of activities that do not come under the 
class of work or study. 

These are mental desserts. The purpose of any dessert is 
to balance and give variety to the serious, the useful and the 
heavier duties of life, no matter what Department is included. 
It is true of the stomach. It is true of the mind. A rich man 
can afford more desserts than the poor man, but the latter is 
blessed with his limited purse, for desserts weaken when they 
are out of balance. 

It is arranged by Nature that the mental desserts shall affect 
only the surface brain, as we call it in popular language. The 
purpose is to call the blood and activity from the deeper portions 
of the mind, and such relief is often a blessing. But there are 
useful ways of establishing the balance between the two brains. 

A person whose duties are mostly muscular is relieved by 
mental efforts of any kind. 

A person whose duties are mostly mental is relieved by 
muscular toil or exercise. 

In other words the sedentary person may seek variety in any 
use of the muscles, and the toiler may seek change in any use of 
the mind. 

For the toiler to seek his relief in mental desserts is to throw 
away the greatest opportunities he has of becoming a successful 
power in the world. He needs relief, but he will get it even in 
the hardest study. Why, then, should he use only the surface 
of his mind ? History is full of instances where men who have 
worked with their muscles have also carried on the heaviest 



17* INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

studies in the intervals, with the result that when their faculties 
were ripe they leaped into power almost at a bound. But there 
is not a single instance in all history where the toiler has become 
useful in life, when he has turned from his labour to seek relief in 
mental desserts. This one fact speaks volumes. 

It should find deep root in the lives of those who wish to rise 
from their humble stations. Let it be remembered that the 
greatest men and women of the past have come from the 
humblest ranks ; but they have obeyed this instinctive law of 
life. 

Personal magnetism is not an empty acquisition. It is based 
on something real ; not on sham and pretence. The more you 
acquire in the mind, the more accomplishments you cultivate in 
the faculties, the greater will you become when these qualities 
are harnessed to the power of controlling your fellow-beings. 

By another law of balance, the realm of mental desserts is also 
the only realm of worry, apprehension, fear of the future and 
gloomy forebodings of all kinds. 

The woman who deems life made for mental desserts is the 
most wretched of all creatures ; despite the effort she makes to 
establish the contrary belief in her friends. Her smiles are 
forced. She is burying under a mountain all those better gifts 
that God has placed in her charge, and she repays the trust by 
reading novels, playing cards, devoting her time to play or 
amusement and much worrying, with an ever-growing dislike 
for the sweeter and more serious things of life. It is surface 
thinking and the use of only the outer layer of the mind. Like 
the stomach that feeds on nothing but desserts, there comes a 
weakening and breakdown, a nervous unrest, or a tendency to 
hysterics, or other cloud upon her existence. She sees all the 
weakness of others, even in her own family, and they make her 
unhappy, all the while longing for some excitement and some 
form of stimulant in her pleasures, until at last her soul passes 
over to the morbid chasm. 

Mental desserts have their time and place, but nobody can 
afford to make them the chief meal of the brain. 

The millions of young men, and the countless thousands of 
grown men in this country who hate any form of mental action 
except desserts, are playing into the hands of those who pursue 
the laws of Nature for more useful ends. 



MENTAL LOSSES 173 

That vitality which is magnetic and which gives to each 
person the power to rule self and others, springs from the deeper 
uses of the mind than the surface. It is for this reason that 
few persons have any real mastery over themselves. In fact it is 
so hard to put down temptation that few care to essay it. The 
cravings for eacElinH^very kind of harm are so supreme in these 
weak lives, that vices are always on the increase. 

Surface thinking is a petty matter. The sensations of the 
press, the love for gossip, the criticism of neighbours, the 
reading of magazines, the perusal of novels, the study of puzzles, 
the playing of cards and other games, the idled hours in social 
affairs, the worship of fine attire, the fascination for races, for 
gambling and for games of chance : all these call into action the 
surface brain and weary the deeper mind by their effervescence. 
Most of them are harmless as far as actual injury is concerned ; 
but they deprive the better faculties of their part in the plan of 
existence. 

There can be no magnetism where there are only mental 
desserts to base it upon. 

The athletes that win the great contests are not fed on 
pie, cake, pastry, ice-cream, or sweets. Such a diet would 
at once place them beyond all hope of even entering the 
tournament. In fact, the rule is the opposite, for all desserts 
are denied them during the long period of their preparation. 

We have often been asked to outline for the ambitious young 
man and woman, and the adult as well for no person is too 
old to study, and student life makes all young again some 
studies that are most usefuTand that arouse the powers of the 
deeper brain ; and we append our usual list at this place : 

As thought lives in words, and as the great people of the world 
have been masters of words, we advise every ambitious person 
to learn the synonyms of English, the shades^ of meaning in 
English words, and their representative words in some other 
language, notably Latin. This is an interesting line of study, 
arid soon becomes quite fascinating. 

The greater the number of words that a person is able to 
use intelligently and with shades of meaning, the greater the 
power of mind and thought that will be developed. 



LESSON THIRTY 

GAINS WITHOUT WAITING 

DELAYS IN THE ACQUISITION of a power so 
valuable as that of personal magnetism should be 
avoided because of the fact that much time will be 
lost in coming to results that will bring gain and 
advantage to the possessor of this gift. Time is passing and 
the years will not wait on any unnecessarily slow process in 
these efforts to move on to success. We have tried to make it 
clear in this system that the magnetic power is a natural part 
of the human body and its faculties. Thousands of men and 
womerTliave possessed it by the manner in which they have 
lived ; and this has been their only training, but it has been 
training nevertheless. They say that experience is a teacher, 
and probably the best in the world ; but it is a teacher ; and its 
pupils are those who have been bright enough to shape their 
lives to its instructions. 

Since the power we are discussing is a natural gift, whether 
acquired by experience, or habits of living, or as the result of 
suggestions and directing guidance , or stimulated by exercises, 
it still remains a natural gift, and as such mayHBellrawn into 
the activities of life from the very start ; to-day, some of it 
may be acquired and recognized ; to-morrow, more of it ; and 
so on without limit, for it is limitless in its jjcqjjej being 
life itself it is as far-reaching and all-embracing as human 
existence. 

You can learn to drive a car in one lesson, that is, a little way, 
and farther in the next lesson, and so on. But you should read 
up on the subject first. We ask only that you read this book 
through as the beginning. Take time for it. Bead^ carefully, 
slowly, understandingly . Then review the interesting parts ; 
omitting the exercises that comeln the latter half of the volume. 
Then give a third reading to the R6gime of Mental Magnitude, 

174 



GAINS WITHOUT WAITING 175 

as that furnishes the completed combination that makes this 
power, as has been stated, a unit of all the operations of the 
human organism. 

The body is composed of material from chemical elements ; 
and these are made up of molecules ; these are built of the 
combination of atoms ; and each atom is composed of electrons 
that are in the same kind of motion that prevails in our solar 
system, with a central sun, and revolving planets. Thus the 
material of which the human body consists is, in the ultimate 
analysis, nothing but electrons, and all of these are generators 
of magnetic energy. This is the material body. 

Each cell in the body holds its intelligent centre, and when 
these are brought together in masses, the result is the creation 
of the brain. 

The electrons of the body hold magnetism in a diffused state ; 
and it is part of life to collect them in nerve centres or ganglia, 
and in the brain mass. But it is easily possible to increase these 
almost without limit ; and an increase if it is not wasted by 
the faults and Leakages we have described becomes magnetism. 

Personal magnetism is a combination of Mental Magnitude 
and the generated magnetism of the body. 

These reasons are given here to show why we wish you to 
read the Regime of Mental Magnitude at least three times 
before beginning the actual work of developing this power as a 
means of winning success in life. 

Another bit of advice is added here. Read three times the 
lesson in the Department preceding this which is entitled the 
Magnetic Eye of Youth. We wish you to assume at once as 
a new and fixed habit the control of the vital muscles, the 
control of the chest, the control of the vertical carriage of the 
head and body, and the control of the facial contractions. All 
these influences make or mar your immediate success. You will 
now have as the basis of progress : 

1. The careful re-reading of the book. 

2. The adoption of the Regime of Mental Magnitude. 

3. The control of the vital muscles, the vital centres and 
the facial contractions. After the reading of the book has been 
concluded, the last two items will require only a few minutes 
and this we call 

THE FIRST DAY. 



l?6 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

But the day's advance does not begin until after the reading 
is completed and this must be remembered. 

The next step is to retain what you have acquired to begin 
with, and to add the study of the Mental Losses, in the pre- 
ceding lesson, ending with the fixed purpose to acquire optimism 
of the right kind. That lesson will tell you what is the right 
kind. This we call 

THE SECOND DAY. 

Progress of a marked and distinct kind has been made by 
the reading of the book ; more progress has been made by its 
review ; and kstjlj more prQgrfigfl_hfta follftTOfjJJip, ma^ry of thft 
f ^ MfiIlt^LMagnitudfi_and the control of the vital 



muscles, the vital centres and the facial contractions. But very 
decided progress attends the adoption of the right kind of 
optimism. You will recognize your very sudden acquisition of 
personal magnetism ; and there will have gone out from you a 
certain subtle but very distinct power which will reach others 
and be felt by them without their knowing how it came about. 
Unconsciously there will be paid you both respect and atten- 
tion, and you will rise in their estimate of you. Yet this is 
only the end of the second day. 

Now you must adopt one of the dead^still positions that are 
taught in a later part of the book. It is not an exercise, but a 
habit. Keep all that you have acquired in the first two days, 
and add some dead-still positions as stated. This we call 

THE THIRD DAY. 

Next you are to add one of the tensing habits taken from 
another Department of the book, wGite retaimng all that you 
have acquired. This we call 

THE FOURTH DAY. 

Now you add another of the dead-still positions ; keeping all 
that you have acquired ; and this we call 

THE FIFTH DAY. 

When we say that all you have acquired is to be retained, 
you must remember that whatever becomes a habit takes no 
time to use. It is not an exercise. It is a way of living. 

THE SIXTH DAY requires attention to the Physical Losses 
that are described in one of the lessons of this Department. 
Select any one loss that you find of sufficient interest to be 
discarded, and eliminate it from your list of Leakages. 



GAINS WITHOUT WAITING 177 

THE SEVENTH DAY is to be devoted to the elimination of 
another Physical Loss. 

THE EIGHTH DAY brings the study of the Nervous 
Losses ; and one of these should be overcome. 

THE NINTH DAY deals with another Nervous Loss. 

THE TENTH DAY includes consideration of a Mental Loss. 

THE ELEVENTH DAY brings in another of the dead-still 
positions, to be selected by you. Bear in mind that each day's 
addition is to include all that has preceded. This may seem 
difficult, but it is very simple when actually put to the test. 

THE TWELFTH DAY adds another tensing habit. 

THE THIRTEENTH DAY deals with another Physical 
Loss. 

THE FOURTEENTH DAY deals with all the remaining 
losses, Physical and Nervous and Mental ; thus ending them at 
this time. If they cannot be overcome so readily, devote further 
days to them after this list has been ended. 

THE FIFTEENTH DAY adds one more of the dead-still 
positions. 

THE SIXTEENTH DAY includes another of the tenso 
habits. 

THE SEVENTEENTH DAY adds one more of the dead : still 
positions. 

THE EIGHTEENTH DAY includes the tensj^walk. 

THE NINETEENTH DAY goes back to the lesson in the 
Department of the Magnetic Eye, under the title of the Vital 
Eye, in which the Temple Generating or the Temple Pulling 
habit is taught ; and that habit is now to be fixed for permanent 
use in developing the magnetic vitality of the eyes and face, as 
well as brain. It is to serve a most important mission in your 
life. 

THE TWENTIETH DAY deals with the three middle pitches 
of the speaking voice, called the fourth, fifth and sixth pitches. 
Begin now to practise using them in conversation of all kinds, 
whether at home or in other places. 

THE TWENTY-FIRST DAY introduces the use of the tense 
eye as taught in the Department of the Magnetic Eye. 

THE TWENTY-SECOND DAY takes up the subject of 
mental determination which is to play so important a part in 
Applied Personal Magnetism and in Magnetic Healing. At this 

12 



i?8 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

time we can only consider the beginning of it, for it will require 
weeks or months to fully unfold its possibilities, which are 
really unlimited. Mental determination is a power that is 
given to magnetism from the brain ; and, when developed, is 
capable of accomplishing any purpose in life that can be 
accomplished. It cannot do the impossible ; but, before these 
lessons are ended, we shall show you that it can come close to 
this achievement. It can come close also to the age of miracles 
when brought up to its highest standard. 

Mental determination is founded on the fully developed 
magnetic powers of the body, the nerves and the brain. 
Without all the magnetism that comes from these sources, it 
would fall short in its work. For this reason we will only start 
its work at this place. It is both interesting and valuable. 

The only part of this study that we will introduce here is a 
simple quotation that is intended to serve as an exciting 
influence in firing the mind to secure its ends. This quotation 
comes from the play of The Merchant of Venice, and is a demand 
as well as expression of purpose made by Shylock who, on find- 
ing that he is entitled by law to a pound of flesh from the 
enemy to whom he made a loan, purposes to enforce the terms 
of the bond in order to cause the death of the man he hates. 
Therefore when he is offered more money than is due him, in 
place of exacting the penalty, he insists on the latter. With fist 
clinched, he stands facing the Judge, and says : 

" I will have my bond." 

You are to repeat this with body tense, and dead-still, 
holding the fist of the right hand forward and about on a line 
with your hip, with the tones of your voice subdued but very 
firm. On the first repetition, place the emphasis on the word 
bond. " I will have my bond." On the next repetition, place 
the emphasis on the word will. " I will have my bond." On 
the next repetition increase the emphasis on the word will 
without raising the voice. " I WILL have my bond." One 
more repetition with the emphasis made still stronger on the 
word will. " I WILL have my bond." But be sure not to raise 
the voice. It is this increase of power by the mental force that 
takes the place of noise-force, that develops the mental deter- 
mination. It is a law of magnetism that any increase of the 
will-energy that can be made without requiring the aid of the 



GAINS WITHOUT WAITING 179 

physical tones or physical body, will very speedily develop 
mental determination. 

The wonderful part of this determination is that it exists just 
as strongly when no sound is made by the voice and no words 
are expressed as with such sounds and words. Now the final 
repetition is to be made silently but with tense fist and dead- 
still body. Speak the words mentally only, but look at the 
imaginary Judge. If he were living before you we guarantee 
that he would know your decision without your uttering any 
spoken words. This is the beginning of the subtle power that 
is able to sway men and women and to win its way in the world. 
When we come to the Department of Applied Personal Mag- 
netism, we will find inspiring opportunities for carrying on this 
development in a variety of uses that show that its value is 
greater than can be told in words. 

In this Department of Instantaneous Personal Magnetism, 
we have shown the way to come immediately into this power, 
and to recognize your possession of it. The probability is 
that you have advanced fully one-half of the journey in these 
twenty -two days. That is, you are now fifty per cent or more 
developed as a person of magnetism. This is a quick work. The 
rest will be easy, but you will not advance so rapidly. Nor 
would you wish to do so, for there is a pleasure and fascination 
in pursuing these studies ; and to have them come to an end 
too soon would leave you missing them as you would miss a 
beloved friend. 

If you have not advanced half-way at the end of these twenty- 
two days, the reason will be that you have not followed the 
suggestion made, especially as to reading and re-reading the 
whole book carefully before starting the first day. Then there 
may be the reason that you have not given full attention to the 
different requirements. Other students have made the progress 
that we have indicated ; you are fully as bright as they are, 
and perhaps you have skimmed over the suggestions and in- 
structions, expecting they might be adopted with very little 
attention. If we are right in this surmise, then we feel sure 
that you will repeat the twenty-two days, and proceed more 
carefully and studiously. 



DEPARTMENT OF MAGNETIC 
HEALTH 

LESSON THIRTY-ONE 

FOUL HABITS ARE REPELLENT 

THERE AEE TWO KINDS of health ; one of the 
general body including the flesh, the nerves and the 
brain ; the other relates to the electrical vitality 
which is allied with the sources of magnetism such as 
are described in this work. It is never a fact that mere 
physical or mental or even nervous health brings magnetism 
into use ; for there may be a dozen counteracting influences 
that offset what is gained. There are robust farmers and robust 
city dwellers who seem to possess perfect health, yet who are 
lacking in personal magnetism. Any student of this book will 
see why they are not gifted with such power. 

On the other hand there are persons who seem very frail 
who are quite magnetic. So there is another basis of success 
other than mere health of the body and its parts. 

But it is true that anything that saps the vitality prevents 
the accumulation of magnetism ; and PAIN of any kind is one 
of the greatest enemies in this line, for it is exhaustive of nervous 
and magnetic energy. 

We have never seen a person who was suffering from the 
toothache who had any magnetic control over others. This 
affliction not only saps the vitality and draws away its vigour, 
but sets up a still more dangerous enemy in the shape of 
irritation. 

Whatever will irritate a person, whether in physical pain, 
or torture of the nerves, or mental aggravation, will rapidly 
reduce magnetic power. This fact is known to most persons 
who are crafty, who take advantage of it to destroy the coolness 

180 



FOUL HABITS ARE REPELLENT 181 

and calm demeanour that are so attractive in an opponent. It 
requires skill of personal management to ward off the attempts 
of another to irritate you ; but this is generally mental irritation. } 
Pain from toothache racks the nerves, if severe ; and vitality ! 
flows out of the body faster than it is generated. 

We have never seen a person who was suffering from head- 
ache, or rheumatism, or neuralgia, or neuritis, or other acute 
malady, who was magnetic at such times ; although they might 
have been highly so when conditions were normal. We recall 
on one occasion hearing Beecher say in private that his last 
address was a failure because at the time he had a most painful 
attack of indigestion ; and his hearers must have wondered why 
he was so stupid ; yet under ordinary circumstances his personal 
magnetism exceeded that of any public speaker of his times, and 
his control over audiences was almost unlimited. 

Pain. It is one of the axioms of magnetism that anything 
that saps the life out of the nervous system is sure to demag- 
netise the body, which means that no person can hope to acquire 
power when the avenues of escape are as great as the oppor- 
tunities of acquisition. Pain is the surest and quickest of all 
enemies. It wearies mind, nerves and flesh. A boil will lower 
the tone of the system through its exhausting influence, as 
also will toothache, a headache, rheumatism, or any kind of 
physical torture. 

How to get rid of these enemies is easily answered. A boil 
is not so great a problem, for the cure and the prevention are 
both at hand. The same is true of headaches and rheumatism. 
The toothache can be stopped in most cases by extraction or by 
treatment. But, whatever the cause, and whatever the remedy, 
the principle remains the same there can be no magnetism 
where there is pain. 

There are several reasons why bad teeth should be treated. 
One is that they generate pain, and so sap the vitality . Another 
is that they send into the blood and into the general circulation 
of the whole body a virulent poison that affects the brain, 
the mind, the heart, and especially the nerves. One tiny drop 
of this poison contains billions of bacteria, and these spread 
far and wide in the blood and do injury that until recently was 
unaccountable. This injury may prove to be neuritis, or 
rheumatism, or neuralgia, or brain taint affecting the processes 



182 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

of thinking and even the criminal nature. Therefore the most 
sensible thing a sensible person can do is to get rid of the 
teeth if there is no other remedy. 

But there is a still more potent reason why decayed teeth 
should not be allowed to remain in the mouth. The odour is 
offensive to those who must .come in contact with the breath 
from such poison. In addition to this odour which is due to the 
height of neglect in personal care, every exhalation carries out 
upon the air millions of floating bacteria from open rottenness 
both in the teeth and tonsils. Speaking of the modern insanity 
known as " flirtation parties " in which painted girls with bad 
tonsils, decayed teeth and intestinal poisons saturating the 
breath through blood circulation, kiss and are kissed by boys 
and young men with bad tonsils, decayed teeth and intestinal 
poisons saturating the breath through blood circulation, a 
physician says : " From knowledge obtained in a professional 
way it may be stated with certainty that ninety -nine per cent 
of these young people are foul physically, no matter what they 
are morally." Such conditions are repellent, and therefore there 
is no hope of magnetic attractions in them, and they grow up 
as hopeless in after-life as now. They furnish the common 
herd, without which there would be no chance for ambitious 
people to rise in the world. 

We have been informed of many cases where men with 
decayed teeth have been rejected by women who were repelled 
by this foulness. We have heard of many cases where women 
with decayed teeth have been unable to attract and win men 
worth having. Foulness is unmagnetic and therefore repellent. 
People with more desire for wasting their money in frivolities 
than for making themselves attractive, go through life losing 
friends and opportunities because of decayed teeth ; and we 
have had information covering thousands of cases to tjie effect 
that chances for getting on in the world and winning greater 
rewards in every way, financially and otherwise, have been lost 
because of the stupid refusal to spend some of their earnings in 
getting cleanliness of the teeth, while they waste it for doubtful 
forms of pleasure. They injure their health, lose friends, lose 
respect of decent people, and lose opportunities for bettering 
their financial condition. Only recently have we learned of 
the case of a very brilliant young man who was in line of 



FOUL HABITS ARE REPELLENT 183 

advancement where his salary would have been a thousand 
pounds a year ; and, instead, he was discharged. We asked the 
employer why this was done, and was given this reply : " He 
had been with us seven years. Our manager suggested to him 
that, as he had to meet many people, he should have his teeth 
looked after, and he told the manager that he had not employed 
a dentist at any time in his life and he did not intend to begin 
now. So we let him go. Since he has gone the air in the office 
is not as foul as when he was here." It is a fact that one person 
with ulcerated or decayed teeth can send out into the air of 
a large room a very offensive odour. 

Hence it is easy to see why ambitious persons will fail in life, 
even if capable and efficient. Another employer said : " There 
always comes the time when one or more of our employees 
may rise in their positions, and one or more may be dismissed. 
Personal habits or neglect have much to do with promotion 
and demotion." 

The tonsils, when decayed, generally discharge pus in small 
drops from their pores. This pus, although very small, contains 
billions of bacteria, which spread rapidly as they enter the 
circulation of the blood. In the " flirtation parties " it is 
estimated that practically every one taking part in them has 
pus oozing from the tonsils ; and this pus works its way to the 
lips and is transferred to the co-kissers ; but in eating food or 
in drinking water or other liquid, the pus mixes with it and 
enters the stomach. Congestion in the stomach is fertile soil 
for germs and poisonous bacteria, and the rapidly spreading 
cases of ulcerated stomachs will be the result. 

Under such conditions magnetism is impossible. 

Personal neglect is always unmagnetic, even if it did not lead 
to disease and loss of vitality. 

Any influence that tends to bring genuine success is an aid 
to magnetism ; and it is a fact the odour of a bad breath is 
sending more men and women into the ranks of failure than 
any other unpleasant habit. The people who can help them, 
avoid them as much as possible. 



LESSON THIRTY-TWO 

WANTON LOSSES OF VITALITY 

HABITS GOOD AND BAD play an important part 
in making or ruining vitality. One person keeps 
himself at the point of exhaustion in certain indis- 
cretions, and goes through life an under-dog ; he never 
chooses to save his energy, and so blames the world 
because it owes him a living, and does not give it to him. There 
are men and women who are careless and defiantly negligent of 
their health, in the conceit that they are hardy and can endure 
any exposure. Here is a fine young man being buried who went 
out the other day in a chilling rain with no protection against 
outdoor conditions ; he plunged from a warm house, without 
overcoat, and in three hours was brought back home suffering 
from chills which developed into pneumonia. Obstinacy is 
the exact opposite of mental magnetism. Most of the bad 
judgment in the world is due to obstinacy ; and a large 
proportion of deaths are the result of this defect of the brain. 
Here is a woman who is clad in her indoor clothing standing 
at the outer door, saying a long and oft-repeated good-bye to a 
lady friend who is dressed for the chilling blasts and who does 
not mind standing there indefinitely. She lacks the judgment 
to leave promptly ; and the woman whom she is saying good- 
bye to does not like to hurt her feelings ; so she contracts fatal 
pneumonia, and hurts the feelings of husband and family. 
Any exposure that will end in death will surely weaken the 
energy when it does not kill. 

Wet Clothing. Electricity, which is the basis of magnetism , 
is just the same in a human body as it is in a storage battery or 
along a wire. Dampness is a good conductor, and will lead it 
away from its centres. When the clothing is wet, the body drops 
many degrees in vitality, as most persons find out when it is 
too late. The same is true of damp or wet shoes. The same is 

184 



WANTON LOSSES OF VITALITY 185 

true if you sit on the ground, or stand in damp places, or in 
any way connect the warm skin with the great fund of outer 
moisture by carelessness. 

Thin Shoes. We had intended to omit this enemy, because 
there is such opposition everywhere to the wearing of heavy 
shoes. But the fact may as well be stated that thin shoes bring 
the vital nerves of the feet so close to the ground that dangers 
ensue from wearing them. One of the severest critics of a 
prominent statesman spoke of his shoes and boots as being 
heavy enough for a giant. Bonaparte made it a point to buy 
the heaviest shoes for the feet of his soldiers, as he found it 
saved them the disorders that arise from marching too much in 
damp places. His soldiers were less stricken with bowel 
troubles than any armies ever known. In the Great War 
thousands of men died of bowel weakness. Sickness kills twice 
as many men as the shots of the enemy. 

Standing on cold ground, or damp ground, or walking on wet 
or even damp ground, with thin shoes is one of the surest means 
of getting the body out of order, to say nothing of the loss of 
vitality that affects the generation of magnetism. This fact has 
been verified by a large number of experiments, and cannot be 
challenged. 

Excitants of Appetite. No greater mistake can be made than 
th'at of exciting or tempting the appetite with something that is 
abnormal. Nature furnishes excitants that are wholly within 
reason, but man seeks to improve on her efforts by perverted 
creations, such as spices, rich gravies, condiments, pastry, and 
almost anything that may be craved by abnormal tastes. 

Much that grows in the lap of earth is poison. The products 
that are safe to take into the system are very few, compared 
with those that are death-dealing or poisonous. Therefore the 
fact that Nature produces them is not proof that she produces 
them for the human family. 

The test of value is found in an analysis of the body itself. A 
certain number of chemical elements are required and their 
combinations are known to a certainty. Anything else is foreign 
and therefore an injury. 

In many hotels gravy is bought from gravy manufacturers, 
who produce it by the hundreds of barrels. Analysis shows that 
it is not suited to the human body. This is but one of hundreds 



186 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

of things that people are compelled to eat who live away from 
their own firesides. The art of seasoning, flavouring and 
enriching worthless foods is now such an exact science that the 
expert chef, who does not want his employer to look into the 
kitchen, can take the carcass of a cow that died of tuberculosis, 
allow it to become badly tainted with decay, as was proved 
in a recent number of cases, then cook it so as to conceal the 
taste, dress it with gravies, and pass it before the banquet board 
as a delicious viand. 

Most people eat too much. This being true, the safer way 
is to eat onljTthe foods that are known and recognized, and 
discard all others. We know that it is unpopular to teach 
plainness of diet, but we feel warranted in saying that vitality 
and magnetic energy are weakened by rich foods, and by the 
tempters of a false relish. The nearer we can come to plain 
eating, and not much of that, the greater will be the powers of 
life. 

Indigestion. It is hardly necessary to speak of this fault, 
after all that has been said. But it is a fault, rather than a 
malady, just as a headache or toothache is a fault. What can 
be prevented or removed cannot be termed a malady. Indiges- 
tion is either blind or acute. The latter is felt after eating, 
and may abideTor hours or days. Blind indigestion is not 
felt at the stomach, and leads persons who eat harmful foods 
to exclaim that they agree with them, for no unpleasant results 
are felt at the stomach. They do not take into consideration the 
rolling of the intestines, the weakness at the heart, the yellow 
bile in the face, and the bad breath ; so they go on eating the 
things that keep the vitality low. 

As all life, both magnetic and physical, comes from the 
nutrition that makes the body and its parts, the first great 
battle at this stage of the course is to fight down and entirely 
remove all traces of indigestion, both acute and blind. 

Carbon that has been turned into a poison by a chemical 
action is found in all conditions and almost everywhere. Its 
presence in the breath that passes from the lungs is easily 
detected, for it will extinguish burning carbon, and where 
carbon will not burn life cannot exist. It is also present in all 
newly made bread, cake, and most of the eatables that are fresh 
from the oven. It is the essential power in making dough rise. 



WANTON LOSSES OF VITALITY 187 

It is found in all soda-water ; and there is no drink so vicious as 
that which contains gas of carbon. It is found in all charged 
waters of every kind. It is the sparkle. Champagne is based 
almost wholly upon carbon gas for its quality. Wine, beer, 
cider, soft drinks, and all ferment are filled with this poison. 

It is liked because it has the bite, the snap, the sparkle, and 
much of the scrape that throats long for. One of its great offices 
in sickness is to cleanse down the stomach after the mucus of 
an outraged gastric juice has been collected there, clogging it 
to excess. The gaseous fluid cleanses it, just as a file will clean 
the teeth, or sandpaper will remove dirt from the face. Many 
doctors recommend plain soda, or other form of carbon gas ; and 
what wonder is it that nearly every person who has taken it 
has had agendicitis ? The latter malady is so much on the 
increase to-day that it may be called the forthcoming epidemic 
of civilisation. It is due to the loss of the fine surface membrane 
of the intestines, which opens the way to the vermiform ; and 
this is the first result of too much carbon gas. 

Neuritis is also becoming epidemic. It is due to the taking 
into the stomach of elements that are not assimilated by the 
system, because they are not food elements. More things that 
are not foods are eaten to-day than those that are foods. Yet 
they pass as foods, and are found on every menu and in most 
homes. These tax the vitality because they not only dojiot 
furnish nutrition to support it, but require a great and wasteful 
expenditure of power to dispose of them and get them out of the 
body. 

Sickish Diet. This does not mean sickening diet, but it is 
intended to include diet that gives mere pleasure and no 
strength. It costs a large fund of vitality each day to digest and | 
throw out of the system the excess of food that is generally 
taken ; and when this excess is of the sickish kind, there can 
be no energy to be added to the storehouse of magnetism. 

The plainer the food, the greater is the energy and the vitality 
of the body. It is, however, a hard doctrine to preach, for there 
is a universal craving for carbon in one form or another. Some 
like their carbon in the shape of sweets, some like it in cake, 
dessert, puddings, pies, doughnuts, fats, butter, cream or alcohol. 
The last named is almost pure carbon. When a person likes 
alcohol, there is less liking for sugars and fats, for the result 



188 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

would be disease. One form of carbon is interchangeable into 
another. Sugars everywhere make alcohol. Starches every- 
where make alcohol. Starches make sugar. Rich gravies, ice- 
creams, butter, cakes, sweets, and all the things that please the 
palate, are carbons, and their own element could have passed 
easily into alcohol. 

The child is born with a craving for carbon, and the mother's 
milk is therefore much sweeter in sugar than the milk of the 
cow whose young is destined to eat hay and grain. The human 
craving increases as years are unfolded, and no parent can ignore 
the demand of Nature. The absence of carbon means the 
absence of magnetism ; while the excess of it means the burning 
out of the fires. Nothing will burn that is not carbon. This 
craving allows the palate to pass on to the stomach almost 
anything that has carbon in it, and the result is the eating 
of much that is sickish in its nature, such as cakes, pastry, ice- 
cream, new bread, gravies, patties, crisp fried and baked foods 
and many things that tax the energy of the nervous system in 
the effort to drive it out of the body. 

We were at one time invited to sit upon the platform in a 
great hall where one of the most magnetic speakers of his times 
was to make an important address. He was a man who was 
known to possess what is called natural personal magnetism ; 
having come by it through habits of life that tend to develop it. 

Just before he appeared for the introduction, he made the 
statement that he had eaten an evening meal that contained too 
many rich foods ; his stomach was uneasy, as he put it. A 
sickish taste was in his mouth. Eructations of gas troubled 
him. He said, " I generally eat sparingly before speaking to 
the public, and only the plainest foods. Now, to oblige a very 
kind hostess, I am not feeling as well as I should." 

The speech was a failure ; he did not evince any magnetism ; 
and he made the apology to the audience that he came there 
in poor health. Magnetism requires a sensible diet. 



LESSON THIRTY-THREE 

ARTIFICIAL MAGNETISM 

THE WANTON LOSSES OF VITALITY that were 
discussed in the preceding lesson were those that 
related to physical losses. There is another class 
that may be called hygienic, because they relate to the loss 
of health, and consequently to the weakening of the sources 
of magnetism. 

Ice- Water. The use of ice-water if taken slowly and allowed 
to warm in the mouth, a little at a time, will not do injury to 
the health ; but the pouring of a half -glass or more at one time 
into the stomach will quickly decreaseJihfi^action of the heart, 
check respiration, contract the stomach so that it will force 
out some of its contents undigested, and lessen the magnetic 
heat of the nervous system. We recall several cases where 
speakers were deprived of their usual magnetic powers by 
drinking ice-water just before making their addresses. One of 
our students, a lawyer of national reputation, wrote the follow- 
ing assertion in a letter to a friend which was forwarded to 
us for criticism : " I have had success in my trials whenever I 
have held magnetic sway over the court. I have learned that 
food and drink have something to do with magnetism. I 
am fond of ice-cream when I am. heated, and often partake 
just before going to court in the afternoon. I have noticed 
that my vitality is less and my magnetism is very much 
impaired for speaking after I have taken either ice-water or ice- 
cream, or any chilling food or fluid." The experience is a 
common one IT care is taEenTcTwatch results. 

Excess of Water. This is injurious just before an attempt to 
use the magnetic powers. The best time to drink watery is when 
the stomach is empty. Thirst should not invite^jreat floods of 
fluid to the stomach. The more water one drinks in the course 

of twenty-four hours, if taken in small quantities at a time, the 

189 



190 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

better will the machinery of the functions do their work. This 
method of drinking prevents the stomach from carrying more 
water than the blood can take up, and hence it is not harmful. 
There is a widespread belief that the use of stimulants will 
develop magnetism. They burn up the magnetism in the body, 
and during the very brief period of this burning, they seem to 
set free the power they are destroying. This is wholly artificial 
and wasteful, for every reaction leaves the person weaker than 
before the taking of the supposed aid. 

That is a stimulant which seeks to make some foreign matter 
do the work of Nature, and arouse a failing power or bring to life 
a dead vitality. Tea, coffee, alcohol, and the many concoctions 
that are sold as hot winter drinks or cold summer beverages, 
are indulged in, with the result that the fires of magnetism are 
burned out. There is much discussion on both sides of the 
question, some persons claiming that stimulants are necessary. 
The author can speak of his own experience, and say that he 
has never used tobacco, tea, coffee, alcohol, or stimulant of any 
kind since he was born. He can also speak with authority of 
many persons who have held magnetic sway for decades, and 
who have not used any of the things named. 

A very important law of life comes into play in this attempt 
to substitute the artificial for the natural, and it is this : 

Nature will not carry on the process of generating vitality, 
energy or magnetism while some foreign agency is employed as 
a substitute for that purpose. 

The same law is seen at work in the supply of natural heat. 
The warmer the room in which you live, the less heat will be 
generated in the body ; the colder the outside conditions, the 
warmer will the surface of the body become. If you toast your 
feet, as the saying goes, over a grate, or at a stove, or supply 
artificial heat, Nature will not develop as much natural heat 
within the body. In a person of normal health, the best way to 
get the feet warm is to bathe them in cold water, wipe them 
very dry, then bathe the upper part of the chest in cold water. 
The feet will be in a glow in a short time, and will remain warm. 
The quickest way to get confirmed cold feet is to form the habit 
of warming them at some stove or heater that furnishes artificial 
warmth. 
This law runs through everything. 



ARTIFICIAL MAGNETISM 191 

In the study of magnetism, no greater mistake can ever be 
made than to seek power through stimulants ; for the best 
stimulant can do nothing more than burn up in a more rapid 
manner what power is already on hand. Some speakers get so 
far down in vitality that they can do nothing until they take 
whisky or other stimulant ; but their fires are soon burned out, 
as has been proved in hundreds of well-known cases. The 
magnetic speaker or actor needs no fluid in the mouth from the 
time he begins until he is done. The few exceptions to this rule 
are in cases where careers of usefulness are on the wane. Two 
generations and more ago the three most magnetic men alive 
were Daniel Webster, Rufus Choate and Junius Booth. Not one 
ever used water or fluid of any kind during a J>ublic effort ; 
there was no pitcher and glass on the stand to supply them with 
moisture. All three were great because of their excess of mag- 
netic vitality, and all three have left names that will live for 
ages. Yet Webster and Booth, in later life only, were victims of 
the alcohol habit ; but not one of them made any fame during 
that period. Booth had achieved all he was capable of during 
his years of ambition, when he wholly ignored wines and liquors, 
as his son, Edwin, has so well stated. Success turned his head, 
and his career was erratic and downward. Yet he was not a 
drunkard. 

Webster was not a drinking man during the years that he 
climbed to the pinnacle of success. He was afraid to touch any 
beverage that was not clear, cool water. Success and acceptance 
of social attentions dethroned him ; and in the latter years of 1 
his life, when his work was done, although he was only in the 
early sixties, he stood before the public " a failure in every 
department of life," as one of his greatest friends has declared 
in a printed work ; and he was later on described as a magnifi- 
cent ruin. 

Magnetism brings success. Success brings social attentions. 

Rufus Choate was a man of the highest morality in personal 
habits. He had but one love, and that was triumph in his 
profession. He worked himself into a state of nervous collapse, 
and then became an excessive tea drinker. But his work had 
been accomplished long before he took up this habit. The tea 
broke down his health. He ignored all laws of diet and soon 
his stomach was a wreck. Death came to him while yet in the 



192 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

prime of active life. Many young men have been misled by 
the statement, so often made, that Choate's magnetism was the 
result of his tea-drinking habit ; and we know of men who 
have sought the power by the use of this beverage, and have 
wondered why it failed them. 

In our efforts to ascertain the facts, for facts are very 
important in this study, we at first were led to believe that 
Choate built up his magnetism by tea. Many experiments with 
scores of men proved that no one else could do the same thing. 
We left no stone unturned to get at the true origin of the story 
that has so often been printed to the effect that he was an 
inveterate tea drinker all his life, and we found no proof of that ; 
nor did his historian have any proof of it except the well-known 
fact that he drank tea to excess in the latter part of his life ; 
and only when his health had begun to fail did his friends and 
relatives know of the habit. His favourite beverage in the 
first forty years of his life was water. 

No grander example of magnetism was ever seen than that 
displayed by John B. Gough, who was personally known to 
us for many years After ne had discarded his early alcoholic 
habits, his power developed, and not before. For all Ms years of 
public triumph he used chiefly cold water as a beverage. One 
man who had attended him on his tours for eight months stated 
in the most positive terms : "I have not missed a meal during 
all this time, having been at the table with Mr. Gough day in 
and day out, three times a day, and having partaken of his 
lunches when the regular meals were not to be had. We were 
companions in eating. I personally know that no fluid passed 
his lips except cold water. He had used coffee and tea, as he 
told me, but only in small quantities. During the severe tax of 
a prolonged lecture tour he depended solely on cold water. I am 
told that, later in life, he used both coffee and tea in moderation, 
but not when his health was at its best. Plain food and cold 
water jgave him his best powers." Gough once made the 
assertion that he could geFafong on a diet of bread and water 
and yet maintain his public work. 



LESSON THIRTY-FOUR 

THE MAGNETISM OF HEALTH 

MANY PEOPLE LIVE TO EAT and there are some 
who eat to live. Several principles are involved in 
the matter of eating. Dieting is the employing of 
that restricted line of foods that are necessary in order to 
cease irritating the body so that Nature may get a chance 
to repair the injury that has been done by improper foods. 
While many maladies are set in motion at the begin- 
ning by attacks by bacteria, it is well known that no 
bacteria will be able to secure a hold in the system until 
improper foods have prepared the soil for them to feed upon. 
No infectious or contagious diseases can get a start until 
improper foods have preceded them. Even inherited taints and 
maladies will be held dormant and will never appear until the 
blood has been poisoned by improper foods. 

This then brings us to the consideration of what are and what 
are not proper foods. 

Our reason for discussing this subject here is that magnetism 
cannot be generated to any appreciable degree in any body that 
is subjected to the irritation set up by congestion of any organ 
or membrane. Nothing so quickly saps the vitality as irritation. 
It is a form of torment ; and the soil that invites bacterial 
diseases is the one great cause of irritation. Being derived from 
the use of improper foods, our present study must deal with 
them. 

The husband whose digestive system has been subjected to 
the torments of badly cooked or wrongly selected food, and 
whose nerves are wild with the suppressed agony of blind 
indigestion, cannot exhibit for his wife that fondness and 
affection that is expected of him when in normal condition. 
Nor could he exercise the power of magnetism over any one. 
We were told by a man of unusual magnetic power that when 

13 I 



194 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

he called on his sweetheart to propose to her, an undigested 
dinner was crying for relief, and his stomach was filled with a 
thousand little devils all shrieking with pain, due to his indis- 
cretion in eating, and his efforts to win the approval of 
his lady-love were a dismal failure. The conversation was as 
follows, as reported by the lady and confirmed by the man : 

He (taking her hand). I have something to say to you this 
evening that I have been wanting to say for a long time. Can 
you guess what it is ? 

She (demure). I am sure I do not know what you mean. 

He (placing one hand over his heart ; but the hand slips down 
to his stomach). I have a feeling for you here. 

She (watching his hand). Where ? 

He. Here. Where else should it be ? 

She. Are you ill ? 

He. No. What is the matter with you. Are you nervous ? 
I am trying to tell you how much I love you. 

She. But you are so restless that you annoy me. I have 
never seen you this way before. 

He. I am in pain. I thought it was a heart pain, but it must 
be that darned dinner I ate. My stomach is full of dancing 
devils. 

She. I do not like your language. You would have sworn if 
I had not been here. Now is it not true that if I were out of 
hearing you would swear with your indigestion ? Tell me the 
truth. 

He. You bet I would. 

She. And if we were married would you not swear before 
me under the same circumstances ? Do not conceal the 
truth. 

He. A man who is being tortured as I am would not be half 
a man if he were not capable of swearing. I am a whole man 
when it comes to indigestion. Will you marry me ? 

She. ;Why should I ? You are not attractive when you do 
not swear, and you would be less than attractive when you 
compelled me to listen to your profanity. If we are not married 
to each other, I can dismiss you when I wish, which I could not 
do after marriage. 

He. You then refuse me ? Do you dismiss me ? 

She. I think it best that you go at once and see a doctor. 



THE MAGNETISM OF HEALTH 195 

In this case all semblance of personal magnetism had been 
lost in the pain of indigestion. 

The cause was improper food. 

The rule of proper food is this : 

Eat only the elements of Nature that are required to build 
the body and all its life, both nervous and mental. Any food 
that contains elements not required by the body and its life 
is foreign to it ; hence is a poison, and sets up intestinal 
poisoning. 

The rule of the proper preparation of food is this : 

It should be eaten in a state that retains its elements in their 
actual value ; and no process of cooking should change such 
condition or value. 

DIGESTION takes place as follows : 

Fortj^per cent of all digestion occurs at the stomach ; and 
sixty" per cent of all digestion occurs below the stomach, 
including the intestinal canal. 

Active indigestion takes place in the stomach. Acute 
indigestion is a dangerous form and may cause the heart to stop 
beating. More than one hundred thousand people die every 
year from acute indigestion ; but the lesser form known as 
active indigestion is almost always curable, although very 
exhausting and weakening. Blind indigestion occurs after the 
food has left the stomach, and lasts much longer than the active 
form. It is not painful but sets up a state of restlessness, 
nervousness and irritability ; but because it is not painful, the 
condition is misunderstood by people who, when not feeling 
distress at the stomach, come to believe that they can eat 
anything with impunity. " Nothing I eat ever hurts me," 
says the man or woman who is highly nervous and irritable. 

They will not tell the truth. 

Not one person in a thousand, except doctors, knows that 
sixty per cent of the nutritive value of food is extracted from it 
by the process of intestinal digestion. Yet it is a matter of 
common knowledge that, when a person's stomach will not 
receive food, the nutrition is given in the form of injections at 
the lower end of the intestinal canal. Life has been supported 
in thousands of cases by this method of feeding. Any food or 
liquid having an odour that is so injected soon comes to the 
breath ; as when onion juice or peppermint water, or some other 



196 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

thing is forced into the colon ; showing that the contents of the 
intestines enter the circulation and are carried to all the organs, 
as well as to the brain, and even to the skin. 

The blood is no better than the contents of the intestines. 

There are two classes of foods : 

1. THE PROPER FOODS. These give magnetic health. 

2. THE IMPROPER FOODS. These destroy magnetic 
health. 

If only the proper foods are eaten, the development of vitality 
and electrically charged energy is a very rapid process. 

When the improper foods are eaten they produce in the blood 
and in the tissue of the body, including flesh, nerves and brain, 
the soil that makes disease possible, and without which soil 
no disease could ever enter the body. 

Improper foods also cause intestinal poisoning, and this 
foulness attacks every part of the body. It is one of the causes 
of rheumatism, neuralgia, and neuritis. It is the sole cause 
of the catarrhs that infest the membranes, especially the 
catarrh of the nose and throat which repels many a friend and 
defeats many an effort to win the respect of others. No person 
wishes to fall in love with a catarrhal individual ; for the mucus 
and phlegm are not only infectious but have an offensive odour. 
If there were no intestinal poisoning, there would be no catarrh ; 
and if there were no improper foods eaten, there would be no 
intestinal poisoning. 

A familiar affliction that is due solely to intestinal poisoning 
is the collection of ^dandruff in the scalp, and also scalp disease. 
There has never yet been discovered a remedy for these troubles 
until the source was discovered, and it was found to be 
the contents of the intestines flowing into the blood. Skin 
maladies also have their origin here. All these defects stand 
in the way of success through magnetism ; as falling dandruff, 
sore scalp and blotched faces all repel friends and followers. 

Another affliction that repels friends and associates is that 
known as BODY ODOUR. Both sexes suffer from it. We have 
met daily for weeks and months women and girls who were 
employed as clerks, who were troubled with arm-pit odour. We 
have known society women of the highest refinement who have 
applied to us for a remedy for the latter offence. They had 
tried all the advertised cures, but with no success whatever. 



THE MAGNETISM OF HEALTH 19? 

Painting the skin under the arm-pits with a semi-varnish 
stopped the pores and nearly caused cancerous growth, but 
was stopped by advice of physicians. 

There exists but one/emedy. 

It is to prevent the poisons from the foul contents of the 
intestines entering the circulation of the blood, and thereby 
coming to the arm-pits. 

In hundreds of cases this remedy succeeded, and has never 
failed in any instance. By choosing proper foods the blood is 
cleaned, and the circulation is sweet and free from all odour. 

The skin becomes fair, pure and of fine texture. This shows 
in the face, and quickly relieves women and girls from the 
necessity of heavy painting. Very recently a man who believed 
more in natural than in artificial beauty and colouring, and 
who knew that what is called love is not so permanent a quality 
as respect, abiding admiration and deep appreciation, resolved 
to choose a wife from among more than two-score lady friends, 
and devoted himself to the study of the face and its natural 
health and colouring, discarding those faces that were sub- 
merged beneath coats of paint through which he could not see 
the texture of the skin. He succeeded, and is now happily 
married. Natural colouring that indicates fine health is 
attractive. 

The teachings of this and similar lessons refer to those 
aids to magnetism that serve to attract instead of repelling 
people. It cannot be denied that, in spite of these personal 
disadvantages which we are discussing, there are men and 
women who are magnetic because of the possession of accumu- 
lated nerve fire driving forth ideas from a fertile brain, and 
stirring into action many thousands of followers by this direct 
power. But close association with persons whose bodily 
conditions are offensive serves to ostracise in time the people 
who would otherwise have been greatly admired and respected. 

Nor does mere health bring the power of controlling others. 
To be useful in this way it must be actually charged with those 
inherent forces that we are teaching in this system. Like all 
attractive qualities it is a splendid help to magnetic supremacy. 



LESSON THIRTY-FIVE 

FOODS THAT ARE MAGNETIC 

EVERYTHING THAT IS CALLED FOOD appears 
in one way or another and in one place or another 
in the experiences of humanity ; but it may surprise 
most readers to know that a majority of the things eaten 
are not even food but merely furnish the soil that invites 
disease, and more than this, they furnish repellent con- 
ditions that cause people to lose their best friends at times 
and to lessen their influence in every walk in life. When man 
came on earth he had no one to tell him what to eat and what 
not to eat ; nor had he the experience of his predecessors in 
testing out the value or danger contained in the things that were 
found growing about him. He had to try them for himself. If 
he survived they might be safe. If he died, some one of his 
family might have learned why. If he lived and suffered, he 
might have guessed what hurt him. It took time to learn all 
about foods, and the time has not yet expired. In the next 
lesson you wiH see what has yet to be learned in this line of 
experience. 

In the preceding lesson you will find the great truths that 
arise concerning food selection ; and the damage that is done 
to health, influence and life by the use of improper foods ; and 
we advise you to re-read that lesson as you have the book open 
close to it now. It tells you vital things of the greatest 
importance. In the present lesson we intend to furnish a list of 
*k e foods that are proper and that establish magnetic health, 
at the same time overcoming the extremely disagreeable 
conditions that may make a person repellent instead of 
attractive. 

The following list contains foods from which you may select 
what you prefer. It is not necessary to use them all or even a 

half or a third of them if you do not care for them. What will 

198 



FOODS THAT ARE MAGNETIC 199 

appeal to one person will not be liked by another. The list is 
large enough to admit of selection and choice. Some persons 
use but few things in their dietary ; we do not expect any one 
person to use all we hereby mention. 

THE MAGNETIC FOODS 

1. ALMONDS as a nutritious dessert ; and ALMOKD COFFEE. 
This is the king of nuts, and the best of all nut foods. It 

is rich in several of the special elements that are difficult to 
find in other foods. But almonds are never beneficial unless 
they are chewed into a fine meal ; or else so ground before being 
eaten. The habit of chewing roasted and salted almonds after 
a meal is the best of all aids to digestion, the making of pure 
blood, and the bringing of a fine complexion into the face and 
clear vision to the eyes ; providing other Proper Foods are 
eaten at the meal. No other nut can approach the almond in 
these qualities. 

ALMOND COFFEE is used in place of the ordinary coffee. 
It is made from almonds that have been roasted to a dark 
brown, then ground in a coffee mill such as is found in all homes. 
After grinding, they should be pounded in a mortar or on a 
board into a fine meal. They are taken in a cup of hot milk. 
The heating of milk pasteurises it, and if it is allowed to get 
cold it loses its vitamins ; for which reason pasteurised milk 
is not beneficial compared with raw milk. Re -heating pasteur- 
ised milk will not restore the vitamins. But heating raw milk! 
to any temperature and using it while hot or very warm 
will not lose these qualities. Therefore in almond coffee, 
raw milk should be heated as hot as coffee usually is when 
served, and enough of the almond meal put in it as may suit 
the taste of the person. It should be well stirred not only when 
put in the milk, but re-stirred in drinking it, so that the meal 
may be thoroughly mixed with the milk. It is a deliciously 
nourishing drink, with no bad qualities and plenty of good ones, 

2. APPLES. These should be sweet or mild, and should be 
perfectly mellow before cooking. They are best baked and 
eaten with cream or milk, and sweetened if desired. Apples 
should not be eaten on an empty stomach, and are best as a 
dessert. 



200 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

3. ARROWROOT well cooked. A side dish only. 

4. ARTICHOKE. A vegetable of light nutrition. 

5. ASPARAGUS. This is an ideal vegetable either in seaso 
or canned. 

6. BARLEY. This is best used in the small form, called peai 
barley, and is most readily suited as one of the ingredients c 
soups or stews. 

7. BEEF. This meat if desired is the most, niitritious of a 
foods of the animal kingdom. It should be cooked slight! 
underdone ; and is to be preferred roasted. Tough beef is nc 
very beneficial. Steer meat is, of course, the best of all. Bee 
broth, beef juice, and raw scraped beef spread on hot toas 
and well salted, make good foods. 

8. BEETROOT. These should be young. They can be bough 
at almost any vegetable market, and the smaller sizes ar 
lower in price and make better food. If so bought or raise 
in the home garden they should be canned for winter an 
eaten freely. 

9. BREAD that is not new. All hot white flour products ar 
harmful, and so is fresh bread. 

10. BUTTERMILK. This is a medical food, which means tha 
it is not only nutritious but has a decidedly curative value. 1 
makes new blood quickly and helps to repair diseased organ* 
But it is a mistake to drink it. The best way is to sip it slow! 
alternating with other foods. 

11. BUTTERED TOAST. Old bread should be toasted an 
when hot should be buttered, and eaten before it gets cold. 

12. CAKE. If plain and not rich, any cake may be eaten a 
any meal. 

13. CAPON. 

14. CARROTS. 

15. CELERY. This may be eaten raw with salt, or cooked i 
any form. It is also used raw in salads. As a purde it make 
a valuable evening first course. 

16. CHERRIES. These should be perfectly ripe, mellow an 
sweet. Avoid the small ones that are coloured red with coal-te 
dyes. 

17. CHESTNUTS cut partly open and boiled or roasted, 

18. CHICKEN. 

19. CHIC&EN BROTH, 



FOODS THAT ARE MAGNETIC 201 

20. CARP. 

21. CLEAR SOUP, or bouillon. 

* 22. COCOA, if pure ; or cocoa shells. 

23. CODFISH, fresh. Avoid all other forms of this article. 

24. CORN, green in season. 

25. MEAL. 

26. CRACKERS of the bready kind. 

27. CREAM. 

28. CREAM CHEESE if made at home. 

29. DATES. These are the most valuable of all the food- 
fruits. They can be eaten in any form ; but cut up in milk 
they are very beneficial as a part or all of a breakfast. 

30. DOUBLE-BAKED BREAD ; meaning old bread that has been 
sliced and again baked in an oven, and laid away for use. 
Broken in milk, or toasted and buttered, it is wholesome. 

31. EGGS. These may be taken raw or lightly cooked, or 
boiled two hours, and eaten with butter and salt. If not boiled 
two hours, they should be merely made hot in the water, or 
what is called soft-boiled. The two hours of cooking alters 
their character and renders them digestible and highly nutri- 
tious. Never eat them fried. 

32. FIGS. 

33. FLOUR from whole wheat. Remove the coarse bran by 
a sieve ; and use three times as much yeast if bread is to be 
made, as for white flour. It is best served as a boiled pudding 
or mush. 

34. HADDOCK, fresh. 

35. HALIBUT, fresh. 

36. HERRING, fresh. 

37. HOMINY. This should be long cooked. It is a better 
food than white flour, which causes constipation. 

38. JUNKET ; a light food for weak stomachs. 

39. LAMB ; if young and not cooked to a hard, dry mass. 

40. LENTILS. 

41. LETTUCE. This exceedingly valuable vegetable may be 
eaten raw, and in this state it may be made a part of a salad. 
Or it may be cooked, and in a purde makes a splendid first 
course for an evening meal. 

42. MACARONI, or spaghetti, or the like, 

43. MACKEREL, fresh, 



202 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

44. MILK. The best form is in the raw state when handled 
cleanly. Pasteurising takes away much of its value. Certified 
raw milk is merely a notice to the public that unclean farmers 
and milkers have been watched some of the time. Pasteurised 
milk is notice that dirty milk, or possibly dirty milk, has been 
cooked to cover up the dangers coming from dirty milking. As 
milk is the basic food of all peoples of all times and ages, a 
public official should be appointed in each community to see 
that this, the most vital need of life, should be made safe and 
avoid an excess of cost for cleanliness that takes more money 
out of the people than the Income Tax 

It should be understood that pasteurising does no harm if 
the heat can be retained, or the milk when hot sealed up in 
proper containers. But when it becomes cold in the air the 
vitamins are lost. If you heat raw milk remember to use it 
before it gets cold, either at the table, or mix it in some in- 
gredient like a pudding, which will prevent loss of vitamins. 

45. MILK TOAST. Or cream toast. 

46. Moss, Irish, Iceland or any sea moss. It is a light 
food. 

47. OATMEAL. This should be cooked three hours, or better 
still all night in a fireless cooker. 

48. OLIVES ; not when ripe. 

49. ONIONS. These should be eaten boiled, never raw or 
fried. 

50. OYSTERS ; always cooked, preferably in stew, or fancy 
roast, or steamed, or scalloped ; never raw, nor fried. 

51. PARSNIPS. 

52. PEAS. These are good food in season, and also tinned. 

53. PIGEON, young. 

54. POTATOES, white. The best way to prepare white 
potatoes is to bake them ; next to boil them. They are good 
scalloped, or sliced and cooked in a pan with milk. Avoid fried 
potatoes. Chips have caused many deaths from indigestion. 
Very new white potatoes are indigestible, as their starch cells 
have not been developed. Old waxy potatoes are injurious, 
as are those with green on the skin. 

55. RAISINS. Use the seeded kind in preference to the seed- 
less, and avoid dried currants. Seeded raisins are very 
nutritious. 



FOODS THAT ARE MAGNETIC 203 

56. RICE. Get the unpolished kind which is for sale every- 
where. 

57. RYE. 

58. SAGO. 

59. SOLE, or any good fresh fish. 

60. jjpiNAOH in milk, cream or butter dressing. 

61. SQUASH, or pumpEin. ~ 

62. SWEETS. White or brown sugar is essential to the health. |, 
Maple sugar is not so good, but may be used. Honey is the! I 
best of all sweets. Molasses is very useful and very nutritious, I ' 
besides containing valuable salts, which are also in brown' 
sugar. The juice of cornstalks will not digest, but passes 
through the system unaltered. Bought sweets are not always 
safe, and must be excluded from this list. 

63. TAPIOCA. 

64. TOMATOES. These contain malic acid, citric acid, and 
some of them a small amount of oxalic acid. But if used 
sparingly, as in purges, they may not do harm to a system that is 
not afflicted with rheumatism, neuralgia, neuritis, or headaches. 

65. TBOCTT. 

66. TURBOT, or any good fresh fish. 

67. TURKEY, if not too expensive. 

68. VEAL. This meat is a poison to some persons, due to 
its being too young. From a calf six months old it is safe ; and 
the older the calf the better is this meat as a source of nutrition. 

69. VEGETABLES. These may include almost everything 
that is raised, if not cooked by frying. Lettuce and^ spinach 
lead in value as food and for vitamins. Cabbage, turnips, 
parsnips, carrots, celery, beets, green peas fresh or tinned, 
green beans fresh or tinned, limas, string beans, and others are 
good food. But avoid radishes and cucumbers, as both set 
up intestinal indigestion and poisoning, and hold a large 
mortality list. 

70. VERMICELLI. 



LESSON THIRTY-SIX 

FOODS THAT DESTROY MAGNETISM 

KNOWLEDGE OF THE VALUE or non-value of the 
things that enter the human system has come from 
the experience of the past, from sickness and death 
that have followed, and from analysis of their contents. 
No thinking person can get away from the conclusion that, 
when it is known that the body requires about fourteen to 
sixteen elements in about seventeen chemical combinations, the 
daily use of double that number in about eighty chemical 
combinations is the actual cause of the sickness in the world, 
and of the suffering and premature deaths that fall to the lot of 
misguided human beings. Here are the latest facts : 

1. Inherited disease and blood taint remain dormant in the 
body until improper foods excite them into action. 

2. All organic maladies are impossible until improper foods 
poison the blood. 

3. All bacterial diseases are impossible until improper 
foods furnish the soil in which they live and on which they 
thrive. 

4. Improper foods cannot be digested, and therefore their 
poisons generate the intestinal foulness that is a prolific cause 
of neuritis, neuralgia, rheumatism, headaches, bad breath, 
heart-disease, kidney disease, blood pressure, all catarrhs, body 
odours, and deranged mental and moral natures. ~~~* 

Experiments made by governments and various hospitals and 
other institutions for the purpose of discovering the causes of 
crime, insanity, and moral taint, have traced one line of causes 
directly from intestinal poisoning arising from improper foods 
and drinks. In fact some cases of insanity have been cured by 
changing the diet ; and there are other cases where the criminal 
nature has been overcome by diet alone. 

Irritability is the most potent foe of magnetism ; and there 

304 



FOODS THAT DESTROY MAGNETISM 205 

is no form of irritability so acute as that which arises from 
intestinal poisoning. 

This poisoning sets up a malady that doctors say now prevails 
among 990 persons in every 1000 ; that of congestion of the 
stomach and of the membranes. This results in irritability and 
loss of magnetism. The brain is surrounded by three membranes 
in layers which control all the thinking processes, all the moral 
standards and activities, and all the criminal instincts. These 
membranes become quickly congested following the use of 
improper foods, for the blood that supplies the brain with the 
fluids required in all thinking activities, is loaded with intestinal 
poisons, and we cannot expect accurate thinking, good judg- 
ment, high moral standards and obedience to law from a flow of 
blood that is charged to the limit with the foulness of the 
intestines. Here we find the explanation for the lack of common 
sense that incites men and women, and to-day even girls and 
boys, to become carousers, drinkers, law-breakers, libertines and 
abject fools by the millions, indecent in talk and conduct, 
flippantly boastful of their disrespect for all that is right and 
noble, defiant of correction or disapproval, sneering at home, 
love and life, scoffing at parents and religion, and dancing 
attendance on every devil pleasure as the only influence in life 
worth following. Their blood, brain and moral nature are fed 
by poisons. When you see a person who is willingly and 
boastfully breaking the law of the land ; who is indulging in 
night frivolities at the expense of health and decency ; who is 
ready to slap in the face the mother who gave her best years 
in caring for her family ; who thinks, talks and dreams in terms 
of lasciviousness born of nasty methods of dancing, who guzzles 
beer until the eyes are bloodshot and the head reeling, you 
are witnessing the natural and logical effects of a perverted 
nature that comes from blood saturated with intestinal poisons. 

The proper foods properly prepared and cooked, perform 
their mission in the body, and develop no foulness whatever 
in the intestines. While more than half of the jgutrition that 
sustains life must come from intestinal digestion^ it is all 
cleanly and pure under the foregoing circumstances. This is 
due to the fact that the body requires only fourteen or fifteen 
elements, and when these are supplied, the demands of life 
are met ; but if you send down into the system a mass of 



206 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

things that the body cannot use in its maintenance they cannot 
be assimilated, and must be made war upon, fought out and 
eliminated ; all of which takes vitality away from the other 
functions of the body. 

In other words, if you omit the improper foods you will have 
pure blood and will become immune against disease, suffering, 
irritability and the losses to magnetic power that attend these 
afflictions ; and you will add other advantages that are of still 
higher value than any of these blessings. 

THE NON-MAGNETIC FOODS ARE 

presented here in alphabetical order ; and it must be remem- 
bered that some are totally foreign to the needs of the body ; 
others are partly so ; and others directly poisonous in a form 
that slowly and insidiously undermines the health, bringing on 
those hidden diseases that do not give warning until it is too late. 
There are also included some proper foods that are ruined or 
partly so by bad methods of cooking. In the following list 
will be found a few things that readily change into poisons 
in the body, that otherwise would be nutritious. 

1. BACON. This is recommended by doctors because of its 
carbon ; but it does a vast amount of injury in spite of that fact. 

2. BAKED BEANS. For a labourer with iron-clad digestive 
powers this may furnish a stand-by for hours after being eaten ; 
but for the purposes of this study, it is a wrong food. 

3. BEANS, dried. 

4. BREAD, new. 

5. BISCUIT, new or hot ; and hot or new rolls. 

6. CABBAGE that is old and fibrous. New, young and tender 
cabbage is the opposite of the old and tough kind. 

7. CAKES that are rich, or that contain spices, citron or dried 
currants. 

8. SWEETS not home made. Some shop-bought sweets are 
harmful, being made partly of bad grease, imitation sugar, coal- 
tar dyes for colouring, and in many instances of impure choco- 
late. There axe no doubt a number of shop-bought sweets 
that ajre wholesome. 

9. CHEESE ; except home-made cream cheese. 
10. CHIPS, whether potatoes or other kinds. 



FOODS THAT DESTROY MAGNETISM 207 

11. COFFEE. The kind that is now sold is much more 
poisonous than the kind formerly obtainable. In any event it 
is not a food, nor does it contain any of the elements needed 
in the body. Use almond coffee instead. 

12. CORN FLAKES. 

13. CORN CRISPS. Or any crisps. They are not food, and 
even if they were made of corn grain, they are not properly 
prepared as food. 

14. COCOA-NUT. This is a food in the lands where it grows, 
with its milk and fresh meat ; but in our clime it is indigestible. 

15. CRANBERRIES. Here we have a much advertised article 
that has no food value, and that does great injury to the blood. 

16. CRISP surfaces of meat or anything else. 

17. CUCUMBERS. 

18. CRABS. 

19. CURRANTS, dried. 

20. DOUGHNUTS. 

21. DRESSINGS, if rich or not simply made. 

22. EGGS, fried. 

23. FRIED food of any kind. 

24. FISH, fried. 

25. FRUIT CAKE. 

26. FRUIT PUDDINGS. 

27. FISH, smoked. 

28. FISH, salted or pickled, dried or cured in any way. 

29. GOOSE. 

30. GRAVIES. 

31. HAM. 

32. LARD, including all substitutes. 

33. MARMALADES. 

34. MEATS, smoked, pickled, dried, salted or cured in any 
way. 

35. MINCEMEAT. 

36. NUTS of the oily kinds. Almonds and chestnuts jare the 
best. 

37. ONIONS, fried or raw. 

38. OYSTERS, fried. 

39. PASTRY, patties and the like. 

40. PEAS, old. 

41. PEANUTS. 



208 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

42. PEANUT butter, peanut lard, etc. 

43. PICKLES. 



44. PIG'S FEET. 

45. PEPPEBS. 

46. PORK. 

47. POTATOES, fried or crisp. 

48. RADISHES. 

49. RHUBARB. 

50. RINDS of oranges, lemons, etc. 

51. SAUSAGE, and all ground-meat mixtures. 

52. SAUCES. 

53. SHRIMPS. 

54. SPICES. 



55. STRAWBERRIES, gooseberries, currants and crab apples. 

56. SWEETBREADS. 

57. SWEET POTATOES. 

58. TEA. 

59. TERRAPIN, or any sea scavengers, including lobsters. 

60. TURNIPS when old and fibrous. 

61. VEGETABLES when old and tough. 

62. VINEGAR, and all things mixed or dressed with vinegar. 

63. YAMS. 

64. VISCERA or entrails, sweetbreads, kidneys, brains, hearts 
and hoofs including hoof-made gelatin, and gelatin made from 
glue elements. These things, also tendons and muscles, appear 
in sausage form, and in meat breads and meat cheeses, as well 
as other mixtures, and should be avoided as the worst of 
enemies as they contain the dead within the dead. 

The foregoing list is formidable and will not meet the approval 
of people who like the things which we discard, and who do 
not like to be told what they should eat. But there is behind 
this list more than forty years of experience and test. There 
is a difference between^aT3iemical test and $ living test. One 
tells what a food might be, the other tells what it is from its 
effect on human life. For instance, chemistry tells us that 
soap fats and axle grease are rich in calories and vitamins ; 
experience says they are suited to the inhabitants of the Arctic 
Zone, but would kill people in our part of the world. 

We are closing this part of our studies which have thus far 
dealt only with the formation of HABITS. 



FOODS THAT DESTROY MAGNETISM 209 

The book might be ended at this place, and the pupil would 
have advanced far into the development of the power which 
is being taught. It requires but little impulse to set in motion 
the agencies that bring to men and women a vastly increased 
magnetism with all the advantages that accrue with it. But we 
are going on to great achievements. 

The next step will be to develop Magnetic Energy. When 
this is accomplished, the finarprocessT^nb^^cquire the per- 
manent use of it. While all these processes a'fe going on tfie 
pupil TS"""^! wmg healthier, heartier, more manly and more 
womanly in a physical sense ; the nerves and brains are reaching 
a state of vigour that can be obtained in no other way ; and 
existence at once assumes a loftier bearing suggestive of the 
old-time belief that humanity has kinship with the angels. 

Thus this study becomes the most important in life. 

The work thus far is not difficult, nor will it consume time 
or attention to the detriment of other duties. The progress 
to be achieved will keep pace with the regular work and thought 
of the day, and not intrude upon them. A man may take a 
smile to his office or his toil, and it will accompany him in his 
round of duties ; not displace them. The common query is, 
how much time must be devoted to the practice of the lessons 
in personal magnetism, and the answer is in the form of another 
question, how much time will be required to do the same thing 
correctly that you are now doing wrong, as for instance to 
walk or stand with the weight on the vital part of the foot 
instead of carrying it on the heel. The substitution of one way 
for another does not take time ; it calls for attention at the 
start. ~ ~ 

We therefore conclude that no extra time is to be demanded 
by the lessons thus far given. 

Having finished this part of our study, we are now ready 
to enter into the affirmative accumulation of the fund of power 
from which personal magnetism is developed. With the 
enemies out of the way or reduced, the work of forging ahead 
into new fields of discovery and accomplishment will be 
surprisingly fast. The gradual unfolding of the latent energies 
of the body and mind will be as marked and pleasing as is the 
life that is founded upon power attained by inheritance or gift. 

The wonderful sea or ocean of communication that surrounds 
n 



210 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

all human beings is worth the cost of time and effort required 
to thoroughly investigate it. Its waves beat now upon your 
unconscious brain : let us learn to recognize them, to interpret 
them and to set our influence at sail upon their unbeaten tracks. 
In so doing we shall learn what mind and soul are, what God 
is, and what place each one of us occupies in tEe plan of earthly 
existence. 

With power of magnetism there comes a clear light that 
breaks into the windowless haunts of others' minds, that shows 
defects and flaws in the plans and purposes of our fellow-beings, 
and gives the power and the right to uplift and ennoble the 
lives that drift in weakness through a storm-tossed gulf. 

While mystery and fascination both play upon the imagina- 
tion, the new world of fact will resolve every grade of influence 
into fixed currents of energy that obey a system of laws ordained 
for tfie benefit of humanity/ 

We are now ready to enter the fields described. 

Before doing so we must repeat what has been insisted on 
many times in this study, that all exercises may be omitted 
and the student of these pages will make rapid and permanent 
advances into the realms of this power ; so marked in fact that 
those who know and see the reader of these lessons in daily 
life will note the changes for the better in every respect. 

In our former systems the greater part of the training 
consisted of exercises ; these are now retained ; but each and 
every one of them may be omitted and yet great progress will 
result. But the exercises serve to bring a higher degree of 
power very quickly ; after which they merge into habits. 
Both methods combined make a very fascinating study. 



DEPARTMENT OF TENSION 
ENERGY 

LESSON THIRTY-SEVEN 

PHYSICAL TENSING 

HAVING COMPLETED that part of this study that 
deals exclusively with habits, wo now approach a 
part that requires some attention to exercises with 
the ultimate object of forming a new set of habits, and 
thus leaving the work for the future as the adoption of a 
method of living rather than a system of development. By so 
doing we shall be able to acquire magnetism as a natural gift 
and not the result of artificial attention to the causes from which 
it sprung. Tension energy is found in all persons who are 
magnetic and successful, whether they have been taught or 
not. It is an essential part of the power, and is never absent 
from its use. Therefore if we were to omit it we would leave 
the student only partly provided with the means of winning 
success. 

Tension of the muscles is a setting of them for some great 
physical effort. 

As all muscular action is impelled by the nerves, it follows 
that muscular tension has its origin in the nerves. 

Tension energy, as the term is used in this study, relates 
solely to the setting of the nerves for some great effort, not 
muscular, but nervous. 

In muscular tensing, which is common and necessary with 
any athlete, the nerves send forth their command in one 
impulse for each setting. 

In tension energy, which is necessary for the expression of 
the power of magnetism in any form, there is no setting of the 
nerves, but an increasing flow of nervous force, beginning small 



212 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

and proceeding by building on itself as it is used. This 
distinction, while seemingly technical, is so important it should 
be understood, and for that reason we will repeat it in another 
way. Take the following description as a further example. 

If you set the muscles for some great effort you tense them 
all at once for the degree of effort at hand. If greater demand 
is to be made on your muscular jgpwer, you set them at still 
greater tension ; but each setting is fixed for the time being. 

On the other hand, if you wish to give expression to some 
magnetic power instead of muscular power, you do not set the 
nerves, but you start^them on the way to flow with greater 
force as your magnetic uses of them grow in life and vigour. 
The flow INCREASES as it takes place. 

If the flow were to start at a fixed limit, it could not increase 
unless more was required of it ; in which case it would be a 
series of jumps. 

It is the INCREASE in vitality during any tensing progress 
that generates magnetism. Thus a magnetic person is always 
improving his power instead of using it up. Here again is 
another important fact. 

Believing that you have not yet grasped the meaning of these 
distinctions, we will offer you a very familiar illustration in 
the shape of an exercise, by which we will show the value of 
increasing the flow of vitality in place of setting its tension 
to start the action. 

Get a small part of a broom handle about six inches long. 
Hold this in your right hand. Shut your hand over the stick 
as tightly as you can. This is a muscular setting of tension, and 
has no value in developing magnetism. If you were to hold a 
full length broom handle in both hands, and some one were to 
try to take it from you, you would grasp it with both hands 
and with the muscles set. They are thus tensed, but the tensing 
has no value. It is never true that muscular or physical power 
develops magnetism. On the contrary it offsets it, and tends 
to decrease its growth. 

Returning now to the six -inch length of the stick which you 
are holding in your right hand, instead of grasping it tightly, 
take hold of it as lightly as you can and retain it. Here the 
hand is relaxed. Now add the least bit of power to your hand 
as you hold the stick. Then gradually and slowly add more, 



PHYSICAL TENSING 213 

not by a series of increases, but by a smooth flow of additional 
force ; and keep this going as long as you can do so, without 
reaching that degree of grasp that is required for muscular 
tension. 

When the increase in nervous flow approaches the force used 
by the muscles, stop. Never go as far with the nerves as the 
muscles go in their tension. This margin leaves the flow wholly 
nervous. 

Now it is this INCREASE in the nervous flow and the margin 
that is left, without reaching a muscular climax, that generates 
magnetism. And it generates it rapidly and in great quantity. 
The question arises, have you caught the meaning and the 
importance of this distinction ? 

The principle of life cannot be explained, yet it is a process 
constantly generating the magnetic power. The author has 
known of many persons who have so mastered the exercises of 
this series of lessons that they could easily feel the life principle 
at work within them. This has proved the seat of life to be 
co-extensive with the brain and the organs enclosed within the 
walls of the chest, the spinal column and the diaphragm. 
Physiologists who analyse this agency will at once comprehend 
the deeper questions of life. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 
Tense conditions magnetize. 

It is the, central law of magnetism. In the first place, it 
is necessary to understand what is meant by the word tense. 
The dictionary very nearly expresses it when presenting the 
definition as not lax. It is also called rigid, or possessing the 
power of firmness. In this study the meaning of the word tense 
is this : The power or condition that exists when any part of the 
body is passing from a state of laxity to a state of rigidity. 

It is ffie T opposite of laxity. 

It is not rigidity. 

In a condition of laxity the muscles are devitalized or devoid 
of life expression. In a condition of rigidity the muscles are 
set ; the work is done ; the end is attained. Nothingls going 
on at the time except that the nerves are holding the muscles 



214 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

in place just as a man might hold a stone on a wall. To make 
this matter clear several principles must be presented at this 
place and discussed together. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 
Setting the muscles produces muscular energy only. 

We see illustrations of the various uses of the muscles in the 
way calisthenics are performed in classes, as much in the high 
schools as elsewhere. When the movements are languid, we 
call the muscles devitalized or lax. You may try these and 
see what is meant : Stand ; raise the hands to the shoulders ; 
shut up the fingers^ lightly, half clinching the fists. Extend the 
arms slowly in the front, oblique front, lateral, and other 
directions, and back a few times, keeping the motions as languid 
as possible, and in every sense lazy. Then do them rapidly 
but lazily. You see it does not make much difference what 
degree of speed you use, if the muscles are lax. 

In such manner are most of the exercises, calisthenics and 
other movements performed in schools and under the direction 
of teachers of physical culture, and the time is more than 
wasted. Lax movements and lax conditions produce weariness. 
Lax walking is the cause of exhaustion. Like begets like. 
It is not good logic to suppose that a muscular action can 
originate of itself ; if it can, why will not an amputated arm act 
as well by itself as when it has life to move it ? Or why does 
an electric current cause a detached leg of a frog to move its 
muscles ? 

There must be energy behind the motion, or it will have no 
vitality, and the nearer we get to the condition of energy the 
farther we go from the tendency to weariness and exhaustion. 
For this reason any lax movement is a detriment to the vitality 
of the body ; it is plain to understand that it loses its own stored 
up force without having it replenished from the source of 
supply. Therefore, lazy walking, or lax walking, to use a 
more polite term, is wearying. Therefore, also, the lax manner 
in which gymnastics, calisthenics and physical culture move- 
ments are performed destroys all their value and even detracts 
from the condition of the body prior to their employment. 



PHYSICAL TENSING 215 

This is why so many hundreds of thousands of persons fail 
to get benefit from the most valuable of all means of health. 

If the growth of the muscular strength is what is sought, 
this end is to be attained under the present grand principle. It 
is by setting the muscles that we make them strong. The 
attempt to hang by the arms from a horizontal bar without 
setting the muscles will tear away tissue that is necessary to 
health. Pulling in the same way is injurious. But just as soon 
as the muscles are set, the tissue is protected and vitality 
supplants laxity. Any experienced person knows what we mean. 
The method by which strength is attained is found in this law ; 
yet nothing but muscular strength comes from such practice. 
The facts may be concisely stated as follows : 

1. Lax movements weary and exhaust. 

2. Set movements strengthen the muscles. 

3. The continual use of set movements leads to stiffness and 
awkwardness, unless relieved by counter-movements. The 
farmer and common labourer never make use of the counter- 
effects ; their bodies lose their graceful shapes ; they are strong 
enough, but never graceful or magnetic. It is almost always 
possible to find grace among skilled artisans. 

Thus we see the importance of tensing for all uses. Nothing 
can be accomplished with the muscular system, either for 
exercise or for work, unless it is tensed when it is employed. 

But while there is a side relationship between such tensing 
and that employed for the development of magnetism, it does 
not generate the latter. It is the setting of the power that 
defeats its use in magnetism work. What is needed is a 
progressive increase of tensing for the latter purpose. Being 
progressive it is developing, and while developing it builds as 
it progresses. This progress is what we are seeking. 

A person who works without tensing the muscles is doing 
worthless work. 

One who exercises for health without tensing the muscles is 
doing worthless exercise, and useless physical culture. 

But these matters belong to the physical side of life only. 



LESSON THIRTY-EIGHT 

NERVE TENSING 

OUR PRESENT LESSON brings us to a discussion of 
the power that develops magnetism collectively from 
the diffused state in which it exists in the body. 
The latter, as has been stated, is composed of chemical 
elements which are created by the formation of mole- 
cules through the law of cohesion into fixed combinations, 
each remaining the same unless affected by some such law as 
radio-activity. Each molecule is made of a certain number of 
atoms ; the kind of element depending on the number of atoms 
in each ; although the claim is being made that the number of 
electrons in each atom determines the kind of chemical element. 
In any event it is said to come down to electrons as the basis 
of all matter, and all else. These being wholly electrical it 
follows that the human body is a composite organism consisting 
of nothing but magnetic forces. 

Each unit is capable of developing a tremendous force in and 
of itself. 

As the human body is made up solely of electrical units, and 
as the magnetism that is everywhere present in the body is 
diffused, it follows that some agency must be invoked to bring 
these diffused forces of magnetism into mass-control ; and the 
natural agency is the power of tensing the nerves, as dis- 
tinguished from tensing the muscles. We have seen that the 
latter must be tensed either for work or exercise in their 
lines ; so the nerves must be tensed, but in a wholly different 
way, in order to develop magnetism. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 

Magnetic tensing is the transit from laxity to rigidity. 

The tensing is not the laziness of devitalization, nor is it 
the stiffness of rigidity. In other words, it is not a condition 

316 



NERVE TENSING 217 

of rest or of fixed strength, but a process of change. It is the 
progressive increase of energy. The process is one that may 
be easily understood. When nerves and muscles are lazy, they 
depend upon no supply of power from the vital sources of the 
body. When they are set, they are held by a fixed degree of 
energy, which is alive but not progressive. When the muscles 
are taken from a lax condition to one of strength, but not 
allowed to reach a limit or to become set, the nerves are kept in 
a progressive condition. This ever-changing effort makes a 
continual demand on the source of supply, and the creation 
of energy is the result of that demand. 

There can be no growth of vitality where there is no occasion 
for its use. Nature ordains that a demand shall be necessary 
to create a supply. The same law holds true everywhere. The 
muscles will not grow at all if they are not used. Being used, 
they break down their tissue ; the blood is excited towards 
this breakdown, and it leaves its nutrition to repair the waste, 
a thing it would not do had there been no effort, no breakdown, 
no waste. 

The only process by which man is able to generate electricity 
within his body is by tensing. This consists in many ways of 
using the body. We see the most noticeable examples of it 
in persons who appear before audiences to speak, sing, act or 
otherwise hold the interest. They are more readily observed, 
more readily singled out, and we find their actions more gener- 
ally understood. A person possessed of magnetism does not 
tense and set the body all at once, for, if he were to do this, 
the influence would soon be gone. 

We recall hundreds of cases of lost magnetism owing to 
this mistake. Here is a lawyer, young and inexperienced ; he 
rises to address the jury on an issue of great importance ; he 
is full of his case ; his magnetism springs from eye and voice 
and bewilders his listeners in the opening sentences ; he does 
not begin easily increasing his energy gradually, as one of skill 
in the magnetic art would be sure to do ; he plunges into the 
case with pent-up power blowing off all its steam on the first 
words ; he holds all hearers in thralldom ; then, in five minutes, 
he feels that it is all gone, and the interest flags. His case 
is lost. He wearied the jury. He commenced like an Alexander 
and ended like a tired child. When his magnetism was blown 



218 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

off in the first few minutes all his zeal, his earnestness, his 
power had to vent itself in force ; he shouted and gestured 
vehemently ; having allowed his magnetism to escape, he 
wearied the jury . 

Many and many a speaker has told us that this has been 
a common experience. They did not know the cause or the 
process of the loss, but they knew that they began with a 
magnetic charm and soon felt its collapse ; then how empty 
and hollow the voice sounded. Speakers who know nothing of 
the technical laws of magnetism are obeying those laws on the 
negative or the affirmative side ; they are failing or succeeding 
by them. To commence any effort with a full head of energy 
means a blow-off, and no opportunity is afforded for generating 
the power, for there is no tensing. 

All greatness is plain, simple, humble and quiet in its intro- 
ductory efforts. This allows opportunity for tensing, for 
growth, for an increase. Whether a conversation, a transaction 
or a speech, it is to be likened to movements of the arm, 
thus : 

1. When the lax arm and hand are pressed forward and 
back as in calisthenics, no energy is expressed, and this would 
represent the indifferent speaker. 

2. When the fist is held tightly clinched in the movements, 
the physical and^oisy speaker is represented. 

When each motion IJFtEe arm begins languidly and energy 
is called in gradually and increasingly instead of all at once, 
the magnetic speaker is represented. 

It is worth one's while to watch such a person, whether 
speaker, actor or conversationalist. Let us look at the first 
named, the speaker. He steps forward on the platform, calm 
and easy. The audience may be regarded as strangers to him, 
or he to them. What will his effort prove to be ? We cannot 
tell as yet, for we know nothing of him by reputation or 
experience ; but the student of magnetism may detect in his 
repose and coolness the evidence of a magnetic power yet to 
show itself. This, however, may be born of stupidity and cheap 
conceit. A few minutes of time will tell ; for, if he is of the 
latter mould, the moment he attempts to warm up he will 
evince nervousness, and he will warm up suddenly. 

He proceeds as easily as he began, but he has not displayed 



NERVE TENSING 219 

any evidence of the great orator. To be sure he speaks fluently 
and steadily, if somewhat slowly. His language is interesting ; 
it shows thought, care in preparation and a belief in its declara- 
tions. The audience listens well. They really know that it is 
not above the average quiet efforts of oratory, but it seems 
smoother and pleasanter. They like it. They feel that it is 
going to be more interesting ; that something greater is at 
hand. The very atmosphere seems to contain that information. 

Soon the interest deepens. It appears to be in the facts 
presented, but the voice and manner present them so pleasingly 
that the audience would rather hear them than read them. 
Now the student of magnetism notices that the eyes of the 
speaker have darkened ; no one else pays any attention to the 
tiny fact. The grey, brown, blue or hazel has not changed, 
but the pupil has distended, and this always appears black. 
Then the student of magnetism, sitting on the platform or in the 
front row, has observed that the body of this speaker, untrained 
in the art as he probably is, has changed ; the chest is gradually, 
very slowly indeed, solidifying ; it is full, large and firm, but 
motionless ; the arms no longer hang devitalized, nor have 
they suddenly become rigid. The shifting from the easy repose 
of the opening lines to the energy that follows has been imper- 
ceptible to everybody except the keenest observer. The speaker 
is not only holding his magnetism, he is collecting more, 
generating it rapidly by slow tensing ; and soon it is felt in his 
voice. 

Every ear is attentive. Little by little, unconsciously to the 
audience, the speaker has increased the tension of every part 
of his body and of every faculty. He himself may have no 
knowledge of it, for he may not think of it, but the fact exists 
in him as in all magnetic persons, that there can be no increase 
of power unless it is accompanied by a corresponding increase 
of tensing. How was this fact ever seized upon for exercises 
in this art ? Simply because it was universally noticed that all 
men and women who were possessed of personal magnetism were 
always in a tensed condition while under perfect control. 



LESSON THIRTY-NINE 

THE TENSE TOUCH 

ETLE BY LITTLE we have approached this the 
most important part of our work ; and we will now 
proceed to enter into the depths of it in order that 
the progress may be marked and decided in its benefits. 
We strongly advise that you read again the two preceding 
lessons in order that this subject may be well understood ; 
and also to help you obtain the utmost advantage from the 
present and coming lessons. Learn what tensing really is when 
applied to the development of magnetism. 

By the present use of the word we refer to that quiet form 
of increase in the development of energy that never reaches 
its limit of power. It is gentle, but not lax. It is firm, but 
not set. Between the extremes there is opportunity for a long 
range of increase without too great firmness. If we can make 
this clear we shall be able to get you started right in the 
present period ; and that will mean much to you. 

We have met students who have failed, and we can always 
tell in advance why they have failed. A gentleman called upon 
the author some years ago and said, " I have not made as much 
progress in the development of magnetism as I ought, although 
some of my friends have done remarkably well." We replied, 
" It is possible to write down the cause of your failure before 
you explain anything in detail," and we wrote and sealed a 
brief statement which we gave him. Then we asked him to 
perform the tension movement a half-dozen times. This he 
did. We said, " The cause of your failure is in that envelope. 
Open it." He did so, and read, " You tense too Suddenly and 
reach the limit of force. Both these faults or either of them, 
will stop all progress." 

A tense condition of any faculty supplies energy, but it must 
have the power of magnetism back of it, just as a live electric 



THE TENSE TOUCH 221 

wire must have a battery or generator to supply its force. It 
could be alive and yet weak. Tensing calls into action the 
magnetic stores of the body, even increases them, and co- 
operates with the dead-still processes in producing both 
quantity and power. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 
The magnetic touch is always tense. 

The first test of a person of magnetism is in the hand. If 
it is cold there is either a withdrawal of vitality for the time 
being, or the individual is lacking in magnetism. Warmth 
alone is not sufficient. It is necessary, but not all that is 
required. When you clasp the hand of one who possesses this 
quality, the effect is not marked in any way except by a slight 
muscular interest. The tight grasp is set and valueless, while 
the lax touch is dead. No one likes to take a cold and flabby 
hand. 

There are men and even women who delight in hurting the 
hand by giving a tight squeeze every time they welcome an 
acquaintance. This is physical, and not in good taste. To 
set the muscles for vigorous pressure is just as far from mag- 
netism as is the lax hand which weak persons adopt from 
necessity. Marital affection is the quickest generator of 
magnetism, in a temporary way, that is known. Even the 
ancients, four thousand years ago and less, knew that warm lips 
and warm hands were two of the evidences of love. "Mature 
ordains this to be so, for she compels the two sexes to attract 
each other, and gives them the power to win, to enchain, to 
enthrall, in order that the race may be perpetuated. Yet in 
many cases this is a blind magnetism. The loveless hearts, or 
those that never felt the power, are non-magnetic. 

The delights of friendship are generally thrown away by 
impetuous or careless individuals. What is the use of grasping 
the hands as if they were tools of ice, or setting them as in a 
vice ? Neither gives pleasure. One is affectation or weakness ; 
the other is physical and emotionless. The true lover never 
hurts the hand of his sweetheart ; the latter never gives the light 
grip. While timidity may vibrate the hand and make it tremble, 



222 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

there is a series of finer, inner waves of pulsation that are 
in no way T?eIaEe3 toTEe former, just' as tHe ocean may roll 
and toss in a storm, while its billows transmit the vibrations 
of sound and the still tinier pulsations of light, all at the 
same time. The feelings in a human body are variously 
expressed, but the magnetism of love always tenses the body 
and proves itself in touch, voice and sight. 

If in your own life or in tGe experience of others you wish to 
know the truth, and separate the real from the sham, apply 
this rule, and watch the results. When the hands clasp each 
other weakly, there is a negation of the avowals that have been 
uttered by the tongue or pen ; when they are set in their clasp, 
there is the affirmative evidence of pretence, the attempt to 
seem in earnest. If love genuine, honest love prompts the 
greeting, the touch is at first as light, but soon holds the hand 
in a slowly increasing pressure that never clasps tightly. The 
interchange of opposite magnetic currents is the most delightful 
sensation in the world. It is because of this great law of human 
life that the book of Sex Magnetism has been written. It 
has done, and is doing to-day, more good than any other work 
or school of special education, for which reason it should be 
placed within reach of all persons without cost but under proper 
conditions. 

As we write there is an old couple, as they call themselves, 
although the man is not sixty and the woman not much over 
forty, sitting in a room across the way watching the November 
fires die in the western sky. They hold each other's hand as 
sweetly as the tenderest lover of nineteen ; none too old to 
evince the keenest interest without impetuous display/ Look 
at the maiden and her fianc6 ; they meet and greet with a 
handshake that is perfunctory because they may not be 
altogether alone. But when time and place are theirs they yield 
to each other a far different tribute ; it may be the good-bye of 
the evening, or the more prolonged farewell of the visit. Their 
eyes meet with deeper glance, moist with fervour ; large, full 
eyes charged with the expression of kindred emotions. They 
know instinctively that the lips are the agents of speech, that 
words are idle vows, but that the tokens of speech coming 
from the very source itself are deeds of exchange that may be 
impressed with the seal of approval ; and, in a delicacy of 



THE TENSE TOUCH 223 

approach that drifts like a golden vapour nestling against the 
silvery moon, he bends over the uplifted face, while a pressure 
of the arm obliterates their identity, and the crimson bloom 
mounts her fair cheeks and paints roses in a garden of lilies. 
The cold lipped reader of this page will shudder at our descrip- 
tion and think it strange. Without magnetism there is no 
sentiment in life, no poetry, no sweetness, no charm, nothing 
but the plainness of mechanical existence. 

There is no better way of developing the power of magnetism 
than in the touch of the hand through the ordinary greeting. 
Avoid the two extremes. Remember that the lax hand is 
worthless, and that the set grasp is insincere, if not an automatic 
fault. Do not think that mere firmness is all that is required. 
Tensing is an increasing approach to a rigidity that is never 
reached when the increase cannot be maintained, a limit is 
found and that is non-magnetic. Nothing better indicates 
progress than this power, and progress never stands still. It is 
in the first delicate growth toward firmness that the body, the 
arm and the hand evince magnetism. Experiments can be 
made all day long with decided results. It is hardly necessary 
to add that nothing unusual in your conduct should attract 
attention, for it would at once end the usefulness of the practice. 

By this is meant that any form of practice should be so 
conducted that it will not be noticed by another person. But 
there are phases of your life that will command the interest of 
others ; and these relate to your general changes from what you 
were to what you have become. Thus the person of a month 
ago is now so much improved that others mentally comment on 
the fact. An employer said of his clerk, " Something has 
happened ; a new personality is evident." The young lady in 
society of a short time ago is not the young lady of to-day. But 
no one has seen the transformation taking place. 

All these methods may be adopted as habits. They will 
require attention to begin with, but this will soon blend into 
the ordinary occurrences of the day, and will take no time after 
they are well established. 



LESSON FORTY 

THE TENSE VOICE 

STILL ADVANCING in our study, we come now to 
the consideration of the chief avenue of communication 
between human beings, wEIch is the speaking voice. 
Perhaps ninety per cent of all communication is made 
by the sounds of the voice, when magnetism is employed. 
It is true that a letter may be magnetic, but only through 
what is known as mental magnetism ; and printed words may 
in the same way hold power over a reader. There is a very 
large Department of this book that is devoted to the Magnetic 
Voice ; but as we are dealing with tension, we are including the 
tense voice in the present Department. It will make the Voice 
lessons so much easier to master. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 
The magnetic voice is always tense. 

Magnetism, exerted through the voice in speaking and 
singing, is so very important an accomplishment that we devote 
one entire Step in this course to the subject. Here, we briefly 
sketch some phases of the use of magnetic voice. 

There are three general classes of voices : the flat, the tense 
and the emotional. The first is the common sound which is 
everywhere heard, from the simplest remark up to the vigorous 
tones of the market-man or the wearisome orator ; a mere 
mechanism of sound. Flat voices are never tense, never vibrant, 
never possessed of feeling ; for which reason the street vendor 
would never succeed in the lecture field ; and for which reason 
also the vast majority of public speakers, preachers, advocates 
and others fail who might be great if they had the enterprise 
to get better delivery. 

In daily conversation this flatness of sound is the universal 



THE TENSE VOICE 225 

experience. When a voice tires you, the cause is easily ascer- 
tained. No tense voice is ever wearisome. Some vibrant voices 
are. Some emotional voices are. There are so many charac- 
teristic classes of sound vibration involved that the subject 
seems endless. Sound itself is a wave-force, but when kept 
within its own range it is always sound. It is possible to add 
other vibrations to it. Even the church organ is given a tremolo 
that corresponds to the same action of the singing and speaking 
voice ; but this is neither evidence of tenseness or of feeling. 

Many persons wonder why the piano or the organ yields 
a more impressive sound under the touch of a genius than 
when the amateur manipulates it ; and why at times the expert 
is more skilful than usual. Technique and finish are factors 
of importance, but there is the indescribable something that 
cannot be accounted for by any rules of execution. It is mag- 
netism. But how can magnetism affect a musical instrument ? 
Is the latter not a mechanical affair that is what it is made 
to be, a mere tool ? Yes, but so are the vocal chords of the 
throat. So is everything ; bones, flesh, muscles, nerves, all are 
parts of a machine of matter. Behind the material is the soul, 
the vital-spark, the magnetic quality. So when the gifted 
musician touches the keys of the musical instrument this 
quality lives in the vibrations of a tense hand, waves as small 
as light-pulsations that go out into the air and awaken a 
harmony in all other life. 

But they are felt by all who hear them. 

If your voice is flat it can never be magnetic ; and the first 
step to be taken is towards the destruction of the* flatness. 
This is done by the adoption of the tremolo in all degrees of 
coarseness and fineness ; an old attempt to substitute the 
appearance for the reality. The throat tremolo is used much in 
musical training, but it is not natural. Emotion springs fronf 
the diaphragm, a large muscle situated at the base of the lung 
cavity and just above the stomach. To find this muscle, place 
the fingers over the stomach at that place where the apex of 
the rib-arch is found. It is at the highest part of the abdomen 
and the lowest part of the chest, at the soft bone. 

When you cough the diaphragm jumps up and its edge gives 
a leap forward. This can be detected by the fingers. Now 

take a deep breath, place the palm of the left hand on this 
is 



226 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

edge of the diaphragm and the palm of the right hand over 
back of the left hand. Pronounce the sound " oo " as long as 
possible, while shaking the lower chest with the rapid action of 
the hands. This will make the tone shaky. It is the only 
natural tremolo, for the diaphragm by its vibrations produces 
laughter, gladness, joy, grief, sorrow, weeping, crying, hysterics 
and every mood known to the human heart. 

This class of vibrations is divisible into a hundred or more 
grades. The usual series in the study of expression embraces 
ten only and they should be fixed in the voice by practice. 
After the hand has caused the tremolo, the next step is to 
produce it without the aid of the hand. Prolong the sound 
" oh " instead of " oo " with a decided tremolo, and keep at it 
until it is very easy to say such sentences as the following with 
ease : " Pity the sorrows of a poor old man," " Oh, the long and 
dreary winter " ; " Dear master, I can go no farther," and the 
like. When this can be done the next step is to increase and 
decrease the range of the vibrations ; that is, to make them 
wider and narrower at will. The doing of this is of the utmost 
importance and is not an easy task. 

We recommend that you make a gamut of the tremolos, from 
one to ten. Take a large piece of brown paper and a heavy 
pencil. Across the top make a wavy line, about ten inches 
long and two inches wide, and mark this the tenth degree of 
the tremolo. Under it make another wavy line ten inches long ; 
but witfi^vaves only an inch high, calling it the ninth degree ; 
under that put another wavy line, three-fourths of an inch 
high, as^fche eighth degree ; then under that put the seventh 
degree, which will have waves a half-inch high ; then the sixth 
degree, with waves three-eighths of an inch high ; then the fifth 
degree with waves one-fourth of an inch high ; then the 
fourth degree with waves one-eighth of an inch high ; the third 
degree with waves one-sixteenth of an inch high ; the second 
degree, with waves one-thirty-second of an inch high, and a 
straight line for the first degree, representing a flat voice. The 
rule of practice is to begin at the middle degree and increase, 
then decrease in turn. It will be seen that the scale of increase 
is not regular. When the finer tremolos can be used at will it is 
necessary to exclude the plain ones. A plain tremolo is one that 
is audible ; it expresses emotion rather than magnetism. A 



THE TENSE VOICE 227 

concealed tremolo is one that is present but not noticeable. It 
attracts no attention as a wave-action of sound, but it affords 
an easy transit to a tense voice. To develop the latter we advise 
the foregoing practice, and then the use of the sentences given 
in connection with the tense eye under the following methods. 

The purpose of cultivating these fine and indistinguishable 
vibrations is to destroy the flatness of the voice, and to prevent 
the building of the voice of an auctioneer or mere stouter, such 
as we often hear in public addresses. This is one purpose, but 
not the main one. The waves must be too fine to be noticed. 
As soon as they are given the intense power that belongs to 
the magnetic voice, their real value will be recognized. There 
will be no morelndifferent listeners anywhere. 

In order to produce the tense voice, assuming that you have 
acquired the fine vibrations as stated, develop the tensejohest 
according to the practice that will follow in this Department, 
and associate with it the tense^eye as taught in the Department 
of the Magnetic Eye in the early part of this book. You 
are then ready to graduate from this lesson of the tense voice. 
We repeat here some quotations that are useful. Let each one 
be spoken easily without raised pitch or loudness of tone ; 
keeping the chest tense and the eye tense : 

" I will have my bond." Emphasize the last word. 

" I WILL have my bond/' Emphasize the second word. 

Repeat this quotation now with the hand becoming Gradually 
tense as it closes in firm determination. 

" Civilisation on her luminous wings soars phoenix -like to 
Jove." Repeat this with raised eyes tensed, chest tense, 
vibrant voice, and right hand raised over the head. Repeat 
twenty times each day until the power that is sought shall be 
recognized by you as having come into the voice. 

In this connection review all the lessons of the Department 
of the Magnetic Eye, and read ahead the remaining lessons 
in this Department. 



LESSON FORTY-ONE 

THE GREATEST POWER IN LIFE 

NOTHING IS SIMPLER than forming tensing habits, 
and blending them into the various activities of life. 
The only difficulty arises in learning the difference 
between setting the muscles and tensing the nerves, 
as both processes seem associated in part at least. The dis- 
tinction has been made clear in the preceding lessons, thirty- 
eight and thirty -nine. They should be carefully reviewed. If 
the purpose is to exert muscular strength, a firm preparation 
for that effort is necessary, but that kind of effort never develops 
magnetism. 

The latter comes from the progressive increase of nervous 
effort, beginning with the lax or relaxed condition, and gradually 
vitalizing the nerves in any part of the body. It is better 
always to devitalize the part that is to be trained ; then slowly 
vitalize it. This change is seen in the tensing of the hands. 
Try at %$t with one hand, the right. Relax that, so that it is 
devoid of any power. Slowly vitalize it by closing the fingers ; 
but closing them is not enough ; add vitality as you close them, 
but add it gradually to avoid setting the muscles. 

Another way is to shut the fist tightly and yet relax it so 
that there is no vitality in it ; then slowly add vitality. In the 
first case you closed the fingers at the same time that the 
tensing was going on ; closing and tensing together. In the 
second case, you closed the fist first, and afterwards slowly 
tensed it. 

Any increase of vitality by the process known as tensing 
that does not go far enough to set the muscles, draws mag- 
netism from its diffused or scattered state in the body to the 
nerve centres and to the nerves that are being tensed. This has 
always been Nature's way, and there is no other method that 
is natural. In these lessons we are simply copying Nature. 

M8 



THE GREATEST POWER IN LIFE 229 

A test of whether you are actually tensing instead of gradually 
setting the muscles is found in the following experiment. 
Learn first to relax or devitalize. Relax the hand. By this is 
meant that all muscular effort has gone out of it ; the fingers 
may be shaken about like so may limp rags. 

The test is made by maintaining that relaxed condition of 
the hand while tensing the whole arm from the shoulders down 
to the wrist, and there ending the tensing effort. In other 
words you cut off the vitality at the wrist, holding it in the 
arm. When you can do this you will recognize what is meant 
by tensing ; for it is not possible to set the arm muscles while 
the wrist is devitalized. The test is so valuable that, if you can 
meet the requirements, you will quickly be able to generate 
an unlimited amount of magnetism throughout the whole 
body. 

Next after completing this test, you may proceed rapidly 
with the rest of the body. But first carry the test to the left 
arm and hand after finishing with the right ; and then make 
yourself so skilful in the action that you can at any time on a 
second's notice repeat the performance with either arm. 

Repeat these conditions with the right leg and foot ; relaxing 
the latter until it is devitalized, then while maintaining that 
state tense the whole leg. Transfer the test now to the left 
leg and foot, and keep practising until you are an expert at it. 

The neck must receive attention now. Before making the 
experiment at that part of the body, look back to the lessons 
of the Magnetic Eye, in which the vital centres are explained. 
To sum them up briefly, all that is necessary here to say is that 
the centre of the top of the head, the centre of the neck, the 
centre of the chest and the centre of the hips, all must be in ' 
a vertical line, one above the other, as if a plumb-line had 
been dropped down through them. Stand and sit always with 
these vital centres maintained. It means a great deal to you 
eventually ; besides which it is the only natural position that 
indicates vigour, strength, mental power and magnetism. 

We have witnessed many episodes in human experience, and 
we have never seen any exhibition of magnetic power that was 
not accompanied by the maintenance of these vital centres. 
More than this, it means better health, better form, better 
physical appearance, and the status of youth ; for the man pr 



230 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

woman who always maintains the vital centres in the vertical 
line, will never take on age. 

Having learned this, now try to tense the neck, not by setting 
the muscles, but b^slowly calling nerve force ^^^hejuggort^ 
of the head. Do not forget that, in an early lesson, it was shown 
that the third brain controls all the vital functions of life ; that, 
after the vital centres were discovered and kept constantly in 
their vertical line, the attempt to force the top of the head a 
half -inch nearer the ceiling by lifting the head so as to pull at 
the muscles of the neck, stimulated the circulation of the blood, 
one of the most noticeable effects being the warming of the feet 
and hands by this increased excitement of the function of 
circulation ; and that respiration was increased to a wonderful 
degree, thereby bringing new life into the blood and helping 
the development of greater magnetism. We have said that aU 
magnetic people have warm hands and feet. 

Following along this same line of experiment, we learn to 
tense the neck while at the same time stretching it all we can, 
even if less than one-hundredth of an inch, by trying to raise 
the top of the head in the direction of the ceiling above. 

When this double practice has been developed to a proper 
degree of efficiency, the results will be wonderful. They will 
surprise you. Many of our pupils have expressed themselves 
as believing them to be uncanny. One of the greatest psycholo- 
gists now living witnessed these experiments, and became so 
interested in them that he set about practising this double 
action, which he mastered in a few days. He said of the results : 
" The stretching of the neck pulls on the spine, pulls on the 
muscles and nerves that are meshed about the medulla, and 
excites enough flow of vitality to that locality to stimulate it. 
So delicate is it that the influence of the weight of a feather 
reaching it would excite it to greater activity. But it would 
not need any appreciable excitement to make it accomplish 
wonders. We know that the touch of a needle-point on certain 
parts of the brain would produce mountainous results, if that 
term is allowable. So the pulling of the neck muscles in an 
upward direction may do as much. But in addition to this 
is your tensing, which in and of itself is a wonderful repro- 
duction of Nature. The two combined are capable of exerting 
unlimited powers. Then will follow the psychological value 



THE GREATEST POWER IN LIFE 231 

of the combination, and you have the most powerful agency in 
life transforming the body into a dynamo of energy. I have 
never seen its equal." 

This medulla or third brain, is the top section of the spinal 
column, and while it controls and directs all the vital functions 
of the body, it also throws a powerful flood of magnetism into 
the brain itself when these double experiments are made. T5o 
not treat this part of the work hastily. If you will take time 
for the study and practice of this combination, we promise that 
you will meet with a degree of success in this and other lines 
that will astound you beyond all words of description. 

Having mastered the above combination which stands out 
as the greatest aid to human power ever known, you are next 
to develop the tense chest. 

GRAND PRINCIPLE 
The tense chest generates vital-magnetism. 

To the man or woman who would become magnetic in the 
shortest possible time this principle is most important, for it 
is most helpful. It is not enough that the vital organs be raised 
and maintained ; that is of inestimable value, but the life itself 
of the chest and all its contents must be kept energized. This 
does not mean that the chest is to be set or strained by muscular 
effort, for that will lead to no good. 

Direct the mind as closely as possible to the inner portion of 
the chest, keeping the outward part immovable. Think of a 
point as near the centre as possible. Make the whole internal 
portions tense, and as gradually as possible. It will be some 
time before this can be accomplished. The nerves and not the 
muscles are, in fact, exercised by this process. 

A magnetic person can in an instant generate, also, a heat 
within that can be felt very distinctly, giving a glow of warmth, 
that is transmitted by the vibratory process through the eye, 
voice or touch to any person within reach of these. 

When the voice is impelled by these influences it becomes an 
agency of great power. 



LESSON FORTY-TWO 

THE GREATEST ENGINE OF VITALITY 

WE NOW COME to the pleasantest part of the in- 
struction in this line of study, which is called tense 
walking. In order to know the exhilaration of the 
habit, we must learn to develop a knowledge of the great engine 
of vitality, which in medical books is called thejiiaphragm. 
It is a large and wide muscle, constituting the entire floor of the 
lungs or roof of the stomach. It reaches from one side of the 
body to the other and from the front to the back. The ancients 
taught that here was the seat of the soul. But it is merely the 
great engine of vitality. **"~ 

It is full of mischief, and can play many pranks. If, for 
instance, it gets fast in its upward movement and will not go 
down by its own impulse, the result is that you will have the 
hiccoughs. We were called at one time to visit a person who 
had suffered from this malady for two days and no doctor 
could relieve him. We showed him in ten minutes how to take 
in more breath than he had been inhaling, increasing this 
intake with each respiration, and as soon as he was able to 
take in a fair amount of air, the diaphragm was forced down 
to its place, and the hiccoughs ceased at once. We have known 
this method to be employed successfully many times. It is 
valuable in mild cases when a person wishes to get rid of this 
troublesome condition. Its cause is merely a raised diaphragm 
that will not go down until the lungs are filled with air, and the 
breath Jjeld for a short time. 

The act of sneezing is interesting as showing the relationship 
between the nerves, the third brain, and the respiratory function. 
If you have a grain of dust in the nostril, it will tickle the nerve 
there ; this nerve will communicate with the medulla, or third 
brain, which is the top section of the spine ; and as this third 
brain controls the organ of respiration, that muscle which i 



THE GREATEST ENGINE OF VITALITY 233 

called the diaphragm will suffer a quick paroxysm, with the 
result that it will rise with great suddenness, hurl the breath 
out through the nose or mouth, and produce what is called the 
sneeze. This sneezing is frequent in colds or hay fever ; and 
we find that over half all such cases are due to false sensations 
which may be controlled. 

Another set of caprices that this great engine of vitality 
indulges in is called mirth, and it has many varieties. If -a 
young man says something nice to the girl who is just blooming 
into society, her diaphragm will respond with rippling waves of 
action, the result being that she will giggle. Mild forms of mirth 
are caused by the same organ. There are twenty different kinds 
of laughter, each requiring a different throbbing action of this 
organ that rests at the base of the lungs. Actual laughter of the 
robust kind is merely the very large motions of the same organ. 
In hysteria the whole trouble arises in this diaphragm, whose 
powers are then running wild like a motor vehicle plunging 
ahead uncontrolled. As laughter is exactly the same action as 
weeping, the sounds emitted by the person who is indulging in 
hysterics are as often laughing tones as crying ones. Some 
people weep with joy ; others laugh with joy. When a child is 
crying, the transition from weeping to laughing cannot be 
recognized without seeing the face. 

When a person weeps the corners of the mouth droop ; these 
pull on the tear sacs, and tears flow. Laughter that is attended 
by the drooping mouth is prolific of tears. Hard crying, yelling, 
or bawling, is a form of shouting that can be turned to loud 
laughter in less than one second of time. Of course the 
emotional mood controls the result ; but the diaphragm does 
all the work in any case. 

When you pant, it is the diaphragm. 

When you gasp in horror or otherwise, it is the diaphragm. 

When your attention is concentrated on any idea, this organ 
of respiration almost stops its action. 

When your mind and thoughts are wholly absorbed in some- 
thing, this organ of respiration CEASES ITS ACTION 
COMPLETELY. This cessation has been known to last for 
minutes and then to be followed by a minimum of breathing, 
thus lowering the vitality and endangering the heart and 
general health, This cessation has been caused countless 



234 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

by giving rapt attention to what is being said and done ; and 
it accompanies any attempt to hypnotize a person ; therefore 
it is important that you practise the teachings of this lesson for 
warding off all outer influences, no matter of what character. 

A lowered diaphragm develops magnetism naturaUy. 

A raised diaphragm depresses life, 'weakens "health, and 
destroys magnetism. 

In hypnosis it is raised. 

In rapt attention it is raised. 

In hysterics it is raised. 

In hiccoughs it is raised. 

In giggling, simpering and suppressed or abnormal levity it 
is raised. 

When another person is holding any kind of control over 
you, your organ of respiration, the diaphragm, is raised. 

In fainting the diaphragm is raised. 

In illness it is raised. 

In death it is raised. 

In any condition of the mind that transfers the full attention 
to something, such as a game of gambling, or of chance, as of 
cards, this organ is raised in the same position as in death. 

For these reasons and because such condition depresses life, 
weakens health and destroys magnetism, it is important that 
this fault should be overcome by the formation of a new habit. 
This is accomplished by the following practice : 

1. Learn to recognize the location of the diaphragm. It is 
the floor of the lungs, and is to be found at the top of the 
abdomen above the stomach, at the arch of the front ribs, where 
the soft part of the abdomen joins the bones. Place the tips 
of the fingers of both hands at this part, and cough. As the 
diaphragm does all the coughing, it will give a series of jumps 
when that action is going on. Try one big cough, and note the 
way in which the diaphragm gives a big jump. Snivelling is 
caused by small jumps of the same organ. 

2. Next exhale all the air from the lungs, then inhale as 
much as you can, and hold the breath for one second. After a 
rest, repeat the whole process and hold the breath two seconds. 
Then exhale as before all the air from the lungs, after another 
rest ; breathe in all you can, and hold the breath three seconds. 

3. After another rest exhale all you can, then inhale all you 



THE GREATEST ENGINE OF VITALITY 235 

can, hold the breath for four seconds, and tense the locality of 
the diaphragm, which is done by directing attention to it as 
the breath is retained in the lungs. This tensing is best done by 
attempting to spread the lower chest as far to the right and 
to the left, as well as in front and back, as is possible. This is 
called expanding the diaphragm. When this organ is raised 
it is contracted ; when lowered habitually it is expanded. It is 
able to carry on the process of respiration in the lowered 
position, despite the fact that it rises for exhalations and falls 
for inhalations. But there is a vast difference between a rising 
and falling diaphragm in a raised position, and a rising and 
falling diaphragm in a lowered position. 

4. As soon as you are able to master this habit, adopt it 
always. This means to keep the locality of this great engine of 
vitality both tensed and expanded. You will soon find yourself 
a very much changed and improved person with new courage, 
new confidence and new powers. 

5. Combine the tensingjmdjjxpanding of the diaphragm with 
the very excellent practice of tensing the chest. Both are 
related, and should work together. 

Remember that in tensing and expanding the diaphragm and 
also in assuming the positions just described, the abdomen must 
not be allowed to protrude. If you are over-large in that section, 
this lesson will slowly but very gradually reduce you there, for 
it gives to the body its most beautiful and graceful shape. 
Persistent attention, however, is necessary. - , 

^TFese exercises are in use in institutions that have purchased 
this system of personal magnetism for the purpose of imparting 
health, vitality, grace, freedom from awkwardness, and beauty 
of form and action to pupils who have sought the best re- 
finements of the body. They destroy all bad developments, 
ill-shapes and evil habits of carriage, and overcome flat chests, 
fallen shoulders, spinal curvatures and unattractive positions. 
But these advantages are incidental only. 



p 



LESSON FORTY-THREE 

TENSE WALKING 

ERHAPS THE MOST pleasing and exhilarating of 
all habits is that of the tense walk. It combines the 
tense eye as taught in the Department of the Magnetic 
Eye, the tense neck, the tense diaphragm and the tense 
chest. These seem like a ponderous combination of new habits 
to be learned and acquired ; but they fall into place naturally 
and simply in a very short time. They hardly involve as 
much work as would be needed to master a few lessons on the 
piano. When once adopted they come about as habits just as 
easily as the habit of good manners may be acquired in any one 
line of conduct. 

Tense walking is a rapid generator of magnetism. 

Here we have the most wholesome and healthful of all 
exercises, and the one that is most easily adopted, for all persons 
who hope to possess vitality in a strong degree must depart to 
some extent from a purely sedentary life, and walking is 
common to all. 

We have watched those women who, as queens of their homes 
or in the fashionable drawing-rooms, take leadership because 
of that commanding charm which the world calls personal 
magnetism, and they have never been the weak affecters of 
dignity, nor the set muscular types of strength ; but they always 
have shown unmistakable evidences of the tense character. 
We have closely studied many a speaker who has aroused his 
audience to the highest realms of pleasure and enthusiasm by 
the same quality ; and we never yet have seen one who did not 
gradually become tense as the magnetic vitality grew and in- 
creased. We have observed the men and women of the great 
activities of life, as they were engaged in the commonest 



TENSE WALKING 237 

duties, and the same law held true. Even in walking they are 
different from the lax and lazy, on the one hand, and from 
the stiff and muscular, on the other hand. 

There are two kinds of magnetia walking ; the plain method 
is that of easy and gentle tensing ; the beautiful method is that 
of alternating tenseness and release. Both are very valuable as 
means of culture as well as of development in vitality. The 
reader of these pages who is able to adopt as the fixed habit of 
life either one of these two styles of walking, has already gone a 
long way toward victory in the present study ; for the practice 
of such walking is like an electric generator that is always 
creating the needed power. Habitual tense walking takes the 
place of nearly all other practice in this period. Continue with 
it the two other great exercises, and you have 

THE MAGNETIC TRINITY 

1. Maintain vital organ muscles as a permanent habit. 

2. The tense chest as a permanent habit. 

3. Tense walking as a permanent habit. 

And the advantage is that they do not require a minute of 
time, nor take you from the regular duties of life. 

The tense walk is acquired at first by comparisons. The 
beginning of the practice is in the lazy walk, which represents 
the languid condition of the body. This is always wearying. 
The next effort is to take rigid steps, allowing the knee to spring 
back with firmness as the weight comes wholly on each leg. 
Then increase the speed a little, and avoid springing the knee 
fully back. Here we have an excellent example of tensing in 
walking. To set the muscles firmly on each step will accomplish 
the same results provided there is not great rigidity ; and this 
permits of slow walking. Rapid lax walking is injurious to the 
nervous powers. Rapid set walking exhausts the muscles. 
Rapid tense walking is midway between the two, and is highly 
beneficial to the health and nervous system. Let some form of 
tense walking be made a habit. 

TENSE AND RELEASE 

The most beautiful and most valuable type of walking is that 
which embodies the same practice as is seen in the tensing of 
the arm preceded and followed by laxity ; each change being 



238 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

gradual. To do this in walking the whole leg is devitalized as 
it becomes free after the weight leaves it ; and is tensed as it 
again assumes the weight ; each action being gradual, although 
done quickly. When properly executed the walk has every 
appearance of being unstudied and easy ; although a crude 
experimenter would make it laboured and unnatural. There is 
nothing gained by lifting a free foot tensed ; and the more this 
walk is considered the more natural it seems. A compromise is 
secured by the following method : 

Walk slowly and firmly with a tension in both legs, made 
stronger on each alternate leg as the body passes the weight over 
it in walking. Thus it will be noticed, that, while the tension is 
to be kept great during the entire exercise, it becomes greater 
while the leg carries the weight of the body, as is done in every 
step. The will-power should be kept constantly on this slight 
increase of tension at these times. 

When several weeks have been spent in this practice, the habit 
should be formed and applied permanently to everyday 
pedestrianism. It then, of course, becomes more rapid, and 
varies itself with the circumstances attending each mode of 
walking. 

A magnetic person is known by his walk. 

At first the new method may seem awkward, but when it has 
become a habit, it is the most graceful carriage of the body 
known. 

This line of development, like all else in the study of personal 
magnetism, brings with it every kind of advantage, even if the 
specific purpose of the instruction were not sought. It proves 
that what is acquired for establishing a personal attainment, if 
it becomes useful in every phase of life, is a part of Nature's 
purposes and plans to better humanity. 

But the present Department of tensing stands in the fore- 
ground of value and importance, as it brings results rapidly and 
they are absorbed into permanent habits. One of the most 
skilful, successful and wealthiest psychologists now living has 
said of our present line of instruction : 

" Any person could safely offer the sum of 1000 to any 
man or woman who failed to acquire magnetism by the tensing 
methods alone ; and these are but a contributory part to the 
magnificent system which they serve." 



DEPARTMENT OF REPOSE 

LESSON FORTY-FOUR 

THE FIRST VICTORY 

EVERY STEP IN OUR PROGRESS becomes more 
and more interesting and important, if such can be 
the case where every part of the work is of the highest 
value. In this new Department we have used the 
term REPOSE in place of the former title of dead-still practice ; 
but either will suffice. It is necessary to offer the explanation 
that by repose in this art we refer to life that is not wasting 
itself ; not to the absence of life. The more life that is present 
in the mind and body, and the greater the calmness in the 
process of thought and the power of the body, the more value 
there will be in such repose. Here we must contend with and 
defeat the greatest and most common foe of magnetism, the 
loss of vitality. 

General restlessness is the most frequent cause of leakage of 
vitality. 

A person is generally restless who is uneasy, fidgety, squirm- 
ing, or in any way addicted to irritating activity. This cause of 
leakage is not the same as that known as nervousness, or 
depressed nerves, or prostration of the vitality. 

If there were no enemies of magnetism in the human body, 
there would be no case of nervous prostration, no case of 
neurasthenia, no case of depressed vitality, and no case of 
mental exhaustion. All these ills are direct results of allowing 
weeds, which we call enemies, to enter and to remain in the 
habits of life. Thus, without intending to deal with matters 
of nerve-health, we find the study of magnetism the most 
important cure of such maladies. 

When once you have concluded that such a man or such a 



240 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

woman whom you meet or see from time to time is magnetic, 
you will soon discover a train of facts, not one of which would 
have attracted your attention unless brought before your mind 
for the purpose of analysis. These facts are always the same, 
no matter who the man or woman may be, if the charm of 
personal magnetism be present. As they always agree, there 
must be some natural law at work producing them, and at the 
same time producing the power known as personal magnetism. 

We recall several friendly interviews with Hon. Henry W. 
Grady, the great orator, many years ago. Not only in his public 
worE7but in private as well, he gave unmistakable evidence of 
the possession of personal magnetism. There was a charm in 
his voice, a charm in his step, a charm in his presence, a charm 
in his methods of execution. The more he undertook, the better 
he did it. The more he engaged in broader activities of life, 
the greater seemed to be his hold upon his fellow-beings. In 
youth and young manhood giving no evidence of unusual 
ability, he unfolded his usefulness just in proportion as he 
unfolded his magnetism. He drew men to him. They liked to 
receive orders and suggestions from him. They enjoyed the 
work of carrying out the grander thoughts which grew upon his 
mind as he extended his efforts on behalf of his country. 

There is no doubt that in his case the fame he acquired and 
the following secured were due wholly to the magnetism that 
grew as he added years to his career. 

Now, while some would regard him as a nervous man, he was 
not a restless, fidgety, squirming or uneasy individual. His 
nervousness, if it could be called by that term, was the presence 
of power. 

But the very first thing that attracted attention, when one 
came into the room where Mr. Grady was standing or sitting, 
was his total lack of restlessness. If there were twenty men 
present with him, and all were standing, he would attract 
attention by reason of his superior physical quietude ; provided, 
of course, the mind were making the analysis. If there were 
a dozen, or dozens of men and women present, and all were 
sitting, he would be the first to win approval from the critic 
who was seeking proof of the first cause of magnetism. 

Yet not one person in ten thousand would be able to analyse 
this difference or explain it. 



THE FIRST VICTORY 241 

This freedom from restlessness is not the stiffness of a person 
of awkward carriage who braces himself into a fixed position 
and resolves to maintain it or die in the attempt. Relaxation is 
the basis of ease, polish and grace ; but it must be the relaxation 
of power, not of laziness. It must be the flexibility of great 
nervous tension, and not the deadness of the grave. These ideas 
will be worked out as the later steps are taken in this study. 

An engine may lack fuel and have the repose of emptiness ; 
or it may contain tremendous power and be calm in its repose, 
or smooth in its action. 

We were so much fascinated in our youth and earlier manhood 
with the consideration of the traits of magnetic people, that we 
carefully inquired into the private lives of some of the leading 
men and women of this country ; always seeking to ascertain 
if it was true that there were uniform habits that accom- 
panied the power known as personal magnetism. How we 
succeeded is a matter for the public, but how we secured the 
evidence may or may not interest the students of this book. 
We have all along laid down the general proposition that any 
sincere and earnest man or woman who seeks information for 
proper ends can very easily gain admission into the private lives 
of great men and women. y 

When the author was sixteen years of age, two of his works 
had been published. They attracted some attention, and this 
alone was helpful in making acquaintances. Not long after that 
he established and published successfully a periodical which also 
proved helpful. Still later he allied himself with some news- 
papers and their editors, and served in the capacity both of 
contributor and reporter. These offices gave him the right to 
create new acquaintances. He was personally known to a 
number of the most prominent men and women at a time when 
the country was rich in the fame of such personages. Later 
on he was identified with lecture work, employing such speakers 
as Phillips," Gough, Beecher and others, all of whom were most 
gifted with the power of personal magnetism. He knew in other 
ways such men as Brooks, Newman, Sumner, Conkling, Grady, 
Edwin Booth, Wilson Barrett, Lawrence Barrett, and scores of 
others, all of whom were successful because they were magnetic. 

Not one of these great men possessed the power of hypnotiz- 
ing. All were successful in the highest degree. Not one was 

16 



242 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

in the least impressionable under the efforts of a hypnotist. 
The uniformity of these facts shows conclusively that personal 
magnetism is in no way associated with hypnotism. 

But it is also true that not one of these men, nor any men or 
women who have ever been magnetic, was addicted to the fault 
of general restlessness ; at least not as long as life was successful 
in each individual case. We recall that, during the last years 
of the career of Lawrence Barrett, when a certain malady 
depressed him, he became quite nervous, and restlessness was 
seen at work undermining his power. But such an exception 
proves the rule. 

Apply this fact to any phase of professional or practical life 
that you please, and note the result. 

It must be remembered that a magnetic person must attract, 
and therefore must be attractive. The fidgety and restless 
person is not only unattractive, but is repellent. In addition 
to this disadvantage, there follows the loss of vitality from the 
body which is carrying away with it the magnetic power that 
is necessary for success after the repellent influences have 
disappeared. 

This is the first victory. 

A fine illustration of the efficacy of this power of repose, under 
great pressure of energy held in bondage, comes from the 
testimony of a man of world-wide reputation who undertook 
the study of this system for the sole purpose of overcoming his 
almost uncontrollable temper when angered. He says : " I 
learned from your book that perfect repose counts most value 
when the whole body, mind and nerves are aroused to a fearful 
power. That described me when I was aroused to frenzy by 
some person whom I hated. I kept myself in perfect repose ; 
but I looked, thought and felt daggers. I was ready to explode, 
but was as calm as a summer zephyr. I learned the secret of 
life." 



LESSON FORTY-FIVE 

CALMNESS 

HAVING ACHIEVED THE FIRST VICTORY by 
the resolute determination to put an end to leakage 
and restlessness, it will be possible now to take up 
the affirmative lines of practice in substituting repose of 
power in place of loss of energy. Examples are always 
helpful in acquiring an understanding of the meaning of a 
great proposition. These examples are seen in everyday life 
about us. First let us recall a case in court where we witnessed 
the conduct of two opposing counsel. 

1. One was active, full of life and movements " smart," as 
they termed it. He got excited when he became earnest. He 
tired his listeners and beholders. 

2. The other was calm and solid as a fixed rock. Not one 
waste motion escaped him. When he spoke his voice was full of 
a pleasant vigour and accumulated feeling that held all listeners 
spellbound. He commanded respect. When he became earnest 
his calmness was so intense that it seemed a disappointment that 
he should stop at all. He was never fidgety, never got excited, 
never hitched and halted in his words. He won the case. Such 
people are rare. How we respect a lady or gentleman who can 
show such self-control ! 

This brings us to the consideration of dead-stillness in the 
presence of others. The quiescent condition is not magnetic 
stillness ; it is always rest or stupidity, never repose. That is, 
it is not called repose even if it is absolutely still or dead. There 
must be the magnetic life of the live engine, with the calmness 
of conscious strength ; the power of the full-developed energy 
without waste of force. When you have such vitality, not 
physical but nervous, then you are ready to put dead-stillness 
to practical usefulness. Look at some examples of it. 

Standing before a vast mob that threatens to demolish a great 



244 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

city with the growing vengeance, a nervous man calls, shouts 
and gesticulates, all in vain. His wild antics exhaust themselves 
upon deaf ears. Another man, his eye fixed with earnestness, 
steps forward upon a balcony, looks calmly into the heart of the 
assemblage, never moves a line of his face, raises his hand for 
attention, and stands like a statue while the fixed gaze holds 
the eyes of all the multitude. He makes no sign, expresses no 
appeal with voice or glance ; shows no mark of anxiety on his 
face, does nothing to ask for silence, and there he stands a 
volcano of pent-up energy under absolute control ; and it is 
true that his perfect stillness gives him his magnetism. The 
attitude tells the complete story of the situation ; a man of 
heroic purpose determined to become the master of that 
mob. 

This is life. It is also an actual incident. It tells the story 
of life. What good would shouting do ? What would be the use 
of frantic appeals, prayers, entreaties, threats, stormy passion 
or plaintive coaxing ? How may persons would have thrown 
themselves into a paroxysm of action, from the sternest 
command to the most intense soliciting, in the effort to still the 
mob ? Yet there was but one kind of person who could succeed 
in the attempt, and that was the dead-still individual ; one 
who could gaze calmly into the angry faces and assert his 
superior power. One by one they looked upon him and came 
to recognize his god-like bearing ; their voices were lost in their 
eyes ; a feeling of approaching silence began to travel across the 
crowd ; it deepened ; the man stood like a rock, yet alive to the 
highest degree ; the shouts died away ; all was as quiet as the 
grave ; and in the hush of that solemn stillness his every word 
was heard and absorbed. One man had mastered many 
thousands. 

A well-known business man of great coolness and magnetism, 
took his accounts home one night for the purpose of looking over 
them. He had a sum of money with him, of which a desperado 
had knowledge. It was the hour of midnight ; stormy without 
and lonely within. The man sat at his desk writing, and thought 
he heard the sound of steps in the adjoining room which was 
dark, although the door stood open. He was a man of mag- 
netism as we have said. One of the essentials of magnetism is 
coolness ; coolness to an extraordinary degree. The person who 



CALMNESS 245 

gets excited, who shows fear, who trembles, who quails before 
anything, is to that extent lacking in this power. 

Coolness can be acquired. We have had letters from nervous 
persons who have said they were incapable of becoming cool ; 
and yet they conquered the fault as soon as they began to 
develop magnetism. From the very fact that nervous motions 
cause a rapid loss of vitality by throwing off the energy of the 
body, it could at once be seen that the absence of coolness would 
amount to a loss of control over another person. The man 
referred to was of the combination required to cope with the 
burglar. The following conversation is substantially that which 
took place : 

" Come in." 

The burglar resolved to kill the merchant if he resisted ; and 
although he was surprised at the announcement, he entered the 
room, levelled a revolver at the head of his victim, approached 
him and said : 

" I've got you." 

" Eh ? " 

" I've got you." 

" Sit down." 

" No, I won't. I'm here for business. I've got you." 

" Eh ? " 

" You're mine. Now give up." 

" Isn't your language a little peculiar for a professional 
burglar ? " 

" Well, that's my look-out. Give me that money or you're a 
dead one." 

" The money is all right. I give lots of money away without 
being asked for it. I don't mind the money. I have plenty for 
my own use and to give away. I don't like the tone of your 
voice." 

" That's all right. Be quick now. I'm here to do a 
clean job." 

" What will you do ? " 

" I'll kill you if you move." 

" What good would it do you to kill me ? You would hang 
for it." 

" Hang nothing." 
By this time the merchant, who had kept his eyes fixed on 



246 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

the burglar, found a slight evidence of quailing in the latter. 
From that moment he was sure of the result. 

" You will certainly be hung. Do you see that button ? " 

" Yes." 

" Do you hear the sound below ? " 

" Police ? " 

" Give me your revolver/' 

The man is now serving a term of imprisonment. 

Coolness with magnetism are sure to conquer all things ; and 
these two qualities belong together. The more of one you get 
the more of the other will follow, provided the coolness is not 
of the blas6, cold-blooded type of stupidity. Remember that 
the engine must be alive with power. 

A speaker stands on the platform delivering his speech. He 
is languid, gentle, quiet, cool, collected, effeminate, weak and 
yet free from nervousness. He lacks the energy of a thoroughly 
live man. There are no fires in the engine ; hence the quietude 
of the body. 

Another speaker stands on the platform delivering his speech. 
He has vitality enough, but it leaks out at all sides. His head 
beats the emphasis of his ideas just as nearly as all readers' and 
speakers' heads do. His eyes are unsteady, looking in every 
direction without power of expression. He steps about, shifting 
his weight every minute or two, now advancing, now retiring, 
now going across to the right or the left, and never standing still 
very long at a time. He brings the upper half of his body 
forward and bends to give emphasis to a supposedly strong idea, 
doing this several times a minute. He gestures in every sort of 
way, but contents himself to do finger movements in the absence 
of the full-arm action whenever the thought is not weighty 
enough to admit of gesticulation. Soon he has exhausted all 
that stock of energy that would have gone to produce mag- 
netism, and he now finds that he must make up in the physical 
what he lacks in the magnetic, and he shouts and pounds. 

Another speaker, the rare kind, the individual with the 
greatest degree of honesty because he has the conscience to equip 
himself for his profession, stands on the platform delivering his 
speech. He is cool, not because he is weak, but because he 
knows that great truths require all the power a man possesses to 
give them full weight of utterance. He stands still. When 



CALMNESS 247 

there is cause for action of the whole body he steps forward 
with a single movement as a stately ship might swing from her 
moorings, not as a fidgety orator might jog about over the 
platform. His head is not bobbing up and down, right and left, 
to the rhythm of his words, as is so commonly the case with 
speakers. He keeps his head erect upon his shoulders, strong, 
powerful, energetic, but in perfect repose. This is what excites 
the admiration of the audience. 

Pew men and few women carry their heads in magnetic poise. 
When weak it falls forward, or is inclined to the right or left, 
or is tilted back ; while the person of magnetism is of easier and 
yet more solid poise. There is no setness, no stiffness about the 
neck ; but there is firmness and certainty of carriage that 
denotes the presence of power. To be still does not require that 
one be stiff; the stillness of death holds that quality. We 
wish the stillness of life. When the ordinary person is told to 
straighten up, to remove the lines of weakness, he has no other 
recourse than to the lines of hardness, and the latter is worse 
than the former. Magnetism steers us clear of these extremes. 

The third speaker of whom we spoke was magnetic. He had 
cultivated the body and all its faculties. He knew the value of 
repose, of dead-stillness, as he stood before his audience. The 
vitality that another might have thrown away in useless 
action he kept in storage to be dealt out as he chose. His 
gestures were inclined to assume the character of attitudes, for 
he presented as much versatility in his physical portrayal of his 
thoughts as did any of the other speakers ; but he preferred 
the gesture of the outstretched arm and expressive position of 
the hand rather than the swinging motion so common to others. 
Why is it that nearly all speakers believe that motion expresses 
more than attitude ? Does the blow dealt by the hand hit 
anybody in a gesture ; and, if not, why are the uplifted arm and 
clinched fist not more expressive of the meaning of a blow ? The 
speaker seeks to illustrate this thought. He cannot reproduce 
life by acting its details. He cannot fire a gun when he tells of a 
killing. Repose in the attitude of description is always more 
effective and far more beautiful than action that never comes to 
a position of meaning. 

A lawyer who holds mastery over himself at once wins respect. 
He does not fly up out of his chair to shout his objection to 



248 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

the judge. If the interests of his client demand that he make 
objection he can always be heard, and the more dignified he is 
the more likely he will be to get a full hearing. Judges admire 
cool, self-possessed lawyers ; they dislike the active, nervous 
fellows who try to carry everything before them as by storm. 
The cool lawyer is most powerful in handling witnesses, for he 
thinks more rapidly and carries more trains of thoughts than 
the excitable lawyer. 

The habit of walking to and fro while speaking is the result 
of nervousness, and is very taxing on the vitality. It occurs 
before juries and before audiences generally. Some men walk 
up and down, striding from place to place as though the action 
were impelled by a special degree of interest ; but if you will 
take notice of the successful, the brainy, the magnetic lawyers, 
and orators generally, you will find them keeping closer to a 
given spot. It is true that action arouses latent magnetism ; 
but when it is aroused, it should not be wasted and thrown away 
wantonly. 

There is no more interesting study of human nature than 
that which is devoted to watching people about you, and seeking 
to apply some of the laws of life to their habits and methods 
of handling themselves. 

A new phase of the study of personal magnetism is called the 
Comparative System. It is employed by those who wish to 
make the greatest progress in the least amount of time and 
with the least effort. It has been used with great success by 
a number of keen-minded persons, and seems to have been 
invented by a man of unusual magnetic power for his individual 
advancement. 

The value of the Comparative System is that it requires no 
time whatever, and no practice. It is simplicity itself. All 
that is needed is to watch other people, and study their various 
mannerisms and defects of handling themselves ; and compare 
each action and each defect with yourself in the same line. 
Thus, how does such a person sit, stand, walk, talk, move about, 
exhibit unrest or lack of control, and so on ; and what of these 
defects, if any, or merits if any, do you possess, comparing 
each and every detail ? 



LESSON FORTY-SIX 

CALM ENERGY OF POWER 

OUE NEXT STEP brings us to the consideration of 
perfect calmness of body and mind while charged 
with tremendous energy ; the power to think great 
thoughts and not to let them run wild with the emotions ; 
the power to hold great determination and not lose any of its 
force in wasted action. Can you imagine a perfect machine 
that has been built for the execution of the most delicate 
and at the same time the most useful movements ; a machine 
that does what it was made for, and nothing else ; a machine 
that never loses any motion in the midst of those that display 
its efficiency ? Every detail of its work has a purpose behind it. 
If it were permitted to perform other details, some of its 
power and much of its usefulness would be wasted. 
In like manner it must be remembered : 

1. That there must be the energy of a strong life within. 

2. That there must be no action without except what is 
needed for the expression of the life within. *~ 

The practice introduced in this chapter is of a mixed character. 
We prefer, wherever it is possible, to use the necessary events 
of the day as means of progress, rather than dry exercises. The 
child that grows up to manhood or womanhood, and becomes 
magnetic without practice, is in fact always practising. The 
nervousness, the activity and vigour of youth are all evidences of 
extra vitality with which young people are supplied ; the excess 
being intended by Nature to carry the child through the perils of 
early life, for statistics as well as circumstances conspire to its 
cutting off. Out of that turmoil of activity a few come to the 
settled repose of stupidity which has but little life within ; and 
a rare few attain magnetism by natural processes. 

But how ? 

Who told them that a live soul, a throbbing, pulsating life 



250 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

within a body, when held compressed by the other forces, 
became intensely magnetic ; that the use of the inner power 
through the controlled channels of expression increased that 
magnetism ; and that waste action or lost motions sap the 
fountain and spend its wealth ? 

No one ever proclaimed these things to them, perhaps, but 
some genius whose presence they could not discern whispered 
the secret to them ; and they, all unconscious of the fact, became 
experts in the art of self-composure. Or it may be that a keen 
judgment told them that persons who cannot sit still or stand 
still are less capable of impressing themselves upon their fellow- 
beings than those who retain all their vigour while commanding 
its use. At any rate, the person who is naturally magnetic 
possesses the same traits as those who have acquired the power. 
The possession has come through the same processes. 

What may be practice to you is habit in another. There are 
not two royal roads to the same palace in the study of mag- 
netism. It is by conserving the energies of life and increasing 
them that the results are attained. These things are done by 
habit in one case ; and by practice in another ; but they are 
identically the same. While the work of the present chapter 
may be called practice, we are endeavouring to set it forth in 
two classes : 

1 . In the habit of persons who are naturally endowed with 
personal magnetism. 

2. In dry practice. 

If you adopt the former without the latter, it will suffice, 
provided you are able to make the easier and more natural 
methods count as effectively as the dry practice. The latter has 
the merit of being speedier and more certain. 

Newly acquired habits soon become second nature. 

What you decide to do regularly in the daily routine of action, 
will grow upon you and soon attend to its own performance. If 
it were not for this quality of the human mind, we would all be 
helpless. Parts of the body may be trained to take up these 
secondary habits and carry them on in many diverse ways at the 
same time ; as is specially noted in the case of the musician. 
No person can play the piano until the fingers have acquired the 



CALM ENERGY OF POWER 251 

habit of travelling over the keys with accuracy of touch, a 
thing that is impossible for may weeks or months. 

By and by the ten digits of the two hands are able to perform 
ten different duties, all exact, and at the rate of hundreds per 
minute. Then comes the time when the habit of playing is so 
weD established that the eyes need not see the keyboard ; the 
mind can measure it through the hands. The church organist 
operates the many keys that are made for the hands, as well as 
a number of pedals for the feet. 

One of the charms of second nature is in the fact that a new 
habit does not bother the mind when it is correct in its opera- 
tions, but does bother the mind when in error. Here is a person 
who has spoken bad grammar for years in ignorance ; he learns 
the rules of grammar, soon applies them, does so with accuracy 
for weeks until he finds himself speaking correctly as a second 
nature, and thereafter he has no knowledge that he is following 
the rules. Being adopted into his life they demand no attention 
from the mind. But here comes the wonder : When he speaks 
correctly he is not aware of the fact ; yet let him make an error 
and his mind will recognize it at once. 

In stronger force the same law holds true when personal habits 
are involved. The faulty attitude is overcome by practice and 
disappears ; if there is negligence the breach is noticed at the 
time, but the continual doing of what is one's regular way is 
never recognized by the doer of it. It is the error, the exception, 
the break in the habit that arrests attention. When an attempt 
to establish dead-stillness as a second nature has been persisted 
in for a few weeks, the whole nervous system will take it up and 
adopt it as a habit. Then, when some breach of this occurs, the 
mind will have knowledge of it. 

Dead-stillness requires perfect calmness of the mind and 
emotions. 

When the mind is excited, the body as its agent loses control 
of itself to some extent. The emotions or feelings go much 
further, for they unbalance both mind and body. 

We know of nothing more important in this or in any other 
study than that the mind should always be calm. Even if the 
muscles must give way to their proneness to move constantly, 



252 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

or the nerves twitch, the 'brain which is the engineer should 
never under any impression show excitement, nor should the 
emotions control the mind or body. 

A calm mind is a successful mind, if the calmness is one of 
strength, not exhaustion. Many little laws come into play at 
this juncture ; not broad enough to be called principles. We 
will state them : 

1. The muscles of the body, by constant involuntary motions, 
may waste the vitality without involving the action of the mind. 

2. The nerves of the body, by constant twitching, may waste 
the vitality without involving the action of the mind. 

3. Dead-stillness as practised in this book, will overcome 
both faults and lead to the accumulation of magnetism. 

4. The excitement of the mind may or may not involve the 
action of the muscles or of the nerves. It generally does affect 
them seriously. 

5. The excitement of the emotions may or may not involve 
the mind, muscles and nerves. It is almost certain to affect the 
mind, unless the person is of strong magnetic self-control. 

6. It is a test of power to be able to separate the thoughts 
from the face. 

7. It is the best test of power to be able to separate the 
emotions from the mind ; thence from the face and general 
body. 

8. The practice of dead-stillness as given in this book will 
accomplish such results. 

Napoleon could make his face like marble if he chose. He 
never allowed his nearest friend or closest counsellor to know 
what was passing in his mind, or what effect any news, good or 
bad, really produced on him. He retained that placidity of 
countenance that told nothing. Apart from his occasional 
periods of anger, he was a man of dead-stillness ; an engine of 
tremendous power held in control. His magnetism was most 
powerful. By it he held men of treachery under sway of his 
will ; he inspired his soldiers to deeds of frenzied heroism, and 
overawed his opponents in diplomacy. 

Bismarck, Gladstone and all great men have separated their 
emotions from their minds, and both from muscles and nerves ; 
so that passion never intrudes itself unbidden. 

9. Mental and emotional excitement may be concealed by 



CALM ENERGY OF POWER 253 

controlling the muscles and nerves, even at times without 
possessing much magnetism ; but it requires the highest degree 
of this power to prevent the voice from betraying the excite- 
ment. It is dead-stillness in full earnestness. 

Practise dead-stillness all day long. Use all parts of the body 
that are required in the performance of any duty ; but do not 
allow a single action otherwise to escape. It will take no time. 
You will be all the stronger for it. If need be, have some friend 
watch you to give advice as to any escaping motions. Make 
everything count. 

The parent can always control the child, and without 
unkindness, by the perfect power of absolute repose of all parts 
of the body not needed in use ; the steady glance, the placid 
face and the calm control of mind and body. No child, 
however fractious, can resist this influence if backed by the 
magnetism that such calmness will generate. 

The school teacher is able to control the most unruly of 
scholars by the conditions just stated. We could devote 
hundreds of pages to reports from teachers confirming the 
irresistible force of dead-stillness when alive with magnetic 
energy. 

The same results are everywhere reported. There is no reason 
why you should not be master of those with whom you come in 
contact. 

However, all such control requires tact. It is the one key of 
success in life. Tact unlocks all the doors in the hearts and 
pockets of your fellow-beings. It wins friendships without 
ostentation, and secures wealth without wrong. 

It makes but little difference how much magnetism is born 
in us or later cultivated, if we have no tact we cannot suitably 
use it. There are to-day living in obscurity great men and 
women who need only this one power to develop them. They 
have aspirations and longings for a proud career, a noble future, 
but have no tact. Could we go among them and bring them out 
by teaching them how to come in contact with the world, we 
should find Shakespeares and Miltons, Whitefields and 
Spurgeons, Websters and Clays, Garricks and Goughs, where 
now we see but the yearning for greatness stamped upon the face. 

The cultivation of tact and the cultivation of personal 
magnetism go hand in hand. 



LESSON FORTY-SEVEN 

EXPERIMENTS 

A FEW PLEASING TESTS arranged for the purpose 
of hastening the progress of the student will be wel- 
comed as a diversion. While they are highly beneficial 
they are not very difficult unless your nerves are shattered by 
bad habits or ill-health. If they are repeated a number of 
times they will begin to grow easy, as has been often declared 
by those who have tried them. 

FIRST EXPERIMENT 

Take a sheet of notepaper, neither too stiff nor too thin ; tear 
it in halves ; hold one-half of it in the hand by placing the 
thumb and two fingers at the lower corner of the paper, holding 
the hand about a foot from the chest, and the elbow away from 
the body. The entire arm must be free that is, must not touch 
anything, nor have any means of support. 

If a mirror is convenient it is well to locate some fine spot 
on the glass (if it has none, place an ink spot there), and hold 
the paper so that the upper opposite corner from that in the hand 
shall be on an exact line with the eye and the spot on the mirror. 
Hold this for twelve seconds, and note the deviation of the corner 
of the paper from the spot. If there is no deviation, you are 
ready to undertake the second experiment. If there is, you 
should practise this until you can prevent any departure, 
however slight, from the spot indicated. 

SECOND EXPERIMENT 

Take a large sheet of writing paper, tear it in halves, and 
hold it in the same manner as in the first exercise. Persist in 
practising until there is no deviation even of a hairbreadth. 
Do not be discouraged if it requires patience. The left hand 



EXPERIMENTS 255 

may be employed about one-quarter of the time, or vice versa, 
if the pupil is left-handed. 



THIRD EXPERIMENT 



When the last exercise has been mastered, the pupil may 
take a sheet of the larger size foolscap paper, tear it in halves, 
and continue as before. 



FOURTH EXPERIMENT 

When the third exercise has been accomplished, the pupil 
may take an entire sheet of foolscap paper, and, without 
tearing it, open the whole sheet and hold it by the lower corner, 
having the thumb and two fingers upon as small a portion of 
it as possible. The paper must be just stiff enough to stand 
alone. Making a hollow curve diagonally across the centre 
will aid in keeping it stiff. 

Be sure that the elbow has no support and is extended from 
the body. 

FIFTH EXPERIMENT 

Fill a large wineglass two-thirds full of water ; take it at the 
small part just above the bottom, by the thumb and first 
finger only, and hold it for thirty seconds on a level with the 
chin, the elbow being away from the body and the whole arm 
free. The water must not shake or even tremble. Rest. 

Hold it in the same way, employing the thumb and second 
finger only, for thirty seconds. Rest. 

Hold it in the same way, employing the thumb and third 
finger only, for thirty seconds. Rest. 

Hold it in the same way, employing the thumb and little 
finger only, for thirty seconds. Rest. 

Your patience will be sorely tried. 

But after several efforts you will suddenly find yourself 
mastering the experiment with unexpected ease. 

These experiments will seem to make you " nervous " ; you 
will say that instead of making you control yourself better they 
irritate and vex your nerves. So it will seem at first, and like- 
wise at all times when your leakage is going on rapidly. This 



256 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

apparent " nervousness " is really the rebellious leakage being 
checked. It dislikes to be stopped. A " nervous " person 
wants to let the leakage go on until complete prostration ensues. 




FIG. 1. FLOATING THE ROSE-LEAF. 

There is a temporary agony in the checking of the outflow of 
this vital force. While the loss is going on the person walks 
and moves about, swings the feet or twitches the hands, tears 
paper, fingers some button or watch chain, gets in a rocking- 



EXPERIMENTS 



257 



chair sometimes, and shows every manner of restlessness. The 
downhill grade has begun. 

To check it at first is to make the person suffer. Yet the 
great men and women of the world have somehow learned to 
stop this waste. Those who want to achieve greatness, or even 
wish to learn to control others, must endure the suffering. 

In conversation with those who have been magnetic and have 
been successful in life, it was learned that every one had made 
some effort to check this waste of vital force. Not one knew 
the principle involved, and not one had the advantage of any 
guide or help ; and, stranger yet, none knew that any other 
person was endeavouring to reach the same result. Such con- 
versations proved that our great men and women do more for 
themselves in private than the public suppose. Some of their 
efforts are often simple, child-like, and even ridiculous. Yet 
they accomplish great ends. 

You who give up now would better cease to hope for much 
in this world in the way of commanding talents. 




FIG. 2. EXTENDING THE FLOATING LEAF. 



17 



258 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

SIXTH EXPERIMENT 

Take a large wineglass (not a tumbler) even full at the top 
with water. Place the bottom in the flat palm of the hand 
and hold the same at arm's length. The water must not be 
allowed to spill or even shake or tremble. The other hand may 
be tried occasionally. Then procure the aid of a friend who 
is to give you two wineglasses of water, one in each hand, the 
water coming to the top and slightly rising above the edge. 
Hold these in the two hands out at arm's length for thirty 
seconds, without the slightest tremor or shake of the water. 

You will not be able to do this at first, but perform it daily 
for a month, and you will be surprised at the result. If you 
give it up before the full design is effected you will yet learn 
what patience is, and patience helps to overcome the erratic 
action of the vital-force. 

The fact that the water trembles or overflows at the top need 
not discourage you. We are constantly receiving reports from 
our members who have failed utterly and have given up all hope 
of accomplishing anything in this practice. One says : 

" The water shakes out and spills. I can no more do that 
exercise than I can jump over the moon." And we reply, 
" Oh yes, you can. The very fact that you cannot do it is 
proof of the need you have of it." 

No one need fail ultimately. All can do it in time. Those 
who have given up completely have in most instances, come 
back to the practice, drawn by the fascination of it, and they 
have succeeded in the most difficult of all experiments the 
great Rose Leaf Test, which is now for the first time made 
public, although we have given it many times to our private 
pupils. It will be presented in the next chapter. 

The wineglass experiments have great value in bringing 
the nerves to absolute perfection. They are tests that 
never tell an untruth. The nerves may be alive, jumping, 
irregular, erratic and out of normal health, while it is possible 
for a person of strong will to keep all the muscles dead-still. 
So we see that the present experiments reach a condition that 
may always escape the previous exercises. They give smooth- 
ness to the flow of the nerve-currents ; they tone down the 
irritated fibre ; they do for the direct electric system of the 



EXPERIMENTS 



259 




FIG. 3. RAISING THE FLOATING LEAF. 

body what dead-still practice will do for the muscles, 
ence alone can show great benefits. 



Experi- 



DENTISTS 

Many of our pupils have been dentists. They of all persons 
require not only muscular dead-stillness, but nervous dead- 
stillness, and these experiments have so qualified them for 
exactness of movement and delicacy of touch that their skill as 
well as their income have been greatly increased. The sensitive 
spot on a tooth is often very small ; a careless or uncontrolled 
movement of the hand would cause severe pain to the patient. 
The dentist who allowed a drill to slip and penetrate the flesh 
of the cheek, coming through on the outside of the face, would 



260 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

never have had the accident had he been a student of magnet- 
ism, and his patron would not now be disfigured for life. The 
person of steady nerve will, if the instrument slips, not allow 
it to pass an eighth of an inch in any direction. 

SEVENTH EXPERIMENT 

While in a large room try to follow with the steady eye a line 
on a height with the head, or if there is no line, then an 
imaginary one, first from left to right, and reverse. Do this 
slowly fifty times each way. The eye must not move by small 
muscular jerks, but very smoothly and slowly. It is not easy 
to do, and to do well. Do not wink while doing it. 

If outdoors, try it by following a horizontal line of mortar on 
a brick building, or the joints of a wooden one. 

To those to whom the object of the foregoing experiments 
may not seem clear, it will be necessary to say a word : 

The pupil is asked to remember that the vital-force is the life 
of the body ; from it is generated the Magnetism wliich controls 
others. It is constantly being formed, and some portion of it is 
constantly in motion. It propels the action of the involuntary 
organs by the decree of its Maker, and without the direction of 
the human will. The heart circulates ~^ 



attencla TtoTilie breathing ; and the stomach propels itself during 
digestion ; and thus the trinity of life's movements, without 
each and all of which life itself would cease, may be traced to the 
action of the vital-force, and through that to some power beyond. 

But here the line is drawn, and one of the Principles of 
Personal Magnetism is called into requisition : 

" No movement of any voluntary muscle of the human body 
must be made unless directed by the will/' 

The voluntary muscles are those whose motions may be 
operated by the conscious being. 

They should never move involuntarily. 

Leakage occurs in the following ways : 

1. By unsteadiness of the hands, arms or body. 

2. Twitching of the eyelids, or constant winking. 

3. Drumming with the fingers after the habit has been 
formed, or with the feet. 

4. Sighing. 



EXPERIMENTS 261 

5. Yawning. 

6. Wakefulness. 

7. Swinging the arms, hands, legs, feet, head or body. 

8. Booking, after the habit has been formed. 

9. Restlessness. 

10. Twitching of the fingers, or any movement of any part 
of the body during embarrassment, or while speaking or being 
spoken to. 

11. All kinds of embarrassment. 

12. Awkwardness. 

13. Shorter exhalations (in point of time) than inhalations. 

14. Stammering and stuttering. 

15. Lack of fluency in speech where it cannot be attributed 
to want of words or ideas. 

16. Allowing the ankle to be turned or a strain to be put 
upon any muscle by an uneasy standing position. Never have 
the foot on its side. Never twist the body. 

Who are exempt from all these ? 

The cool, determined, successful, magnetic people of the 
world. 



LESSON FORTY-EIGHT 

STILL LIFE 

OUR course of training now leads us into new fields 
of practice, although what is presented in this chapter 
rests upon the previous lesson with a wide difference 
in the way of tests and results. This must be clearly under- 
stood at the start, and we will state that the work previously 
presented has been designed for two specific missions : 

1. To bring the muscles to dead-stillness while the life within 
is most energetic. 

2. To bring the nerves into perfect smoothness while the life 
within is most energetic. 

Statuary work is the combination of the two. In the practice 
of muscular dead-stillness it is allowable to express life in any 
form and to use any muscles that are needed. The experiments 
given in the preceding chapter, called mechanical exercises, are 
for the nerves alone. This distinction must always be under- 
stood. Now we unite the two and produce statuary effects. 

The definition of a statuary position might be one that em- 
braced the power of complete imitation of a statue. To be sure 
such training is properly included in other lines of culture. The 
woman who was told by her husband that she was so restless 
and uneasy all the time that he was constantly irritated by her 
presence, did not leave home and go back to her mother ; she 
quietly studied forms of expression and learned grace and 
particularly statuary attitudes. Then she was no longer rest- 
less and nervous. A home that might have been broken up 
and joined the long list of disasters due to incompatibility of 
temper became the bulwark of love. Let husbands and wives 
do everything possible to retain the home before giving up and 
separating. If we have no other crown to wear, we are pleased 
to know that our efforts in carrying the study of magnetism into 

hpme-life have saved many men and women from the misery of 

262 



STILL LIFE 263 

failure in marriage. We know that over ten thousand couples 
are living happily together at this time, who would have been 
divorced but for this very study. Husbands and wives who are 
magnetic never quarrel. 

This fact is easily proved. 

The statuary exercises of this chapter are not difficult to 
undertake. If you are capable of interest in anything you can 
go through all the requirements with relish for the practice. 
The fact that they are not easily mastered does not render them 
uninteresting or hard to try. They are not everything in this 
study, but only a part of the general structure. In many cases 
to be able to perform one or two perfectly might be sufficient. 
Others wish to take them right through without omissions. 

As a good student studies all his life, so there must be a 
constant use made of the principles involved in this chapter, 
as long as the student lives. The exercises may be abandoned 
in a few months after they have grown into habit, but do not 
abandon the results they produce. The dead-still attitudes 
concentrate the electrical or static forces, giving them an 
opportunity to accumulate while Internal Energy is going, 
and by a change of the static into the dynamic form of 
electricity, intense Personal Magnetism is developed. 

Then new habits follow. 

Students have to grow into this power ; they cannot jump at 
a bound. After the force has commenced to grow it can be 
kept growing for many years, just as a child grows into man- 
hood. 

The pleasantest period of one's study of this art is when he 
or she experiences the consciousness of the presence of a new 
power within, the Internal Energy. We would gladly lead the 
student to that happy condition by a flight to the mountain- 
top, avoiding the toilsome plodding through the valley, if we 
could, but we cannot. Patience is a test of character; youj 
must have character enough to be patient as you go slowly ^ 
through the tedious drill of this chapter. 

Later on we shall commence the formation of Internal 
Energy. Then the two means of development will work 
together. For the present we shall introduce exercises that 
open the way to those that are to constitute the main practice 
in this chapter. 



264 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 
THE PROGRESSIVE STEPS IN THE STATTTABY PERIOD 

First Step Sitting Still. 

The movements which lead to the sitting position and those 
which lead from it are elsewhere described, together with the 
principles underlying them. This exercise deals only with the 
attitude of sitting. 

FIRST DAY 

Attach to the wall or to some object directly in front of your 
chair on a height with the eyes, a watch having a second hand. 
If you do not possess this article, mental counting must be 
substituted ; that is, count silently one to each second, as 
nearly as may be estimated in the mind. 

Sit down. Take as easy a position as possible, without 
supporting the back. 

1. Looking steadily at the watch (which must be on a 
level with the eyes), try to avoid winking for five seconds. 
Rest a few seconds. 

2. On resuming you may take the mind from the winking, 
and think exclusively of the fingers. Look steadily at the 
watch for five seconds and be sure that no movement of the 
fingers takes place. Rest a few seconds. Do not hurry, as 
it will cause a loss of time and labour. 

3. Resume and look steadily at the watch for ten seconds, 
without allowing the eyelids to move in the slightest degree. 
Rest a few seconds. 

4. Resume and look steadily at the watch for ten seconds, 
without allowing the fingers to move in the slightest degree. 
Rest a few seconds. 

5. Resume and look steadily at the watch for fifteen seconds, 
eyelids dead-still as before. 

SECOND DAY 

The student must now rest until the next day, and then he 
must repeat the foregoing five exercises. 

THIRD DAY 

On the third day he may continue the Dead-Still sitting 



STILL LIFE 265 

positions as directed below, arriving at the tenth exercise on 
that day. 

6. Resume and look steadily at the watch for fifteen seconds, 
fingers dead-still as before. 

7. Twenty seconds, eyelids dead-still. 

8. Twenty seconds, fingers dead-still. 

9. Thirty seconds, eyelids dead-still. 

10. Thirty seconds, fingers dead-still. 

FOURTH BAY 

11. Thirty-five seconds, eyelids dead-still. 

12. Thirty-five seconds, fingers dead-still. 

13. Forty seconds, eyelids dead-still. 

14. Forty seconds, fingers dead-still. 

15. Fifty seconds, eyelids dead-still. 

NOTE. When the eyes begin to water, continue only five 
seconds after the unpleasant feeling begins. Do not keep too 
long at one time on the eye movements. Judicious practice 
will strengthen the eyes very much. 

16. Continue in this way until you can go to eighty seconds, 
fingers dead-still, and eyelids as long as possible. 

17. After a few days' practice, you will be ready for this 
and the next exercise. 

18. Look steadily at the watch for one minute, not moving 
a muscle of the body, and keeping the mind upon the feet, and 
especially the toes. The extremities of the body, the fingers 
and the toes, and the eyelids are the first parts to show nervous- 
ness or leakage. These must be watched at all times during 
the day, as well as in these exercises. 

19. Look steadily at the watch for one minute, keeping the 

e entire body, being sure that no motion of any 



^ 

kind occurs in any part. This exercise should be performed 
daily as long as the person lives. The good that grows out of 
a long continuance of it cannot be estimated. 

NOTES. All the foregoing exercises refer to the sitting posture, 
the back being unsupported at the time. 
It is better to have the light behind you. 



266 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The watch may be four feet away unless you are near-sighted. 

The following exercises will add to your stores of magnetism, 
through the principle of Still Life. Practise these as oppor- 
tunity permits. 

Second Step Lounging, Dead-Still. 

20. Take a sitting position, allowing the body to fall into a 
lounging attitude of perfect ease ; hold this position without 
a movement of the fingers, toes, arms, eyelids or head. 

Maintain for two minutes, watching some object steadily. 

Third StepStanding, Dead-Still. 

Arrange a watch, as in the first exercise, on a height with the 
head and as far away as the hands can be easily seen. In 
standing, allow the arms to hang at the sides as dead weights. 
If all muscular tension is taken out of them they will hang easily 
and properly. The weight of the entire body should be borne 
on the balls of the feet, the heels merely touching the floor. 

Make this position natural. 

21. Stand for thirty seconds, fixing the mind upon the eyelids, 
fingers and toes. Do not move any of these a hairbreadth. 

22. Stand for thirty seconds, fixing the mind upon the entire 
body, and draw in full and very long and deep inspirations, 
exhaling when necessary, all without the slightest swaying of 
the body or rocking to and fro, or movement of any voluntary 
muscle. It is a good idea to keep the chest fully extended and 
immovable and the shoulders down, but not back. 

Do not assume an unnatural attitude. 

Gradually increase these periods until you can stand for 
sixty seconds under the conditions named. 

23. Stand for ninety seconds dead-still, as to every voluntary 
muscle of the body ; the hands at the side ; the second and third 
fingers of the right hand touching each other very lightly ; the 
same as to the left hand; the eyes looking fixedly at some object. 

This exercise is so important that it should be practised 
every day during life. 

Fourth Step Frozen Movements. 

24. Stand for one minute with the entire body dead-still, and 
the arm raised so as to allow the wrist to rest lightly against 



STILL LIFE 267 

the body, near the hip, and a little in front. Either arm will 
do. Do not move the eyes or lids, or any muscle of the body. 

25. Advance to a table, place the first finger of the hand 
very lightly upon it, and look steadily for one minute at some 
fixed object ; the whole body being dead-still. As the first 
inclination to move will be at the fingers, toes, eyes or eyelids, 
all these points of leakage should be guarded. 

This watchfulness will soon become a habit. 

It is not intended to include Sunday in the practice days, 
although the better habits of life should prevail at all times. 

Fifth Step Statuary Positions. 

The normal positions just taken are very exacting in their 
requirements, and must tax the will-power of the student to 
a great degree. 

To stand still, however, is not sufficient. This calmness, 
this repose of conscious strength, becomes the highest type of 
manhood and womanhood when carried into the activities of 
life. Excitement is weakness ; calmness is strength ; energetic 
repose is grandeur. 

Think what all these mean. 

In after years make it the chief element of your daily habits 
to adopt the principles involved in these exercises. For 
instance, when irritated remain perfectly calm, when nervous or 
fidgety be absolutely in repose, physically and mentally. When 
others address you adopt the manner of one who is not easily 
embarrassed or moved by the remarks or actions of another. 

Learn the art of perfect self-control. Do not be afraid to 
look another in the eye ; to remain passionless when others 
are excited ; to turn every disturbing influence into an idle 
wave battering hopelessly against the strong wall of calmness 
that hems in and protects that sacred essence of being, your 
personality. 

This is the secret of personal magnetism ; and it is a secret 
that all great men and women have acquired. 

THE GREAT ROSE LEAF EXPERIMENT 

This has never been published elsewhere, but the author has 
for many years given it as an exercise to his most accomplished 



268 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 



students, and it has been the means of affording both pleasure 
and gain in the control of the nerves. When done in class it is 
attended by so much enthusiasm that the energy is not lacking 
within. We think greater progress is made from books ; and 
the expense of many^guineas Tor class lessons, or for* private 
instruction, may be avoided. The present edition of this book 
is intended to do away with all need of such lessons. 

The Rose Leaf experiment should not be attempted until 
you have graduated from the preceding stage, as time will be 
lost otherwise. It consists in filling a wineglass with water, 
while holding the wineglass in one hand, the arms being free 
from the body. When the wineglass is full to the top, by the 
law of adhesion it will hold about an eighth of an inch more. 
To pour this on requires very great steadiness of nerves. Then 
the wineglass must be set down upon the table and a rose leaf 




FIG. 4. SWINGING THE FLOATING LEAF. 



STILL LIFE 



269 



taken up and floated on the top of the water, without jarring 
any of the latter from the glass. Thus the one hand will move 
while the other is held still, and neither must be afiected by 
the other. If a leaf is not easily obtainable for this test (as 
would be the case in the winter-time), a piece of waxed paper 
usually will do, bending up the edges to prevent it lying wholly 
flat upon the water. 

Now comes the test. 

When all this can be done easily, the wineglass with its extra 
water and rose leaf must be held out half-arm's length, or about 
twelve inches in front of the chest, for one minute. Rest. 

Next hold it out full-arm's length in front of the chest. Rest. 

Reverse by taking the leaf away, pouring the water away, 
changing hands ; then, holding the wineglass in the other 
hand, fill it full as before, and extra full also, to which the 
rose leaf should be added. 

With hands reversed as just stated, hold the wineglass out 
in front of the chest half -arm's length. Rest. 

Next hold it out full arm's length for a minute in front of the 
chest. Rest. 

With the wineglass full as stated, and the leaf floating on top, 
pass it to the other hand, then back again. In class work we 
use!Tfo"];8^ one spilled the 

water ; then we would begin over again. 




Pio. 5. LOWERING THE FLOATING LEAP. 



270 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

A very difficult task is to pass the wineglass from the hand to 
the table, then from the table to the floor and back again. A 
stooping position tests the smoothness of the nerves as much as 
anything can do. 

The wineglass is then raised to various heights and positions. 

When connected with much muscular effort, these smooth- 
nerve tests do not always accumulate magnetism, although they 
tend that way. When associated with tensing they never fail 
to develop magnetism rapidly. When done with flabby life of 
the body, they are neutral, and have no value except to teach 
control. When done with energy within the chest, they quickly 
accumulate magnetic power. As we have said before, they are 
not all. 

Other helpful tests are as follows : 

1. Dressing. Put on a coat or jacket without the loss of any 
motion small or great. The fidgety person will have trouble in 
finding the sleeve-hole, or something will hitch. Even the 
buttons must go into place with ease and smoothness. Wher- 
ever the coat may be in the room, lift it from its place, put arms 
in the sleeves, and button it ; all to be done smoothly and easily. 

2. Shoes. Put on your shoes that lace, inserting laces in 
eyelets, avoiding the loss of any motion, however small. When 
this is done, unlace them. Do not use force. Every movement 
must be smooth and free from hesitation. 

3. Books. Take a book from a table, open it at any page 
and turn ten leaves forward. Close the book, place it on the 
table, and again take it up with the other hand. Open it, turn 
ten pages forward ; shut it ; open again at another place, and 
turn ten pages backward. No leaf must be missed, no motion 
must be lost, and every detail must count some value. This is 
a very difficult thing to do successfully. 

As irritability destroys magnetism, the purpose of smoothness 
in the above exercises is double. There must be gentleness of 
action and placidity of mind in every detail. That which would 
ordinarily cause you to scold must be welcomed as a test of 
your perfect self control. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
THE MAGNETIC VOICE 

LESSON FORTY-NINE 

QUALITIES THAT WIN 

WHEN ONE PERSON is said to be more magnetic 
than another and thereby secures some influence or 
power over the other person, there must be some 
means of communication between the two in order that the 
stronger personality may be conveyed and express itself. This 
fact makes it necessary for us to consider how many such 
means of communication exist, and what they are. We know 
that all methods of conveying such influence are of wave 
character ; but the results and not the processes are of the 
most importance ; and these will claim our attention. The 
recognized means of communication between human beings 
are as follows : 

1. The Eye. 

2. The Voice. 

3. The Face. 

4. The Touch. 

5. The Presence. 

6. The Thought. 

7. The Feelings. 

The first of these has been very elaborately discussed in an 
important Department of this book. Later on, in Lesson Forty, 
the tense action of the voice was taught. At this place we will 
take up the other powers of the voice, and unfold another 
important method of development founded on the practical 
usefulness of this means of communication between human 
beings. 

271 



272 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Of course something cannot be evolved from nothing. For 
every value in life there must be somewhere an equivalent. 
Voices are trained for singing, and it is a matter of common 
knowledge that they may be vastly improved for speaking and 
especially for conversational uses. In addition to these 
attainments, there can readily be built a number of leading 
qualities, which we call magnetic for the reasons to be stated 
and explained. 

THE MAGNETIC VOICE 
Must Please * * Attract * * Win * * Hold 

" To Please." Not one voice in a thousand is pleasing. It 
may even be said that not one in ten thousand is capable of 
giving genuine pleasure to those who hear it. The first great 
step is to find out why the voice is not pleasing, and then 
ascertain the way by which it can be made a source of pleasure 
to others. 

" To Attract. " Having accomplished the first great step in 
this work, the power of a pleasing voice to attract others should 
next be acquired. As this has been done many times in the 
past by the method taught in this book, it is certain that it can 
be done again in every case where the student is determined to 
achieve so great an end. 

" To Win." It is our creed that there is nothing worth while 
in this life unless it can win. We all wish to win the respect 
of others ; but that is not enough. Our character and person- 
ality should be lovable ; our social relations sincere and estim- 
able ; our business dealings of the highest standard ; and our 
habits cleanly and pure. But, added to these traits, there should 
be constant activity of the most useful kind and a steady 
mental improvement . These bring social and financial success in 
many lives ; yet they may fall far short of winning true success 
if the voice be repellant, as it is in most men and women. There 
are many instances where a magnetic voice has won the greatest 
degree of success in life, in spite of almost everything else being 
absent that should make a person attractive ; because the voice 
is tjhsj^MF 6 ^ 68 *' agfcnt of communication. But let a magnetic 
voice be coupled witt all te other splendid traits, and success 
is more than doubly assured. 



QUALITIES THAT WIN 273 

It is grand to win friends. It is grand to win social distinction. 
But the burdens of life are many and are heavy, and it is 
necessary to win the means of support, and the bank account 
that shall stand between old age and want when the days of 
activity are over. If, therefore, the magnetic voice can be 
turned to substantial earnings, it is one of its legitimate goals. 
This course of lessons shows the many and wonderfully varied 
ways in which such earnings are made possible. 

1. A clergyman can increase his salary and accomplish vastly 
greater results in his profession. 

2. A lawyer can increase his income in his office practice and 
in his work before judge and jury. 

3. A physician can increase his earnings and his influence 
over his patients for their good. 

4. All professional men of every grade and rank can attract 
greater patronage and win larger earnings. 

5. All business men can double in a short time their 
effectiveness. 

6. All clerks, salesmen and all employees who deal with 
others, can rise in value to their employers and secure better 
compensation. 

7. Friends and social advantages are more readily won by a 
magnetic voice than by any other power. 

8. School teachers can add to their value by their better 
control over their scholars and by their increased skill in 
teaching. 

" To Hold." There are persons who possess what seem like 
pleasing voices, who cannot hold their power over others. There 
is something in the voice that tires after a certain time. The 
ability to please, to attract and to win, should be supplemented 
by an e^jjring ^ msignetic quality that never is lessened. This 
comes best Irom draining. 

A few advance thoughts will be in place here : 

1. Mere sound is never pleasing. Most voices are far from 
pleasant. They serve for a while as a means of communication 
in business or social use, then the hearer is glad when they 
cease. 

2. Some voices are considered pretty and even beautiful that 
soon tire the listener. Ninety -nine persons in every hundred use 



18 



274 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

the same part of the vocal scale when they converse. Now, 
suppose you have a friend whose voice is actually rich, and she 
sings always on one note ; or suppose you have a musical 
instrument with the most beautiful tone ever produced, and it is 
played on one note all the time ; can your brain long endure 
that sameness ? 

3. A voice must not only be pleasing, but there must be 
brought into it a subtle quality known as magnetism, in and 
of itself. That which is magnetic is more than pleasing ; it 
must attract, win and hold. We heard a lawyer speak for an 
hour, and everybody was exhausted ; as he had tired them out, 
and had weakened their vitality by the strain necessary to 
follow him and understand what he had in mind. On the other 
hand, we listened to another lawyer who was defending a 
hopeless case of great moment, and he talked all day. There 
was never a moment when any listener was tired of his voice. 
He knew when he had won his case, and not till then did he 
cease talking. 

4. Above all, there must be naturalness in the voice. A 
musical instrument is not natural, although it may have fine/ 
tones. The kind of magnetism that will serve on the stage, will 
not do in oratory, nor will either kind do in business or social 
usage. The thoroughly flexible voice responds readily of itself 
to all the operations of the mind and heart, and thus it becomes 
natural. Flexibility, therefore, must be acquired to a very high 
degree ofefficiency ; and the time spent in such acquisition will 
be more than amply rewarded. 

5. In securing perfect flexibility of voice, this faculty comes, 
incidentally, in its natural gift of reproducing any sound that 
can be made in nature ; not always with the force of the latter, 
but in all other respects in the exact likeness. 



LESSON FIFTY 

WINNING AND LOSING 

MANY INFLUENCES contribute to the making of a 
winning voice ; and many more detract from its 
value. In this lesson we shall discuss both classes 
of influences ; for we can learn more by looking at what 
should be avoided at times than by dealing only with the 
qualities TEat^are desirable. To know what is wrong is half 
the battle. Then to know how to remedy the wrong is another 
step in the progress to be made ; while the climax is reached 
by the actual process of effecting the remedy. 

"THE MEANING " 

Cold type does not express the meaning. 

It rarely does this. Any line can be rendered by some 
person in an ordinary manner and seem to have but little thought 
in it. Some other person will make it full of meaning. But a 
man or woman with a perfectly flexible voice will make the 
thought stand forth in a most amazing power, and the tones 
employed may be quiet and wholly unassuming. 
What does the following statement mean : 

" The man would have died if you hadn't cut his foot off." 

You can read it in such a way as to make the man alive ; 
or in such another way as to make him dead ; and it certainly 
is important to know which fact you desire to convey. There 
is a great difference between a living man and a dead man. 

Put your mind behind the words and think that the man is 
alive. 

Think that the operation saved his life. Think that, if the 
foot had not been cut off, he would not have lived, but would 
have died because the foot was left on. In so thinking, you will 
do something more than emphasize the word died ; the flexible 
voice will not depend wholly on emphasis. The object point 



276 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

of the voice is the word died in the reading, " The man would 
have died if you hadn't cut his foot off." Try it fifty times or 
more until you are able to read the thought that he is alive. 
Now try to execute him. 

This is done by the human voice. Think that the man died. 
Think that he would have died anyway. Think that the 
operation of removing his foot was of no avail ; that he was 
sure to die anyway ; and that he " would have died if you 
hadn't cut his foot off." 

After making your voice perform this execution, repeat it 
fifty times, always on the same man. Repetition gives a flexible 
voice. If you can read the above skilfully so as to make 
the man alive or dead at will, you are then well advanced on 
your way to a successful attainment in this course. 

If you cannot do this, then call in some friends to help 
you solve the problem. But if you can do it fairly well, keep 
on the practice of repeating until the meaning stands out more 
and more day by day. No one is perfect in such practice. 

" THE INTENTION " 

In the preceding lesson we have dealt with the meaning. 
Now we seek to read the purpose or intention of the thought. 
Imagine yourself seated in an outer room, and that in the next 
room there are two persons one a wife, the other a husband. 
The wife says to the husband : 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " What does she intend ? 

But instead of putting it that way, she says : 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " 

Does not the first inquiry clearly indicate that she desires 
to know whether any oner is going to town to-day ? And does 
not the second inquiry take it for granted that some one is 
going, but is he the one ? 

Instead, however, of either inquiry, suppose she had asked : 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " Would not the intention 
shift completely ? Someone is going, and you are the person ; 
but how will you go ? The town is two miles away. Will you 
walk, ride or fly ? 

Another meaning is brought out in the following question : 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " You sometimes go into 



WINNING AND LOSING 277 

the town, or as far as the town ; and often go in that direction, 
and not to the town itself. 

Here is still another intention : 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " This asks whether you 
are going there, or elsewhere, perhaps into the country. 

There are six words in the sentence. One remains to receive 
attention. 

" Will you ride to town to-day ? " Here the purpose shifts in 
the most startling manner from the other five intentions. Is 
to-day the time of your visit to town ? 

The acute thinker will note that, when one word is made to 
carry the idea, all the others are taken for granted. This is 
a very important fact. In court a witness is held accountable 
for all ideas so taken for granted; and, as every man and 
woman is likely to come to the witness stand some day, it is 
well to know to what extent the human voice is committing its 
owner. 

Thus, when the wife asks : " Will you ride to town to-day ? " 
she may not think that she is assuming as admitted truths all 
the other facts suggested in the sentence ; but she does so in 
her form of inquiry. 

If the husband were to enter the room and say to his wife, 
" I will ride to town to-day," he would know, or ought to know, 
that she understands that he is going, that his visit is to be to 
the town, and to-day is the time, as well as the other minor 
ideas to be as stated ; but that he will not walk, as he has 
decided to ride. 

Here the meaning changes with every repetition. 

But the real object of this lesson is to teach you to form 
the habit of expressing exactly what you have in mind. 

The voice becomes natural ancf flexible by specific practice. 
Thus, if you were to repeat each of the above inquiries fifty 
times, or a total of three hundred times, you would find your 
voice much improved in its powers of expression. What you 
can do once, or a few times, is merely what you are in the 
habit of doing all the time. To grow more and more expressive, 
is the chief object of vocal practice. Repetition does wonders. 
Great actors have been known to repeat a single line many 
thousands of times, and so they have become great in so doing. 

Repeat. Repeat. Repeat. 



278 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

" THE PLEASING VOICE " 

Not more than one voice in a thousand is pure in its 
mechanical quality. Some musical instruments, by wear and 
tear, develop what is called in art a mongrel tone. A dog that 
is neither one thing or another in breed is a mongrel ; and 
when it is mean in its habits and nature it is known as a 
mongrel cur. Such a dog does not appeal to the best tastes of 
the community. 

The human voice is constantly subjected to influences that 
destroy its purity of quality. The singer knows, or soon comes 
to know, that the everyday habits of life take the value out 
of the voice ; and so there are exercises that restore the purity 
of the quality. Some musical instruments have exquisitely 
beautiful tones. Some horns of gold alloy are exceedingly rich 
in tone-value ; some of silver are almost as rich ; some of brass 
are more blatant ; and so the quality follows the metal. On 
the other hand, there are methods of construction that help 
make the tones richer. The sounding-board of a piano has 
much to do with the excellence of the sounds to be produced. 
All other parts exert some influence. The instrument that 
to-day attracts by its fine tones may in the course of time give 
forth a sound like an " old tin pan." The same deterioration 
that takes place in a piano is certain to occur in the human 
voice. 

That the latter is rarely ever found in a pure quality is a 
well-recognized fact. 

The vocal cords are made rough and coarse by the use of 
vinegar, acids, spices, tea, coffee, tobacco and alcohol. Ex- 
cessive meat-eating generates a poison in the blood that reaches 
the throat in its circulation. 

Inhaling through the mouth is the most injurious of all 
habits. It is always better to breathe in through the nose. 
The outgoing breath does not affect the vocal cords. Mouth - 
inhaiation bringgT dust and germs to the throat, and also chills 
its walls ; these combined influences often introducing con- 
tagion into the system. 

The larger the lung capacity becomes, the more readily the 
vocal cords will responTTo^any method of improving them. 
Therefore, deep breathing daily is necessary to voice develop- 



WINNING AND LOSING 279 

merit. This may be done without interfering with other duties. 
You must breathe all day long, and it takes no more time to 
breathe deeply than in the usual shallow manner. 



"THE PURE VOICE " 

If you have absorbed the lesson next preceding this, you may 
go on with the work of securing a vocal quality that is called 
pure. In so doing, you drive out all the accumulated roughness 
and crudeness of years of growth. Just think of the value of a 
musical instrument, the notes of which are clear, sweet, rich 
and pure. Listen to the piano that sounds like an " old tin 
pan " and compare it with the new piano every tone of which 
pleases because of its mechanical purity. 

A simple exercise will bring vast results. 

Learn what the vowel " ah " is and how and where it is made. 
We have been told that it is the most open of all sounds. This 
really means that it can be readily made the most open. In 
fact, it is possible to make it with the lips almost closed. It 
is possible to make it on the front of the mouth, at the lips, 
on the tongue or in the throat. 

If you make it on the lips, your voice will not improve, for 
lip sounds are never pleasing. The vocal cords are in the 
throat, in what seems to be the bottom of the throat-well. 
Imagine the throat to be a deep well, and that you are to 
produce the sound from the lowest part of that well. Open 
the mouth at the lips, at the tongue, in the middle, at the back 
of the palate, and deep down in the throat. Then say " ah." 

The latest and most approved method of voice production 
is that which starts the tone in the deep throat and projects it 
at the front upper teeth. This quickly leads to purity and 
clearness. The process is as follows, and, if duly employed, the 
results will soon be marvellous : 

1. Utter the sound " ah " in the manner just stated, and try 
to make it as clear as possible. Think of the place of origin 
which is always at the bottom of the throat-well, and at the 
same time think of the point of attack which is at the front 
upper teeth. Keep these two locations always in mind. 
Never release your attention from them. 

2. Having mastered the two points as just stated, and having 



280 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

made yourself capable of executing the tone as required, try 
to prolong the sound of " ah " for five seconds. In doing this, 
depend on the expert acuteness of your ear ; for your ear will 
tell you what character of tone your voice is producing. Your 
ear is to be your mentor, your guide, your dictator ; and you 
must encourage its good work. 

3. Listen to the tone you are producing. Is it getting 
clearer ? If so, then prolong it for ten seconds by your watch. 

4. Then prolong it for fifteen seconds. 

5. Then for twenty seconds ; and so keep on, adding five 
seconds at a time until you are able to prolong a good tone for 
sixty seconds in one breath. 

6. When you rest, start over again with five seconds. Never, 
after a rest, try to see how long you can maintain a tone, 
always begin with five, then let the breath out, inhale, and go 
to ten seconds, and so continue. The real progress comes in the 
habit of beginning over with five seconds. It would be a waste 
of time, or nearly so, to try to go a long period, say twenty or 
more seconds, at the start. Build up, five seconds at a time, 
and progress will be rapid. 

7. The ear is to detect the growing purity of the voice. That 
will soon find improvement, and then it must insist on the 
continued bettering of the tone until it rings true and clear 
as a flute note. 

The pure voice in a man is a resonant, clear, beautiful tone, 
suited to the manliness of the individual ; while in a woman it 
is free from any of the blemishes that mar a perfect voice. It is 
not confined to one part of the vocal range, but sustains the 
same quality in each and all of the pitches. It is sometimes at- 
tained, and very speedily, by the process of elimination. This 
means to first get rid of the throaty character by learning to 
open the throat to its full capacity, thus allowing the tones to 
come through to the front upper palate. Another fault to be 
eliminated is that of unvocalized air passing through the mouth 
mixed with the tones. This occurs in both speaking and sing- 
ing, and is called partial aspiration. The ear can detect it and 
lead to its disappearance. The nasal twang can be likewise 
overcome. 



LESSON FIFTY-ONE 

ROUNDING THE FLAT VOICE 

A VERY LITTLE CHANGE determines the difference 
between the good and the bad, and often turns a losing 
existence into a winning one. People who are com- 
pelled to get their living by their voices, and who find them- 
selves failures in all their efforts to make progress towards 
success, are sometimes turned around and made to face in 
an opposite direction ; and what was repellent becomes 
attractive. Flat voices under all circumstances are repellent ; 
round ones are always attractive. The reason lies deep in 
the meanings of Nature. Flat voices express dislike, hatred, 
disapproval, suspicion and irritability, with many kindred 
moods. You can readily see that such voices are not likely 
to win friends, sell goods, secure contracts, or draw victories 
out of efforts at any form of speaking. 

" THE FLAT VOICE " 

Few persons realize that the voice is either round or flat. 

As the voice is produced by the vocal cords which are 
located in the throat, the character of the tone must of necessity 
depend on the shape of the chamber through which it is 
compelled to pass ; the throat giving that shape just as the 
musical instrument determines the character of the sound 
that is developed in it. A trombone emits a tone quite different 
from the cornet or the flute. 

By changing the shape of the throat and mouth, a nasal effect 
is produced that often causes laughter or ridicule. By other 
shapes the throat is made to give out a guttural growl which 
disagreeable men are too often guilty of ; or hard, distressingly 
crude tones that repel. Yet these same throats may be so 
shaped that in time their sounds will be pleasing and even 

beautiful. 

381 



282 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The two great divisions of the shapes of the throat are : 

1. The flat. 

2. The round. 

Every time you swallow, you assume a flat throat ; and, as 
you swallow hundreds of times a day, you are constantly train- 
ing the throat to take on its flat shape. Habits are the great 
master of the voice. Nature employs the same throat for eating 
as it does for singing. The act of eating is more important 
than that of singing ; but persons who live to eat, instead of 
eating to live, lose much of the real pleasure of existence. 

In swallowing food, it is necessary that the throat shut it 
off tightly and send -it down to the stomach by a slightly 
convulsive action which produces the flat shape at the location 
of the vocal cords. It is this bad shape that all singers and 
most speakers of ability train themselves to overcome. It 
is very easily changed to the proper condition with a little 
practice. 

" PRACTICE ! PRACTICE ! " 

It is not necessary to practise much. 

Nature sets things right very quickly. Habits take a long 
time to make them wrong. It is knowing how that counts. 

One minute a day will keep the voice in fine shape after once 
you get it so. But do not be ashamed to practise. All great 
singers look after their diet, their daily habits of living, and 
their little tests of vocal condition. 

No great orator ever became great unless he practised. 
Most of them discovered instinctively the need and the way of 
practising. Demosthenes probably invented his own scheme, 
but history is very clear on the point that he did spend time 
in making his voice right. The same fact is shown in other 
biographies, Patrick Henry made use of every empty school- 
house he could find ; and Daniel Webster, by the testimony 
of Edward Everett and others, built up his voice by practice. 
All the great men of this art of speaking have been willing and 
glad of the opportunity to practise. It is the little men 
who are above it. 

Hon. Roscoe Conkling had one of the richest and most 
pleasing voices we ever listened to. When he died, no one 
knew the combination to the lock on his safe. " Did he have 



ROUNDING THE FLAT VOICE 283 

any favourite word ? " asked the expert. " Yes," said a 
young man in the office, " I have often heard his voice ring 
out on the word Rome, when he was alone in this room." 
The word Rome furnished the key to the combination, and 
the safe was quickly unlocked. 

History and public as well as private biographies are full of 
incidents connected with the practice indulged in by great men 
to keep their voices in good shape. It pays. It even pays for 
the salesman and the clerk ; for improved voices mean better 
work and more effective results. A pleasing voice, even though 
quiet, draws people ; while crude, harsh, flat voices repel them. 
Add to the pleasing voice the charms of personal magnetism 
and there is no better investment in the world. 

14 ROME ! ROME ! ROME ! " 

All natural habits are good or bad. 

The drift of things, left to themselves, is to the bad. 

What is called a natural gift, is an accidental drift to the 
good ; often stimulated by ambition or earnest effort. 

Any drift can be cultivated. That which is cultivated, if it 
coincide with a natural drift to the good, is as natural as if it 
had come about of itself. True art everywhere is a cultivated 
drift toward the better things ; and, the more it coincides with 
Nature, the greater is the bond of union between the cultivated 
and the natural gifts. In fact, that which is cultivated is far 
more valuable, because it outlives the accidental drift of habits. 

Between the flat voice, which is the drift to the bad, and the 
round voice, which is the voice of art and cultivation, there 
is as much difference as between a golden-toned piano and an 
old tin box. People who meet those they seek to impress have 
enough instinct to drop the flat voice and assume the round 
tones in part although in small part. This proves that effort 
is able to control the character of the voice even among persons 
who lack all desire for culture. What has been called the 
" Sunday voice " in a preceding lesson, is an example of what 
instinct may accomplish. The woman who would employ the 
flat voice that her family hears constantly to a visitor for 
whom she had great regard, would utterly fail in making 
herself pleasing. She would repel. 
Women often wonder why the men who attracted them before 



284 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

marriage are so quickly tiresome after the honeymoon is over. 
Wives maintain their " Sunday voices " for a longer period after 
marriage than men do theirs ; but it is all over sooner or later, 
and the dreadful commonplaces fill all their hours together. 
Once in after years the husband has the old kindness in his 
manner and tones, and the wife says : " Harry, your voice 
sounds now as it used to sound when we were engaged." 

Why go through life with a flat voice ? 

While habit and special effort will make it partly round at 
times, art alone can fill out the full quality. Short cuts in 
art are as good as long and expensive journeys. 

The quickest way of reaching the round voice is to practise 
with the word so constantly used by Conkling : " Rome ! 
Rome ! Rome ! " Not he alone, but many others have 
employed the same word. It was the favourite tone of David 
Garrick, the greatest actor of his day. 

" MAKING RAPID PROGRESS " 

It is possible to do a right thing wrong. 

Any person can speak the word " Rome " with a flat throat. 
But it is such a word as will respond more quickly to the 
attention of the mind than any other that can be found. 

The mind and the ear should be combined ; or, in other words, 
the mind should give constant attention to the ear, so that the 
latter may note the right utterances. The^yoice is ready at 
all times to obey the ear and mind, if both work together. 

Of course a round tone is maHe by a round throat. But there 
is no necessity of going through a long period of practice to 
learn how to make the throat round. A " yawn " will do it 
at once, if a person is able to yawn or imitate the action of 
yawning. The process consists in lowering the " Adam's 
apple," or vocal box of the throat, which always goes way down 
during the yawn, and rises way up during the swallow. 

Yawning is not a good habit to establish, but all singing 
artists have been compelled to use it to start with ; then, when 
once the open throat is secured, the muscles will repeat it 
afterwards as desired. If you have ever noticed any great 
singer, you will at once recall the position of the throat. 

Any sound of " " will tend to make the throat round in 
shape. Any liquid word containing " O " will do likewise. 



ROUNDING THE FLAT VOICE 285 

" Lo " is a liquid word. So is " Mow." So is " No." So is 
" Ro." So are words made of these consonants : as " More," 
" Roar," " Lower," and others. Words containing " M " and 
" N " tend to free the voice from the offensive twang called 
the nasal defect, " R " tends to make the tongue flexible as 
it is a tongue consonant of the liquid kind. Hence there is no 
word quite as good as " Rome " for practice. The word 
" Roll " is used a great deal by actors and singers and orators 
in their private practice which they carry on in their room ; 
but it lacks the resonant value of " Rome." 

It does no real good to utter the word " Rome " without the 
aid of the ear and the attention of the mind. The latter should 
make sure that the throat is in the open position, as its first 
duty, and that the sound is pure and round ; while the ear 
should note the various kinds of tone-characters produced, and 
select that which is most pleasing. Friends often meet for 
practice and mutual criticism, and as this is the most important 
culture in human life, it should be given first place over all 
other duties. 

Like a beautiful flower garden that is capable of bearing 
exquisite gems if kept in a condition of culture, but that goes 
to rank weeds when left to itself, the voice responds to careful 
attention or drifting neglect, being the agent of the mind, the 
heart and the soul in their communication with humanity. 

"THE UGLY FLAT TONES " 

A badly shaped musical instrument will emit badly formed 
and unpleasing tones. A flat throat is badly shaped for song 
and speech. It is the result of natural drift. A bad disposition 
accentuates the flat voice. In fact, humanity, like the canine 
species, is disposed to growl at things it does not like. You 
are so used to hearing the growl and snap, in various degrees, 
that you pay little attention to them, although they instinc- 
tively repel you when you are able to get away from them. 

If you are a clerk or employee, you would prefer to work for 
a man who has a kindly voice rather than for one who closes 
his throat into a guttural tone. If you have read the story of 
" Christmas Carol," by Dickens, you will recall the kind of man 
Scrooge was, as therein depicted. Dickens, himself, when 
giving public readings, used the flat voice in very close form 



286 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

for the character of Scrooge, until the change had come over 
the tight-fisted man ; then the kindly tones fell from a beauti- 
fully rounded voice. 

We have had many reports from gramophone records of the 
utterances of men and women whose dispositions have not 
been pleasant, and who have therefore developed the flat voice 
in excess, which means that the throat comes closer together 
in the act of speaking. These tones are very near to the 
growl of a dog, which is made with a flat shape of the throat. 

If you can speak as many persons about you speak, and will 
take the trouble to reproduce their tones, you can carry them 
into the growl without much change of throat. 

When people disapprove of some act of their fellow-beings, 
the throats are closed flat, and the tongue was made flat also, 
thus throwing forth the tones of dislike, the same as the cat 
does when it is in an ugly mood. The growl of the dog and 
the hissing of the cat, are both made with flat throats, and 
evince a hateful disposition at the time. 

In art, the hiss in a tone is called aspiration, and the growl 
is called guttural. You will hear them both, in one degree or 
another, all about you. For purposes of imitation, they may 
be learned and used ; for they will help you to avoid them if 
you are able to make them and drop them when you like. 

But it is a good rule to never misuse the voice ; always keep 
it in its pure qualities ; and let the ear determine tlio presence 
of defects. In cultivated voices for singing, the teacher first 
uses his ear to detect faults ; then tells the pupils to keep 
alert in the same manner so that they instantly recognize and 
avoid them. 



LESSON FIFTY-TWO 

MAGNETIC MODULATION 

HERE WE COME to what is considered the most 
beautiful and at the same time the most effective use 
of the speaking voice. In song the beauty and power 
depend on the variation of notes in the musical scale, com- 
bined with arrangements of time, force and other qualities, all 
of which are useful in the speaking tones as well. Every 
departure from a monotonous tendency in speech is a relief 
to the listener ; and when the changes suit the meanings of the 
thoughts, the effect is more than doubly attractive. 

" MEANING OF MODULATION " 

The word modulation in speech means variation in pitch, 
although it may be made to include change of force and time 
in utterance. 

But the chief and important meaning of modulation is 
variation in the pitch of the voice. 

Most persons who try to give an off-hand definition of pitch 
call it force. It has no relation to loudness or softness, or any 
of the uses of force, but applies wholly to range of voice, up or 
down, in the musical scale. Thus a tenor has a high pitch 
voice ; and if he converses in the same general part of the scale 
that he uses in singing, he will talk in a high pitch. The bass 
singer generally talks in a low pitch. Those who sing in the 
middle part of the vocal range, or scale, talk in the middle 
pitch. It is proper to say that you pitch the voice high or low ; 
but it is not proper to say that you pitch it loud or soft. In 
the roof of a house the pitch is the declivity or steepness, not 
the strength. 



288 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

11 TIRESOME VOICES' 1 

Nature gave to every man and woman a two-octave speaking 
range, and even greater range than this can be cultivated, and 
is cultivated year after year by thousands. Yet most men and 
women use in conversation only a small part of one octave, and 
generally only one note. There are millions of one-note talkers 
in the world, and they wonder why they are not attractive in 
business or socially. 

Even a beautiful voice that is used on one note, or on only a 
few, will tire. The human brain will not long endure peace- 
fully the constant hammering at one kind of sound. The 
nerves rebel. 

If you have a fine piano and strike one key all the time, how 
long will your neighbour put up with it ? One refrain has 
diiven people crazy. Not long ago a man rushed out of a house 
with a smoking revolver having killed a girl whfr was playing 
a few bars of a strain that she had caught and sought to fix. 
No mind is wholly sane and sound, and it is not difficult to 
make it lose its self-control. Nature steps in and relieves the 
brain from monotony by sleep in a majority of cases ; and this 
accounts for the ease with which monotonous preachers will 
put a congregation into a state of slumber or close to it. But 
what can be said of the calling of the man who will thus fail 
in his great work ? 

All about you are one-note speakers, or one-note talkers, and 
they are failures. We have rescued many of them in the 
past twenty-five years, and we hope that these lessons will 
rescue thousands more. The human voice has the greatest 
opportunity of all the faculties, and is the most used, but the 
worst used. 

One note is the climax of monotony ; but even two notes will 
not give relief; nor will three or four. If Nature provided 
fifteen or more, let them all be developed into actual use. 
Some singers who are able to exceed this range in song, talk 
in a monotonous pitch when they converse, showing that the 
mere possession of a large range is not enough. 



MAGNETIC MODULATION 289 

"RANGE OF VOICE" 

The term Range of Voice is well understood to refer to the 
compass or extent of pitch. This by some authors is divided 
into registers, and called the Upper, Middle and Lower. 

The Upper register is said to embrace the highest third of the 
vocal compass of a thoroughly developed voice. 

The Middle register embraces the middle third. 

The Lower register the lower third. 

The highest third, sometimes called the head register, in- 
discriminately, is best represented by the vowel sound of E, as 
in the word meet. 

The middle third, sometimes called the throat register, is 
best represented by the vowel sound of Ah, as A in father. 

The lowest third, sometimes called the chest register, is best 
represented by the vowel sound of 0, as in roll. 

These divisjpns may be mental ones, at least, and will some- 
what assist the pupil in practice. 

The development of pitch is absolutely necessary to the 
singer, and to the reader or orator it is an exceedingly valuable 
acquisition. Many singing voices are developed by the exercise 
of this book, yet nothing of the technique of music is here 
attempted. A person may be ignorant of music and remain 
so, yet understand, perform and master all these exercises. 
For speaking and reading it is not necessary to preserve 
minute distinctions of pitch or be musically exact. 

"DEGREES OF PITCH " 

Voices limited in range will not be able to make the divisions 
given in this exercise ; but persistent practice will soon show 
great improvement. Those who understand music may make 
the nine pitches one whole note apart, if their vocal range admits 
of it, or a half note apart, if very limited in compass ; or a note 
and a half apart if the range is comparatively extensive ; or 
two whole notes apart, if possible. 

Rule. Arrange the pitches so that their range, from the very 
highest to the very lowest degrees, may be a little greater than 
the ability of the voice to produce, and then work to produce 
them perfectly. 

19 



290 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

THE NINE DEGREES OF PITCH 

No. Description. Expressional meaning. 

9 Extremely high Very excited. 

8 Very high. Excited. 

7 High. Enthusiastic. 

6 Bather high. Bather serious. 

5 Middle. Calm. 

4 Bather low. Bather enthusiastic. 

3 Low. Serious. 

2 Very low. Very serious. 

1 Extremely low. Profound. 

"MEANING OF PITCH " 

Every part of the vocal range has a meaning of its own, 
as will be seen in the following : 

QUOTATIONS FOR PRACTICE IN THE NINE DEGREES OF PITCH 

No. Description. Quotation. 

9 Extremely high. " I repeat it, sir, let it come, let it 

come." 

8 Very high. " Three millions of people armed in 

the holy cause of liberty ! " 

7 High. " The sounding aisles of the dim 

woods rang." 

6 Bather high. " With music I come from my 

balmy home." 

5 Middle. " A vision of beauty appeared on 

the clouds." 

4 Bather low. " Friends, Bomans, countrymen ! " 

3 Low. " And this is in the night, most 

glorious night ! " 

2 Very low. " Boll on, thou deep and dark blue 

ocean, roll ! " 

1 Extremely low. " Eternity ! Thou pleasing, dread- 
ful thought ! " 

An extra No. 9 pitch may be made by crying " Boat ahoy ! " 
holding the last syllable as long as can be done easily, as " Boat 
aho y ! " 



MAGNETIC MODULATION 291 

An extra No. 1 pitch may be made by pronouncing the word 
" Swear " in a deep, sepulchral tone, as described in the next 
exercise. 

Incessant practice in the quotations will accomplish more in 
cultivating a wide and extended range than would seem 
possible. The Rule must be observed strictly. 

" HOW TO PRACTISE " 

Some years ago a prominent man came to us, having been 
sent by a famous teacher of singing ; the purpose being to 
extend his range of voice. He could sing in about an octave 
and a half, and the teacher had exhausted every method to 
increase his range. 

At the same time a politician came to us who had almost 
no range at all ; his voice being pitched on the note above 
the middle, and remaining there during his entire efforts at 
speaking. 

To both these applicants for lessons, we gave the following 
rules of practice. The singer in the course of time acquired a 
full octave beyond that which he possessed when he began 
the exercises in range that are given here. The politician 
acquired a two-octave range, and was constantly re-elected for 
sixteen years. He connected himself with our institution as 
a result of his interest in the good work being done. 

The practice consists in speaking, not in singing, each quota- 
tion of the table in the preceding lesson. 

Begin with the middle, or fifth quotation. Say the words, 
" A vision of beauty appeared on the clouds," in the easiest 
pitch in which you can speak, and make it conversational in 
style. Say this a number of times, always aloud, but not 
loudly. 

If you have a piano or musical instrument nearby, find how 
many notes you have in your voice, and speak the above 
quotation in the note that is about midway between the 
highest and the lowest. 

Then speak the next quotation below the fifth, which will be 
as follows: " Friends, Romans, countrymen!" This should 
be given in a rather serious vein, and the pitch should be 
close to the middle, but not quite up to it. Follow with the 
next quotation, " And this is in the night, most glorious night ! " 



292 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

giving the words in a pitch lower than the fourth. Then 
proceed to the lowest pitches in turn. After this, repeat the 
fifth, " A vision of beauty appeared on the clouds," in the 
middle part of your range, and then take the sixth, and so on 
up to the top or last one, which is the ninth. 

It is first necessary to establish the nine degrees of range, 
then to extend them gradually as practice gives you great 
security in the production of them. 

" THE LOW NOTES " 

The higher the pitch rises, the more vibrations there are in a 
second of time. These occur at the vocal cords. The lower 
the voice descends, the fewer are the vibrations. These relieve 
the ear and brain of the listener ; for which reason the magnetic 
tones are more often effective in the low notes than in the high 
ones. 

After acquiring the number one pitch of the table of range 
as given in these lessons, try to drop below that by speaking 
the word " oh " and then the word " swear " in a still lower 
note. These words suit the effort. Imagine the throat to be 
a very deep well, and in that well utter the word " awe " very 
solemnly a number of times, trying to get it lower each time. 
All three words help, but some voices respond better to one 
word than to another. 

THE CONVENIENT Low NOTE 

In the low register of the voice there are some notes that 
are weak, especially the extremely low ones. 

Constant practice on the lowest note of the voice that can be 
made easily will soon result in the next note below it acquiring 
strength and fulness by sympathy, owing to its proximity to 
the note that is being used so much. 

The note next below, then, will be the " convenient low note.'* 
This should receive the attention of the student just as soon as 
it is full and strong. Remember to wait until the fulness has 
come to it through sympathy, not to force it. 

When the new " convenient low note " has been practised for 
months as its predecessor was, it in turn, by sympathy, will 
cause strength and fulness to creep into the note next below, 
and so on down the scale the voice will extend itself in range. 



LESSON FIFTY-THREE 

MODULATING MOVEMENTS 

EVERY VARIATION in the voice, whether in con- 
versation or address, is a relief to the ear nerves 
and brain nerves of the listeners ; but when the varia- 
tion expresses the meaning of the thought or the feeling 
behind it, the effect is more than doubly pleasing and attractive. 
Few persons know these facts ; and we have never known a 
man or woman who came by this practice naturally or as a 
habit. Like accomplished singing, it is one of those things that 
must be taught as a form of culture, producing in speaking 
and in conversation what is known as the cultivated voice. 
The attractive voice must be : 

1. Natural. 

2. Modulated. 

3. Flexible. 

Commonplace thoughts should not be declaimed nor rendered 
in a bombastic style. When your thoughts, whether of your 
own composition or coming from other sources, are common- 
place, the natural style is conversational. 

Very often lofty thoughts are clothed in simple forms, and 
rare beauty dwells in ordinary words. We here give an example 
of this complex composition ; but nevertheless it is much more 
effective and carries the impression of naturalness if rendered 
in a purely conversational tone ; just as if you were in the same 
studio with the artist trying to describe your mother to him. 

" Oh, if I could only make you see 

The clear blue eyes, the tender smile, 

The sovereign sweetness, the gentle grace, 
The woman's soul, and the angel's face 

That are beaming on me all the while ! 
I need not speak these foolish words : 

Yet one word tells you all I would say : 

She is my mother/' 
393 



294 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Commonplace thoughts may be lofty, like the foregoing ; and 
as such they may be given the dignity and value they demand, 
even in ordinary conversation. In an address or recital, speech 
or reading, this natural style is most agreeable and pleasing. 

But it should be coloured with true feeling. 

A modulated voice is one in which there is a constant de- 
parture from a monotonous pitch, or avoiding too much close- 
ness to one of the pitches as scheduled in the preceding lesson. 
The table of the Nine Pitches furnishes the working material 
for an immense amount of practice and development in many 
departments of vocal training ; therefore it should be not only 
well memorized but kept at hand ready for use whenever called 
upon for service. 

Everybody knows, either through experience or instruction, 
the havoc that is wrought upon the nerves of listeners through 
the lack of modulation in conversation or speech. A trained 
voice is not only able to produce the needed variations, but 
knows how to make them coincide with the meanings in the 
thoughts and in the feelings. Wonderful as the voice is, the 
power of expressing meanings in the movements of pitch is still 
more wonderful. These meanings may be summed up as 
follows : 

UPWARD MOVEMENTS 

1. Thoughts or feelings that tend towards uncontrol move 
upward. 

2. All forms of excited interest tend upward. 

3. Tendencies to lightness or frivolity tend upward. 

4. Sympathy, gentleness, tenderness and similar moods move 
upward. 

5. Beauty, exaltation and triumph move upward. 

6. Inquiry, doubt and insincerity move upward. 

7 . Weakness moves upward, including servility and obedience. 
The Sound of the voice, as well as the vibration, deter- 
mines the character of the thought or feeling. 

DOWNWARD MOVEMENTS. The following take down- 
ward modulations : 

1. Decision, strength, command, conclusion. 

2. Discouragement, surrender, and similar moods. 



MODULATING MOVEMENTS 295 

3. Sublimity of statement. 

4. Disobedience and surly moods. 

5. Reply and certainty of assertion. 

6. Self-control. 

7. Weighty and serious thoughts. 

8. Superiority. 

In the natural use of the voice all modulating movements 
undulate, which means that, instead of a steady rise or fall, they 
rise and fall back and forth on an upward movement, and 
fall and rise back and forth on a downward movement. This 
fact would have been discovered by any person in practising. 

The following is an upward modulating movement : 

" He that formed the eye shall He not see ? " 

Begin at any part of the scale of Nine Pitches which may be 
found in the preceding lesson, and rise naturally in the inquiry. 
Repeat until this movement is easily made. 

Here are two quotations from Hamlet : 

" Hold you the watch to-night ? " 

" Armed, say you ? " 

Other quotations that exemplify the laws for upward 
movements are as follows : 

" Dear master, I can go no further/' 

" Insects generally must lead a truly jovial life." 

" This our life, exempt from public haunt," 

" Finds tongues in trees," 

" Books in the running brooks," 

" Sermons in stones." 

" And good in everything." 

The first of this group depicts weakness ; the last six depict 
beauty ; and all require a general modulation upwards, not in 
steady rises but in undulations. 

The next group requires falling modulations : 

" Stop, I command you." 

" Life is a shadowy, momentary dream." 

" The dizzy train reels as it swoops down the mountain." 

" Conscience does make cowards of us all." 

It is not at all difficult to find quotations that meet the 
requirements set forth in the early part of this lesson ; and 
it is a very excellent mental exercise for the student to do this, 
as the practice will cultivate discernment. 



296 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

One of the best examples of an undulating, modulating move- 
ment is the following quotation from a speech of Patrick Henry; 
and accounts of his style made by witnesses who were present 
agree that he used his voice very much in the following manner : 

" Shall we acquire the means of effectual resistance by lying 
supinely on our backs and hugging the delusive phantom of 
hope until our enemies shall have bound us hand and foot ? " 

The quotation contains four divisions. 

Each division is a movement upward in the following 
manner approximately : 

" Shall we acquire the means of effectual resistance/* start- 
ing in the lowest pitches and gradually rising for about three 
or four pitches. 

" By lying supinely on our backs," starting about the third 
pitch and moving upward for three or four pitches. 

" And hugging the delusive phantom of hope/' starting about 
the fourth pitch and moving upward for three or four pitches. 

" Until our enemies shall have bound us hand and foot/ 'start- 
ing at about the middle or sixth pitch, and moving upward as 
high as the voice will run. Having practised these movements 
many times, the final process is to blend the whole quotation 
as one piece of dramatic inquiry. 

Double movements are very pleasing, and can be selected 
freely by any student, Here is one from Richelieu : 

" I have re-created France." 

The words, " I have re-created," are given a decided upward 
action, and the word " France " falls. This is a double move- 
ment. 

Perfect freedom of choice is allowed any student in making 
these modulating movements, provided their meanings are sus- 
tained under the laws stated in the early part of this lesson. 

FLEXIBILITY consists of mental colouring and of magnetic 
colouring. It impacts to the voice an inexhaustible richness 
and a most exquisite beauty. 



LESSON FIFTY-FOUR 

MAGNETIC COLOURS OF VOICE 

PERHAPS THE MOST DELIGHTFUL and at the 
same time the most satisfying of all studies in voice, 
whether for conversation, reading or speaking, is 
that which deals with the effort to develop changing colours 
in the tones, and to recognize them as they appear. When 
one tone differs from another, there is magnetism in it ; when 
you yourself can recognize the fact that one tone differs from 
another, then you are conscious of the presence of magnetism ; 
for no voice, except one that is magnetic is able to make its 
tones change their colour. 

"TONE COLOUR " 

In more than ninety-nine per cent of all people, the great 
defects of voice are : 

1. Monotony of pitch. 

2. Flatness of tone. 

3. Lack of flexibility. 

4. Absence of colour. 

Even a beautiful voice may be uninteresting after a few 
utterances. 

Colour of tone is the presence of feeling in the tone. 

Persons are often unable to give expression to their real 
feelings from lack of colour-development in the voice. For in* 
stance, a voice that has never been employed, except to express 
the merest commonplaces of life, would find it impossible to 
put any other colour into the nobler or more beautiful thoughts, 
unless a systematic course of practice, like that given in these 
lessons, should be adopted. 

Without colour all expression is mechanical and artificial. It 
is art without nature. Yet by the rules of art we can dive 
down into the hidden recesses of Nature, and bring to the 



298 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

surface her most precious secrets ; then, by practice, adopt 
and wear them as our own, for they are ours by heritage. 

Our purpose is to provide a series of exercises for acquiring 
all the colours of the voice, by special practice, until they 
become natural. 

Having said this much, we now invite the student to commence 
the most fascinating practice known in the art of expression. 
It is well to keep a record of the number of times each colour is 
repeated, for all practice counts something, even if but once 
a week or month. It is only after repeated trials that the ear 
begins to recognize the real colour ; it may not be until after 
hundreds of repetitions that the colour will be recognized ; but 
when it comes, as come it surely will, a delicious feeling of 
pleasurable satisfaction is experienced. 

While these lessons are not intended to include instruction in 
singing, hundreds of singers with colourless voices have applied 
for them during the last twenty-five years and have been 
greatly benefited by them. 

All persons who speak, read, converse, or sing should develop 
tone colour. 

"TONE COLOUR EXERCISES " 

The feelings are many, and their colours should be made to 
harmonize with them. The greater number of colours you 
acquire, the more magnetic will be your voice. 

Some colours are easily developed. They happen to coincide 
with your common moods. Others must be brought into your 
voice by placing your mind and feelings in the realm of exist- 
ence that the thought seems to describe or indicate. Make 
no two colours alike. 

(Only the words in quotation marks are to be coloured. 
Colours that seem alike are quite different.) 

1st Colour. Mild Determination. Colour words : Impossible ; 
cannot. 

" It is impossible, I cannot." 

2nd Colour. Strong Decision. Negative. Colour word : Not. 
" I will not." 

3rd Colour. Strong Decision. Affirmative. Colour words : 
Will; bond. 

" I will have my bond." 



MAGNETIC COLOURS OF VOICE 299 

4th Colour. Surprise. Colour words : Gone ; married. 
" Gone ! to be married ! " 

5th Colour. Wonder. Colour word : Wonderful. 
" Oh, a wonderful stream is the River Time ! " 

6th Colour. Amazement. Colour words : There ; look ; 
steals. 

" Why, look you there ! look, how it steals away 1 " 

7th Colour. Beauty. Colour words : Heaven ; thick ; 
patines ; bright gold. 

" Look, how the floor of heaven is thick inlaid with patines 
of bright gold." 

8th Colour. Grandeur. All the words are equally coloured. 
" Roll on, thou deep and dark blue ocean, roll." 

9th Colour. Pride. Colour words : Inch ; king. 
" Ay, every inch a king." 

10th Colour. Arrogance. Colour words : Like ; myself. 

" I have no brother, I am like no brother, I am myself 
alone." 

llth Colour. Defiance. Colour word : Defied. 
" I tell thee, thou'rt defied." 

12th Colour. Dignity, Grave. Colour words : God ; come. 
" Sir, before God, I believe the hour has come ! " 

13th Colour. Dignity, Earnest. Colour words : This; self; 
true ; any. 

" This, above all, to thine own self be true, and it must follow 
as the night the day, thou canst not then be false to any man." 

The foregoing sentiment builds a very magnetic voice. 

14th Colour. Courage. Colour words : Free ; host ; 
liberty ; man. 

" Now, my brave lads, now are we free indeed ! I have a 
whole host in this single arm. Death or liberty ! We shall 
not leave a man of them alive ! " 

15th Colour. Affection. Colour words : Wear ; core ; 
heart ; thee. 

" Give me that man that is not passion's slave, and I will wear 
him in my heart's core, ay, in my heart of hearts, as I do thee." 

16th Colour. Greeting to a Friend. Colour words : Glad ; 
twenty ; years. 

" Well, Tom, I'm right glad to see you ! It's twenty years 
since last we met." 



300 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

17th Colour. Greeting to Country. Colour words : Crags ; 
peaks ; again ; you ; still. 

" Ye crags and peaks, I'm with you once again. 
I hold to you the hands you first beheld, 
To show they still are free." 

18th Colour. Coldness. Colour words : Unwelcome ; 
extend. 

" Sir, you are unwelcome here ! I do not wish to extend our 
acquaintance." 

19th Colour. Indignation. Colour word : Leave. 

" You may leave this house." 
20th Colour. Shame. Colour words : Shame ; blush. 

" Oh, shame ! where is thy blush ! " 
21st Colour. Anger. All the words are equally coloured. 

" What do you mean, sir ! " 

22nd Colour. Caution. Colour words : Hush ; silence, 
word ; word ; lives. 

" Hush ! Silence along the line there ! Not a word not 
a word, on peril of your lives ! " 

23rd Colour. Descriptive. Variable colours. 
" From dumb winter to spring in one wonderful hour, 
From Nevada's white wing to creation in flower, 
December at morning tossing wild in its might ; 
A June without warning, and blown roses at night." 
24th Colour. Faith. Colour words : Youth ; bright ; no. 
" In the lexicon of youth, which fate reserves for a bright 
manhood, there's no such word as fail." 

One of the greatest actors of the last generation repeated 
this 24th colour 20^00 times aloud. 

25th Colour. Longing. Colour words : Long ; better ; 
striving ; heart ; me ; alone. 

" I have another life I long to meet, 
Without which life my life is incomplete. 
O better self, like me, art thou astray, 
Striving with all thy heart to find the way 
To mine ; seeking, like me, to find the breast 
On which, alone, can weary heart find rest." 
26th Colour. Hope. Colour words : Hope ; angels ; away. 
" Ah, well 1 for us all some sweet hope lies, 
Deeply buried from human eyes ; 



MAGNETIC COLOURS OF VOICE 301 

And, in the hereafter, angels may 
Roll the stone from its grave away." 

27th Colour. Solemnity. Colour word : Eternal. 
" Oh, thou eternal one ! " 

28th Colour. Dark Intensity. All the words are equally 
coloured. 

" Thou sure and firm-set earth, hear not my steps which 
way they walk." 

29th Colour. Sublimity. 

" But thou, most awful form, risest from forth thy silent 
sea of pines, how silently ! Around thee, and above, deep is 
the air, and dark, substantial, black an ebon mass. . . . 
But when I look again it is thine own calm home, thy crystal 
shrine, thy habitation from eternity/' 

30th Colour. Contempt. Colour words : Loathe ; scorn ; 
taunt ; fight. 

" I loathe you in my bosom, I scorn you with mine eye ! 
And I'll taunt you with my latest breath, and fight you 
till I die." 

31st Colour. Threatening. Colour words : Pray ; remorse, 
accumulate. 

" If thou dost slander her, and torture me, never pray more ; 
abandon all remorse ; on horror's head horrors accumulate ! " 

32nd Colour. Hate. Colour words : Hence ; Satan ; 
behind ; go ; hate ; despise. 

" Hence ! from my sight ! Thou Satan, get behind me ! 
Go from my sight ! I hate and despise thee ! " 

There are a few other colours such as a tragedian would use 
on the stage, but they are not suited to this work. 

Charles Dickens, in his readings, employed all thirty-two 
colours which are given in these lessons. 

When once a colour is developed in the voice, it never leaves 
it, but flows naturally with the tones at all times. This 
makes the voice natural and never artificial. 

It can be seen at once that such a voice can never become 
monotonous or repellent. 



LESSON FIFTY-FIVE 

VOCAL QUALITIES 

FEW PERSONS KNOW what is meant by qualities of 
the voice, and still fewer persons ever make use of them. 
All conversations are carried on in the same uninterest- 
ing flat tones, which soon tire even those who employ them. 
We now approach the study of those tones that reflect the real 
soul and character behind them. The mouth and throat are 
given the power to change their shape, and thereby change 
the nature of the tones that are uttered. Earlier in these 
lessons we learned that when the upper throat is nearly closed, 
the tones are flat and guttural ; that when the lower throat 
is partly closed, the tones are threatening and pectoral. 

Singers are taught to impinge their voices against the front 
upper palate of the mouth, and at this place the tones are 
bright and beautiful. For speaking and conversing, the tones 
may be forward in the position just stated ; or the voice may 
be impinged against the middle of the palate, in which case 
a different effect is produced ; and if impinged against the 
soft palate, the dark or gloomy quality is made. 

Then when the upper throat is open and round, another 
timbre follows ; but when the lower throat is open and round, 
still another effect is produced. And so on through the entire 
list of changes in the voice that reflect the soul or the character 
of the speaker. 

All these varieties of voice are known as TIMBRE 
QUALITIES. 

As you open this lesson you ask if there can be anything 
more to be learned about the voice. But you will agree, ere 
long, that this faculty of speech is most wonderful, most 
amazing in its powers. 

The end has not yet been reached. 

Colour is a great thing ; but no musical instrument can of 

30* 



VOCAL QUALITIES 303 

itself produce colour ; although the players are able to do so 
to some extent. 

But the church organ is able to produce timbre qualities. 
You have heard it almost sing in the beauty and ecstasy of 
its tones ; then suddenly change to the heavy roll of majesty ; 
or again produce the liquid notes of birds at early morning ; 
and so on, through a multitude of qualities that are summoned 
by the manipulation of the many stops. The organ has 
timbre qualities, but lacks tone colour. 

The true character or inner life of a person shows itself in 
the timbre that prevails in that person's voice. He who leads 
a gloomy, solemn life, will fall into the unconscious habit of 
using the dark form, and generally a low pitch. If his gloom 
is mingled with sorrow or suffering, the pitch is higher, and 
there is a mixture of the laryngeal timbre in the voice. 

Although the dark form is perfectly natural, and is given to 
the world in fact by the world's great mother, yet everybody 
does not possess it. It is easily acquired by practice. 

A man or woman whose life has more of happiness than of 
sorrow in it, will fall into an unconscious habit of using the 
bright form, and vice versa. 

Daniel Webster's habitual timbre quality was orotund. He 
was brought up amid the giant scenery of New Hampshire and 
the grandeur of earth impressed itself on his mind and heart. 

" TIMBRE MEANINGS " 

The BRIGHT TIMBRE means happiness, brightness, or vitality. 
It is produced by impinging the voice forward in the mouth 
so that it strikes against the hard palate near the front upper 
teeth. 

The DARK TIMBRE means gloom or solemnity. It is made 
by impinging the voice against the soft palate near the back 
of the mouth. 

The PURE TIMBRE means beauty. It is made with a round 
shape of the throat. 

The OROTUND TIMBRE means grandeur. It is made by 
enlarging the whole larynx and thereby increasing the volume 
of sound. 

The GUTTURAL TIMBRE means hatred. It is made with the 
flat shape of the throat. 



304 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The NASAL TIMBRE means scorn. It is made by lessening the 
resonance of the voice which seems as if the nose intervened. 

The ORAL TIMBRE means weakness. It is made by mouthing 
the voice, or confining the sound within the mouth with very 
little vitality. 

The LARYNGEAL TIMBRE means suffering. It is made at 
the vocal cords and has no vitality elsewhere. 

The ASPIRATE TIMBRE means something startling or secret. 
It is made by a large proportion of escaping air mixed with 
the voice. 

The WHISPER TIMBRE means extreme secrecy or startling 
importance. It is made by removing all tone from the voice, 
and using only a whisper. 

The PECTORAL TIMBRE means awe or deep malice. It is 
made by the flat shape of the lowest part of the throat. 

Just as the player of a great church organ would suit the 
stops to the character of the selections played, so any person 
in life should suit the Timbres to the uses made of the voice. 

In business conversation the Pure Timbre is the most 
attractive, and may be shaded with some slight changes in 
the Bright and Dark. 

In social conversation, the Bright, Dark, Pure, Orotund and 
Whisper are useful, but should be tempered in good taste. 

The preacher has need of the Bright, Dark, Pure, Orotund, 
Pectoral, and possibly the Whisper, which is very effective 
when rightly used. 

The lawyer in his address to the jury has need of all the 
Timbres, as has been proved in the lives of every successful 
lawyer. 

The actor needs exactly as many Timbres as the lawyer. 
Edwin Booth was past-master of Timbre tones. The difference 
between the actor and the lawyer is that the latter keeps 
more closely to the conversational Timbres except when he is 
depicting human character, while the actor has occasion to 
depart more frequently from those Timbres when he steps 
out of the merely conversational roles. 

The reciter, entertainer and imitator needs all the Timbres 
that are described in this lesson. 

The lecturer is a social converser on a large scale. 

The orator is an actor in part and needs in part of his work 



VOCAL QUALITIES 305 

all the Timbres. John B. Gough was the most wonderful 
depicter of human character of modern times ; yet, without his 
mastery of these Timbres, he would have been a mere lecturer. 
The Timbres coined for him thousands of pounds, and they did 
the same for Dickens, the reader of his own characters. 
A Timbre is the character of the tone. 
A Quality is the blend in which the Timbre is employed in 
the voice. 

We will include here those Qualities that are most useful in 
ordinary life. 

The First Quality is Bright. The Quotation is : 
" My happy heart with rapture swells." 
The Second Quality is Dark. The Quotation is : 
" Her death was sadly beautiful, and her soul was borne 
upon the perfume of earth's drooping lilies to the land of 
flowers that never fade." 

The Third Quality is Neutral. The Quotation is : 
" Though they smile in vain for what once was ours, they 
are love's last gift." 

The Fourth Quality is Half -Bright. The Quotation is : 
" The Rhine ! The Rhine ! Our own imperial river ! Be 
glory on thy track ! " 

The Fifth Quality is Half-Dark. The Quotation is : 
" One sweetly solemn thought comes to me o'er and o'er." 
All the foregoing Qualities are made in the Pure Timbre mixed 
with either Bright or Dark Timbres, except the Third which is 
neutral ; that is, without brightness or darkness. 
The Sixth Quality is Bright Orotund. The Quotation is : 
" And the spent ship, tempest driven, on reef lies rent and 
riven." 

The Seventh Quality is Half -Dark Orotund. The Quotation is: 
" Through what variety of untried being, through what new 
scenes and changes must we pass ! " 

The Eighth Quality is Dark Orotund. The Quotation is : 
" Toll ! toll ! toll ! thou bell by billows swung ! " 
The Ninth Quality is Whisper. The Quotation is : 
" Hark ! Listen ! Keep still ! Some one is coming ! " 
The Tenth Quality is Aspirate. The Quotation is : 
" Thou sure and firm-set earth, hear not my steps which way 
they walk ! " 

20 



306 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The Eleventh Quality is Bright Guttural. The Quotation is : 

" I loathe you in my bosom ! " 

The Twelfth Quality is Dark Guttural. The Quotation is : 

" To-morrow, and to-morrow, and to-morrow, creeps in this 
petty pace from day to day, to the last syllable of recorded 
time." 

The Thirteenth Quality is Pectoral. The Quotation is : 

" I am thy father's spirit, doomed for a certain term to walk 
the night." 

You can make your own colours. 

In a previous lesson you were taught to make the round voice 
and to remove its crudities. That produces the Pure Timbre. 
Such a Timbre you must have if you would have friends. So 
that much is assured, and is easy. 

To produce the Orotund Timbre, merely give greater volume 
of sound to the Pure voice. Make the throat cavity deeper 
and larger, and that is all there is to it. So the Orotund will 
be at hand in your tones very soon. 

The Bright and Dark Timbres are matters of impingement, 
which means that a forward throwing of the tones will brighten 
the voice, and a backward throwing of the voice will darken it. 

The Guttural is made by the top of the flat throat. To be 
sure, the Guttural is a flat voice and is faulty ; but hatred is a 
faulty phase of character. 

The Aspirate is a mixture of tone and whisper. It is a fault, 
but the above remarks concerning the Guttural will apply. 

The Pectoral is like the Guttural, except that it is made in 
the lower throat, while the Guttural is made in the upper throat, 
Very little practice will be needed to secure it in your voice if 
you use the quotation given. 

In fact all the quotations help very much to establish the 
Qualities. 



LESSON FIFTY-SIX 

MIXING BEAUTIFUL COLOURS 

STILL MORE BEAUTIFUL practice is to be had in the 
mixing of colours ; for much of the work is left to the 
taste and discretion of the student, and that is always 
the source of the greatest progress in anything. The kind 
of colouring that enters the voice through the qualities is 
always allied with the use of tone colouring, of which we have 
given thirty -two examples in a preceding lesson. We advise 
practising them with these qualities, so that one set of values 
may be mixed with another set. Both are wholly natural ; 
and both are the result of life activities from which art gets its 
instruction. 

All artists mix their own colours. 

You will remember the historic inquiry made of one great 
painter by a novice who asked him what he mixed his colours 
with, and the great man said, " 



You now have, or soon will have, thirteen basic qualities in 
your voice, and you have been taught how to increase the 
mental vitality of words by the use of glides ; in addition to 
which you have practised Tone Colour until you are able to put 
your feelings into every utterance and to harmonize the feelings 
of the occasion and the value of the thoughts spoken. 

You can see the great need of the modulating movements, for 
they compel your mind to wake up and summon all others to 
listen to you. You know the necessity of Tone Colour, for a 
colourless voice is as dead as the sound of a nail scraping on 
glass. You do not want to present such a voice to your friends 
and acquaintances. 

Colour may exist without the aid of Timbres ; but it will be 
weak and of poor material. Timbres are really the instruments 
through which you speak. If you had a voice like the reed 
notes of an organ, you would have beauty of tone, and tliis you 

307 



308 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

could colour ; but how much better it is to have more stops to 
manipulate. You know how depressed the organist would feel 
if he found all the grand Timbres of the organ out of use some 
Sunday morning when the church was alive with interest in 
his work. 

The great organ becomes a group of instruments when it 
employs all the Timbres which the stops bring into being. So 
your voice should be made into a group of instruments by the 
various Timbres which nature has given you for your develop- 
ment. Hide no talents under a bushel, for it is wrong to do so. 

As soon as you have built up the Timbres and have mastered 
them in the Thirteen Qualities of the preceding lesson, then you 
have secured a group of instruments, each distinctly different 
from the others. 

These are colour-mixers. 

Mixing your own colours is the grandest and the most fascinat- 
ing of all work in this world. The human voice is the sublime 
gift of the Creator to humanity, and lifts the race to the very 
pinnacle of power and supremacy. But the work of building 
its many instruments is the most satisfying and the most 
useful of all developing agencies in this realm of high art. 

Because no one has done this to your knowledge, you are of 
the belief that it is not worth doing. But some few great men 
and women have accomplished these tasks, and have made 
fortunes in so doing. 

It is a great pleasure to mix your own colours. 

You are left to your own judgment and tastes in this work. 
Look over the selections herein given, then take account of 
stock of what colours and Timbres you possess already in your 
voice, and produce the combinations which you please. Try 
different combinations on each selection. 

The first offering is one that will admit of many variations 
in colour and Timbre, but not of greatly marked degree. 
Remember that the meaning of the Pure Timbre is Beauty, and 
that the first five Qualities of the lesson devoted to them are 
made up of the Pure Timbre. 

The mixing of the Bright and Dark Timbres with the Pure 
does not take away any of the beauty of the voice effect, but 
changes the degree of brightness or vitality into a more solemn 
or gloomy form of beauty. 



MIXING BEAUTIFUL COLOURS 39 

FIRST SELECTION 



" How beautiful this night ! The balmiest sigh, 
Which vernal zephyrs breathe in evening's ear, 
Were discord to the speaking quietude 
That wraps this moveless scene. Heaven's ebon vaults 
Studded with stars unutterably bright, 
Through which the moon's unclouded grandeur rolls, 
Seems like a canopy which love has spread 
To curtain her sleeping world. Yon gentle hills, 
Robed in a garment of untrodden snow ; 
Yon darksome rocks, whence icicles depend 
So stainless, that their white and glittering spires 
Tinge not the moon's pure beam ; yon castled steep, 
Whose banner hangeth o'er the time-worn tower 
So idly, that rapt fancy deemeth it a metaphor of peace/' 



SECOND SELECTION 
" MUSIC OF THE STARS " 

" How sweet the moonlight sleeps upon this bank. 
Here we will sit and let the sound of music 
Creep in our ears ; soft stillness and the night 
Become the touches of sweet harmony. 
Sit, Jessica. Look how the heaven 
Is thick inlaid with patines of bright gold. 
There's not the smallest orb which thou behold'st 
But in his motion like an angel sings, 
Still quiring to the young-eyed cherubims ; 
Such harmony is in immortal souls ; 
But whilst this muddy vesture of decay 
Doth grossly close it in, we cannot hear it." 

" GRAND MIXED COLOURS " 

The Pure Timbre prevailed in the preceding lesson. We 
now bring the Orotund into use. Its meaning is Grandeur. 
You are to mix the colours to suit your own tastes and feelings. 



310 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 
THIRD SELECTION 

" MOUNT BLANO " 

" Hast thou a charm to stay the morning star, 
In his steep course ? So long he seems to pause 
On thy bald, awful head, sovereign Blanc ! 
The Arve and Arveiron at thy base 
Rave ceaselessly ; but thou, most awful form, 
Risest from forth thy silent sea of pines 
How silently ! Around thee and above 
Deep is the air and dark, substantial, black, 
An ebon mass. Methinks thou piercest it, 
As with a wedge ! But when I look again, 
It is thine own calm home, thy crystal shrine, 
Thy habitation from eternity ! 

dread and silent Mount ! I gazed upon thee, 
Till thou, still present to the bodily sense, 
Didst vanish from my thought. 

Entranced in prayer 

1 worshipped the invisible alone." 



FOURTH SELECTION 
" RICHELIEU " 

1 Then wakes the power which is the age of iron 
Burst forth to curb the great and raise the low. 
Mark where she stands ! Around her form I draw 
The awful circle of our solemn church ! 
Set but a foot within that holy ground, 
And on thy head yea though it wore a crown 
I'd launch the curse of Rome." 



FIFTH SELECTION 
" WEBSTER'S GREAT PERORATION " 

" When my eyes shall be turned to behold, for the last time, 
the sun in heaven, may I not see him shining on the broken and 
dishonoured fragments of a once glorious union ; on state 
dissevered, discordant, belligerent ; on a land rent with civil 



MIXING BEAUTIFUL COLOURS 3" 

feuds, or drenched, it may be, with fraternal blood ! Let their 
last feeble and lingering glance rather behold the gorgeous 
ensign of the Republic now known and honoured throughout 
the earth, still * full high advanced ' ; its arms and trophies 
streaming in their original lustre, not a stripe erased or polluted, 
nor a single star obscured ; bearing, for its motto, no such 
miserable interrogatory as c What is all this worth ? ' nor those 
other words of delusion and folly, ' Liberty first, and union 
afterwards,' but everywhere spread all over, in characters of 
living light, blazing on all its ample folds as they float over the 
sea and over the land, and in every wind under the whole heaven 
that other sentiment, dear to every true American heart 
4 Liberty and union, now and forever, one and inseparable/ " 



SIXTH SELECTION 
" SHIEL'S GREAT PERORATION " 

" Whose were the arms that drove your bayonets at Vimeiro 
through the phalanxes that never reeled in the shock of war 
before ? What desperate valour climbed the steeps and filled 
the moats at Badajos ? All his victories should have rushed and 
crowded back upon his memory, Vimeiro, Badajos, Salamanca, 
Albuera, Toulouse, and, last of all, the greatest Tell me for 
you were there. I appeal to the gallant soldier before me, from 
whose opinions I differ, but who bears, I know, a generous heart 
in an intrepid breast. Tell me, for you must needs remember, 
on that day, when the destinies of mankind were trembling in 
the balance, while death fell in showers ; when the artillery of 
France was levelled with a precision of the most deadly science ; 
when her legions, incited by the voice, and inspired by the 
example of their mighty leader, rushed again and again to the 
onset ; Tell me, if for an instant, when to hesitate for an instant 
was to be lost, the ' aliens ' blanched ? " 

" VITAL MIXED COLOURS" 

The Guttural Timbre depicts Vitality of feeling, as well as 
hatred and kindred moods, all of which are really vital. 
The Pectoral is a more awful form of Guttural. 
While these two Timbres originate in faulty uses of the voice, 



312 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

the faults in some cases are inspired by sublime censure of 
the evils of life, and a purpose to expose them. Thus the 
Guttural and Pectoral so common in the famed Indian Orators 
whose eloquence has been of the highest order, are grand at 
times in their effect on the hearers. Louis Kossuth was as 
great an orator as he was a General ; and the moving power of 
his speeches was in the Guttural and Pectoral tones, highly 
coloured by a fine nervous intensity. 



SEVENTH SELECTION 
" VICTOR HUGO'S VITAL STYLE " 

" A cannon which breaks its moorings on board ship becomes 
abruptly some indescribable, supernatural beast. It is a 
machine which transforms itself into a monster. 

" This mass runs on its wheels like billiard balls, inclines with 
the rolling, plunges with the pitching, goes, comes, stops, seems 
to meditate, resumes its course, shoots from one end of the ship 
to the other like an arrow, whirls, steals away, evades, prances, 
strikes, breaks, kills, exterminates." 



EIGHTH SELECTION 
" SHAKESPEARE'S VITAL STYLE " 

" Poison be their drink, 

Gall, worse than gall, the daintiest meat they taste ; 
Their sweetest shade a grove of cypress trees, 
Their sweetest prospect murdering basilisks, 
Their softest couch as smart as lizard's stings, 
Their music frightful as the serpent's hiss, 
And boding screech-owls make the concert full ; 
All the foul terrors of dark-seated hell." 



NINTH SELECTION 
" THE INDIAN'S HATRED " 

Some strike for hope of booty ; some to defend their all ; 
I battle for the joy I have to see the white man fall. 



MIXING BEAUTIFUL COLOURS 313 

I love, among the wounded, to hear his dying moan, 
And catch, while chanting at his side, the music of his groan. 
You've trailed me through the forest ; you've tracked me 

o'er the stream ; 
And struggling through the everglades your bristling bayonets 

gleam. 

But I stand as should the warrior, with his rifle and his spear, 
The scalp of vengeance still is red, and warns you come not 

here ! " 



TENTH SELECTION 
" THE GLADIATOR " 

" If ye are beasts, then stand here like fat oxen waiting for 
the butcher's knife ? If ye are men, follow me ! Strike down 
yon guard, gain the mountain passes, and there do bloody 
work, as did your sires at old Thermopylae ! Is Sparta dead ? 
Is the old Grecian spirit frozen in your veins, that you do crouch 
and cower like a belaboured hound beneath his master's lash ? 
comrades ! warriors ! Thracians ! if we must fight, let us 
fight for ourselves, if we must slaughter, let us slaughter our 
oppressors ! If we must die, let it be under the clear sky, by 
the bright waters, in noble, honourable battle ! " 

The world knows more of the habits of its famous men than 
it does of the manner of living of the thousands who have won 
successs in the private walks of life. Thus it knows to a 
certainty, by reading the biographies of such men as came before 
the public in their efforts to shape the destinies of nations, that 
they one and all without exception build the fires of personal 
magnetism in themselves by the repeating aloud of the most 
stirring thoughts they could find. 

Patrick Henry developed his magnetism by practising aloud 
in deserted or unused schoolhouses. Edward Everett was an 
incessant practiser before a mirror, using thrilling thoughts in 
potent words. In his life of Daniel Webster he tells of the 
latter 's practice in the deep woods where he was often overheard. 



LESSON FIFTY-SEVEN 

RAPID MAGNETIC ADVANCEMENT 

NOTHING SO AMPLY PROVES the complex character 
of humanity as the varying changes of the voice, 
suiting themselves to all manner of moods and feelings, 
and all kinds of intellectual activities from the lowest to the 
highest adventures of speech. But there still remains a vast 
field of development, intended to impart to every message from 
the mind the highest service in efficiency ; for by such means 
what might possess value in ordinary form becomes a mighty 
force when driven home with the utmost power of physical 
magnetism, or muscular magnetism. This use of these words 
must not be confounded with the bad habit of setting the 
muscles for the display of mere force or noise. 

" QUICK MAGNETISM " 

It does not take long to develop muscular magnetism, to fire 
your nervous system with a new life, and to see for yourself 
the effects of a little practice of the right kind. 

The mouth, by muscular motion, makes the checks called 
consonants. We wish that muscular action to be impelled with 
greater energy. Deal to each check a hammer blow ; then 
another, and so continue until you have struck many blows on 
one check. 

If your arm is not used, it will grow soft and flabby. If 
you use it in the right way, it will become strong and large, 
and its muscles will harden and take on greater power. The 
same is true of the muscles of the mouth that are employed in 
making the vocal checks. 

New energy behind them will bring development that will 
aid very materially in their work of executing the tasks set 
for them to do. 

Take a little sentence to begin with : " / will have my bond." 



RAPID MAGNETIC ADVANCEMENT 315 

In this sentence the word bond is very important. Now 
repeat the word bond with intense energy ; not of voice, but of 
muscular touch ; and keep on repeating it. The " b " and the 
" nd " in the word can be given a very powerful muscular 
touch in the mouth, and the energy behind the utterance can be 
made to grow all the time. 

Keep on increasing the power of the muscular touch. This 
implies more impelling energy in every repetition. You must 
have your mind on the work. You must be determined to 
succeed in adding more energy as you proceed. After saying 
the word bond hundreds of times, then repeat the whole 
sentence ; / will have my bond, and note the fire that comes into 
the brain. This is only a beginning ; but from the least 
beginning great achievements may follow. 

Take another sentence : / am determined. 

Take the last word and find the dams or vocal-checks in it. 
They are u d " in the beginning and in the end, and " t " and 
" m " in the middle. The " n " goes with the final " d " Just 
repeat these checks separately hundreds of times each before 
uttering the whole word ; then speak the whole word " deter- 
mined " hundreds of times. Remember to impel always 
increasing energy in every repetition of letter or word. Do not 
become languid or indifferent. Keep the source of the power 
growing stronger and stronger always. This is the secret. Then 
repeat the whole sentence : 

" I am determined." 

If you have read this lesson and the one preceding a few 
times until you understand the manner of practice, you will 
achieve results in a very short time ; and these results will go 
into every word you speak to other persons. Something will 
begin to hold their attention and bring them to you. 

Force of voice is never required. 

In fact many men now of national fame have practised this 
method in their rooms without being heard in the next rooms. 
One of our students developed great magnetism in this way and 
never was discovered in his practice as he omitted the vocal 
tones, when other persons were present in the same room. 
He pantomimed the action. This is not the best. A low, 
quiet tone can be employed. 



316 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

" MAGNETIC COINAGE " 

It is not loudness of voice that enables a person to be 
heard. 

It is the coinage of sound into syllables and words. 

Our life sounds are known as vowels. 

Our vocal-checks or dams are known as consonants. 

Every life-sound should have the full variation of mouth- 
shape that the sound requires. It is possible to hold the mouth 
in one position and utter the words of a sentence, so that you 
think that you can hear them distinctly ; but other persons will 
not hear you clearly, and the voice is for others, not for your- 
self to hear. 

If the vowels have no mouth action the utterances are not 
clearly made, and not easily heard. It is not sufficient that 
the audience hear the sound of the voice they should hear 
what is said. Language consists merely of syllables ; syllables 
of vowels and consonants. One syllable differs from another 
merely in the fact that different vowels and consonants are 
employed, or combined differently. 

If a speaker or reader with more voice than brains should 
endeavour merely to make himself heard, he could do it by 
shouting or yelling unintelligible sounds, as the street vendors 
do ; the voice is heard, and distressingly so. But a quiet tone, 
accompanied by clear enunciation, will carry sense, in the 
form of intelligible words, farther than the shouter's voice. 

A strong voice is of no avail if the vowels and consonants 
are not well-formed and made. 

11 MAGNETIC CONSONANTS " 

All the vocal checks or consonants that are worth practising 
on are given here. Simply repeat them with a hard muscular 
touch on each one, and with ever-increasing nervous energy 
behind to propel them. Each one should be repeated hundreds 
of times. But saying them will not do any good. Hammer 
them. Give them intense power from the nerve-centres. Make 
the mouth execute them with tremendous pressure. Drift 
always into a naturalness as you proceed. 

The genius is he who thinks of what he is doing ; the mind- 
wanderer does things mechanically. 



RAPID MAGNETIC ADVANCEMENT 317 

J?d Cribb'd, bobb'd, robb'd. 

He robb'd his friend in the field. 
Bdsir Cribb'dst, bobb'dst, fib'dst. 

Thou fib'dst to thy best friend. 
JSMs^-Gambl'dst, rambl'dst, fabl'dst. 

Thou rambl'dst over the ground. 
Bst Sobb'st, stubb'st, robb'st. 

Sobb'st thou at such trifles ? 
Dldsi Handl'dst, fondl'dst, fiddl'dst. 

Fiddl'dst thou much, my friend ? 
Dnd Madd'nd, wid'nd, broad'nd. 

Study broad'nd and wid'nd his life 
FldStifi'd, muffl'd, baffl'd. 

He muffl'd the drum and stifl'd the sound. 
Fst Laugh'st, quaflF'st, stuff'st. 

Laugh' st thou at this ? 
Fths Fifths, twelfths. 

They formed by fifths. 
Old Smuggl'd, wrangl'd, mangl'd. 

The smuggl'd garments were mangl'd. 
Gldst gurgl'dst, struggl'dst, bungl'dst. 

Thou bungl'dst it. 
Ost pegg'st, flogg'st, drugg'st. 

Thou drugg'st and flogg'st him. 
Kldst Shackl'd'st, tackl'd'st, buckl'd'st. 

Buckl'd'st thou thy armour ? 
Klst Encircl'st, tackl'st, buckFst. 

Encird'st thou her form ? 
Kndst Heark'n'dst, lik'n'dst, black'n'dst. 

Thou lik'n'dst it to death. 
Xnst Wak'n'st, heark'n'st, beck'n'st. 

Thou heark'n'st well. 
Lftr Engulfed. 

The wave engulfed him. 
Lfthr ^Twelfth. 

Did you witness " Twelfth Night ? " 
LdgbdIndnlg'd, divulg'd, bilg'd. 

They were indulg'd but divulg'd not. 
Lps Scalps, pulps, helps. 

What helps scalps I 



318 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Lpst Scalp'st, help'st. 

Help'st thou not ? 
Ngdst Long'dst, wrong'dst, hang'dst. 

Hang'dst thou innocent men ? 
Ngst Bring'st, hang'st, sing'st. 

Thou sing'st like a lark. 
Ngths Lengths, strengths. 

He was left many lengths behind. 
Vst Shov'st, liv'st, prov'st. 

Thou prov'st thy point. 

" MAGNETIC BARRIERS " 

Some persons with good voices and other excellent qualities 
are sometimes placed in a bad position by the inability of 
the tongue muscles to execute the mixed variety of con- 
sonants that may intrude without warning. Many a fine 
address has been ruined in this way. 

A young man who was trying to impress a young lady 
with his superior ease and polish fell into this trap that his 
own tongue set for him. 

Conversations meant to be serious have been turned into 
ridicule by the same causes. 

The trouble arises from the fact that some letters do not 
allow other letters to be sounded with them without special 
practice to develop flexibility of consonant muscles. 

Take for example the reply made by a waiter when a young 
man asked him to bring two kinds of soup for himself and 
lady friends. The young man tried to order " Sheep soup, 
shoat soup and beef soup." But he never got as far as the 
first two. The waiter said," I understand. You want lamb 
soup and young hog soup." 

Can you say, " Sheep soup, shoat soup," easily and rapidly, 
or at all ? 

Try it aloud, and then ask your friends to try it aloud. 

It will strengthen the tongue muscles. 

You wish to be understood when you speak ; you cannot 
afford to be misunderstood. 

Then pay strict attention to clearest articulation of words, 
for which the following is excellent practice. 



RAPID MAGNETIC ADVANCEMENT 319 

If you can speak these words readily, then increase the speed 
of utterance to make them flexible. 

Here are some others : 

" She stood at the gate, welcoming him in." 

" A pink trip slip." 

" A million alien minions." 

" Literally literary." 

" A shame it is to sham so, Sam." 

" Sue saw six slender saplings." 

" He twists his texts." 

" A peculiar pecuniary predicament." 

" She thrust six thousand thistles through her thumb." 

11 Around the rough rocks the ragged rascals ran." 

" Beef -broth." This must be said many times with great 
speed. 

" Tie tight Dick's kite." 

" Sunshine some shun." 

" Six thick thistle sticks." 

" Then thrust it through the thatch." 

" Chaste stars are not chased tars." 

" Triumphant nymphs." 

" Ghastly ghosts at sixty-six Sixsmith street." 

" The axe performs the acts." 

" All sects, regardless of sex." 

" The prow proudly plows the deep." 

" He sent back the blank black ink." 

" A knapsack strap." Say this rapidly many times at once. 

In fact, the true test of flexible tongue muscles is in your 
ability to read all the foregoing examples very rapidly. 



While there are many valuable methods in this series of 
lessons, one that should receive extra attention is that of 
" Magnetic Consonants." In a few minutes you can prove 
that this line of training will develop in you the power and fire 
of muscular magnetism. You will not have to wait many 
minutes to see the effects of it. 

Then you will find that muscular magnetism is the basis 
of personal magnetism. It gives at first surprise ; then a glow 
of satisfaction ; then a realization of a new-found power ; then 
ambition ; then courage ; th6n the determination to ascertain 



320 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

to what ends you can carry your gifts ; and soon you are rising 
in the world far above your fellow-beings. This is the plan 
and purpose of Nature. Nor is it right to hide your talents 
under a bushel. 

And the practice of " hammering consonants " will change 
the shape of the face to such a degree that a photograph taken 
before the work begins and another after it ends, will show a 
decided improvement. The lips, in a few months of constant 
practice, will have the fine chiseling that the sculptor aims to 
give to his noblest men and women. All the muscles from 
those at the forehead down to those at the chin, and from ear 
to ear, are involved in this practice. If you doubt it, watch 
your face in a glass when you are hammering the many con- 
sonants with energy and determination to increase the nervous 
power that impels them. An unused face is immobile, which 
is a polite term for being stupid. This practice develops ex- 
cessive mobility, adds a charm to every feature, brings solidity 
in place of flabby skin, and lights up the features with an 
attractiveness which halts the attention of others. 

The mind is stimulated more by the voice than by any other 
cause. The expressive voice lights up the face in a way that is 
hard to describe. The coinage of words by every great man 
or woman who has ever come in contact with the public has 
been of rare power. All the consonants used by them have 
been energized from the nerve centres, and found execution on 
muscles that, like live wires, have burned them into the minds 
of all who have listened to them. 

When you find yourself acquiring a new power of making 
your ideas felt by other people, this stimulus will arouse in 
you a new ambition that will grow rapidly. We wish we could 
show you the proofs of this fact in the lives of people who 
were dire failures because of their inability to impress their 
hearers ; whose ideas could not be given living expression in 
their voices ; and who revolutionized their careers by the 
mastery of this simple system. 
It is Nature itself. 



LESSON FIFTY-EIGHT 

THE GREAT TEST 

MORE THAN A THIRD OF A CENTURY ago a 
Committee was organized consisting of two Politicians, 
one newspaper proprietor and a scientific investigator, 
for the purpose of determining by direct observation the 
actual results of the training methods employed under this 
system. The Committee was in charge of the Hon. Adolph 
Meyer, prior to the time when he became a Member of the 
Board of Trustees of Ralston University^ which position he 
held for many years and up to the time of his death. He 
was a man of great ability. 

Twelve men were selected from twelve walks of life ; chiefly 
because of their total lack of personal magnetism. One was 
an unsuccessful business man, one a lawyer who had never won 
a case, one a labourer, one an unskilful dentist, one a poor 
doctor, one a carpenter, one a teacher of whom it was said that 
" he would never set the world on fire/' one a clerk in govern- 
ment service, one a salesman in a very modest store, one a 
clerk, one a painter, and one a photographer in failing circum- 
stances. Of course these selections were purposely sought, 
with the intention of making the work as difficult as possible. 

We had previously announced that every person of ordinary 
intelligence could be made to recognize in four weeks the fact 
that personal magnetism was natural to all individuals ; that 
it was latent in all ; and that what was needed was some 
instigating cause to awaken it. 

We had also stated that distinct and marked evidence could 
be obtained in the same four weeks of the awakening of this 
power, and of its rank as the supreme gift of life ; that it was 
a part of existence ; that it nevertheless could be amply mani- 
fested in this short time ; and, finally, that the most unmagnetic 
men and women might be easily brought into the possession of 

21 321 



322 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

this gift if they earnestly desired to do so. It was because of 
the last assertion that we found ourselves about to teach this 
great power to twelve really " hopeless cases " if our statements 
had not been accurately made. 

The Committee were told in confidence that our elementary 
method by which we were able to show astounding results in a 
few weeks followed our " Rule of Four," as we called it. Bear 
in mind that this " Rule of Four " is not a large part of our 
System, but is a mighty one as far as it goes. It consisted of 
the following steps : 

1. Kill the worst forms of Leakage at once ; for neither 
magnetism nor self-control can be acquired when they exist. 

2. Kill the worst forms of monotony ; for there is nothing 
so repellent in human intercourse as sameness of sound, same- 
ness of voice, sameness of pitch, and sameness of colour in 
spoken words. 

3. Fire the mind ; not the brain ; nor the nerves ; but the 
mind ; by opening its portals to the reception of mental 
pictures. 

4. Turn the voice into a human dynamic energy, by sound- 
dams. 

These steps, as we have stated, are all elementary, but 
necessary and effective in the highest degree. 

The first session was devoted to the discovering and reducing 
the worst forms of Leakage. We showed that natural mag- 
netism was all the time developing of itself, and constantly 
running to waste. In the next session we made clear the 
offensive forms of monotony, such as sameness of tone, same- 
ness of pitch, colourless voices, and one colour only when any 
was used at all. The question has often been asked, why tone 
colour is taught ; and the answer is that all unmagnetic 
persons have colourless voices, and these depict the character as 
holding the same relation to magnetism as the spineless jelly- 
fish holds to the powerful lion. These principles were made 
very clear at once, and were as quickly grasped and acted 
upon. 

Now came the only difficult part of the work. The mind must 
be fired by opening its portals to mental pictures. A mental 
picture is a scene that lives in the thoughts. We selected the 
historic battle between the Swiss and the Austrians at that 



THEGREATTEST 3*3 

stage when the latter had surrounded the former and were 
advancing on them in a circle which projected spears from which 
there seemed no escape. The following quotations make the 
connected story when put together ; but we used them singly 
because each one presented a mental picture in itself. With 
body free from Leakages, and with voice free from sameness, 
each quotation was repeated fifty times, slowly and very 
deliberately, with the picture fully alive in the mind. 

" All Switzerland is in the field/' Think of the little army 
completely surrounded by a vast army that is advancing with 
levelled spears, intent upon the complete destruction of the 
Swiss. As soon as the mental picture is vividly present in 
the mind, speak the words very firmly ; and so proceed with 
all the quotations : 

" She cannot fly, she will not yield, she must not die.*' 

Here are three pitches : one in the middle range ; one below 
it ; and one very low. Here are also three colours : hopeless- 
ness ; absolute firmness ; and solemn hope. 

Be sure to give these full expression. 

" Her better fate here gives her an immortal date/' 

This is a look into the future, full of bright hope. 

" Few were the numbers she could boast, but every freeman 
was a host, and felt as though himself were he on whoso sole 
arm hung victory. It did depend on one indeed ; behold him 
Arnold Winkelried ! Unmarked he stood amid the throng in 
rumination deep and long, till you might see with sudden grace 
the very thought come o'er his face ; and by the motion of his 
form anticipate the bursting storm. ' Make way for liberty/ 
he cried, then ran with arms extended wide, as if his dearest 
friend to clasp ; ten spears he swept within his grasp. Swift 
to the breach his comrades fly : * Make way for liberty/ they 
cry, and through the Austrian phalanx dart as rushed the 
spears through Arnold's heart, while, instantaneous as his 
fall, rout, ruin, panic seized them all ; an earthquake could 
not overthrow a city with a surer blow. Thus Switzerland 
again was free ; thus death made way for liberty." 

Here are not less than eighteen mental pictures, and each 
one should live in the mind and be viewed as accurately as if it 
were beheld openly. This is the secret of opening the mind and 
awakening in it the fires of magnetism. As soon as the student 



324 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

is able to see one mental picture his success is assured. In 
these quotations eighteen different colours may be developed. 

The fourth step in the Rule of Four is the most potent of all. 
It develops dynamic power in the voice by treating all vowels 
as sounds, and all consonants as dams. A consonant is a 
shutting off of a vowel prior to its utterance or as soon as 
uttered. A consonant may precede or end a vowel ; it cannot 
exist of itself. The sound-dams are all finals ; meaning they 
all follow vowel sounds. The firm closing off of a vowel by a 
consonant holds in check the magnetism of the voice. The 
union of two final consonants doubles this power. The union 
of three final consonants triples it. The union of four final 
consonants in one ending quadruples it. Rufus Choate, prob- 
ably the most magnetic man of the last century, next possibly 
to Junius Brutus Booth, the actor, always before a speech spent 
minutes in four-consonant endings, such as KAMSKT, 
KAMSTK and others, which are too difficult for beginners. 
But Choate also practised Greek words having three consonant 
endings. Wilson Barrett, the most magnetic of actors, 
ascribed his success in this power chiefly to consonant practice. 

To our class of twelve " hopeless cases " we gave the con- 
sonant combinations that attend the Department of the 
Magnetic Voice in this book ; and we personally drilled them 
every day until they mastered this part of the work. To show 
the value we placed on such practice, we opened each session 
with unison repetition of the word, IRKUTSK, fifty times 
very slowly and firmly ; and every ten minutes we came back 
to some similar practice. In a few days the muscles of the 
tongue of each student began to develop great flexibility and 
strength, which is an invincible combination. 

At the end of four weeks all twelve men had acquired perfect 
mental pictures of the scenes stated ; had mastered their most 
offensive faults : had risen to the expression of great intensity 
of feeling held in perfect check and reserve power ; and were 
so clearly changed, one and all without exception, that the Com- 
mittee unanimously pronounced their progress " astounding. 5 ' 
As a result the Chairman became an official of our Ralston 
University ; and took great satisfaction in following the after- 
history of these twelve " hopeless cases." The unsuccessful 
business man gradually founded a large business, rising from 



THEGREATTEST 325 

small beginnings. The lawyer who had never won a case 
acquired slowly but surely a large practice. The unskilled 
dentist won success in his profession. The poor doctor bade 
farewell to his poverty. The carpenter became a contractor 
and builder. The teacher obtained an appointment as 
Inspector of Schools, after a few years. The clerk in the 
government service was made Superintendent in his own 
division. The painter became a master contractor. The 
salesman established a business of his own. The clerk suc- 
ceeded to the ownership of the business in the course of time. 
The labourer became a builder and contractor. And the 
photographer, the last we heard from him, was at the head of 
a business syndicate. 

The important fact that stands out in these histories is that 
there comes a time in the affairs of men, and women too, when 
failure can be combated and success secured by the development 
of the natural gifts that are stored away in every individual 
life ; and that, instead of long and weary years of practice, the 
maximum amount of progress can be achieved with the 
minimum amount of work. Of course nothing comes of itself 
in this world. 

We depend largely on the formation of mental pictures ; 
but mental pictures are the glory of genius ; and the difference 
between the power to see mental pictures within the mind, 
and not to see them, is now, always has been, and always 
will be, the difference between common clay and the noblest 
human achievement. 

It has always been the chief pleasure of the author to take 
in hand those men and women who are regarded by their fellow- 
beings as " worthless cases," meaning merely that they are 
in fixed ruts in life arid are incapable of rising in the world. 
All that the author has required is that each one should be in 
earnest, and should be endowed with a fair share of good 
sense, or practical intelligence ; something to build on. The 
result has also been that every one of these cases has been 
successful, and such persons have risen to prominence. 



DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED 
PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

LESSON FIFTY-NINE 

THE TWO MINDS 

WE NOW MUST FACE LIFE itself, and enter into the 
myriad associations that are involved in the endeavour 
to make use of the teachings of this book as far as 
they have proceeded. There is too much teaching and too 
little learning in the world. Teaching pours into the mind 
the facts and principles of things ; learning adopts them ; 
education uses them. In the study of personal magnetism, 
when our first book appeared more than forty years ago, there 
were no others on the subject in existence. We were the first. 
Since then, there have been a few works on the same subject, 
but for the most part they have been books of advice ; all of 
which has been good, 

But advice is easy to give and hard to adopt. 
Such books have told their readers that in order to acquire 
personal magnetism, they must be pleasant, agreeable, neat, 
polite, generous, sympathetic, honest, truthful, on time, active, 
helpful, of good habits, and so on without limit. In fact nothing 
that was good was overlooked. While all the pleasing qualities 
that exist are sure to make a person attractive and useful to 
others ; they do not make others useful to such person. The 
agreeable man who is generous, is helping others to use him ; 
the man with personal magnetism uses others to help him ; 
thus reversing the situation. This is an important distinction. 
Of course we shall teach every good quality, but not as an 
^encyL^m^rely for jgomebody else to take advantage of Jt ; 
reciprocity isjairer and always means a square deal. 

Before proceeding further, let us stand face to face with the 

326 



THE TWO MINDS 3*7 

exact purposes of this study. We will not mince words, nor 
beat about the bush. We intend that our students shall be 
divided into two classes : 

1. Those who are willing and eager to follow our advice 
to read carefully and slowly every word of the book twice. 
This is Class One ; or the First Class. 

2. Those who some time in the future may read the book 
in the manner stated, or may not feel inclined to do so. They 
include from five to fifteen per cent of the persons who receive 
the book ; they read it once, and then loiter along the byways 
of life. 

Having separated the readers into the two classes, we then 
deal with those of Class One ; and we set for them the goal 
of 100 Per Cent of Progress in the acquisition of this power. 

ONE HUNDRED PER CENT is reached when : 

1. Financial independence is attained or assured. 

2. Perfect respect and confidence from others are won. 

3. Mastery over all the affairs of life in every department 
of existence is acquired. 

No person needs more in this world. Few have obtained as 
much. But the goal is not difficult to any one who is in earnest ; 
and the course is pleasant all along the way. Sugar-coated 
pills are alluring to the taste. Our lessons are all sugar-coated ; 
they are not only interesting, but fascinating. More than this, 
every lesson is loaded to the muzzle with benefits that reach 
every department of life ; and if you do not wish them for 
the purposes of gain and advantage, you cannot afford to omit 
them for the wonders they will accomplish in other ways. 
Not one is wasted. Your improvement begins at the start, 
and never ceases until you die, going on even after the last 
lesson has been studied. No other line of training or instruc- 
tion in the world produces such results. 

Before going ahead, let us review briefly what has gone before. 

The Department of Magnetic Sources is very helpful and 
inspiring. 

The Department of Mental Magnitude finds you facing in the 
wrong direction. It turns you completely about, and faces you 
forward ; after which it makes all the difference in the world 
what you do or how you do it. You cannot go wrong when 
you are facing right. Nor does it make so much difference 



328 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

how fast or by what means you are travelling ; if you are facing 
right, you are going on. The man or woman who masters 
Lessons 12 and 13, is already far to the front of the human 
throng ; and these lessons are very easy to master. 

The Department of the Magnetic Eye is so valuable that, 
if it were possible to place a cash equivalent against it, the 
amount would be surprising. We read books by interpreting 
their words into ideas. Here we read faces like open books. 
Take this Department into your evening half-hour of thought 
and study ; read one lesson each evening ; think of the vast 
wealth of opportunity that is placed within your reach ; carry 
the knowledge into the affairs of the morrow ; and note your 
growth in self-conscious power. 

The next Department, that of Instantaneous Personal 
Magnetism, gives you daily work to do. You will not omit it. 

The Department of Magnetic Health is of the greatest 
importance to every person regardless of having an interest in 
this study ; for it will effect changes from ill conditions to 
those of the perfect enjoyment of life with body, mind and 
nerves freed from every malady and danger that now brings 
weakness and loss of vitality which are serious deterrents in 
the efforts to win success. These lessons have a value in 
excess of the cost of the book a thousand times over. 

The Department of Tension Energy is the crossing of the 
fine from the prevailing conditions of drifting that sweep 
people along a common current to nowhere in particular, over 
to the side of aroused activity and awakened purpose. The 
fires of purpose are lighted and existence begins anew. As 
a method of building an enormous vitality, it has no equal, 
and there is nothing that can take its place. 

The Department of Repose is like entering a garden in which 
all the beautiful attractions of Nature abound. The calmness 
of still life supercharged with living power enthralls the scene 
with the exquisite loveliness of mind and heart. Centuries ago 
there were no gentlemen, no gentle-women, no gentle folks ; all 
humanity were physically coarse. Then a division was made 
when it was seen that here and there refinement of manner 
appeared, self-control asserted itself, and a calm and attractive 
demeanour compelled admiration and obeisance. Now a still 
further advance is developing these qualities in higher degree, 



THETWOMINDS 3^9 

This line of training alone embraces the greatest attractions 
in life ; and its advantages are so valuable that it should be 
given precedence over all others. 

The Department of the Magnetic Voice is a complete world 
in itself. It is through the voice that most people influence 
their followers and associates ; for the one distinguishing endow- 
ment of humanity as the head of the animal kingdom is the 
power of articulative speech. The system which we present 
here has been taught for forty years in private schools, colleges, 
academies and seminaries as the best method known for the 
development of the voice in speech and conversation, and in 
all uses, where all the rich and beautiful qualities of tone and 
expression were sought. It has a substantial and practical 
value in every phase of human activities ; and especially in 
business, professional and social life. 

While you have been developing the new wealth offered in 
these Departments, another process has been going on ; and one 
of which you will by this time have found some recognition. 
This process was first made evident to you when you had 
finished the study of Mental Magnitude and its Regime as 
taught in the twelfth and thirteenth lessons ; and had passed 
successfully through the Department of Instantaneous Personal 
Magnetism. It was further unfolded in the Departments of 
Magnetic Health, Tension, Energy and Repose ; and confirmed 
in the new powers of speech that were taught in the Depart- 
ment of Magnetic Voice where the soul spoke through the rich 
colourings of sound and tone in which the thoughts and feelings 
of other beings were engrafted on the heart and mind of the 
student. Then that other process became a reality and revealed 
the fact that in each human being there exist 

TWO MINDS : 

1. The Physical Mind. 

2. The Magnetic Mind. 



LESSON SIXTY 

THE MAGNETIC MIND 

OUR USE OF THE TERM, the Two Minds, is made 
applicable to this study. In other works various names 
are given by scientists and writers to these same minds. 
For many years there has been a persistent reference by 
scholarly investigators to what is often termed the subcon- 
scious faculty, as a mind wholly apart and entirely different 
from the so-called workaday mind. In all leading institu- 
tions of learning, the subject of psychology is now taught as a 
branch of the highest importance ; some claiming that it 
controls all human activities, and makes for success or failure 
depending on the uses derived from it. Experiments and the 
after-history of graduates prove that all opportunities for ad- 
vancement in the world are swayed inevitably by the influence 
of this power ; and, to the surprise of investigators, every test 
has shown conclusively that there is a mind wholly different 
from that hitherto known as the thinking function of the 
brain ; that there is a life embedded in human existence that 
is endowed with powers that cannot be explained by any 
human standards. 

No one name can describe properly this other mind. 
It is not a faculty of a single character, but a collection of 
faculties ; one of which is subconscious, and hence this term 
has been applied to it as an inclusive one. Some years ago 
a very able writer issued a small book entitled a scientific 
demonstration of the existence of an immortal life within 
man, based solely on proofs of the presence of this other 
mind ; and to fall in with the accepted usage he employed 
the name subconscious faculty. In some hospitals, the 
same term is used by doctors and surgeons in their cura- 
tive experiments ; and thousands of remarkable cures have 

330 



THE MAGNETIC MIND 331 

been effected through a recognition of the powers of this 
faculty. 1 

The Physical Mind that is mentioned in the last page of the 
preceding lesson is that which is generally understood as the 
entire conscious thinking faculty in all its divisions, including 
its sensations, its intelligence, its memory, and its power of 
reasoning. Writers and teachers allude to it as the conscious 
mind ; also the working mind ; also the thinking as well as the 
automatic mind ; to distinguish it from the subconscious 
faculty. 

The Magnetic Mind is connected with that other mental 
world of which the subconscious faculty is only a part, and 
with it forms a group of activities such as those of the genius, 
of the inventor, of the poet, of the great dramatists, of the 
leaders in all onward movements, and of the inspired writers 
of the past. History presents in countless ways the efforts of 
such genius to break through the wall that separates the natural 
from the supernatural powers of life. But that which was once 
supposed to belong to the realm of the supernatural has been 
found to be a part of the plan of Nature ; just as the belief 
in the occult warnings of eclipses and earthquakes has melted 
into modern knowledge. So in time it will be learned that 
there is no supernatural world ; but that all existence is 
wedded together. 

The Magnetic Mind contains three powers : 

1. The Truth-Teller. 

2. The Ideal-Maker. 

3. Mental Determination. 

The Truth-Teller is a double-power. It is able to discern 
the truth of the future by applying the experiences of the past. 
It is also able to take advantage of its faculty of discernment 
by possessing the ability to accept the truth of the future as 
though it had actually already occurred, thus avoiding the 
reefs and dangerous shoals that are wrecking most lives and 
neutralizing the brilliant victories of personal magnetism. 

The Ideal-Maker creates in fact the individual that is sought. 

1 NOTE. Any person who wishes to be made familiar with the sources 
of proofs of the nature, activities and powers of this supernatural faculty, 
may address enquiries to the Publishers of this book. 



332 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

In early youth, and sometimes far into middle life, men and 
women build castles in the air. Blood and brain and heart 
convert their inmost wishes into seeming realities ; and it has 
been aptly said that if these castles could only become material 
facts, the world would be a beautiful place in which to live. 
The Ideal-Maker does not deal in masonry or concrete struc- 
tures, but creates a person and a personality that represent the 
highest type of existence on this little planet, and then leads 
the way to their realization. Measurements are taken, not of 
the individual, but of the idealized person and personality, and 
the power of the Magnetic Mind draws and lifts up to these 
standards the being for whom they are intended. We shall see. 

Mental Determination furnishes the best example of the 
difference between the Physical Mind and the Magnetic Mind. 
The latter is able to accomplish anything ; but the Physical 
Mind succeeds only as far as it has free advance or can break 
down the barriers that stand in its way. In the Department of 
Tension Energy we saw that the habit of setting the muscles 
was a detriment to the cultivation of magnetism. So the habit 
of setting the mind is a detriment in another form. Luckily 
the Magnetic Mind cannot act in that way ; for what is known 
herein as Mental Determination is the opposite of setness ; it 
is movement. 

This is the greatest force in life. 

There is power in a locomotive that stands on the track of 
a great artery of travel, but that does not move. In like manner 
there is power in the obstinate person who conceives a fixed 
idea, and who stands by it with all steam up. But he does not 
get anywhere. The world moves past him. Progress finds him 
there still, and still there. When the great machine is given 
the open valve, it moves and goes on into the world of action. 
It sees life, participates in it, and becomes a part of it. In like 
manner, Mental Determination is power in motion. 

It has a goal, and it moves towards it by the process of 
action, not of belief or fixedness of position. 

All sorts of causes operate to set the Physical Mind or work- 
ing consciousness in fixed positions or fixed ideas. Disease is 
a frequent cause. Old age, in which the brain cells ossify or 
harden and destroy their flexibility, is a very frequent cause, 
and does not wait for the arrival of decrepitude in a majority 



THE MAGNETIC MIND 333 

of cases ; for this organ may begin to lose its flexibility even 
when a person is in the teens or twenties. One-way thinking 
and one-way believing partly paralyse its powers to see or 
accept anything that challenges such thinking or belief. 

The non-flexible or set mind is rarely ever able to attain that 
fullness of magnetism that wins success or draws friends or 
worthy companions. 

In our journeys among people of all ranks and grades of 
achievement in life, we have never yet found any man or woman 
whose mind had become set in lines of thinking or believing 
who was magnetic, or who had any genuine friends. Some there 
were who had acquired wealth and power, before whom others 
fawned to their faces, and sneered behind their backs ; and 
whose so-called closestjricnds were posers of convenience. 

Obstinacy is merely an acute form of the set mind. 

As long as the majority of the people are fools, so long will 
the world be full of setness of minds and sctness of existence ; 
of friendless and unpitied men and women barricading their 
miserable selves within tho hides of mules and waiting for death 
to make somebody sorry. They cannot help themselves, nor 
their condition. All we can say is that if you belong to the 
class of persons who cannot extricate themselves from the 
inability of flexible thinking, or if you are of the kind that 
grip an idea and hang to it like a dog to a rag, you can make 
no progress in this study beyond what you have already 
attained. 

The Magnetic Mind is open ; wide open ; open always to the 
Truth ; it never closes itself against facts ; it never sets itself 
to an unalterable belief, for it believes what it knows and ex- 
periences. It, however, gets nearer the truth, for it is always 
nearer the sources of the truth, than the Physical Mind. The 
latter is the accumulation of earthly experiences beginning at 
birth, and including all that can be remembered since then. 
The Magnetic Mind has its sources of knowledge from the 
opposite direction. 

It cannot be said that persons who set their minds in a fixed 
belief and purpose, although as a rule devoid of magnetism, 
cannot acquire some of this power ; but they cannot reach 
the heights. They, in the first place, do not understand the 
difference between setting their minds to a fixed purpose, which 



334 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

is always praiseworthy if the purpose is worthy, and setting 
it to a flexible purpose which bends always to the Truth and 
to the presentation of facts. This distinction is hard to grasp. 
But it is the alternative of no magnetism and failure on the 
one hand, and uniform success on the other hand. 

A flexible purpose that moves in the right direction is 
magnetic. 

A fixed purpose that closes the mind is never magnetic. 

Take the old illustration of the college seeking to impress on 
the intellects of its law students the methods of getting proper 
testimony before a jury when balked by the laws of evidence. 
The professor speaks of a table that is to be moved through a 
doorway to the next room. The first attempt is to force it 
through lengthwise ; but as the door is less than three feet in 
the opening and the table is four feet long, the task seems 
impossible. Having seen the futility of the effort in this way, 
the table is then turned so that the end may be pushed through 
the doorway ; but as the width is a full three feet, and the 
opening at the door slightly less, the table still remains in the 
first room. Now comes the application of the law of flexibility. 
The table is laid on its side ; two legs are worked through, then 
the body, and finally the two remaining legs, and it is in the 
next room. 

Taking this example only as an illustration, the obstinate 
mind in life would persist in trying to force the table through 
the doorway with the broadside facing it ; and would sit down 
and stay there set in mind and purpose. Life is made up of 
countless such cases. The Magnetic Mind retains its flexibility 
in all things ; suits all the activities of existence to conditions 
that must be met, and meets them in the best way possible. 
In other words, it moulds its efforts to the necessities that arise, 
changes its methods without changing its direction, and often 
stoops to conquer without abandoning its purpose. 

One of the most beautiful characteristics of the Magnetic 
Mind is its habit of sending out tentacles of thought in order 
to draw in new influences that arise from contact with other 
persons, analysing them, and, if found to possess new values, 
to absorb them ; otherwise to discard them as having been 
found wanting. 



LESSON SIXTY-ONE 

THE TRUTH-TELLER 

A REVIEW OF THE PRECEDING LESSON will 
disclose the following summary of that power of the 
Magnetic Mind that is called the Truth-Teller. It is 
double. On the one hand it is able to discern the truth of 
the future by applying the experiences of the past. On the 
other hand it is able to take advantage of its faculty of dis- 
cernment by possessing the ability to accept the truth of the 
future as though it had actually already occurred ; thus 
avoiding the reefs and dangerous shoals that are wrecking 
most lives, and neutralizing the brilliant victories of personal 



JThere are more reefs and dangerous shoals in marriage than\ 
in any otKer institution of life ; \ yet, despite opinions to the 
contrary, they are not hidden, but lie in full sight just below 
the surface of the shining waters. The victims look afar off 
and do not see them ; or, being told of them, they say, " Even 
if so, in our case they will not bring harm." The Physical 
Mind is swayed by the Four Appetites, or one or more of them. 
In Lesson Sixty, just preceding this, there will be found a 
summary of the processes that develop the Magnetic Mind. 
Those processes, aided largely by the Regime of Mental 
Magnitude which is found in Lesson Thirteen, will overcome 
the influence exerted by the appetites. 

If, however, the Physical Mind holds sway, the appetites will 
bring ruin in ninety per cent of marriages. A very large 
majority of people are or have been married ; and the wrecking 
of this alliance will in nearly every instance result in harm to 
those who make Jbhe mistake of entering into it ill-advisedly. 
A_mistaJke_aypided is worth a thousand corrected.] 

We have seen that when ill -health brings pain, suffering and 
physical torture, magnetism is never possible. In like manner 

335 



INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

mental ill-health, such as must attend the wrecking of married 
life, brings worries, suffering, anguish, hopeless drifting for 
years, and loss of ambition to get on in the world until there 
is the legal separation and the new start at a point far back 
of that where the first course began. As we have said, a 
mistake avoided is worth a thousand corrected. 

With the Magnetic Mind in control, mistakes need not be 
corrected ; they are avoided. The Truth-Teller has charge of 
affairs. He shows you facts by asking you questions : 

1. You are thinking of marrying a woman whom you say 
you love. Do you know that love begins at puberty in response 
to the sexual appetite ? That it exists solely as a partner with 
that condition, is born with it, and cannot live without it ? 
That love is a fever of the nerves tortured by the same appetite ? 
That therejis^ really in fact^but thejdiortest conceivable step 
from loving and hating ? That countless thousands of wives 
Eave loved mlierisely, ~and suddenly have hated bitterly ? 
That ninety-nine per cent of married people have awakened 
after marriage to find their mistake, all of whom, if forewarned, 
would have said, " Oh, we know there have been wrecks in 
millions of other cases, but with us it will be different ; we are 
perfectly mated, and will love each other as long as life shall 
last and ever after." 

2. You are marrying in order to meet the demands of your 
sexual appetite, and the foregoing enquiries do not deter you, 
then you will go on to the wreckage we have described in the 
early part of this lesson. But if you are marrying in order to 
possess a mate as a loving and sympathetic companion, then 
let the Truth -Teller analyse the prospects for you, and see if 
you will take the step. We are discussing the man side first. 
You have found the one woman in this world who was created 
for you. She is pretty. Is she ? Beauty is skin deep. Have 
you seen her with the " make-up " off ? But supposing that 
in her natural skin, her face is fair, its texture is velvety, and 
the lines are yet absent, what of those mornings when, after 
her stomach and liver are upset by indigestion, she is sallow, 
yellow, jaundiced, of sour breath and fishy eyes, drawn features 
and sagging jaw, are you then enamoured of her beauty ? 
There must be something more than a doll face of velvety 
texture and smooth surface toTiold your love. 



THE TRUTH-TELLER 337 

3. How about the housework ? Can you afford to pay for 
help ? If you can, have you the means to pay for them, to 
feed them and to house them ? If, after paying all your bills as 
estimated before marriage, and as many more that will arise 
without being estimated, will you find yourself in debt at the 
end of each year, or will you come out about even ? And are 
you prepared to meet the cost of emergencies, exigencies and 
unexpected liabilities that come in flocks to all married couples ? 
If you are in debt, where will you be when old age arrives ? If 
you come out even, where will you be when the same old age 
arrives ? If you save one hundred pounds each year, how 
many years of smooth financial sailing will be required for you 
to save up sufficient money to invest so that when you are too 
old to work you can live on the income ? Safe investments 
do not average much over four per cent. Four thousand 
pounds placed at such interest would yield only one hundred 
and sixty pounds a year ; and saving at the rate of one hundred 
pounds a year would require forty years to provide this sum, 
with, of course, a slightly larger income from invested interest ; 
but compounding it would not produce enough to enable you 
to live decently after you are superannuated. Hence the 
saving of one hundred pounds a year during marriage will not 
be enough ; and the chances are a thousand to one that you 
will start saving as the man started planting his land, as soon 
as he caught up with the end of the rainbow. You will be 
getting ready to start the next year. But if you do not start 
some time, woe to you and your old age ! 

4. If you are thinking of building your own house, the Truth- 
Teller wishes to say that the cost of material is about three 
hundred per cent above normal ; and the cost of labour from 
three hundred to four hundred per cent above normal. If you 
use electric light, or have other conveniences, and especially are 
compelled to pay for the services of plumbers, or painters and 
carpenters for repairs, or even in constructing a house, the wages 
charged in addition to the swollen prices of material are pro- 
hibitive. What is normal ? It is argued that if all wage 
earners and business men and women receive these abnormal 
prices, then one line of charges will balance the others. But the 
only test of what is normal comes from dividends from the bonds 
of the nation, and from stocks and shares of the great typical 



22 



338 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

corporations, such as the steel companies, the railways, the 
industries and the banking institutions. Taking as the basis 
the purchase price of such bonds and stocks to-day, and the 
dividends that are distributed to owners of them, the average 
income from these sources is nearer four per cent per annum 
than five ; and, while all material and wages have risen from 
three hundred to four hundred per cent over the figures of 
thirty years ago, the returns from bonds and stocks have been 
standing still. Yet people may be surprised to learn that a 
very big percentage of all income on which people pay their 
living expenses comes from these investments ; and, when those 
who now depend on their earnings in other ways are too old to 
remain active in business, employment or professional life, 
ALL their income then must come from similar investments. 
This is the only way of determining what is normal ; and 
possible bankruptcy must be foreseen as the most dangerous 
reef of married life until the cost of material and labour shall 
again become normal. If it requires to-day four times the 
earnings of labour or business to equal the value received, 
excessively high wages and charges bring no advantage, and 
stand in the way of purchasing living investments as a sufficient 
protection against old-age demands. 

We present these abnormal figures because the mental worry 
that attends the struggle to finance marriage, with the years 
passing and nothing being laid by against old age, frets 
husbands and wives until they become nervous and irritable 
and lose both magnetism and ambition. 

5. If you think that two persons can live as cheaply as one 
by marrying, you should first make estimates of every possible 
expense that you can think of as pertaining to marriage,(and 
multiply these by four. The Physical Mind cannot be made 
to believe this ; but the Magnetic Mind knows it to be true. 
We are discussing the average families, not those that are of 
very limited means. The husband may be in business, or may 
be employed in a high-salaried position, or may be building up 
some profession ; he is quite sure to be in one of these three 
vocations. The only point we make in this lesson is that he 
should know the cost of marriage as it affects him ; should every 
year establish a margin between his income and his expendi- 
tures ; and should have the solid satisfaction of knowing that 



THE TRUTH-TELLER 339 

he is living within his means, and providing for the future. His 
exact financial situation should be made known to his wife, for 
if she is worthy of being a wife she will help him to establish 
this margin and will glory in their united efforts to succeed. 

This is genuine personal magnetism applied to the greatest 
institution of all time, marriage, and it tends to hold husbands 
and wives together. 

Let them read this lesson together and study its meaning. 

Every person should possess a Truth-Teller. It is a section 
of the mind that is lighted by the highest candle-power known 
to science ; it lights up the past, collects the unvarying facts 
from that direction, and throws them forward on the screen of 
the coming years. If these facts have been unvarying in the 
past, they are sure to remain permanent guides for the future. 

In addition to these facts it reveals the processes of life 
as they are being unfolded in the present, and shows their 
infallible control of the future ; for it is a law of action that 
no coming event can originate itself, but must be brought on 
by a chain of causation from preceding conditions. 

The Truth-Teller divides the future of each man and woman 
into three parts : Possibilities, Probabilities and Certainties 
on the bright side ; and into three other parts on the dark 
side : Impossibilities, Improbabilities and Certainties, the last 
being certainties of failure. 



LESSON SIXTY-TWO 

DISCERNING THE TRUTH 

STILL GIVING HEED to the Truth-Teller, we look 
into the homes of those people who have weathered 
the storms of wedlock and are still united in the same 
bonds that first made them mates, and that still hold them 
together. In one village of about two thousand inhabitants, 
whose history we have known personally for over thirty years, 
there has not been a single divorce, nor a single separation 
except by death. In this village, less than ten houses are 
rented in each hundred, the others being owned, some by 
labourers, some by professional people, some by business men, 
and some by persons who are employed in offices or otherwise. 
In every family during the first years of wedlock, there were 
no servants, the wife doing the housework except the laundry 
and occasional cleaning, and the husband attending to his 
duties. In later years a few of the families employed help, 
but we do not know of a single case where the wife gave up 
the cooking or superintending it. Eighty per cent of these 
families were affiliated with some church, but less than half 
of them attended regularly. 

In another town of nearly ten thousand inhabitants, whose 
history we have known personally for over thirty years, the 
same general conditions prevail, and divorce has been almost 
unknown. Some of the families were well-to-do, and employed 
servants ; but not until later years never more than one 
regularly. There was a large proportion of church-going 
people in this town. 

From records made in a number of villages, small towns and 
large towns, grading through small cities up to those of middle 
size, it has been learned that three factors have tended to 
keep married people together : the influence of openly observed 
methods of living, the fact that the wives have been workers 

340 



DISCERNING THE TRUTH 34! 

in their homes, and the general custom of attending church at 
least some of the time. We have a list of seven thousand or 
more small towns where, during a quarter of a century, less 
than one couple in two hundred have been divorced or separated, 
where women work in their own homes, and where church 
influence is active. As the towns become cities, the divorce evil 
grows with the growth of the latter ; we mean pro rata. Thus 
in any large city the proportion of divorces to those of marriages 
is the largest of all. 

When we come to the study of VALUES we shall see the 
reason of this increase. 

We are now taking a stroll with the Truth -Teller, and will 
deal with the wrecks that are made in city life among marriages 
that occur there. For this purpose we will not include wed- 
lock among the poorer classes, as they have wholly different 
problems to face. We will step up a grade or two higher from 
the classes which we discussed in the preceding lesson, and 
find ourselves among the middle ranks of the well-to-do, and 
also among the rich. The TruthTTeller wishes to call attention 
to the following varieties of wedded couples : 

1. Here is a wealthy merchant who has married a young 
woman, the latter vowing that she was attracted by her love 
for him, and not by his wealth. He is still in business, but 
spends his evenings with her when she is at home or goes to 
the opera, the theatre, or visiting. During the day she loafs, 
as he can afford to employ servants. On an average they go 
out two evenings each week, but are at home with each other 
the remaining five evenings. He sits in the library, reads his 
paper and falls asleep. She does fancy-work or reads a novel, 
and eventually retires. The opera bores them both. The 
theatre is barely endurable. Visiting is irksome, because it is 
filled with flattery and insincerity, and is always perfunctory. 
There are occasional outings and short holidays. The husband 
feels that he owns the woman, and she takes advantage of 
her freedom during the day to form indiscreet acquaintances 
in order to make tolerable the dull evenings. There is no 
magnetism ; and all VALUES are lacking. 

2. In another case a rich broker marries a woman for her 
extraordinary beauty. He must devote his time during office 
hours to his work ; so she is left to herself, and becomes a loafer. 



342 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

She rises late in the forenoons, after a lazy breakfast in bed, 
gets through some tedious hours until she can call at her beauty 
parlour, fills in more hours playing bridge, is at home in time for 
the evening meal, drags her husband to some lascivious dance or 
cabaret, drinks liquor and smokes cigarettes to excess despite 
the well-proved fact that these things are responsible for the 
rapidly increasing spread of cancer among her kind and class, 
and gets home in the small hours of the morning or later, having 
spent her vitality and lowered her character in a round of excite- 
ments not one of which is wholesome or productive of enjoyment, 
but all of which are pulling her down to the level of their own 
origin. When these wives do not die early of cancer they 
drift into the lives of libertines, and the history of such women 
confirms the fact that a big percentage of them either are 
divorced sooner or later, or openly defy the law. Taking at 
random the cases of five hundred marriages between men of 
wealth and women of beauty that occurred in a large city, we 
find that in exactly four hundred and three of them the end 
came in the manner described. 

All VALUES are lacking, and magnetism never existed. 
There was nothing to hold those couples together. They all 
regretted the marriage after it was too late. 

The Truth-Teller is able to discern the truth of the future 
by the experiences of the past,__- The Physical Mind will not 
accept the truth of the future. The Magnetic Mind is endowed 
with the power to take advantage of its discernment, and to 
avoid the reefs and dangerous shoals that are wrecking most 
lives and neutralizing the brilliant victories of personal 
magnetism. 

3. In another variety of cases which we will represent by a 
sample only, the wife is decent, she does not drink liquor nor 
smoke cigarettes to excess, nor submit herself to the arms of 
dancing libertines, nor hang around cabarets, nor cultivate indis- 
creet friendships with other men. Her husband is wealthy. He 
must be at his office during the hours of the day, and she is left 
to herself, and becomes unwillingly a loafer. But she is honour- 
able. She is true to her marriage vows. She has but little to 
interest her. He takes her to the opera at times, but she feels 
that it is done to enable her to exhibit her fine clothes. A few 
other diversions fall to her lot. He desires to spend some even- 



DISCERNING THE TRUTH 343 

ings at home ; otherwise home life to him would be narrowed 
by his absence at his office in the day and his drifting out at 
night. So they sit together in a pleasant room. He smokes and 
reads the papers. She either does some fancy-work or reads a 
novel. They rarely speak, for there is nothing to say. In their 
individuaraBsorption they do not always remember that they 
areln each other's presence. Many thousands of moral, decent 
couples drift their lives away in this dull routine. 

In this case all VALUES are lacking, and there is no personal 
magnetism. In a subsequent lesson we shall see what these 
values are, and shall note their great influence over the lives 
of married people. 

The Truth-Teller makes known the fact that men who, prior 
to marriage, are free to come and go as they please, night or 
day, are forced to the humiliation of having to invent explana- 
tions to offer their wives in order to account for their wanderings 
especially after the early morning hours, and are continually 
in hot water in failing to make their explanations convincing ; 
while, on the other hand, wives are expected to account to 
their husbands for absences and adventures. Evasions and the 
humiliation of being compelled to explain one's doings are 
destructive of magnetism, because they make independence 
impossible without warfare, which becomes despicable in wed- 
lock. 

The Magnetic Mind meets all such contingencies. 

The fact that the greatest undertakings in life are totally 
lacking in VALUES is due to the substitutes for magnetism 
thai we are trying to expose and avoid by Lessons Twelve and 
Thirteen of this book. When men and women are influenced in 
the right direction and for their actual benefit, the influencing 
power is magnetism ; but when they are lured to the shoals of 
ruin by the power of their appetites, then they find that the 
enterprise lacks the VALUES which alone bring success and 
triumph. This failure brings emptiness of hope, and an ever 
haunting despair. 



LESSON SIXTY-THREE 

INTRODUCING PHYSICAL VALUES 

PERSONAL MAGNETISM is an exchange of values. 
There are as many values as there are activities and 
things in life. An exchange is not one-sided ; it takes 
but gives at the same time. A one-sided transaction is either 
robbery, cheating_^r fraud i janqL the > world is full of these 
episodes. /Hypnotism L_is the opposite^ of magnetism i; it may 
dull the mind so that any intelligent transaction is impossible. 
Magnetism gives the mind its full powers of operation and 
discernment and endows it with its best qualities. 
VALUES are of three kinds : 

1. Physical. 

2. Plebeian. 

3. Patrician. 

Physical values proceed from the Physical Mind, appeal to 
it, and proceed to it. They are in the lowest stratum of 
personal magnetism, and in the opinion of some teachers they do 
not in any sense involve any phase of that power ; yet they 
rule ninety -nine per cent of all human affairs outside of the actual 
realm of personal magnetism. Here are some instances : 

1. A woman is passing out of her youth, is not able to more 
than support herself from year to year, and saves nothing 
against old age. Her only hope when she is no longer able 
to earn a living is a place in some home for old ladies. A man 
whom she does not love, for she is not capable of the tender 
emotion, offers to marry her, and she accepts. This is an 
example of physical values. In most cases, such a marriage is 
permanent. 

2. A man who is boarding, and does not like the food and 
treatment he is getting, finds a woman who is a good cook 
and a neat housekeeper. He offers her his name, procures a 

344 



INTRODUCING PHYSICAL VALUES 345 

humble home, and enters into an alliance that is abiding. We 
have learned of countless thousands of such cases. If the wife 
is asked if it is a love affair, she generally says, " Oh, pshaw ! 
no ; just a mutual arrangement,*' or something similar. 

3. A man of more than ordinary means is trapped by a 
widow of unusual beauty and more than average avoirdupois. 
She fascinates him. He marries her without an exchange of 
Values. Soon after the wedding, he finds that she is a loafer ; 
all the housework must be done and even looked after by 
servants who are strangers. The cooking leads to indigestion ; 
this to irritability ; this to a sudden awakening ; followed by 
quarrels, and violent outbursts of temper on the part of the 
wife who hurls dishes and other missiles at the head of her 
husband ; and they end their troubles in the divorce courts, the 
husband fighting like a warrior and proving that the woman 
was a mere beauty, a loafer in her home, a bridge-fiend, and 
brutal in her assaults on him. She had anticipated sufficient 
alimony to enable her to live in comfort for the rest of her 
years, but got nothing. The Judge said, " In my thirty years' 
experience I have known of hundreds of cases of such marriages 
where the wives have been mere seekers after leisure and support, 
giving nothing in return, and resorting to violence and physical 
attack on their husbands when they were not successful in their 
schemes. In a matter of life importance like marriage, men 
should have a sufficiently long period of acquaintance with the 
women they wish to make their wives to enable them to know 
who they are and what they are." 

False appeals lead to disaster. 

Many a man has been swung off his mental moorings by a pair 
of legs, and finds himself fettered to a girl or woman who can 
offer in return no Values whatever, for the surfeiting of his 
animal appetite only palls on him. These are the marriages 
that, in every case, are broken either by divorce or by 
separation; and in every instance, when the man is fore- 
warned, he saySj " QiuJKfLJire going to provfii J/QL the world 
tjhatjwe are an exception to the usual cases^' ~ ^The afl 



Since it is tine that unhappy married life hurts if not ruins 
the victims of it, the fact should be hammered home to every 
person, whether now married or not, that there must be an 



346 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

exchange of Values, and these Values are never magnetic if 
merely physical. 

4. A widower of wealth with residences, cars, yacht and 
leisure, marries a woman who gives him nothing in return but 
some of her leisure, some of her display of clothing, some of 
her association, her companionship in travel, and her ability 
to arouse interest among her flatterers by receptions, parties 
and dinners ; all of which bore him and leave her discontented 
and surfeited with life. This same couple could secure from 
their conditions and opportunities, aided by their wealth, a 
genuine enjoyment of existence ; and it need not compel them 
to seek ease of conscience by slumming and ill-directed charities, 
which are forms of repentance of mis- spent lives. But this 
match, like thousands of the same kind, ended in divorce. 
There was no exchange of Values. 

5. A woman of wealth married a poet, and regretted it. 
Her idea was that she should bask in the sunlight of genius. 
Another woman of wealth married a military officer, and 
regretted it. She was attracted by his uniform and the straight 
manner in which he walked or strutted. These became 
monotonous. A young woman of wealth married a chauffeur 
because he was handsome, of fine build, of lovely face, lovely 
eyes and soft-spoken voice. She found soon after that there was 
no exchange of Values, and they were divorced. In almost 
every such case, as in marriages of wealthy girls to poor young 
men, or to rich young rakes, after weathering the storms for 
a few weeks, months or even years, divorce follows. An 
observer of three thousand such cases arising in the past fifteen 
years states that every one of these three thousand were 
divorced or separated ; all unhappy ; all regretful ; all bitter at 
life ; and all because the Physical Mind was unable to discern 
the truth, and the Magnetic Mind did not send the Truth-Teller 
to disclose the certainties of the future. 

Any transaction that is not founded on an exchange of Values 
is a failure, and will be laid bare to the storms of life that must 
follow. Fair-weather success is like a wisp of a boat with 
filmy sails floating idly in summer zephyrs and collapsing at 
the first angry gust of the heavens. The existence of Magnetic 
Values will carry any one through any storm to any port. 

It is a fact that most girls and women prefer to wed a man 



INTRODUCING PHYSICAL VALUES 347 

of means rather than one of poverty ; yet if both are poor and 
work for a competence, the chances for happiness and per- 
manency are increased. Prospective suitors do not know 
generally that their financial rating is investigated, or their 
money worth is ascertained in advance of a proposal, so that 
they may be accepted if satisfactory, or let down easily if not 
wanted. Thus we see that the gentler sex is after physical 
values, and has none to offer in return. Such marriages are 
failures. 

A young man works for his employer the number of hours 
agreed upon and does the kind of work for which he is paid. 
This is an exchange of physical values ; work and faithfulness 
on the one hand, and compensation on the other. There is 
nothing magnetic about it. Let either value fail to meet the 
other, and discontent follows. If the work done is not well 
enough done, or the remuneration too little, the whole arrange- 
ment is likely to collapse. Long years of service faithfully 
performed may be rewarded specially, but still the matter is 
physical. In order to make it magnetic, these values should 
change to those that are either plebeian or patrician, as will 
be seen later on. An exchange of wages for work with nothing 
else involved is the lowest form of human association. 

In sales, the delivery of goods or property for an equivalent 
in money or other value is crude and primitive ; but if each 
sale sends out a drawing influence looking to future transactions, 
it becomes magnetic. 

The same law runs through all the affairs of life. 

The monotony of exchanging something physical for f ;Wwtt 
thing physical is merely dry, vaporized barter and sale, 
whether of property, services or cash. We call a marriage j* 
success if the parties remain together until death, following a 
humdrum existence, securing a living and escaping poverty. 
Yet it is colourless, for it is only an exchange of Physica^ 
Values. On the other hand the attempt to avoid this humdrum 
existence leads to separation. The solution is the exchange otf 
Magnetic Values. 



LESSON SIXTY-FOUR 

MAGNETIC VALUES 

FROM THE BEGINNING of human intercourse there 
have been exchanges of Values, but probably they 
have all been of a physical nature. Once there was 
no money, and other things had to be used for payment in 
sales and trades. In the material world, it sometimes happens 
that payment is made in equivalents that are neither money 
nor property. At a charitable affair fair kisses are sold at 
so much each to raise money for a good cause. This may be 
classed as a service or a favour. The husband who gave up his 
liberty for the joy of possessing a wife, and who remains out 
so late at night that he cannot adequately explain his absence, 
finds a way to buy peace and reconciliation by gifts of jewellery, 
or a fur coat ; this being an exchange of material value for a 
smile, a kiss and forgiveness. Some wives handle these 
situations skilfully. But the real worth of marriage will have 
departed, ^-w^with wedlock that rich old fools purchase when 
gifts to maidens fair in exchange for their 
Animal appetites destroy the judgment, 
and ^jmSho magnetism to guide them off the shoals. 

We hlive seen in the preceding lesson that there are three 
binds of Values ; the Physical, the Plebeian, and the Patrician. 
The first of these was disposed of in that lesson. When it suc- 
ceeds it is because policy is the ruling power. The husband 
who provides a home and support in exchange for the services of 
a woman who is a good cook and housekeeper is following the 
law of policy ; and she is doing the same. It is a very im- 
portant exchange of Values ; and there is no denying the great 
fact that any kind of Values that are fairly exchanged are 
nearly always fruitful in permanent content ; while the lack of 
mutual Values even of a magnetic character is one-sided and 

permanency is threatened. 

34 8 




MAGNETIC VALUES 349 

The Magnetic Values are : 

1. Plebeian ; or 

2. Patrician, 

In this division we do not intend to present the plebeian 
values as unworthy. On the other hand they are all of them 
of the utmost worth in their class. Let us look at some of them : 

1. A married man who furnishes home and support to the 
woman whom he has married in exchange for her cooking and 
housework is following out the law of policy in a very equitable 
bargain. But both he and she may be totally lacking in 
Magnetic Values. 

This principle is valuable. 

To possess these Values of the plebeian class, he should be : 

Neat, well-dressed even in his lounging hours, clean, polite, 
considerate, generous, sympathetic, helpful, good-dispositioned, 
cheerful, of proper taste in most things if not in all, observant 
of the rules of good form and etiquette as far as his mode of 
life demands, decent in his language, free from profane or 
obscene talk or suggestion, dignified when he should be, and 
respectful of the views and beliefs of others. His breath should 
not be foul ; his teeth should have no ulcerated roots or rotten 
cavities ; his nose and throat should be free from catarrh ; his 
tonsils should not be discharging pus ; and he should not be 
suffering from intestinal poisoning which is sure to find its 
way to his breath and skin. 

These are just practical suggestions of the Values that make 
a man personally desirable to a woman. 

Refinement in life has no limit. 

Good taste need not drive a man into classical music or 
classical literature ; but the man that invented certain jazz 
music, the man that plays it, the man that dances to it and 
the man that willingly listens to it, in many instances belong to 
that hopeless class of vapid minds that are never capable of 
possessing Magnetic Values in any department of life ; for 
they are skim-coated thinkers that lack the basic elements 
of greatness in any degree. You never see the solid sense of 
any respected man or woman jigging itself away to such 
semi-crazy contortions of music. 

2. A married woman should be all that the man should be, 



350 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

as far as we have described his plebeian values. We call them 
plebeian because they may be adopted, assumed, worn for a 
day or on special occasions ; yet when so exhibited they do 
exert a most powerful magnetic influence towards winning suc- 
cess. Of course the abiding kinds are the patrician, for they 
grow into a person and are not taken on or dropped as con- 
venience and policy may decree. These we shall discuss later. 

It is claimed that marriage and employment are the two 
greatest influences in the world. It is because of marriage 
that the race remains on earth ; and this institution includes 
home and home support, raising and furnishing supplies for 
home ; also it includes the blood relationships of all kinds, with 
endless ties. Employment involves the employer and the em- 
ployee ; but in the sense in which we use it, the services of 
professional skill, as of the lawyer, the doctor and the dentist 
are not included. They belong to their own class. Business 
and industrial enterprises require the employing of many 
millions of people in this country, and of millions in any other 
large country. 

Employment is divided into several grades : that of the 
common labourer being the lowest ; that of the skilled artisan 
next higher ; that of the expert still higher. In business the 
employees are generally those of common labour, and clerks 
or salesmen. Then come office employees, and a variety of 
others in countless lines. Railway, industrial and other cor- 
porations offer employment to men and women ; but mostly 
to men. 

In every kind of employment there is a large magnet, invisible 
but felt and recognized by magnetic employees, which is hung 
at the top of the whole system, and which exerts a great drawing 
power over all who are below it ; seeking to draw them up, up, 
always up. This drawing power possesses the highest magnetic 
value in human existence. 

An employee who meets in a perfunctory manner the duties 
ot his work, who gets through the hours from start to finish 
each day, who does no more than he needs do in order to keep 
his position may be said to be exchanging physical values 
for physical values. But if he seeks to better himself by a 
genuine faithfulness to his work and takes an interest in it, 
he is exchanging plebeian values for the hope of betterment. 



MAGNETIC VALUES 351 

But this is not all that he can do. The great magnet that hangs 
overhead is not drawing him up. 

The merely perfunctory employee, who gets through the 
hours with the least wear and tear on his energies, is too 
numerous to be described. Sometimes he is a heavy cigarette 
smoker. The habit that is now so common among the labour- 
ing classes of lighting from ten to twenty cigarettes every 
hour is gradually working against their interests. A con- 
struction concern that employs twelve hundred carpenters, 
when there is a slackening of their work, always dismisses the 
cigarette smokers first, and retains those that do not indulge in 
this habit ;~and in hiring others later on as business gets better, 
avoids employing those who are addicted to this habit. 

A construction company that hired over sixteen hundred 
men, by observation ascertained that those who spent time 
enough each hour to light a dozen or more cigarettes, required 
nearly half their time to accomplish this perpetual feat ; and 
in these days when labour is demanding three hundred per cent 
more than normal wages, if half the time is wasted in lighting 
cigarettes, then the wages are doubled by that condition beyond 
the price demanded. 

Similar reports show that with each cessation of activity in 
business or construction, the men who will be the first to lose 
their jobs are the cigarette smokers. There is now a growing 
understanding among great employing concerns that the non- 
smokers will be retained even when there is not enough work 
for them to do rather than lose them. 

We looked three years ago into a vast office building where 
on one floor a large number of men were employed. Recently 
we again looked there and made the following enquiry : " Where 
are the cigarette smokers ? " The answer came, " Hunting jobs 
elsewhere. We have no rule against smoking, but we found 
that the mistakes and the slow work were chargeable to the 
men who used cigarettes. Instead of discharging them, we 
gradually let them go as the work slackened, and put on non- 
smokers as it became brisk again. All other offices that we 
know about are doing the same thing. The cigarette is 
sapping brain, blood and vitality out of strong men and making 
them slaves to the habit ; and we do not wish to have slaves 
work for us." 



352 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

There are thousands of men employed in retail stores 
and in places of retail business ; and the cigarette smoker is 
barred from them ; and, where he refrains during working 
hours, but is known to indulge in the habit outside, he is in many 
instances the first to lose his position when a change is made. 

Magnetism is the opposite of slavery ; and a habit that makes 
a slave of a man is a barrier to the attainment of magnetism. 

Addicts of any bad habit make the specious claim that, at 
least outside the hours and places of employment they may 
do as they please ; so they make themselves unfit for day work 
by night orgies of various kinds. We cited the case of a large 
number*cJ young women employees in a great office, many of 
whom were yawning while trying to work ; indicating that they 
were wasting their physical, mental and nervous energies by 
late hours at night. These women were gradually eliminated 
from their positions, although many of them were helping to 
support dependent parents. The question arose, did it pay 
to sacrifice golden opportunity for the greed of exhausting 
pleasures ? 

Employers now have a way of learning how those who work 
for them spend their time outside the employment ; not in- 
tending to spy on their help, but to be able to advance those 
whose habits are good ; for it is the fairest scheme in the world 
to help those who are trying to help themselves. 

True character can bear being watched. 

The head of one of the great corporations of this country 
told us that it was their policy to advance their employees who 
were of good habits and were efficient, and were enabled to 
do so because their private lives were investigated and given 
consideration in connection with their faithfulness as em- 
ployees. Magnetic values always win success. 



LESSON SIXTY-FIVE 

SPIRIT OF PERSONAL IMPROVEMENT 

E1VING THE LESSER POWERS to the brief ac- 
counts already given, we hurry on to the real climax 
of applied magnetism, as we take up the study of 
greater things. When we speak of values we do not refer to 
money or property, but to qualities and evidences of worth. 
Money and property are agencies of the blessings they are 
charged with bringing to people ; and are not the final goal of 
ambition in any true life. We have shown that Values of the 
physical kind may, if exchanged evenly, serve as imitations or 
substitutes of those that are magnetic. The latter we have 
divided into two classes ; one plebeian and the other patrician. 
Plebeian Values are those that are higher and nobler than the 
physical kind, yet are not engrafted on the life of the individual, 
but may be put on and laid off at will. Despite this limitation 
they are magnetic in a moderate degree. 

To understand the enormously high worth of Patrician 
Values, or those that cannot be assumed and cast aside at will, 
but that are made a part of the individual, we should note the 
status of the Plebeian Values by way of review, which will be 
very brief. Thus some embryo book of personal magnetism 
teaches that politeness develops this power, among many other 
things. Politeness is something that can be put on and laid off 
at will. At home you assume no specially kind or attractive 
tones, but use your commonplace voice. A caller comes to see 
you whom you wish to impress favourably, and at once you put 
on what is called your " Sunday voice." Everybody does this. 
When the visitor departs, you lay aside your assumed tones 
and come back to the common style of talking. The difference 
is marked to any observer who studies you. So with your 
manners, your graciousness and your attentiveness. 

All these are Plebeian Values ; they all lead to a moderate 

353 



354 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

degree of personal magnetism ; but they never ascend the 
heights, for anything that can be put on and taken off 
at will is transient and not deep enough to have become 
inherent. 

The same thing might be said of the Patrician Values. It is 
true that they can be assumed ; but only by an effort great 
enough to make them permanent. Experience shows that once 
they are engrafted on the personality of the individual, they 
remain for life. Employment, marriage and business together 
with the professions, embrace nearly all the activities of 
humanity. It is in these departments of existence that the 
power of personal magnetism finds its opportunities of achieving 
their victories ; and these we must consider as we unfold the 
present lesson. 

The Sgirit of Personal Improvement is one of the Patrician 
Values. 

This spirit itself is magnetic. It is not a state or condition 
but a movement ; it goes forward, never backward, and never 
stands still ; for all of which reasons it is bound to exert unusual 
power over the life of the individual. If it once acquires 
momentum it does not stop. But it will not operate through 
the physical mind. A higher faculty is necessary to set it 
going. This is the whole trouble. The physical mind cannot 
be convinced that every step in the personal improvement of 
mind and body adds value to every department of life, and by 
building a better general individual builds a better man or 
woman in some special line of activity. The instances of the 
usefulness of this law are numerous. Take the case of Lawrence 
Barrett that we have mentioned in some former lesson ; when 
a lad he was not only poor but uneducated. When he became 
an actor, he did not stop with that profession, but became a 
scholar in all general lines of mental growth ; and his scholar- 
ship was reflected in his dramatic career. 

In law it is well known that the higher a man rises in his 
general knowledge of history, literature, rhetoric, language and 
the biographies of great men and women, as well as in many 
of the college branches, the better lawyer he will become. A 
one-sided mentality is not attractive. Every great lawyer has 
been highly educated in other lines, or he could not have been 
great. The value of this all-round knowledge is recognized by 



SPIRIT OF PERSONAL IMPROVEMENT 355 

the requirements now made when applicants are examined for 
admission to the bar. 

But we know of a young lawyer who, instead of sitting with 
his feet on the table waiting for clients to call, utilized his time 
collecting forms, copying written pleadings in other cases on 
file in clerks' offices, learning how to carry cases up to higher 
courts on appeal, saving exceptions, making bills in chancery or 
equity, preparing unusual papers by studying those that had 
been drawn for past trials, copying contracts and recorded 
deeds, leases, wills and countless other documents ; all of which 
he kept at hand in his office so that during his otherwise idle 
hours he could make himself familiar with them. Clients 
employ lawyers because of their experience ; this line of experi- 
ence consists in having had contact with such writings. The 
result was that the young lawyer rose rapidly in his profession 
and was often called into consultation by older attorneys in im- 
portant cases where technical knowledge was needed. Evenings 
he read and studied books that made him a finely educated man. 

The young and ambitious artist, if guided by his physical 
mind, will devote his many idle hours to reading novels, thus 
weakening the artistic temperament. His theory is that all he 
needs, after graduating from an art school is to go out and paint 
when the weather is fit, send his work to shows or dealers, and 
wonder why the cheques never appear. Ihe would lay aside 
his novel and absorb the history of mankind instead ; and, as 
companion to such study /master the finer phases of rhetoric^ pj 
grammar, of the forgotten matters of his earlier schpolingj read 
ihe biographies of great men and women ; and inform himself 
about the lives and characteristics of other peoples the world 
over ; he would be adding true values to the little that Nature 
Has bestowed upon him, ; for artists are not made by art schools. 
There never was a real artist who was not a poet by inclina- 
tion ; he may never have written a line, but he has caught the 
sacred fire by absorbing the spirit of the geniuses of the past. 
If he can arouse this fire in himself by reading and being thrilled 
by the fancies of such geniuses, he may find himself an artist 
some day. Novel-reading dries up the fancy, shrivels the 
imagination, and lowers the mental tone so that all he has left 
is the inclination to go out on days when the weather is fit and 
try his hand at painting something. 



356 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

The poetry that is necessary in the life of the artist is seen 
working its charms when it leads the painter out where Nature 
has preceded him in her works of art. The man or woman who 
goes out for miles to try a hand at painting something sees 
nothing worth painting until some attractive scene is reached. 
The true artist sees values everywhere ; he passes countless 
wealth in landscape, the sky, the river, the fields, the forests, the 
drooping foliage, the flowering roadside ; to him there are 
" sermons in stones, books in the running brooks, and good 
in everything. " He is alert. He sees. He feels. He will 
succeed. 

The Spirit of Personal Improvement is at work in him. 

It goes with him through life. 

Drop into some retail shop, and note the assistants that have 
nothing to do while waiting for patrons. They discuss all the 
gossip of the times. They idle away many valuable hours 
every day of their lives. In one group of assistants was a young 
man who sought the Spirit of Personal Improvement. One 
day he brought a small pocket dictionary, and consulted it 
during the periods when little demand was made on his services. 
A customer entered the shop. Other assistants who were ab- 
sorbed in some news, emerged slowly from behind their 
counters, but the assistant with the dictionary put it quickly in 
his pocket, and was the first to greet the customer. This was 
always the case. The manager eventually noticed this fact. 
One day the head of the firm said to the manager, " Can you 
find out what kind of a book that assistant is reading when he 
has nothing to do ? " He did find out. It was a dictionary. 
On another day the assistant had a different looking book ; 
it was about grammar. On still another day he brought a 
third book ; it was about rhetoric. Later on, when the head 
of the firm knew these things, he instructed his manager to see 
that the assistant's wages were raised under an agreement that 
nothing was to be said to the other employees, and with the 
impression that no one but the manager was to know of the 
increase. 

In the course of time the head of the firm called the assistant 
into his private office and said to him : 

" Young man, you have been in my employ three years. 
Is that so ? " 



SPIRIT OF PERSONAL IMPROVEMENT 357 

The sternness of the enquiry alarmed the youth, who replied 
timidly, " It is true, sir." 

" Well, during that period do you know how much of my 
time has been used by you reading books that you have con- 
cealed in your pockets ? " 

" I was not reading exactly, but studying. I thought I might 
improve myself in that way. Besides I did not encroach on any 
of your time, as I always was ready to wait on customers." 

" You had your evenings to yourself. Why use my time at 
the shop doing what you could do at home in the evenings ? 
Was that right ? " 

" I have always had work to do at home helping my mother 
who is not well ; and besides, when I did have any spare time 
in the evenings I read history and literature and other things 
from books too big to bring to the shop." 

" Well, as you admit that you have used my time for three 
years for which you have been paid by the firm, what adjust- 
ment do you propose to make ? " 

" I will leave that to you, sir." 

" Well, I do not wish to be hard on you. I am starting a 
large branch in another part of the city nearer to your mother's 
home. I will offer you the position of manager at double the 
salary you are now receiving, in addition to which I will admit 
you to a limited partnership, so that while your income will be 
assured, it may be largely increased by the profits from the 
branch. You know we do not do business without profits." 

The assistant was astonished, and remained silent for a time, 
his employer watching him closely. When he was able to 
express himself, he enquired : 

" Why are you so kind to me, sir ? " 

" I am kind to myself," said the employer. " Your private 
life is known to me. It is exemplary. Your habits are clean. 
My other assistants are time-wasters. You will never be poor. 
They will never be worth any more than they are now. Mark 
me, you will never be poor." 

You, who are reading these pages, do you know that you and 
countless thousands of other employees have exactly the same 
opportunity for advancement, if you are working at a salary ? 
Your physical mind will say, " Oh, what's the use ? " If you 
proceed far enough to awaken your Magnetic Mind, its Truth- 



358 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Teller will convey to you the information that there hangs 
above you in your employment a magnet which is there to draw 
you up, up, up ! 

The process is easy. 

Just let the Spirit of Personal Improvement enter your life 
and begin to do its work. 

The Unseen Magnet is hanging over the head of each and 
every man and woman who adopts this Spirit of Personal 
Improvement ; and it affects every phase of human life every- 
where. It appears not only in the results of each line of 
business, but in all employment, and also in the larger work of 
those who conduct the great affairs of the world, no matter 
what they may be. 

We are greatly pleased to have learned that our efforts on be- 
half of employees and employers in this one line alone have been 
wonderfully rewarded, and we have been informed that wher- 
ever there has been a sincere attempt to put into practice this 
Spirit of Personal Improvement, the most remarkable success 
has resulted. We have inspired thousands of young men and 
women to add values to themselves in this way, and we know of 
no case where they have not risen rapidly and to great heights 
compared with the prospects that confronted them before they 
undertook this method of betterment. 

A fertile mind is necessarily magnetic ; and such a mind is 
able to find ways and means of self-improvement. It may be 
in one direction, or in another ; but the great fact must be met 
that, on the one hand, there is the inclination to waste minutes 
and hours, to get through the day with the least effort possible, 
to even be on time and to remain until the last minute attending 
to the absolutely necessary duties, yet doing so in a perfunctory 
manner ; while, on the other hand, there are countless little 
ways in which human values may be acquired and added to 
every person who seeks the higher and better things of life. 
We have cited a few examples only ; but a book might be 
written on those that remain. 

We are proud of the fact that large business concerns and 
other employers are making use of these lessons in order to 
encourage their employees to improve themselves. 



LESSON SIXTY-SIX 

MAGNETIC INITIATIVES 

WHATEVER MAKES A PERSON more valuable to 
himself will make him more valuable to others ; and 
the reverse of this proposition is true. There is 
another reverse condition that is not given much attention. 
It is this : Personal improvement lifts the individual up 
because of the power of its influence ; and a person is improved 
and lifted up by associating with thoughts, ideas, impulses and 
individuals that are higher in life than the person. To seek one's 
associates among those of a lower level draws downward the 
whole character ; to seek them among those on the same 
level maintains the same level ; but to seek them among 
those of a high level draws upward the character and the 
individual. 

These are all magnetic forces ; and they are at work in 
millions of lives every day. 

Ideals -ajKLambitions __a!sp are magnetic j they may be born 
injbhe appetites which we have discussed in the Secojad Depart- 
ment of this book ; and if so they draw downward. _ They jnay 
seek only the physical levels of TSfejjind so carry people through 
the monotony of existence to the grave. But if they are born 
qfjrreat andjnoble desires, they draw upward. It is not at all 
difficult to find these high levels ; and even to find associates 
among people who occupy higher stations in life. In your 
friendships and affiliations do not stoop ; but rather rise. 

Out of this habit of looking upward and forward comes the 
Spirit of Initiative. This seems on its face like some fanciful 
dream. But it is just as practical as the Spirit of Personal 
improvement that we discussed in the preceding lesson. Let 
us look at what it can do, by again visiting the place of employ- 
ment where young men may choose their own fate by their 
determination to add magnetic values to themselves. We 

359 



360 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

will cite two little histories that came to our personal attention 
many years ago. 

A young man who had risen to the position of a salesman, 
and who was given by his employer full power to allow credit 
to buyers, or to deny credit, or after having allowed it, to cut 
it off, found that the country was on the verge of a widespread 
business panic. He did what no other salesman did as far as 
his thoroughness went. He had a list of all the concerns and 
individuals who sought credit of his employer. The great 
mercantile agency that was employed at a yearly cost at that 
time of twenty pounds, had not been called upon to furnish 
reports outside of its general publication and occasional 
bulletins. This young man asked privatejreports on each 
and every debtor of his employer ; and followed this request 
every month ; paying the extra cost when it was incurred. 

The result was that he was enabled to_eliminate every debtor 
who was verging on bankruptcy, to deny further credit, to 
collect what was due, and to close their accounts. When the 
full blast of the panic struck the business of the nation, which 
occurred in less than a year, not a shilling was lost through 
bad debts to this employer. The young man had carried on 
his investigations without beingtold to do so, without informing 
his employer what he was doing, and with the utmost discretion 
from beginning to end. When the employer came through 
unscathed, he learned of the long and very tedious campaign 
of the young salesman, and in time made him a partner, when 
the business assumed its normal prosperity. 

This is the Spirit of Initiative. 

It was the right thing to do. But no other salesman did it. 
It was taking the initiative. Even the employer would not 
have thought of doing it or of ordering it to be done. 

Another instance of the same spirit came to our attention 
many years ago. In a certain city, the business of which was 
largely devoted to one kind of manufacture, namely, the 
making of shoes, there were a number of goat and kid con- 
cerns engaged competitively in supplying their goods to the 
shoe concerns. The salesrooms were piled up with great 
supplies, from which the buyers from the shoe factories were 
enabled to select the kinds and quantities they desired. In 
order to meet with the exact demands of these buyers, a 



MAGNETIC INITIATIVES tfl 

targe assortment of goat and kid skins were carried in stock 
that were not saleable in the dull years. 

A young man who had risen to the position of head sales- 
man of one of these leather concerns, seeing the loss entailed 
by the practice of carrying many thousands of skins for which 
there was no^steady demand, adopted the following course 
without the knowledge of his employer : He made a tour of 
enquiry among all the shoe manufacturers, noting in a book 
the information he obtained, which included the number of 
skins generally required each year, the kinds, the grades, the 
styles of finish and other details of importance. He also 
learned the time of year each of these would be needed. He 
then made a monthly tour of these places in order to keep in 
touch with them. It so happened that a large majority of 
the concerns visited were the regular customers of his com- 
petitors, and wore riot inclined to deal with him on that 
account. He met this objection by arranging with the factories 
which he represented to produce the grades, kinds and finishes 
that were to be required by the shoe manufacturers ; so that 
when they could not find exactly what they needed elsewhere, 
they were compelled to buy of him. 

The result of this method was that his employer no longer 
carried useless stocks ; and was able t^ dispose of all the goods 
that his factories could produce. More thai?, this, the business 
grew steadily and became very profitable. The employer asked 
his salesman how he happened to think of the plan that had 
proved so successful. The latter said, ci I found myself idling 
away hours of time daily with a very dull business. I had time 
to slip out and visit the offices of the buyers. I had to choose 
between doing this or really doing nothing. What moved me 
most was the fact that so many grades were being carried in 
order to meet the requirements of the trade ; and I thought if 
we could know what the coming demands were to be, we could 
make our goods for such demands. It succeeded." 

Some years ago we put the question to a large number of 
business men, asking them how many kinds of initiative of the 
true kind they could think of as possible in their business, and 
they admitted that they had never thought of such efforts in 
the right way ; but the result of the enquiry was that they 
could see at least five hundred important steps could be taken 



362 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

in advancing their interests. Some mentioned one or two ; 
others many more ; and a few as many as fifty different 
methods of betterment. Once their minds were started 
thinking in the right direction, they made great progress. 

All employees hold in their own hands their fate and their 
future ; but initiatives are not confined to this class. Employers 
have come to see a great light. Professional men and women 
have done the same. The whole secret consists in waking up 
to begin with, and in looking present conditions in the face ; 
then matching every present condition with what it would 
be if it were made better. Some persons are rather favoured 
by a spirit of insight into possibilities that escapes others. 
Henry Clay Frick rose from a boyhood of poverty to become 
Carnegie's most valuable assistant, solely by his insight into 
the possibilities of initiative activity. 

It is a splendid training, this habit of looking for ways of 
betterment. It is valuable in home life and in personal self- 
improvement. But whenever started, it sheds an influence 
on all departments of daily existence, and reaches out in many 
directions. It is magnetic because it leads the way to success. 
Millions of minds are apparently dead to-day in lives that are 
stagnant, that might be aroused by this spirit, and become 
tremendous factors in building new hopes. 

We have in this lesson dealt with business matters, but the 
same principle of magnetic initiatives will apply with equal 
force and value to all the relationships of life. The most 
inviting field for such endeavour is in the home. There is 
too much routine there ; too many days of constantly repeated 
humdrum existence ; too little real home-interest by the 
husband, and a consequent loss of interest by the wife. A 
sweeping improvement may be made if one or both will adopt 
the magnetic initiatives, and awaken a vital desire to make 
the home mean all that its name should imply and inspire. 
Then a new world will be discovered. 



LESSON SIXTY-SEVEN 

MAGNETIC MARGINS 

THE STUDY OP LIFE is as endless as are the activities 
of life. We come now to a different line of practice, 
which may be summed up in a few words. Always 
retain some margin in everything. There are other meanings 
for the same word, but in our study we refer solely to progress 
or distance in what we do. There are other ways of stating 
it, that do not convey all that is intended. Thus we might 
say, never reach the limit. Or, keep back some power. Or, 
display a reserved and repressed energy. There are still 
other ways of saying some part of the same thing. But the 
fact is that no person remains magnetic who does not leave 
some margin in everything. 

Examples are very numerous, and only a few can be given. 
If you rise from the table with your appetite fully satisfied, 
you are weaker than if you had risen slightly hungry. In any 
physical effort, if you use the last ounce of your strength, you 
weaken yourself. In making an address, as where the inex- 
perienced lawyer speaks to the court, if he throws into it all 
his vitality, he soon tires those who hear him. We once had 
the pleasure of studying the methods of a great advocate who 
was struggling to win a case in which his client was entitled 
to victory, but which was combated by almost insurmountable 
opposition aided by a combination of influences that seemed 
too great to be overcome. This lawyer in his final address 
seemed to have reached his limit of power, but a reserved force 
was apparent ; this he drew upon, and again seemed to have 
reached his limit, when a new degree of energy was apparent, 
and so on step by step until he reached heights of magnetism 
that towered above all opposition ; and he won. He after- 
wards told us that at no time did he reach a limit ; and that 
accounted for his constant increase of power. 

363 



364 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

Satiety in any form is not only not magnetic, but it is 
destructive of what magnetism has already been acquired. 
In a life of ambition there is always the zest of striving for 
victory ; but let one's ambitions be fully realized, then the 
zest is gone. Wealth won after a struggle is stale. AJdfejrf 
ease is wholly devoid of magnetism. The greatest form of 
happiness is the striving after something not yet attained. 

In courtship and marriage this law runs true at all times 
and in many ways. A margin is always magnetic here ; and 
marriage is the greatest and most extensive institution in the 
world. Courtship is supposed to consist of the effort of the 
man to win the consent of the woman to marry him. When 
! this phase of it is true, as long as the prize has not been attained, 
it is highly valued ; but when attained .ancLaL jense of owner- 
shig^ follows,_the value_js lessened.- On the other hand, the 
general fact is that the man is sought by the woman where he 
is above the average of his sex ; but it is not always the case 
that he knows it. She may lead him on by an appeal to his 
appetite of one kind or another. If no margin is left in the 
winning of him, then as soon as he realizes that satiation has 
been reached, he loses his interest. 

It is an old philosophy that teaches women to keep suitors 
far enough away to prevent reaching the limit. A courtship 
that reaches the climax before marriage generally falls to 
pieces. It is the lure of the unattainable that draws a man 
towards a woman ; never the satiety of the attainable. By 
following this rule, many a woman has exerted a substitute for 
magnetism that has won a good husband ; whereas had she 
given herself unreservedly to the man, he would have tired of 
her ; and if he tired of her before marriage he would have done 
so most decidedly afterwards. There is a great fascination 
which a man has for a woman whom he cannot approach to 
'the limit, which is wholly lost when she permits him to approach 
her prior to wedlock. 

In displays of affection whether before or after marriage, 
satiety kills the desire or lessens it. Too much personal handling 
of a woman by a man leads her to ask either orally or silently 
if he will not please stop gauging her over. She thinks it, if she 
does not speak it. Too much kissing or embracing may reach 
satiety and cease to be desired keenly. It is better to leave 



MAGNETIC MARGINS 365 

a margin. After maniage^fiatiety inihe gexual_ agpetite which 
is reached by the^man more readily than by the woman, kills 
tEe^magnetism of love more quickly than any l^hWlnHuence 
in lile. The man at once becomes unattractive, seems selfish, 
sluggish, irritable, exhausted, and not the same being who once 
told her that she was the most adorable woman in the world and 
he could not exist without her. In his state of satiety he seems 
to bristle all over with the thought of don't touch me, I'm tired 
of the sight of you. This satiety is the cause of nearly all the 
quarrels of marriage ; for it opens the way to ill-natured dis- 
cussions in which the man thinks himself free to say what he 
pleases to hurt his wife's feelings, since now he owns her and 
can let loose his natural self, which he concealed in the glare of 
courtship. 

The wife is always attractive to the husband as long as he 
desires her companionship ; and he can keep her attractive for 
a lifetime by learning the simple lesson of so mastering himself 
as never to reach the point of satiation. He then becomes a 
different being ; and to him she is far different. It is a self- 
apgarent fact that s^^uaj, ...fijfttjfttSL completely expels magnetism 
Jrom the individual. .If it preceded any great effort as where 
a public speaker sought to sway a vast audience, failure of the 
most dismal kind would be the result. By the same process, 
the keen edge of love and the joy of companionship are lost in 
married life. 

Desire is magnetic when there are true values to exchange. 

The unmagnetic people of the world always seek to reach 
every limit in matters in which they engage. If they enjoy 
dancing, they must overdo it and carry it into the early hours 
of the morning. Many a woman who is seeking her living by 
employment, instead of trying to improve herself for higher 
stations in life, runs her vitality to shreds by late hours at 
night, and yawns away the following days in a mental con- 
dition unfit for genuine work. Married couples waste too many 
night hours in excess of card-playing, stopping only when the 
limit of time is reached ; not knowing that a reasonable 
attention to any pleasure is better than such excess. 

Margins may become very magnetic by reason of their 
fascinating power of arousing the keenest interest in life. Take 
for instance the argument made by a man and his wife that all 



366 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

money that comes in shall be subjected to a regular budget, by 
which the expenses shall be kept less than the receipts. Both 
know at the end of every month how much has come in, how 
much has gone out, what remains, and the plan of saving this 
margin between the receipts and the expenditures. Then things 
that he would otherwise have bought will be found not needed ; 
and the same with her. Where such margins have been secured 
in married life, if reports that have come to us may be said to 
indicate the general facts, there have been none of the mis- 
understandings and consequent ill-feelings that occur when 
husband and wife are not fully cognizant of the financial 
conditions that prevail in their home. 

We have in mind a cottage built twenty-five years ago, 
planned by husband and wife the year before they were married, 
a little six-room house, with a small gar3en in front and a good- 
sized garden in the rear, in which both took part when the land 
needed to be cultivated ; and six neat little rooms inside the 
house, bright and attractive ; being gradually paid for as the 
husband's business prospered, until all debts were paid, and a 
goodly sum now is invested in bonds and mortgages ; the result 
of severe struggles and self-denial in their first years of wedlock, 
in which the wife made as many sacrifices as the husband, all 
the while seeking firmly to preserve the margin that made this 
success possible. They have a married daughter who with her 
husband is following this same law of margin ; not flippantly 
wasting all they receive, but building for the happiness of the 
future. 

These cases are not rare. Thanks to the study of magnetism 
they are becoming more and more numerous. There is a 
solidity and permanency to all marriages that are brought 
under the influence of the margins to which we have referred. 

The result is the solidity of the home institution, and the per- 
manency of home life and happiness. By consultation with the 
Truth -Teller which is described a few lessons prior to this, the 
countless mistakes that make all living wretched are avoided ; 
for all future possibilities and certainties are made clear. 



LESSON SIXTY-EIGHT 

THE VANISHING ILLUSION 

MARRIED LIFE, as has been said, is the most exten- 
sive and most numerous institution in the world. 
JFpr this reason it should be made the basis of the 
greatest uses of personal magnetism. Centuries ago when 
wives did hot often leave their husbaiids, they were not held 
to marriage by love any more than to-day, but by compulsion. 
There are some tribes and castes of peoples even in these times 
that require the death of the wife as the necessary fulfilment of 
her marriage vows in case her husband should die. Gradually 
going backward in time in our own history we drift to the same 
tendency in spirit at least ; and the placing of the woman on 
the same level of freedom with the husband to-day is the newest 
phase of human progress. 

This equality and perfect freedom of the sexes are gradually 
changing all the old standards of marriage. Wives may now 
work in offices and places of business, and support themselves 
if they so choose ; and in the large cities the ties of wedlock are 
so very thin and attenuated that a wife is at liberty to associate 
in almost any way she pleases with the husband of some other 
woman. The result of this ultra freedom is that almost all 
marriages are either falling apart, or the parties drift away by 
the law of counter attractions. Years ago the motive for 
marriage was the desire of the wife for a home and support, and 
the wish of the man for a housekeeper." Now the woman is 
able to support herself, and the man finds that his wife is not 
willing to cook or keep house, or manage his home for him. 

No other magnet is active in bringing men and women 
together except the sexual appetite ; young men and women 
are rapidly learning that this magnet need not lead to wedlock. 

The question then arises, why should a man and woman 

marry. One other magnet remains, and that is what is called 

367 



368 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 
love. Buit is anemqtin that 




is laved, as soon as 
Elusion vanishes, love flees^jespecially in this age of freedom, 
equafitjTofthe sexes, and easy divorce. Ofevery one hundred 
love-marriages, not more than two remain love-marriages, even 
where the couples live together. The question still pursues us, 
why marry ? 

The answer is : Do not allow the illusion to vanish. 

Of what is the illusion composed ? Take the case of the 
man who has been placed on a high pedestal during courtship, 
because his fiancee believes him to be what he has seemed to her 
to be. She was led to believe that he was neat, clean, attractive 
in body and mind, and of good disposition. These are not 
impractical dreams ; for they might have been what they pur- 
ported to be. What poorer investment is there in wedlock 
than the easy readiness to cast off neatness, cleanliness, 
physical attractiveness, mental attractiveness and a winning 
disposition ? The husband may not think it matters much 
that he has not visited a dentist for months, that his teeth are 
decaying and give out a terribly offensive odour, that they are 
infected at the roots by ulcers that poison the blood, and that 
his tonsils are emitting pus that flows forward in the mouth 
and lubricates his kisses. It is said by dentists that nine in 
every ten men who are married to refined women are afflicted 
in the manner just stated. How can it be possible that 
women retain any love or even respect for such husbands ? The 
woman is equally guilty, but not in so large a number of cases. 

Then comes the bad breath odour that attends men and 
women who are suffering from intestinal poisoning ; which 
malady also causes all catarrhs and all forms of body odour. 
Nor is the bath visited often enough. Neglect in dressing and 
in personal refinement plays a large part hi the losing of love. 

Men and women were not made equal in the sense of being 
like each other in qualities and attributes. The man who is 
mentally virile and morally upright, is the best ideal ; and the 
woman who is morally upright and mentally beautiful is the 
best ideal in her sex. Masculinity in women is not Nature. By 
birth she is a creature of refinement, daintiness, purity and 
sweetness ; and only her hard struggles in life or her inherent 
wantonness can estrange her from these qualities. The 



THE VANISHING ILLUSION 369 

husband who maintains his status as virile and upright, is never 
likely to lose the love of his wife if she is normal morally ; 
provided he gives due attention to the matters we have dis- 
cussed on the previous page. The wife who maintains her 
status as refined, dainty, pure and sweet, who cultivates a 
beautiful mind and is morally upright, is secure in her husband's 
love, provided she gives attention to the matters to which we 
have referred. 

But magnetism includes an exchange of Values in marriage ; 
and these are not appeals to the Appetites. One Patrician 
Value on the part of the wife requires that she shall retain her 
place in Natur^ in all respects. Another Value of this order is 
her willingness to prove a real helpmate to her husband ; to 
offer him her aid in all things ; and to be a real partner in the 
contract. He should never leave home in the mornings without 
having laid aside all selfishness, all disinclination to assist her 
in her duties, all hasty disregard of the things that interest her. 
Mutual interests are Values, and these should be interchanged. 
The least little thing that absorbs the attention of the wife 
should not be too small to attract the attention of the husband. 
Mutual consultations are useful. When he comes to the home 
at noon, or especially at the close of the day, her work should be 
his work ; her weariness should be lifted by his assistance, for 
it is gross selfishness on his part to lounge around reading a 
paper that yields him no mental value, while she plods through 
the evening finishing her work. 

The best test of magnetism and continued interest is the 
readiness of husband and wife to devote their spare time to 
each other ; or, if to others, then in each other's companion- 
slup. We know of a couple who were married fifty years and 
who in all that time were never separated any evening. They 
had all the pleasures of society, friends, parties, theatre, opera, 
travel and holidays ; but never found it necessary to spend 
any evening or night apart. And they were supremely happy. 
Loyalty in marriage is a Patrician Value. It is magnetic. It 
alsolTtands as the noblest of virtues. If a man must continu- 
ally go out night after night after marriage, he should have 
remained single. Affiliations between married men and men who 
are not married are antagonistic to those higher affiliations 
that should exist between husband and wife. The moment a 

24 



370 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

married woman forms a close personal and confidential friend- 
ship with some other woman, with her husband in the back- 
ground of her affection, she becomes disloyal to him. 

Husband and wife should be good friends with each other, 
perpetual associates, steady pals, with openness of mind and 
exchange of confidence, making all their plans together, hunt- 
ing in each other's thoughts for the themes that are dominant 
and the interests that are most alive ; never saying or doing 
anything that shall in the least hurt the feelings of the other ; 
never taking umbrage at any remark or incident ; forgiving 
freely ; yielding gracefully ; refusing to antagonize ; never 
becommg^ silent or stubbornly diffident ; cultivating 

sympathy, brightnessTTTopefulness and o^imisift--iuider_all 
circumstances ; and forming the mental determination to place 
loyalty to each other above all other considerations in life. 
There have been such marriages, and they have been magnetic ; 
they have been blessed in the highest degree ; and have served 
as stepping-stones through the journey of earthly existence, 
on, on to a world of unending rewards. 

The first two pages of this lesson teach matters that cannot 
be neglected ; for even if all the finer qualities exist, and there 
are evidences of the presence of the coarser ones, the latter will 
submerge the former. 

In the preceding paragraph we have mentioned a phase of 
personal magnetism called mental determination ; and as this 
is the key to all accomplishment in life, we will devote the next 
lesson to its consideration. 

In bringing the present theme to a close, we will recall the 
old saying that a chain is no stronger than its weakest link. 
Whether in marriage or in other forms of human association, 
if there is a weak link in the character of the individual, the 
whole structure is likely to fall. Thus if either husband or 
wife exhibit a single serious fault, the illusion may vanish in 
a flash. The prevention of this disaster may be secured by 
forming the mental habit of self-study at all times. This is the 
most valuable asset in the life of any person. 



LESSON SIXTY-NINE 

MENTAL DETERMINATION 

A THIS COURSE OF INSTRUCTION approaches its 
end, the two most important themes are to be con- 
sidered. In a book of this size it is not possible to 
include the analysis of the mental powers with which humanity 
has been endowed. For centuries preceding our era, in the 
old Greek ascendency, the existence of a mental power beyond 
that of the ordinary faculty of reasoning was taught and 
exemplified. Then the idea slept until a few decades ago 
when many evidences arose to set savants thinking and in- 
vestigating. The result was the claim that a subconscious 
mind was a part of the mental equipment of humanity. 

To-day this claim is universally approved. 

In other works the distinction between the physical mind 
which operates through the cerebrum, and the psychic mind 
which operates through the meninges or brain membranes, is 
fully discussed and proved. But it has always been our belief 
that, whatever this distinction may be, the only facts that 
matter are those that appear as results, not processes ; and 
that names and theories are of less value than actualities. In 
any event it is this distinction that now interests us, as we 
approach the study of mental determination. We have seen 
in the early part of this book that a setness of the muscles is 
non-magnetic ; and that a setness of the physical mind, or 
process of reasoning that operates through the cerebrum, is 
obstinacy, and is therefore non-magnetic. 

It is a common trait of teachers and advisers to tell ambitious 
men and women that whatever they make up their minds to do, 
they will do ; and what they will to accomplish, they will ac- 
complish. This sounds all right, but has rarely ever succeeded. 
It is true that persistent hammering at one object sooner or 
later brings the desired results, if no obstacles of an insurmount- 

371 



37* INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

able nature interfere. Yet, on the other hand, if the will-power 
is operating through the subconscious faculty it rarely fails. 
To generals who lived in the centuries preceding the time of 
Napoleon, there were Alps, and they were obstacles that could 
not be overcome. To him there were no Alps ; his keener 
mind saw the way to pass them. 

When the mind is set through the operation of the physical 
processes of thinking, and this setness persists for a time, it be- 
comes an obsession, or disease. Setness means fixed position. 
Thus obstinacy is a disease, for it is a fixed attitude of the 
mind. Thinking always on one leading subject is a disease. 
Unchanging belief founded on nothing but belief, or blind faith, 
is an obsession, and is most repellent, driving away friends 
and admirers. Political fixedness in place of statesmanship 
is likewise an obsession and non-magnetic. 

The difference between a set purpose of the physical mind 
working through the cerebrum, and mental determination 
working through the subconscious faculty, is that the former 
is fixed and immovable, while the latter always progresses or 
goes forward. The mule stands still when he is obstinate. 
His brain is set, determined, but makes no headway. 

The only absolutely certain method by which the subcon- 
scious faculty may be recognized is that which takes the con- 
scious mind into the last stage of wakefulness at night ; for 
every psychologist and physician who has experimented along 
these lines knows that the subconscious mind is always alert 
and on the verge of recognition at that moment when the 
conscious or working mind is lapsing into unconsciousness, 
which occurs at th& time stated,; pr when sleep is coming on. 
It is then that the most remarkable cures have been made 
through therapeutic suggestion irf hospitals and sanatariums. 

It has been proved many times that any form of mental 
determination that invites progressive action and not fixedness, 
that is given expression in the mind during the last moments of 
wakefulness at night, if founded on a careful development of 
the power of magnetism as taught in this book, will bring the 
results desired. The best preparation for this practice, which 
should be made a habit, is to read this book through twice 
slowly and with great attention^ all that it teaches. FoUowing 
such reading^the m^sVp^owerfunDaethod that can be adopted 



MENTAL DETERMINATION 373 

is to|meinorize|the thirteentH lesson, which deals with Mental 
Magnitucie 



fter thesesteps have been taken, and after all the advice and 
suggestions of that lesson have been carried into effect, the next 
thing to do is to take into the subconscious mind at night the 
full determination to achieve some great work, or to win some 
great end ; or, if minor matters are important, work them out 
by the same process, ^a^cafl^sg^re every student who fol^awa 
thigplan that success will be attained. ^ Not many years ago a 
^greaf^FfeHcFpsyclioiogist came to this country and performed 
some remarkable cures by this process. He made the state- 
ment that where a certain mental belief was given oral expres- 
sion, the sound of the voice reflected in the brain would be taken 
up and be given actual life in the entire jiervous system. But 
this method failed a hundred times where it succeeded once ; 
the fault being that the physical mind alone operated. Tests 
were made with the subconscious mind in the manner we have 
stated herein, and there were one hundred victories for every 
single failure ; just reversing the ratio. Thus if a person who 
has mastered this course of instruction will form some purpose 
in his mind, and give it utterance in spoken words, no matter 
how faintly they are uttered, at the mom^^of follmg^asleep 
at night, the several natural laws that we have described will 
operate to bring results. 

The only way of knowing for a fact whether this method will 
succeed is to give it a thorough trial. When physicians, 
hospital doctors and psychological scientists put such methods 
to the test and follow them up to get results, and do actually 
get results of the highest importance to the world, no sensible 
person will treat them lightly. 

It, however, is not merely in the use of the last waking 
moments at night that this power is employed. That is only 
a developing practice. As soon as the faculty is recognized, it 
may be used at any time of the day or anywhere, and in any 
way. But it must be kept moving. Avoid fixedness. We 
have seen a little lawyer, weighing less than nine stone, drive 
out of a building a bailiff who had a legal right there ; and no 
force was used. He started and kept moving, like a stampede 
limited to one objective. It was mental determination. We 
have recently concluded the history of a couple who had been 



374 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

unhappily married, both of whom took up this study in order 
to find a remedy for their marital failure ; and both developed 
in the highest degree this power of mental determination and 
applied it to the suggestions and matters contained in the pre- 
ceding lesson, which is entitled The Vanishing Illusion. The 
success has been one of the most pleasing and complete we have 
ever known. They were too proud to live apart, and too 
honourable to seek a divorce that would have brought a life- 
time of unhappiness to their children ; so they suffered in 
secret as far as the outside world was concerned, and now they 
have no more anxieties. 

We know of more than one hundred recent cases of employees 
who have bettered themselves by the same power of mental 
determination ; and scores of business men who were drifting 
down grade but who have since begun to win success. 

Many requests have reached us as to what are the best themes 
on which to practise mental determination ; and invariably 
we advise those that are contained in the seventy -three lessons 
of this book. But Mental Magnitude Regime stands in the 
most important of appositions in this regard. It is contained 
in Lesson Thirteen ; and that lesson is a magnet in itself. 

Charles Spurgeon, who claimed that his prayers were always 
answered, said that he never prayed with his brain, nor with 
his physical thoughts ; at that time very little had been dis- 
covered of the subconscious mind, so that he made no reference 
to that faculty ; but he stated his firm belief that he possessed 
an inner self that outranked his thinking brain ; and it was with 
this innerjself that he prayed, and won answers to his prayers. 

Faith when genuine, which is rarely the case, dwells in this 
inner self which to-day is fully recognized as the subconscious 
faculty. There is a kind of faith that emanates from the think- 
ing mind, which is the reasoning power of the brain ; but such 
faith never rises higher than firm belief ; and all belief, if true, 
is founded on facts that are apparent to the conscious mind. 
No normal person says that he believes something unless he has 
some basis of fact for such credence. Faith, when genuine, is 
riever founded on facts, but on subconscious knowledge ; aricf 
as such is far more likely to be well founded than the usual 
conclusions called belief. Mental determination, when using 
the mind of faith, carries its results into far realms. Those 



MENTAL DETERMINATION 375 

who heard Spurgeon pray felt that he was demanding an answer 
by the strong assertiveness of his voice. 

Cures have been wrought by mental determination in the 
form of faith emanating from the subconscious mind ; but this 
faith has generally been exercised by the person causing the 
cure. Occasionally it is true that the patient is able to cure 
himself by faith, but it must be accompanied by mental deter- 
mination, not by belief coming from the reasoning mind. 

We have knowledge of many cases where unruly children, who 
could not be controlled by nurses and governesses, have been 
effectively managed by those who have developed mental 
determination. Some years ago we recorded the case of a 
country school, the bullying boys of which had caused several 
teachers to leave until a young man who had developed this 
power took charge ; and during his several years of teaching 
there, not one attempt was ever made to annoy him. In 
explaining the circumstance, a boy who has since become a 
successful merchant says : " The first moment our new teacher 
entered the school, he walked among us, looked at us, talked 
kindly but very firmly to us, and we liked him because we felt 
and seemed to know that he would not permit any fooling. So 
we stopped it, and began to learn our lessons/' The teacher 
told us his account in a few words : " I went there with the firm 
resolve, no matter what happened, to be master first, last and 
always ; and I was." 

Mental determination always wins. 

But this power is most effective in making a man or woman 
supreme over the influences that lead them into mistakes and 
disasters through an appeal to their appetites, or their inclina- 
tions. It is said that the greatest evil in the life of a person is 
the willingness to drift along from day to day aimlessly. They 
let matters take care of themselves ; and this is something that 
never happens in the right way ; otherwise life would not be 
crowded with failures and disappointments. The mind is the 
engineer of the body ; and it is the duty of every engineer to 
direct and control the power that is placed in his charge. The 
directing and controlling agency must hold sway at all times. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
MAGNETIC HEALING 

LESSON SEVENTY 

METHODS OF HEALING 

A BRIEF BUT IMPORTANT department will close this 
extended study of personal magnetism. Because our 
title seems familiar it must not be assumed that old 
methods are to be presented here. Too much of the imagina- 
tion has been brought into play by the kind of healing that 
has been called mental and sometimes magnetic. In our 
system we do not leave anything to the flights of fancy or to 
the beliefs that have been fed by the suggestions of others ; 
but each and every step in this line is scientifically demon- 
strated as practical and useful for the purposes for which it 
is intended ; and has a basis as exact as any proposition in 
mathematics. 

There are two sides to the question of healing ; one relates to 
the efforts of the patient to heal himself. There are many cases 
of extraordinary weakness where the sick man may give up, or 
may assist in effecting a cure. There are plenty of instances 
where the desire to die is rewarded by such an end. On the 
other hand the incentive to live is furnished by some great love, 
some reciprocated affection, or some material advantage. These 
experiences show that the patient holds some of the power of a 
cure in his disposition to help. There are many familiar cases 
where the exercise of great will-power has prolonged life, and 
even effected a final cure. We recall the recent episode of a 
mother who, on seeing her little child, said, " I must live for 
her sake." This experience has been repeated many times, as 
shown by the reports of doctors. 

It is said of a well-known Queen that, on learning of the 

37 6 



METHODS OF HEALING 377 

sacrifice of her troops in a certain war, she took to her room 
and expressed a desire to die, and her death followed very soon. 
History indicates that Queen Elizabeth, on ascertaining that her 
lover had been executed by reason of the treachery of a rival, 
lost the desire to live and died almost immediately. Edison, in 
a published statement, recites the fact that his grandfather, after 
passing the age of a hundred, declared that he was tired of living, 
went to his room, undressed, got into bed, and died by act of his 
will-power. " There was nothing the matter with him," said the 
inventor. 

These facts being accepted as true, it is the duty of those in 
charge of patients to study what purposes and desires are at 
work in the minds of those who are critically ill ; for they often 
swing the scales one way or the other. 

Our present study relates rather to the influences of the doctor 
or attendant over the case, and not so often in fatal instances 
as in ordinary sickness where recovery may be hastened. There 
are professional healers who call themselves faith doctors, 
meaning that if they can arouse sufficient belief in the minds of 
patients they can effect a cure ; but they must be able to exert 
a positive influence in themselves and transfer such power to 
the patients in order to prove magnetic. There are others who 
are known as mental healers who make use of their own faculties 
in efforts to bring about cures ; and others who seek to arouse a 
mutual mental effort in patient and healer. With these we 
have nothing to do. 

We seek to enhance and increase the natural, everyday powers 
of doctors, nurses, attendants and members of the family by the 
practical use of those gifts that Nature bestows on every one 
in more or less degree. These values appear in the voice, in the 
eyes, in the touch, in the face, and in the presence of the person 
who will be referred to here as the healer, although there is no 
intention of educating any one for the profession of doctor or 
healer. It simply comes down to this : There are endless 
opportunities for all persons to assist in saving others when the 
crises arise. The presence of a person is magnetic when it 
follows the laws of the Sixth and Seventh Departments of this 
book. The face is magnetic when it follows the laws of Mental 
Magnitude and of Mental Determination ; the one in the Second 
Department, and the other in the Ninth Department of this 



3?8 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

book. The eyes are magnetic when they follow the laws of the 
Third Department. 

This leaves for our consideration only the voice and the 
touch. 

Every great teacher of singing knows of and employs the 
law of mental placement of the voice in developing it. In 
ordinary Nature the placing or impinging of the voice in the 
throat is animal, coarse, rough, ugly, repellent and non-magnetic. 
These facts we have taught fully in the Eighth Department. 
Great teachers, especially in Europe where they are the most 
thorough, insist upon the forward placing of all tones, which 
means the impinging of the voice against the front upper palate ; 
and this they accomplish by a double method ; one that drops 
the back of the tongue, lowers the larynx and raises the soft 
palate ; the other solely by the action or attention of the mind, 
for which reason it is called the mental tone as distinguished 
from the animal or physical tone in the throat. 

Mentality of this kind is located in the forward brain, the 
cerebrum, so that the voice that is cultivated is controlled by 
this organ ; while the animal or physical tones are controlled by 
the animal brain or cerebellum. 

The subconscious mind is known not to be located or con- 
trolled by either brain ; but the character and activities of the 
meninges or brain linings account for the presence there or 
control by that part of the subconscious mind. It is an ac- 
cepted fact that all organs of the body are governed by their 
membranes, on the health of which the normal functioning of 
such organs depends. It is also known that disordered meninges 
or brain membranes will cause insanity, crime, low moral 
practices, and all manner of evil ; while the perfect health of 
these membranes will lead to exactly opposite conditions ; and 
the building up of great magnetic powers in these membranes 
will induce the activities of genius, inspiration and the most 
extraordinary control over all persons. Experiments made and 
being made in hospitals and by experts show results that are 
pronounced marvellous. 

Luther Burbank, after receiving instruction or aid from one 
of the greatest of European psychologists, made the public 
statement that he had accomplished cures among others that 
were almost unbelievable, and which if seen would astound the 



METHODS OF HEALING 379 

world. He was not only exceedingly magnetic, but had used 
his higher faculties in his wizardry of the plant world. Other 
persons are doing fully as much as he had done, but without 
making their work public. 

As the mental voice is impinged forward against the front 
upper palate, and the animal voice against the throat, so the 
subconscious voice is impinged against the soft palate, which is 
high up, or should be, in the upper throat. This is the dark 
quality taught in the Eighth Department. It is a dark, smooth 
tone, made softly as if imitating distant thunder, using the word 
" Roll " for the purpose. When established it is called the 
subconscious voice ; and this fact is verified by the practice of 
doctors who employ therapeutic suggestion as a means of cure. 
An expert says that ^ ^ ^ 

" The voice in healing must be low, cultured and caressing ." 

Such a voice is easily acquired especially by a person who is 
magnetic. Doctors, nurses, attendants and friends should 
develop tones that are low, cultured and caressing ; and these are 
readily acquired in our Eighth Department. No one would for 
a moment think of using the coarse, repellent and ugly throat 
tones ; nor the mentally bright and metallic forward tones ; 
which leaves nothing but the subconscious voice that impinges 
on the soft palate and is controlled by the operations of that 
faculty. 

Such a voice when used by a person on himself, accomplishes 
all the results that have been claimed for self-suggestion ; but 
when directed on behalf of another it is even more helpful ; but 
should be charged with a message directed by a living, moving 
purpose, and impelled by the full force of mental determination. 
It must not be empty of ideas, nor a drifting, purposeless 
proceeding. 



LESSON SEVENTY-ONE 

DEATH AND LIFE 

THE SYSTEM OF HEALING is completely interwoven 
in all the lessons of this book, for which reason all we 
can advance is a suggestion or two concerning the 
methods by which it may be applied ; and the lesson just pre- 
ceding this tells in a few words the whole story of procedure. 
But the matter of the magnetic touch remains for discussion. 
Almost invariably when a man or woman discovers the 
possession of the natural power of magnetic healing, the 
attempt is made to use it in a vigorous manner, which involves 
great tensing of the muscles and nerves. There is no magnetism 
in a set condition of the muscles or of the nerves. Setness of 
mind, as has been shown in Lesson Sixty-Nine on Mental 
Determination, is non-magnetic. The results are as wide 
apart as the poles between tensed set nerves, and moving tensed 
nervous flow. The magnetic touch is of the latter chaFacteF. 

In the Sixth Department we have shown the difference 
between setness in tensing and flow in tensing ; and the best of 
all tests is the ability to tense slowly and gradually the whole 
arm from the shoulder to the wrist, and while the hand hangs 
limp and the fingers can be shaken about like so many ends of 
rags. One of the finest and best of all habits is that which 
employs this method of slowly tensing the arm with the hand 
limp, and then stroking some part of the body of a patient who 
is suffering from pain, as of a headache, by passing the limp 
hand very gently over the part, all the while allowing the flow 
of nervous energy that is checked at the wrist to come into the 
hand, and gradually into the finger-tips. In this instance there is 
an actual magnetic current passing from one person to the other ; 
and when accompanied by the voice of healing which is " low, 
cultured and caressing," the effect is instantaneous ; although 
we have been informed of many cases where only the magnetic 

380 



DEATHANDLIFE 381 

touch has been employed ; and in our own experience in the past 
forty-five years such cases are too numerous to be even counted. 
In the development of the voice that is " low, cultured and 
caressing/' full attention should be given to the preceding lesson 
which contains a vast amount of help in the fewest words 
possible. 

The battle of life must be fought against setness in all its 
forms, for any thinking person can readily see that there is no 
flow of a magnetic current unless there is a movement of it. 

In magnetic healing the power of Mental Determination, if 
it is kept a moving power, and not a set condition of the will, 
is almost invincible. When this power is allied with the full 
system of personal magnetism as taught in this book, the 
combination means all that can be wished for by mind or heart, 
and has no human limitations. For these reasons we strongly 
advise every student of these pages to make this book the one 
greatest companion of his or her life ; to know it perfectly in 
each and every one of its lessons ; to become familiar with all its 
teachings ; to go through life with it closer to the activities of 
daily existence than any other agency or influence ; and to 
never part with it or its aid. 

When founded on such a basic structure, the employment of 
the power of Mental Determination interwoven with all the 
teachings of this book becomes a giant force in the life of the 
individual. There have been many cases of the use of this 
power when health, through carelessness, has brought some 
strong man or woman to the verge of the grave. We have seen 
desire to live whip this power into an almost unbelievable 
energy. In one case which has been recorded in medical works, 
a woman who was dying, but who did not know it, overheard 
arrangements being made in an adjoining room for her funeral. 
From a bed of supposed helplessness, she arose, rushed to the 
next room, demanded the facts, was told that she was dying, 
hurled the lie in the faces of those present, and proceeded to 
dress. Twenty years afterwards, she was doing her own 
housework. 

Doctors enjoy reciting among themselves, and keeping from 
the public, many extraordinary cases in which it is claimed 
that the dead have arisen under the stress of the mental 
determination of others, generally of loved ones and close friends; 



382 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

but there are two kinds of death in the body. The engine of the 
automobile " goes dead " when the machinery stops. When a 
person dies solely because the machinery stops, as when he is 
the victim of acute indigestion, drowning, shock, anaesthesia, 
heart failure, asphyxia, neurasthenia and other causes, he is 
called dead enough to bury although all that is needed is some 
power to set in motion again the machinery of his life ; yet in 
fact he is not dead enough to bury until the autopsy is begun or 
the untimely activity of the embalmer is started on its course. 
Doctors say that fully thirty -three per cent of all burials are 
of persons whose life machineryTias merely stopped, but who 
need only some power to set it going again. 
Just think of it ! 

Yet this is the fact. And humanity is apparently helpless. 
The remedy is in the establishing and endowment of a school of 
healers, legalized and genuinely equipped for the practice of a 
new profession, discarding the old pretences of the so-called 
mental and magnetic healers, and coming down to the actual 
science of Nature, tested and verified with mathematical 
certainty, knowing the real processes required, and applying 
them in a rational and effective manner. We are not teaching 
that the actually dead person may be raised from the dead ; 
but we do know that a person whose life machinery is in good 
condition, but who is called dead because it has stopped its 
activity, may be revived ; and you may call it raising the dead, 
or give it its proper name, reviving a living person before the 
embalmer makes it a hopeless case. 

Human beings, like plants, depend on vitality for their 
existence. It has been said that one person who possesses an 
excess of vitality, may impart much of that excess to another 
person. By the law of electrical flow, the weaker may draw in 
the stronger current. 

The accounts of remarkable cases of reviving the apparent 
dead that are told by doctors among themselves are, as far as 
we have had the privilege of learning the facts, which is not 
often, seemingly true. At least some physicians who are 
sincere and trustworthy seem satisfied that they are true. A 
case that is referred to by doctors as " typical," because it has 
many similar cases to sustain its claims, is that of a man who 
learned that his son was dying. By swift journeys he hurried 



DEATHANDLIFE 383 

to the scene, but arrived too late. The embalmer was there 
about to begin his work of actual death. The first thing the 
father did was to knock the undertaker down and out, and 
throw his apparatus into the yard. He said afterwards, " I do 
not know why I did this ; but I did know that my son was not 
dead. When I learned of his critical condition I was fully 
determined that he should NOT DIE. A glow of light seemed 
to shine in and around my body. Wherever I went, it kept 
about me. When I came into the house and saw what was 
about to be done, it was not frenzy but mental determination 
that compelled me to take full charge of the matter. I do not 
know why I knocked the undertaker down and kicked his 
apparatus into the yard. I knew I must act quickly. I had but 
one idea, that my son was alive, and that all he needed was 
the strong force that I was enabled to exercise to arouse him." 

It seems that the father stripped the body of his son, and, 
stripping all clothing from his own body, that he took the son 
into his warm, glowing embrace, and held him there, saying 
over and over again that he was alive, he was alive, he was not 
dead, he was not dead, he must begin to breathe, his heart 
must begin to beat, the blood must begin to flow, the skin must 
begin to get warm, life must come back for it lingered close at 
hand ready to come back when given the opportunity ; and 
so he continued without ever losing hope or lessening his deter- 
mination to win back the child of his love. It required time, 
but he had no knowledge of the passing of the minutes. Nor 
did he know how long he was there. Time was marked off, 
not by the ticking of the clock but by the process of events ; 
each event was an epoch ; and each epoch the enacting of a 
fate that came to him because he deserved it. 

Soon the body of the son displayed returning warmth in its 
surface ; this was an epoch. Then the father knew that 
victory was assured. The glow of the living organism passed 
into the dead. It reached the heart, and then the lungs. The 
eyes opened. The lips spoke, 

" FATHER ! " 



LESSON SEVENTY-TWO 

DOCTORS OF MAGNETISM 

SOME DAY all doctors and medical people will depend 
on Nature as nearly as can possibly be done ; and 
discard the use of chemicals to fight out one poison 
with another, as the saying goes. It is remarkable, even in 
this slightly advanced era in changing the methods of treat- 
ment, to note the tendency to adopt the services of the source 
of all magnetism, which is the sun. 

At a certain Institution doctors are using split rays of the sun 
in order to extract out of the most vital portion of those rays 
the magnetism that Nature intends for bringing the spark of 
life into human bodies. As is well known the sunbeam consists 
of a series of rays. It was once supposed that the heat of the 
sun furnished not only warmth but vitality. This has been 
disproved. At one end of the spectrum is the red ray, and 
beyond this is what is called the infra-red ray, which carries 
the sun heat through glass ; while at the other end of the 
spectrum is the violet ray, beyond which is the invisible ultra- 
violet ray, which carries all the magnetism from the sun, all 
the vitality for plant life and for human life. This will not 
pass through window glass. 

Between the heat of the red ray and the vitality of the 
violet ray are the destructive forces of the sun which, when too 
greatly exposed, do injury. Doctors and governments, as well 
as great hospitals, are now splitting the violet rays and making 
use of its magnetism ; for this is the source of all power both 
of vitality and magnetism. The latter come from the ultra- 
violet or invisible portion of the violet rays ; while we look for 
heat from the infra-red rays. This does not imply that there 
is no warmth in the other parts of the sunbeam, but that other 

forces come from the other rays, some of which are destructive, 

384 



DOCTORS OF MAGNETISM 3*5 

some the sources of energy, and all capable of great activity 
that is akin to heat. 

In another way, but without realizing the fact, doctors have 
for many years employed the magnetism of the sun in the use 
of cod-liver oil. The codfish feeds at great depths in the sea, 
rarely*"cbming into contact with the sunlight at the surface. 
As a recompense, Nature provides for the storing in the liver 
of great relative quantities of magnetism that is exactly like 
that from the sun, but that is self-generated. It does not 
come from the sunlight, but does come from the effects of 
the sun in an indirect way. 

IT IS SELF-GENERATED. 

Poultry that are kept in the outdoor sun during the egg- 
forming period, lay eggs that are charged and super-charged, 
like cod-liver oil, with *tke same kiiiS. of magnetism, but get 
it directly from the sun rays. Here are two results, both the 
same, one from the sun itself, and one from self-generation 
in a living creature ; and both kinds of food furnish a curative 
treatment in disease. 

In a great hospital they are able to bring the ultra-violet 
or magnetic rays of the sun through windows, but they make 
use of panes of quartz-crystal that are worth almost their 
weight in gold. This enables the doctors to treat patients 
indoors, for the clothing must be removed for the body to absorb 
this magnetism. Then arose the question, how can these 
magnetic rays be obtained when the sun is not shining, and 
during the night ? The answer was the invention of the quartz- 
mercury lamp, which delivers the desired rays in unvarying 
and reliable quantity. It is made of a tube containing mercury 
vapour, through which an electric current is passed. It emits 
light that is extraordinarily rich in the ultra-violet or magnetism 
rays. The tube is made of pure quartz-crystal melted at a 
very high temperature with an oxy-acetylene flame. 

Thus we see that, while all magnetism comes originally from 
the sun, it can be generated by a living creature, as we have 
shown ; and it can be summoned by the inventive genius of 
man. If one living creature is given the power to self-generate 
magnetism, it stands to reason that humanity shoulabe able 
to do likewise. A certain Clinic for the cure of children not 
only brings these little patients into the direct rays of the 

25 



386 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

sun, but includes in their medical diet a certain quantity of 
cod-liver oil daily ; thus making use of the same magnetic 
vitality in two ways : first, that which comes directly from the 
sun ; and, second, that which Nature had provided the fish 
as compensation for being deprived of the direct rays of light, 
and the compensation, in this case, overran the needs. It 
was one of Nature's excesses. 

We have said at the beginning of this lesson that doctors will 
some day depend on Nature. The letters that now read M.D., 
and that mean Doctor of Medicine, will some day read still 
M.D., and indicate a new meaning Doctor of Magnetism. 

The change has begun. The use of cod-liver oil is making 
magnetism take part in many cures. The use of eggs, milk 
and other foods that have come from the influence of the ultra- 
violet or magnetic rays is feeding magnetism to the body ; and 
this practice is spreading everywhere very rapidly. Exposing 
the body to the sun rays is another form of magnetic healing. 
Drawing the sun-magnetism through quartz-crystal windows 
is another form. And the use of the quartz -mercury lamp, 
without reference to the sunlight, but by the " made-light " 
of the mercury -vapour tube, shows still another advance. 

We have shown that this same form of magnetism is self- 
generated in a living creature, and in great abundance, owing 
to Nature's proneness to run to excess in some of her processes. 

That almost every human being is endowed with the same 
power of generating the kind of magnetism that brings life to 
the body, and increases life in others, has been proved by the 
teachings of this entire system, including every page of this 
book. More than this, we will state that any student of this 
work may readily acquire the power of helping others who are 
deficient in vitality or who are suffering from disease. 

The death of Luther Burbank called attention to his state- 
ment that was published far and wide a few weeks before his 
demise. He said : 

" I am frank to state that I have successfully applied this 
power in from 200 to 300 cases, effecting cures constantly. 
The result of these cures would make your hair stand on end, 
if known." He refused to draw his patients into the light of 
publicity, as some persons might misinterpret his motives. 
He said his usual method in effecting cures was to take the 



DOCTORS OF MAGNETISM 387 

sufferer by one hand and place his other hand on the patient's 
back. His work and results were vouched for by the scientist 
and physician who probably stands at the head of his branch 
of the medical profession of to-day, Dr. Konradi Leitner, Swiss 
specialist. Dr. Leitner says of his first meeting with Burbank : 
" When I clasped his hand we both felt the flow of magnetism ; 
and each one of us mentioned the thrill that we received 
at the time." 

A young woman, not thirty years of age, but surrounded with 
all the luxuries that great wealth could bring her, refused to 
marry a man who loved her ; stating as the excuse that she was 
too frail for marriage, and probably was not long for this world. 
It was a case of low vitality, not only of body but of the entire 
system, accompanied by mental discouragement. Being a 
church member, and entering into the social activities, she 
took part one evening in a gathering, one of the festivities of 
which placed her next to a young man, whose hand she was to 
clasp. In so doing she felt a steady flow of vitality enter her 
arm and travel through her body. The following statement 
comes from the young man who had been an eager student of 
this system of magnetism, and whose version was confirmed 
by the lady herself : 

" When her hand clasped mine," he said, " I felt a strong 
quiver of her arm, and a tightening of her hold. We were 
strangers to each other until that time, although I had seen 
her often. As soon as the game, as they called it, was over, 
although the evening was very young, she asked me to take 
her and her mother home. Arriving there, she made me the 
surprising request that I act as her doctor, telling me that 
my vitality or magnetism could alone restore her health. Her 
mother joined in the request. The result can be surmised. We 
grew to care for each other ; and, although I was poor and she 
was rich, we were married ; and neither has regretted it." 

We were at one time teaching a large class in personal 
magnetism and made the statement that each and every one of 
our students would acquire by self-generation such a volume 
of magnetism that it would have a decided curative power. 
One lady asked the privilege of bringing a lady friend to the 
next session, saying that this friend was very low in vitality 
and was said to be hopelessly ill from nervous prostration. 



388 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

No doctor was able to cure her, although she was amply able to 
employ the best specialists. The friend came to the next 
session. Among the students were some who were beginners, 
some who had made partial progress, and some who were 
well advanced. This friend was not told these facts, but 
supposed all were of the same status in their progress. 

As an experiment she took the hand of one who had developed 
a high degree of magnetism, and at once reported the passing 
of a decidedjmrrent from him to her body. Then she took the 
hand of one who had not advanced far, and reported that she 
felt but little effect. Next she took the hand of a beginner and 
stated that she felt nothing whatever. " Now/' it was stated to 
her, " you will take the hand of a novice who may some day be 
very magnetic, but you will feel nothing now." She was given 
the hand of the most advanced pupil in the class, and said 
with alacrity, " You have made a mistake. This gentleman is 
full of magnetism." Without detailing the history of sub- 
sequent events, we need only say that she found a way to fully 
recover her health, and one of our students found a beautiful 
wife. 

The world is entering upon the era of magnetism. 

This is true of the curative systems of civilisation. All life, 
all health, all vitality, come from the sun by one of two 
processes : either from direct contact with the rays of that 
orb, which cannot be had on cloudy days, or during the nights, 
or in climes where the sun shines but little, and which, in 
other climes where the sunlight is destructive, is too severe. 

We have cited Nature's compensation in one case ; and we 
find a similar compensation in the case of humanity. To one 
form of life she gave the power of self-generation of magnetism ; 
to every man and woman she has given, in much higher form, 
the same power of self-generation of magnetism ; and it has 
been the mission of this book to set forth that great gift, and 
the natural and practical ways of acquiring it and of using it. 

Any exhibition of power is magnetism. 

To win success in any department of life is one of the goals 
of magnetism, and that quality is taught in this work. 

To rise above want, achieve financial independence, and live 
in old age free from worry on account of reverses, is clearly a 
mission of this power. In fact, most people believe they have 



DOCTORS OF MAGNETISM 389 

achieved the only real success in life when they place themselves 
beyond want. 

Yet every person should strive to win the perfect respect 
and confidence of all others who are worth knowing. This also 
is a valuable result of the practice of this power. 

Still further in the struggle of existence is the mastery over 
all the affairs of life in every department of one's being. Thus 
we round out a successful career. 

Thus far the battle has been fought against adversity and 
failure ; yet, if we were to close this study without carrying the 
struggle far enough to combat the one greatest of life, which is 
disease, we would be remiss in our duty. 

It is gratifying to know that the student of this system never 
need seek help against sickness in person ; as the very essence 
of this training is automatically self-curing. This means that, 
no matter how weak in vitality, or how deficient in health you 
may be when beginning this study, as you proceed you will find 
all traces of illness, all weakness, all ailments, even those that 
are chronic, gradually disappearing. They pass away even as 
the snows of the plains melt before the advance of spring. In 
a history of forty -five years, we have never had an exception ; 
so it may be taken for granted that your case will not be a 
failure in this respect. 

Nor is failure possible. The power that we invoke by our 
plan of self-generation of magnetism is life itself, coming from 
the great orb of life, and building in the human body the very 
life that it draws into itself. 

There have been so-called magnetic healers in the past ; but 
we know of none who have possessed this genuine power unless 
they have also developed this gift of self-generation just as it 
is taught herein. 

The real healers are yet to appear. Burbank was one, but he 
played with the gift only to test its reality ; and he laid down 
his life in a fever of overwork in his experiments ; and, as some 
say, because of misunderstanding of his views on life and death 
he worried himself into the grave. Dr. Leitner is one of a large | 
number who have come to use this power in its highest sense ; 
not as mere healers. Coue effected cures by the laying on of 
hands ; but failed in teaching his system to others who were 
not magnetic. 



390 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

In the old days there was one great medical school, the 
allopa/thic. In after years it had a competitor in another large 
school, the homeopathic. These are called the regulars. Later 
on came the osteopaths ; and still later the chiropractics. A 
great religion that numbers a million or more followers practises 
religious cures but avoids medicines. We are stating history, 
and are not passing judgment on any of these. But it stands 
to reason that when life can be traced to the magnetism that 
comes from the sun, and when this magnetism can be self- 
generated by any man or woman owing to the compensation of 
Nature, then the drift of civilized progress must of necessity 
turn to the only original form of natural cures, magnetism. 

We have shown that this power acts automatically in 
bringing perfect health to any student of this system. 

In order to use it in a public or professional way in curing 
others, it is probable that some legal recognition may be neces- 
sary. But this does not stand in the way of helping friends and 
acquaintances ; and it is a very pleasing test of one's powers to 
employ them in such a cause. The principle that is at work 
is seen in the comparative funds of vitality in youth and age. 
The young man can run faster than the old man ; he can endure 
greater tasks, more severity of strain, and more hardships. He 
can eat foods that would injure an old person. While he is 
taking on growth, as in the years of development and young 
manhood, he draws into his body daily more vitality than one 
who has passed those stages. 

It is this excess of vitality that magnetism brings into the 
body of one who is frail or ill. The contact of the hands is 
not always sufficient ; it is better that one hand of the patient 
should be placed in one hand of the curer, while the other hand 
of the latter is placed on the bare flesh at the back of the body 
between the shoulder blades. Tests have been made in a 
number of ways ; but this seems the most effective. During 
this effort the curer should tense the body in the manner taught 
in this book, and should fire the mind with the purpose of 
mental determination. But these measures are not required 
where there is a great difference between the two vitalities. 
The clasping of the hand is sufficient. 

A physician who gave full attention to this system, and who 
became very magnetic, stated that he helped all his patients by 



DOCTORS OF MAGNETISM 391 

merely coming among them ; as he entered the room of % one 
who was ill, the effect was noticeable. He stated that on one 
occasion when he was spending a brief period at the mountains 
in summer, where he was wholly unknown, and where no one 
even suspected that he was a doctor, he was introduced by a 
newly made friend to several ladies, with each of whom he 
shook hands in response to their proffered greetings, and one 
of these ladies claimed at once that he was charged full to the 
brim, as she put it, with magnetism. She said that she felt a 
great flow or current pass through her hand into her body. It 
was a case of great disparity of two vitalities ; his very strong, 
and hers very weak. Later on he was met by a friend who 
called him doctor, with the result that this lady insisted on 
receiving magnetic treatment from him. She said that she 
had come to the mountains for her health ; that she could not 
get well under any treatment she had tried ; and all she asked 
was that he make the effort to help her by merely the laying on 
of hands. This method required nothing more than contact in 
that way ; and she fully recovered her health ; not under his 
care after the holiday was over, but through the assistance of 
another doctor who was selected by this physician because he 
lived in the same city with the patient. So that any doctor 
is able to self-generate magnetism, it does not matter who he 
is, in effecting cures. 

But as the body is built of material that comes from the lap 
of Nature, it is always wise to supply it with the elements 
that enter into its perfect making, and avoid those foods that 
destroy magnetism. Several lessons are devoted to this diet. 
It is magnetic. We recommend the following combination as 
invincible : 

1. Make use of a magnetic diet for your patients, assuming 
that you seek the opportunity to help your friends and ac- 
quaintances to get well. 

2. Aid them to understand the value and the methods of 
securing the magnetic ultra-violet rays direct from the sun 
when that can be done. 

3. Direct them to the use of such foods as, under the latest 
progress in growing or obtaining them, will furnish the magnetic 
vitality that comes from the influence of the ultra-violet rays, 
such as we have discussed in the early part of this lesson. 



392 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

4. Cultivate in yourself the practice of imparting magnetic 
currents in contact with your patients ; using any of the 
methods that have been described in the preceding page, such 
as contact of the hands, or the contact of one hand with the 
hand of the patient, and placing the other hand on the back 
in the manner stated. 

5. Build up great funds of magnetism in your own body for 
such uses, and for the value it imparts to your own life ; so 
that you may be instrumental in saving others from illness and 
disease. 

Since writing the preceding lesson of this book we have had 
reports from several persons following the tests we have been 
making ; and there is a unanimity of statement that this com- 
bination as suggested herein has never met with a failure. Some 
cases go further than the limited contact stated. Thus a 
mother whose little girl was pronounced dead by a doctor, took 
the bare body of the child into her own disrobed body, and, as 
she said, " enveloped it with her magnetism in a position 
whereby the surcharged vitality of her body entered the child, 
and it breathed and lived." A number of very conservative 
doctors have expressed a firm belief in the power of a magnetic 
person to bring life into a body whose life is merely suspended. 

The whole study is of vast importance in an age when 
methods are changing rapidly ; and humanity is coming closer 
to the source of life. 



LESSON SEVENTY-THREE 

THE PERSONAL MAGNETISM CLUB 

THE WORLD-WIDE MAGNETISM CLUB is an organ- 
ization carried on by correspondence in a general way, 
and by local meetings in a special way, that came into 
existence in the year 1888, with the avowed purpose of turning 
into practical use in daily life the newly formed habits and 
valuable principles of this system of personal development. 
Human association and intercourse are necessary parts of 
every normal and successful life. It is not good for man to be 
alone. It is not good for woman to be alone. Nor is it good 
for human beings to segregate themselves and live selfishly 
apart from other human beings. 

Of course it is possible for a hermit to develop the gift of 
personal magnetism, but he would have no use for it except 
to ennoble his own character which, in his opinion, might be 
worth while. 

But the pleasure, the enjoyment, the triumphs and the great 
achievements of existence require the intermingling of humanity 
in multiform ways, with as much variety of intercourse as is 
possible ; and in and through all these interwoven interests this 
power has its greatest opportunities. 

The International Magnetism Club has never advertised its 
existence, and has never sought members. When local meet- 
ings are held they are composed of persona of close acquaintance 
with each other. The general organization seeks to help its 
members solve all the problems of this system as far as they 
desire such help and, in turn, gathers a great fund of new 
knowledge from experiments and experiences occurring in the 
lives of its members, which of necessity becomes enormously 
valuable to future students. 

There exists a widely held belief that the International Mag- 
netism Club is exclusive, and that only certain persons are 

393 



394 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 

allowed to join it. This is not so. In using the term 
" MAGNETISM CLUB " we have in mind two meanings. 
First, all men and women, wherever they may be located, 
who are students and followers of the Edmund Shaftesbury 
lessons in Personal Magnetism, are considered members of 
the Personal Magnetism Club. 

Second, the term also refers to the group or series of instruc- 
tion books on the various phases of Magnetic Power written by 
Shaftesbury. Magnetism is a subject and study as vast as life 
itself. Magnetism permeates all life from the least to the 
greatest. So extensive and important a power cannot be 
adequately analysed and completely taught in a single volume. 

This explains why the Personal Magnetism Club embraces 
the books mentioned at the end of this book. There are some 
people who want to study all the known methods of magnetic 
development, and for them were some of these private " Mag- 
netism Books " prepared. We call them " private " because 
they are seldom found in any public place ; our students buy 
them and cling to them jealously as prized personal possessions. 
The book you are now reading is the foundation or exercise 
book of the Magnetism Club. It is the vital the " key " 
book. Upon its teachings success in using all other phases of 
magnetic power rests. 

The Magnetism Club was organized for its students to ex- 
emplify in public and private life the principles of Personal 
Power as taught by Edmund Shaftesbury. Its slogan for 
many years has been : " Personal Magnetism can accomplish 
anything which is in the realms of possibility.*' 

The books of the Personal Magnetism Club, in the early 
editions, were the first to be issued on the subject, when there 
were no other systems in existence. { Imitators arose but fell 
by the wayside.} To-day the new and enlarged systems are the 
standard method and are so recognized everywhere. To the 
best of our knowledge Shaftesbury's books represent THE 
ONLY LIBRARY OF PERSONAL MAGNETISM SECRETS 
IN THE WORLD. 

Magnetism is a double power : aggressive and protective 
the best friend of man or woman, and their best defence. But 
Magnetism is not hypnotism. The latter deadens the faculties, 
while magnetism gives them life and energy. Hypnotism puts 



THE PERSONAL MAGNETISM CLUB 395 

into a cataleptic sleep ; while magnetism inspires, thrills, 
enthuses, awakens and enlivens. 

If you possess personal magnetism, you can wield some 
power over every man, woman and child ; you will also be safe 
against the influence of others. Men and women who have 
never done much for themselves in the way of success, or who 
had never reaped the full reward of living, have taken up the 
study of the instruction books of the Magnetism Club and 
re-made their lives. 

Magnetism and success are synonymous terms ; and progress 
in life is proof that they are moving onward. The best progress 
is that which is practical, and that can be turned to actual 
uses. The individual who never goes to bed at night unless 
he has in some degree added to his self-improvement during 
the day is moving onward to success ; and that person who at 
the end of each year has laid aside some part of his earnings or 
gains is moving onward to success. All others are stagnant, 
and are treading the road to failure. 

What you have accomplished you should turn to account 
among your fellow-beings. In that way you will find your 
pleasure in life, your enjoyment of existence and your only 
real triumphs in this world. As far as this earth is concerned, 
there is no greater goal. But in order to do this you must 
participate in multiform ways in the intermingling of humanity. 
And this must be done without waste of time and opportunity. 
Here is the greatest field for the uses of magnetism. 

How to accomplish all these things is, and has been for many 
years, the work of the Magnetism Club. 

This Club inspires the inventor to solve his problems, and to 
win recognition in the world. This Club paves the way for the 
minister to build up a great following. This Club discloses the 
secrets of success in business and in the financial world. This 
Club makes it possible for every employee to better himself, 
and better his income each and every year of his active life. 
This Club shows the way to the lawyer to win many cases ; 
to the doctor to do the greatest good in his profession ; to 
the teacher to develop all that is possible and worth while in 
the minds of scholars ; and to all persons it imparts the gift of 
establishing true and lifelong friendships and the power to 
destroy all enmities. 



396 INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM 



You may organize ^apLocal 



together five others besides yourself, to meet from time to time 
to discuss and practise the teachings of this book,. Any six 
persons may effect such an organization ; or may depend solely 
on" membership > in the General Group, known as| International 
Magnetism ^lub jwMcF, for nearly forty years, has achieved 
the most wonderful results for its Members. We begin, as 



stated, with the most practical^s~ well as the most effective 
acquisitions in life ; and these are first to be sought by dis- 
cussion and advice, as well as planning, in order to find the best 
way of adding each day some degree of self-improvement, no 
matter how slight, and of saving every month out of one's gains 
or earnings something against the future. Such problems are 
readily solved by mutual discussion and advice among half a 
dozen persons who are in earnest. 

These basic achievements prove that you are going in the 
right direction ; neither drifting aimlessly, nor being lured 
blindly to a heart-breaking failure. 

We have said that a half-dozen persons may, by discussion 
and advice, suggest exactly the best methods to be adopted to 
this end, and for other uses of magnetism. By this plan many 
thousands of men and women have been given the new start in 
life that they needed. Nothing is more pleasing than to see 
a prospective failure turned into a grand success. This book 
has been purposely written so as to become of itself an uplifting 
and personal power from merely the reading of it. 

In its helpfulness to others at certain crises in their lives, and 
at turning-points where one of two roads must be chosen, either 
of success or of failure, this book has come at the right moment 
and has been found to be most urgently needed. Its main 
distribution comes, not from public advertising of its merits, 
but from being recommended or presented by people who see 
the vast good it can do when placed in the hands of others. 
Charity is becoming universal, and is failing because it teaches 
people to become dependent. A wealthy woman whose life is 
devoted to charity says, " The best help we can give to those 
who might become successful is to show them the way to help 
themselves ; and for this reason I give to many intelligent men 
and women a copy of the book of personal magnetism." 

There are many business executives who keep themselves 



THE PERSONAL MAGNETISM CLUB 397 

informed of the progress, character and value of certain 
employees, and who find it has paid them to give to the latter 
copies of this book. There are others who find that their 
employees need some real awakening of ambition and power 
in order to become more useful, who adopt as a business method 
the habit of giving this book to those in whom they take an 
interest. 

In bringing this work to a conclusion, the author wishes 
to send to each and every one of his numerous students the 
greeting that is not a farewell, but a wish and a hope that all 
may find these studies pleasant and inspiring ; that they may 
become influences that shall work great changes in all the con- 
ditions and prospects of life ; that they may take the place of 
careless and trivial reading and do away with wasted hours, by 
substituting the most useful and valuable things for those that 
are useless, and that each reader and student of these pages 
shall reach a standing of one hundred per cent in personal 
magnetism, by the following acquisitions : 

1. Financial independence for all the rest, of life. 

2. The perfect respect and confidence of others. 

3. Mastery over all the affairs of life and in every department 
of earthly existence. 



FEINTED BY MORRISON AND CUBE LTD., LONDON AND EDINBURGH 



EDMUND SHAFTESBURY'S 
PRIVATE BOOKS 

EMBRACING ALL HUMAN POWERS 

1. INSTANTANEOUS PERSONAL MAGNETISM. 

2. ADVANCED MAGNETISM. 

3. MENTAL MAGNETISM! 

4. SEX MAGNETISM. 

5. THE OTHER MIND. 

6. UNIVERSAL MAGNETISM (In Two Volumes). 

A University of Personality 

" Books are the true Universities." 
So wrote Thomas Carlyle. Here in 
the 3000 pages of these magnificent 
works the universal secrets of suc- 
cessful living are enshrined. 

All New Editions. Write for Illustrated Booklet. 

PSYCHOLOGY PUBLISHING CO. LTD. 

3 & 5 QUEEN STREET, MANCHESTER 2